Preface General information and networking 1 SINUMERIK Operator panels 2 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operator Components and Networking Handheld units 3 Machine control panels 4 Keyboards and additional components 5 Appendix A Manual Valid for: SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl control 03/2016 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Document order number: 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 03/2016 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2007 - 2016. All rights reserved Preface SINUMERIK documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in the following categories: General documentation User documentation Manufacturer/service documentation Additional information You can find information on the following topics at http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/ docu: Ordering documentation / documentation overview Additional links to download documents Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information) For any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for improvement, corrections), please send an e-mail to the following address: mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com My Documentation Manager (MDM) Under the following link you will find information on how to compile OEM-specific machine documentation based on the Siemens content: http://www.siemens.com/mdm Training Information about training courses can be found at: http://www.siemens.com/sitrain SITRAIN - Siemens training for products, systems and solutions in automation technology http://www.siemens.com/sinutrain SinuTrain - training software for SINUMERIK FAQs You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product Support. http://support.automation.siemens.com Operator Components and Networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Preface SINUMERIK You can find information about SINUMERIK at the following link: http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik Target group This documentation is intended for: Project engineers, electricians and installers Maintenance and service personnel Benefits The manual provides information on the components and functions of devices so that the target group is capable of installing, setting up, testing, operating, and troubleshooting the devices correctly and in absolute safety. Standard scope This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version. Additions or revisions made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer. Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the controller. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new controller or when servicing. For the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable installation, operation, or maintenance situation. Technical Support You will find telephone numbers for other countries for technical support in the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/10805517/134200 4 Operator Components and Networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Fundamental safety instructions 1 System overview 2 SINUMERIK Application planning 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl General information and networking Connecting 4 Networking 5 Manual Valid for: SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl control 03/2016 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 1 2 3 4 5 Fundamental safety instructions...................................................................................................................5 1.1 General safety instructions.......................................................................................................5 1.2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)........................................................................8 1.3 Industrial security.....................................................................................................................8 1.4 Residual risks of power drive systems...................................................................................10 System overview........................................................................................................................................11 2.1 Application..............................................................................................................................11 2.2 System configuration..............................................................................................................11 2.3 Overview of operator components.........................................................................................13 Application planning...................................................................................................................................15 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 Secondary electrical conditions..............................................................................................15 Power supply..........................................................................................................................15 Grounding concept.................................................................................................................16 EMC compatibility..................................................................................................................16 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions..........................................................................18 Transport and storage conditions...........................................................................................18 Operating conditions..............................................................................................................20 Cooling...................................................................................................................................21 3.3 Standards and approvals.......................................................................................................24 3.4 Recycling and disposal..........................................................................................................25 Connecting.................................................................................................................................................27 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces............................................................................................27 4.2 Handling membrane connectors............................................................................................41 Networking..................................................................................................................................................43 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 System settings......................................................................................................................43 Settings for SINUMERIK solution line....................................................................................43 System boot with system network..........................................................................................45 Thin Client Unit (TCU)............................................................................................................46 Factory default settings..........................................................................................................47 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 Commissioning TCU..............................................................................................................49 Using the TCU's main menu..................................................................................................49 Using additional TCU menus.................................................................................................51 How to register a TCU on the system network.......................................................................61 How to calibrate a touch panel...............................................................................................65 Connecting-up the SIMATIC Thin Client Touch Panel...........................................................67 This is how you configure the SIMATIC Thin Client Touch Panel..........................................68 Settings in the "config.ini" file.................................................................................................70 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Table of contents 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 Settings in the "TCU.ini" file...................................................................................................72 Displacement mechanism for TCUs.......................................................................................78 Disable switchover between TCU via PLC.............................................................................80 Example: How to select the behavior of the TCUs during boot up.........................................82 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2 5.3.3 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.2 5.3.3.3 5.3.3.4 5.3.4 5.3.5 Network configuration............................................................................................................83 Permissible network topologies..............................................................................................83 Networks without connection to the company network..........................................................84 Configuration 1: NCU and TCU..............................................................................................84 Configuration 2: NCU and PCU with direct OP......................................................................85 Networks with NCU connection to the company network......................................................86 Configuration 3: NCU and TCU..............................................................................................86 Configuration 4: NCU and PCU with direct OP......................................................................87 Configuration 5: PCU with TCU on NCU ...............................................................................88 Connecting the programming device (PG) to the NCU..........................................................89 Example: Configuring a VNC connection to a PC..................................................................89 Application example...............................................................................................................91 5.4 5.4.1 Service and diagnostics.........................................................................................................93 Booting of the TCU ...............................................................................................................93 Index...........................................................................................................................................................95 4 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 1 General safety instructions DANGER Danger to life due to live parts and other energy sources Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched. Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job. Always observe the country-specific safety rules. Generally, six steps apply when establishing safety: 1. Prepare for shutdown and notify all those who will be affected by the procedure. 2. Disconnect the machine from the supply. - Switch off the machine. - Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed. - Check that it really is in a no-voltage condition, from phase conductor to phase conductor and phase conductor to protective conductor. - Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized. - Ensure that the motors cannot move. 3. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or water. 4. Isolate or neutralize all hazardous energy sources by closing switches, grounding or shortcircuiting or closing valves, for example. 5. Secure the energy sources against switching on again. 6. Ensure that the correct machine is completely interlocked. After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence. WARNING Danger to life through a hazardous voltage when connecting an unsuitable power supply Touching live components can result in death or severe injury. Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the electronics modules. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 5 Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 General safety instructions WARNING Danger to life when live parts are touched on damaged devices Improper handling of devices can cause damage. For damaged devices, hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components; if touched, this can result in death or severe injury. Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport, storage and operation. Do not use any damaged devices. WARNING Danger to life through electric shock due to unconnected cable shields Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected cable shields. As a minimum, connect cable shields and the cores of cables that are not used at one end at the grounded housing potential. WARNING Danger to life due to electric shock when not grounded For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when touched, can result in death or severe injury. Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations. WARNING Danger to life due to fire spreading if housing is inadequate Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage. Install devices without a protective housing in a metal control cabinet (or protect the device by another equivalent measure) in such a way that contact with fire is prevented. Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths. 6 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 General safety instructions WARNING Danger to life through unexpected movement of machines when using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones Using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones with a transmit power > 1 W closer than approx. 2 m to the components may cause the devices to malfunction, influence the functional safety of machines therefore putting people at risk or causing material damage. Switch the wireless devices or mobile phones off in the immediate vicinity of the components. WARNING Danger to life due to fire if overheating occurs because of insufficient ventilation clearances Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent fire and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in increased downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems. Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the respective component. WARNING Danger to life when safety functions are inactive Safety functions that are inactive or that have not been adjusted accordingly can cause operational faults on machines that could lead to serious injury or death. Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before commissioning. Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system, including all safety-related components. Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted and activated through appropriate parameterizing. Perform a function test. Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions relevant to safety are running correctly. Note Important safety notices for Safety Integrated functions If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the safety notices in the Safety Integrated manuals. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 7 Fundamental safety instructions 1.3 Industrial security 1.2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge. NOTICE Damage through electric fields or electrostatic discharge Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual components, integrated circuits, modules or devices. Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of aluminum foil. Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the following methods: - Wearing an ESD wrist strap - Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container). 1.3 Industrial security Note Industrial security Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. For more information about industrial security, visit this address (http:// www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity). To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. For more information, visit this address (http://support.automation.siemens.com). 8 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Fundamental safety instructions 1.3 Industrial security WARNING Danger as a result of unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation Software manipulation (e.g. by viruses, Trojan horses, malware, worms) can cause unsafe operating states to develop in your installation which can result in death, severe injuries and/ or material damage. Keep the software up to date. You will find relevant information and newsletters at this address (http:// support.automation.siemens.com). Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept for the installation or machine. You will find further information at this address (http://www.siemens.com/ industrialsecurity). Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept. WARNING Danger to life due to software manipulation when using exchangeable storage media Storing files onto exchangeable storage media amounts to an increased risk of infection, e.g. with viruses and malware. As a result of incorrect parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn can lead to injuries or death. Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by taking suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 9 Fundamental safety instructions 1.4 Residual risks of power drive systems 1.4 Residual risks of power drive systems When assessing the machine- or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local regulations (e.g., EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system installer must take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components of a drive system: 1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during commissioning, operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example, - Hardware and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and cables and connections - Response times of the control system and of the drive - Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification - Condensation/conductive contamination - Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors - Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic components - External influences/damage - X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation 2. Unusually high temperatures, including open flames, as well as emissions of light, noise, particles, gases, etc., can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions caused by, for example: - Component failure - Software errors - Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification - External influences/damage 3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example: - Component failure - Influence during electrostatic charging - Induction of voltages in moving motors - Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification - Condensation/conductive contamination - External influences/damage 4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close 5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the relevant sections in the technical user documentation. 10 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 System overview 2.1 2 Application Overview SINUMERIK 840D sl offers modularity, openness, flexibility and uniform structures for operation, programming, and visualization. It provides a system platform with trend-setting functions for almost all technologies. Integrated into the SINAMICS S120 drive system and complemented by an automation system, such as SIMATIC S7-300, the SINUMERIK 840D sl forms a complete digital system that is ideally suited for the mid to upper performance range. SINUMERIK 840D sl is characterized by: A high degree of flexibility Excellent dynamic response and precision Optimum integration into networks Benefits Outstanding performance and flexibility for multi-axis systems of average to high complexity thanks to scalable hardware and software. Universal openness of the user interface, the PLC and the NC kernel to allow integration of your specialist know-how. Integrated safety functions for man and machine: SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Comprehensive range of products for integrating machine tools into communication, engineering and production processes: SINUMERIK Integrate Field of application The SINUMERIK 840D sl can be used worldwide in tool and mold making, for high-speed cutting applications, for wood and glass processing, for handling operations, in transfer lines and rotary indexing machines, for mass production and JobShop production. The SINUMERIK 840DE sl is available as an export version for use in countries where approval is required. 2.2 System configuration SINUMERIK 840D sl combines CNC, HMI, PLC, closed-loop control, and communication tasks within a single NCU (Numerical Control Unit). General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 11 System overview 2.2 System configuration Components For operating, programming and visualization, the corresponding operator software is already integrated in the CNC software. For increased operating performance, the SINUMERIK PCU 50.5 industrial PC can be used. Up to four distributed OPs can be operated on one NCU / PCU. The operator panel can be installed as a Thin Client at a distance of up to 100 m. 6,180(5,. +7 6,180(5,.RSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWVZLWK7&8 6,180(5,. 3&8 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 352),1(7 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 352),%86 (7SUR '5,9(&/L4 6,1$0,&66 1&8 1; 3RZHUVXSSO\ 6,180(5,.'VO ZLWK6,1$0,&66 0DLQVSLQGOHPRWRU Image 2-1 6HUYRPRWRUV Typical topology of the SINUMERIK 840D sl complete system The following components can be connected to the SINUMERIK 840D sl: SINUMERIK operator panel front with PCU/TCU SINUMERIK machine control panel MCP/MPP SINUMERIK handheld units SIMATIC CE panel SIMATIC thin client (as of firmware V1.4) Distributed PLC I/O via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO SINUMERIK PP 72/48 I/O module SINUMERIK ADI 4 analog drive interface for four axes SINAMICS S120 drive system Feed and main spindle motors 12 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 System overview 2.3 Overview of operator components 2.3 Overview of operator components Overview of the operator components 6,180(5,.237 6,180(5,.23 6,180(5,.236 6,180(5,.23& 6,180(5,.23 6,180(5,.23$ 23$773$73 $723EODFN 6,180(5,.23 6,180(5,.7&8 6,180(5,.7&8 6,180(5,.3&8 Image 2-2 6,180(5,.23 Operator panels General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 13 System overview 2.3 Overview of operator components 6,180(5,..%& 6,180(5,.0&3&31 6,180(5,..%& 3&NH\ERDUGVWDQGDUG .%3&8/86 &DUGUHDGHU 86%b 6,180(5,.0&3&31 6,180(5,.+7 +DQGZKHHO 6,180(5,.0&331 6,180(5,.0&331 6,180(5,.033 6,180(5,.033,(+ 6,180(5,.+7 0LQLKDQGKHOGXQLW Image 2-3 14 Machine control panels, handheld units, keyboards and additional components (selection) General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Application planning 3.1 Secondary electrical conditions 3.1.1 Power supply Requirements for DC power supplies DANGER Danger of death caused by unsafe power supply The DC power supply must be implemented as a circuit of Category PELV/DVC A according to EN 61800-5-1. WARNING Inadequately fused supply cables can be life-threatening In the case of supply lines > 10 m, protectors must be installed at the device input in order to protect against lightning (surge). The DC power supply must be connected to the ground/shield of the NC for EMC and/or functional reasons. For EMC reasons, this connection should only be made at one point. As a rule, the connection is provided as standard in the S7-300 I/Os. In exceptional circumstances when this is not the case, the ground connection should be made on the grounding rail of the NC cabinet (also refer to /EMC/EMC Installation Guide.) Table 3-1 Requirements of the DC power supply Rated voltage Non-periodic overvoltages Transient voltage interruptions General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 According to EN 61131-2 Voltage range (mean value) Voltage ripple, peak/peak Powering up time when switched on 24 VDC 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC 5% (unsmoothed 6-pulse recti fication) any Period of overvoltage Recover time Events per hour 35 V 500 ms 50 s 10 Downtime Recovery time Events per hour 3 ms 10 s 10 15 Application planning 3.1 Secondary electrical conditions 3.1.2 Grounding concept Components The SINUMERIK 840D sl system consists of a number of individual components which have been designed so that the system complies with the appropriate EMC and safety standards. The individual system components are: Numerical Control Unit (NCU) Machine Control Panel (MCP), Machine Pushbutton Panel (MPP) Keyboard Operator panels (operator panel front + TCU/PCU) Distributor box and handheld unit S7-300 I/O with IM 153 interface module Grounding measures The individual modules are attached to a metal cabinet panel. Insulating paints on the mounting points (e.g. tension jacks) must be removed. It is permissible to cluster the operator control components regarding connection/potential bonding. Example: The control panel on the swivel arm. It is sufficient in this instance to connect the ground connections of, for example, the PCU, TCU, and operator panel front using a cable and to route a shared grounding conductor to the central ground connection in the control cabinet. Additional references EMC Design Guidelines 3.1.3 EMC compatibility In addition to the protective grounding of system components, special precautions must be taken to guarantee safe, trouble-free operation of the system. These measures include shielded signal lines, special equipotential bonding connections, and isolation and shielding measures. Shielded signal cables For safe and fault-free operation of the system, the specified cables must be used. For digital signal transmission, the shield must have a conductive connection at both sides of the housing. 16 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Application planning 3.1 Secondary electrical conditions Cable definition Definition: Signal cables (example) - Data cables (Ethernet, PROFIBUS, sensor cables, etc.) - Digital I/Os - Cables for safety functions (emergency stop, enabling) Power cables (example) - Low-voltage supply lines (230 VAC, +24 VDC, etc.) - Motor cables Rules for routing cables In order to achieve the greatest possible EMC compatibility for the complete system (control, power unit, machine), the following EMC measures must be carefully observed: If necessary, signal and power cables may cross one another (if possible at an angle of 90), but must never be laid close or parallel to one another. Only use cables approved by SIEMENS for the signal lines from and to the Control Unit. Signal cables must not be routed close to strong external magnetic fields (e.g. motors and transformers). If signal lines cannot be routed a sufficient distance away from other cables, they must be installed in grounded cable ducts (metal). The operator panel fronts, MCPs, MPPs, and full keyboards must be installed in metallically enclosed EMC-compatible housings. Note For further information on interference suppression measures and the connection of shielded cables, please refer to the EMC Installation Guide. EMC limit values in South Korea The EMC limit values to be complied with for South Korea correspond to the limit values of the EMC product standard for variable-speed electric drives EN 61800-3, Category C2, or limit value class A, Group 1 according to EN 55011. By applying suitable supplementary measures, the limit values according to Category C2 or according to limit value class A, Group 1, are maintained. Further, additional measures may be required, for instance, using an additional radio interference suppression filter (EMC filter). The measures for EMC-compliant design of the system are described in detail in this manual respectively in the Installation Guideline EMC. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 17 Application planning 3.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions Please note that the final statement on compliance with the standard is given by the respective label attached to the individual unit. 3.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 3.2.1 Transport and storage conditions The components of the SINUMERIK 840D sl system exceed the requirements according to EN 618002 with regard to shipping and storage conditions. The following data applies under the following conditions: Long-term storage in the transport and product packaging: At weather-protected locations that have continuous contact with outside air through openings. Transport in the transport packaging: - In unventilated containers under conditions not protected from weather effects. - In the "cold" in accordance with outside air. - Air transport in the air-conditioned cargo hold. Table 3-2 Ambient conditions during storage and transport Type of condition Permissible range/class Transport Storage Classification EN 60721-3-2 EN 60721-3-1 Climate class 2K4 1K4 Ambient temperature -40 C ... +70 C -25 C ... +55 C Biological environmental condi tions 2B1 2) 1B1 2) Chemically active environmental conditions 2C2 3) 1C2 3) Maximum permissible tempera ture change Direct interaction in air/air: -40/+30 C at 95% relative humidity 30 k/h 1) Relative humidity (without conden sation) Precipitation, rain Water other than rain 18 5 to 95% 6 mm/min 2) 1 m/s and wet loading surfa ces 4) Not permissible Not permis sible 5) 1 m/s and wet loading surfaces 4) General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Application planning 3.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions Type of condition Height Condensation, splash water, icing, salt spray Permissible range/class Max. 4,000 m above sea level Permissible Not permis sible 5) Permissible 4) 1) Transport and storage of operator panel fronts and diskette drives: -20 C to +55 C. 2) Mold growth, slime, rodents, termites and other animal vermin are not permissible. 3) In marine- and weather-resistant transport packaging (container). 4) For storage in the transport packaging. 5) For storage in the product packaging. Note Remove the transport protective foil and packaging material before installing the components. Shipping backup batteries Backup batteries must only be shipped in the original packaging. No special authorization is required to ship backup batteries. The lithium content is approximately 300 mg. Note The backup battery is classified as a hazardous substance, Class 9 in accordance with the relevant air-freight transportation regulations. Storage of backup batteries Always store backup batteries in a cool and dry place. The batteries have a maximum shelf life of 10 years. Rules for handling backup batteries WARNING Incorrect handling of backup batteries can lead to a risk of ignition, explosion and combustion The stipulations of DIN EN 60086-4, in particular regarding avoidance of mechanical or electrical tampering of any kind, must be complied with. Do not open a battery. Replace a faulty battery only with the same type. Obtain replacement batteries only from Siemens. Always try to return low batteries to the manufacturer or deliver these to a registered recycling company. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 19 Application planning 3.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 3.2.2 Operating conditions The components of the SINUMERIK 840D sl system are intended for a weatherproof, fixed location. The documented environmental conditions apply to the climate in the immediate vicinity of the units and to the entry of the cooling air. They exceed the requirements according to EN 60204-1, EN 61800-2, EN 61131-2 and IEC 62477-1. NOTICE Damage to components by coolants and lubricants The SINUMERIK operator components have been designed for industrial use, particularly on machine tools and production machines. This also takes into account the use of commercially available coolants and lubricants. The use of aggressive compounds and additives can damage components and result in their failure. Contact between the operator components and coolants and lubricants should be avoided as far as possible, as resistance to all coolants and lubricants cannot be guaranteed. Table 3-3 Ambient conditions for operation Environmental conditions Application areas Remarks Climate class Better than class 3K3 According to EN 607213-3 Permissible ambient tempera ture when installed vertically 0 ... 45 C (32 ... 113 F), up to 2000 m (6562 ft) above sea level Except PCU50.5; front-side for OP, MCP/MPP and CNC standard keyboards KB. 0 ... 55 C (32 ... 131 F), up to 2000 m (6562 ft) above sea level All, rear-side for OP, MCP/MPP and CNC standard keyboards KB. 5 ... 55 C (41 ... 131 F), up to 2000 m (6562 ft) above sea level For PCU50.5 Climatic environmental conditions Above an altitude of 2000 m (6562 ft), the max. ambient temperature decreases by 7 C (44.6 F) for every 1000 m (3281 ft) increase in altitude Relative humidity (without con densation) 5% to 95% (60% when corrosive gases and/or dusts are present) Condensation, formation of ice Not permissible Dripping water, spray, splash Not permissible water, jet-water according to de Permissible gree of protection Max. installation altitude Air pressure 20 All components, except ... For handheld units, front side of operator and machine control panels (MCP and MPP), front side of the keyboards KB 310 and KB 483C Up to 4000 m (13123 ft) above sea level 620 hPa ... 1060 hPa According to altitude range 0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123 ft) above sea level General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Application planning 3.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions Environmental conditions Application areas Remarks Biological, chemical and mechanical influences, pollutants Biological environmental conditions Class 3B1 according to EN 60 721-3-3: Mold, mold growth, slime, rodents, termite and other animal vermin are not permissible. Chemically active environmental conditions Class 3C1 according to EN 6072133 Mechanically active environmental conditions Class 3S1 according to EN 6072133: Conductive dust not permissible. Classification of the mechanical environment 3M3 for components on the machine 3M1/3M2 for components in the control cab inet Degree of contamination 2 EMC conducted / radiation Class C3 according to EN 61800-3 Note The user must consider radio interference for the complete system. Particular attention should be paid to cabling. Please contact your sales representative for assistance and support. If compliance with limit value class C2 is required, please contact your local sales representative. 3.2.3 Cooling To calculate the heat dissipation, the total power loss PVtotal of all heat-generating components in a housing must be taken into account. Total power loss PVtotal = PV1 + PV2 + PV3 +... [W] Convection surface area A [m2]: The surface areas of the front and bottom sides are not included in the convection surface area calculation. Note A recommended value for the power loss of the operator control components is contained in the "Technical data" section of the associated component (see "Power consumption"). Means of heat dissipation Heat dissipation can take place as follows: Heat dissipation by natural convection Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling Heat dissipation by open-circuit ventilation General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 21 Application planning 3.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions +HDWGLVVLSDWLRQ XVLQJQDWXUDOFRQYHFWLRQ +HDWGLVVLSDWLRQ XVLQJQDWXUDOFRQYHQWLRQDQG LQWHUQDOWXUEXOHQFH 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 7 7 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 7 YROXPHWULFIORZRIWKHIDQ PK 7 7KHUHTXLUHGIUHHFRQYHFWLRQVXUIDFH$>P@RIWKH URRPWREHFRQYHUWHG VWHHORUDOXPLQXPVKHHWLQJPPWKLFNQHVV LVFDOFXODWHGEDVHGRQ DWHPSHUDWXUHGLIIHUHQFH77 7.DSSUR[LPDWHGIURP $>P@ 39JHV>:@ $>P@ 7>.@ 7>.@ +HDWGLVVLSDWLRQ XVLQJRSHQFLUFXLWYHQWLODWLRQ +HDWGLVVLSDWLRQ XVLQJRSHQFLUFXLWYHQWLODWLRQ 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 2SHUDWRU SDQHOIURQW 7 Image 3-1 7 39JHV>:@ 7 7 7KHUHTXLUHGYROXPHWULF IORZIRUGLVVLSDWLQJWKHKHDW ORVVLVFDOFXODWHGXVLQJ DSSUR[LPDWLRQVIURP 39JHV>:@ 9>PK@ 7>.@ Means of heat dissipation Fan design The fan must be positioned to produce an optimum heat dissipation. A clearance of 10 mm must be maintained in front of the fan. The inlet and outlet slots must remain free for the open-circuit ventilation. Air filters must be provided to maintain the permitted environmental conditions. NOTICE Damage to the operating components caused by temperatures that are too high or too low Contaminated air filters impair the desired heat dissipation. For handling the air filters, pay attention to: Proper handling Regular replacement Correct disposal 22 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Application planning 3.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions Guidelines If the convection area A [m2] does not suffice for the "heat dissipation using natural convection", then use: "Heat dissipation using natural convection and internal turbulence" for hot spots and heat concentrations in housings subject to space constraints. The total power loss PLtot for thermally critical applications can be determined as follows: - Current measurement for a 24 V supply voltage - Power loss PLtot [W] = U (24 V) * |measured value in amperes| Heat dissipation using open-circuit ventilation Calculation of the volumetric flow The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unit is to be dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The volumetric flow V required for this should be calculated at a difference in temperature of T2 - T1 = T 10K. ([DPSOHIRUKHDWGLVVLSDWLRQZLWKRSHQFLUFXLWYHQWLODWLRQ 3&8ZLWK23 3&8 &DOFXODWLRQRIWKHSRZHUORVV LQFOXGLQJLQWHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\XQLW 23: 3&8: 39JHV : PD[: 7 7 39JHV>:@ 9 >PK@ 7>.@ 23 ([WHUQDOWHPSHUDWXUH 7 r& ,QWHUQDOWHPSHUDWXUH 7 r& Image 3-2 7 . Calculating heat dissipation for PCU 50.5 with OP 019 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 23 Application planning 3.3 Standards and approvals 3.3 Standards and approvals Approvals CE approval Image 3-3 CE marking The operator panels and the safety-relevant accessories satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the following EC directives. The operator panels and the safetyrelevant accessories comply with the harmonized European standards (EN), promulgated in the Official Journals of the European Community: 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC directive) Directive 2006/42/EC of the European Parliament and Council of May 17, 2006, on machinery, and Directive 95/16/EC (amendment) SIBE Switzerland Certification Service For the HT 2 and HT 8 units. Image 3-4 Symbol of the certifying body HT 2 The HT 2 operator panel and the safety-relevant accessories (is identified in the "Accessories" section for the respective devices) satisfy Category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008. The safety function Enabling device for special mode control and the emergency stop button satisfy the following requirements: Category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Requirements of EN 60204-1:2006, when complying with the safety instructions in the relevant chapters of this documentation HT 8 The HT 8 operator panel and the safety-relevant accessories (is identified in the "Accessories" section for the respective devices) satisfy Category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008. The emergency stop button meets the following requirements: Category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Requirements of EN 60204-1:2006, when complying with the safety instructions in the relevant chapters of this documentation 24 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Application planning 3.4 Recycling and disposal The safety function Enabling device for special mode control satisfies the following requirements: Category 4, PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Requirements of EN 60204-1:2006, when complying with the safety instructions in the relevant chapters of this documentation Address: NSBIV AG, SIBE Switzerland, Brunigstrasse 18, CH-6005 Lucerne Accreditation SCESp 0046 / Notified Body 1247 Number of the prototype test certificate: No. 1416 Risk assessment The following standards must be used to perform the risk assessment: EN ISO 12100-1:2003 and EN ISO 12100-2:2003, General Design Guidelines for Machines EN ISO 14121-1:2007, Risk Assessment for Machinery EN ISO 13849-1:2008, Safety-related Parts of Machines These considerations result in a category (B, 1, 2, 3, 4) and a performance level (PL a to e) in accordance with EN ISO 13849-1:2008 that ultimately dictate how the safety-related parts of the system to be monitored must be constructed. The connection examples with different monitoring units in "Handheld units", Section: "HT 2", Section: "Connections" "Connection examples for acknowledgment button and Emergency Stop button" can also be used for other operator panels and demonstrate how Category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 can be attained with the safety-related parts of the operator panels. Note that the overall concept of the installation must be designed with this in mind. 3.4 Recycling and disposal Products should be disposed of corresponding to the relevant national regulations. The products described in this manual can be mostly recycled due to the fact that they contain very few damaging substances. To recycle and dispose of your old device in an environmentally friendly way, please contact an appropriate disposal company. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 25 Application planning 3.4 Recycling and disposal 26 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 4 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces The pins of the component interfaces are assigned as specified in the tables below. Any deviations are indicated at the relevant point. Signal type: I O B V - Input Output Bidirectional (inputs/outputs) Power supply Ground (reference potential) or N.C. (not connected) Power supply interface Connector type: Max. cable length: Table 4-1 Terminal block, 3-pin plug connector 10 m Assignment of the power supply interface Pin General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Name 1 P24 (+) 2 M24 (-) 3 SHIELD (PE) Type VI Meaning 24 VDC potential (20.4 to 28.8 VDC) Ground 24 V Shield potential 27 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Serial interface COM1 9-pin sub-D connector Table 4-2 Assignment of the serial interface COM1 (V.24/RS232) Connector Pin Name Type Remark 1 DCD (M5) 2 RxD (D2) Receive signal level (carrier) 3 TxD (D1) 4 DTR (S1) O Data terminal ready 5 GND (E2) - Ground (reference potential) 6 DSR (M1) I Data Set Ready 7 RTS (S2) O Request To Send 8 CTS (M2) 9 RI (M3) I Serial receive data Serial transmit data Clear To Send I Incoming call USB interfaces The USB interfaces are implemented as sockets and comply with the generally valid standard. The version information (1.1, 2.0 etc.), the maximum velocity (low speed, full speed, etc.) and the socket type (A or B) are documented in the individual sections for the associated devices. In principle, USB interfaces have the following characteristics: Integrated power supply up to 500 mA for each socket. Maximum cable length 3 m (Length including the supply cable to the hub and the connected terminal device; only 1 hub at maximum is permitted. It should be noted that some keyboards already have a hub.) NOTICE Cables that are too long can cause the screen to freeze Observe the following restrictions for the USB front interface for connecting operator panels to the keyboard, mouse or USB FlashDrive: Maximum cable length: 1.8 m Extension cables are not permissible Hot-plugging-capable devices are connected during operation and are identified automatically. Note Correct identification is only guaranteed for USB I/Os that comply to 100% with the USB specification. 28 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Table 4-3 Assignment of the USB interface Type A socket Type B socket Pin Name Type 1 P5V_fused 2 Data- V 3 Data+ B 4 GND V Remark + 5 V (fused) Data Data + Ground (reference potential) USB sticks If you want to connect a USB stick to the USB interface, preferably use the tested SIMATIC USB stick 16 GB for this purpose (Article No.: 6ES7648-0DC60-0AA0). Alternatively, you can use a USB stick with any memory size. It must, however, meet the following minimum requirements: File system: FAT16 or FAT32 Partitioning: only in PC partition format (MBR) USB sticks that deviate from these requirements have not been tested can may not be recognized by the NCU. PROFIBUS DP / MPI interface Connector type: Max. data transmission rate: Max. cable length: Table 4-4 Assignment of the PROFIBUS DP / MPI interface Connector 9-pin sub-D socket 12 Mbit/s 100 m Pin Name 1,2 N.C. Type - Not connected 3 LTG_B B Signal line B of MPI module 4 RTS_AS I Control signal for receive data current. Signal 1 active if directly connected control is sending. 5 M5EXT V Return line (GND) of 5 V supply. Current load from a load of 90 mA max. connected between P5EXT and M5EXT. 6 P5EXT V 5 V supply (current load see M5EXT) 7 N.C. - Not connected 8 LTG_A B Signal line A of MPI module 9 RTS_PG O RTS signal of MPI module; signal is "1", when PG is sending - On connector housing Shield General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Remark 29 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces PROFIBUS DP interface Connector type: Max. data transmission rate: Max. cable length: Table 4-5 Assignment of the PROFIBUS DP interface Connector 9-pin sub-D socket 12 Mbit/s 100 m Pin Name 1,2 N.C. Type Remark - Not connected 3 RS_DP B RS-485 differential signal 4 RTS_DP O Request To Send 5 M5EXT V 5 V external ground 6 P5EXT V 5 V external potential 7 N.C. - Not connected 8 XRS_DP B RS-485 differential signal 9 N.C. - Not connected Ethernet RJ45 interface Connector type: Max. data transmission rate: Max. cable length: Table 4-6 Assignment of the Ethernet RJ45 interface 10/100 Mbit/s Connector /(' 30 Standard RJ45 socket 10/100/1000 Mbit/s 100 m /(' Pin Name 1 TxD+ 2 TxD- Type Remark O Transmit data 3 RxD+ I Receive data 4/5 GND - (terminated internally with 75 ; not re quired for data transmission) 6 RD- I Receive data 7/8 GND - (terminated internally with 75 ; not re quired for data transmission) - - On connector housing - Green LED (right) - Lights up: 10 or 100 Mbit/s - Orange LED (left) - Illuminated: Data exchange Off: No data exchange Shield Off: No or faulty connection General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Table 4-7 Assignment of the Ethernet RJ45 interface 1000 Mbit/s Connector /(' Pin /(' Name Type 1 DA+ 2 DA- Bidirectional pair A- 3 DB+ Bidirectional pair B+ 4 DC+ Bidirectional pair C+ 5 DC- Bidirectional pair C- 6 DB- Bidirectional pair B- 7 DD+ Bidirectional pair D+ 8 DD- Shield - B Remark Bidirectional pair A+ Bidirectional pair D- - - On connector housing Green LED (right) - Illuminated orange: 1000 Mbit/s Orange LED (left) - Off: No or faulty connection Illuminated: Data exchange Off: No data exchange Note Connection only on LAN, not on telecommunication networks! General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 31 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces DVI-I interface Table 4-8 Assignment of DVI-I interface Connector & & & & & Pin Name Type Remark S GND - Ground - Ground S1 GND C1 R C2 G C3 B C4 HSYNC O Horizontal synchronizing pulse Red O Green Blue C5 GND - Ground CSA GND - Ground 1 TX2N 2 TX2P O 3 GND - Ground 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 DDC CLK 7 DDC CLK B 8 VSYNC O TDMS data 2TDMS data 2+ DDC clock DDC data Vertical synchronizing pulse 9 TX1N 10 TX1P O 11 GND - Ground 12 N.C. - Not connected 13 N.C. - Not connected 14 +5V VO +5V 15 GND VO Ground 16 MONDET 17 TX0N 18 TXoP O 19 GND - Ground 20 N.C. - Not connected 21 N.C. - Not connected 22 GND - Ground 23 TXCP 24 TXCN I O TDMS data 1TDMS data 1+ Hot plug detect TDMS data 0TDMS data 0+ TDMS clock + TDMS clock - I/O USB interface All signals required for connecting operator panel fronts, with the exception of the display interface, are assigned to this interface. Associated interface cable: Connector type: 32 K1 2 x 13-pin socket connector General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Table 4-9 Allocation of the I/O USB interface Connector Pin Name 1 GND 2 P12C 3 BL_ON 4 P5V_fused VO +5 V VCC (fused in PCU/TCU) 5 GND VO Ground 6 P3V3_fused VO +3.3 V VCC (fused in PCU/TCU) 7 - 10 Type VO O N.C. - 11 P5V_fused 12 USB_D1M 13 USB_D1P 14 GND 15 LCD_SEL0 VO B VO Meaning Ground +power supply for backlight inverter Backlight On Not connected +5 V VCC (fused in PCU/TCU) USB data- Channel 1 USB data+ Channel 1 Ground 1 Display type select signal 16 LCD_SEL1 17 LCD_SEL2 18 LCD_SEL3 19 RESET_N 20 reserved - Reserved 21 HD_LED O HD LED, anode with 1 k in series on the motherboard 22 DP_LED O MPI/DP LED, anode with 1 K in series on the motherboard 23 Ethernet_LED O Ethernet LED, anode with 1 k in series on the motherboard 24 TEMP_ERR O LED temperature sensor; anode with 1 k in series on the board 25 RUN_R *) O Watchdog error LED, anode with 1 k in series on the motherboard 26 RUN_G O Watchdog OK LED, anode with 1 k in series on the motherboard I 2 3 4 Reset signal (low active) LVDS display interface channel 1 Used to connect operator panel fronts with TFT displays with 640 x 480 pixels (VGA), 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) or 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA). Associated interface cable: Connector type: General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 K2, max. length: 0.5 m 2 x 10-pin socket connector 33 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Table 4-10 Allocation of the LVDS display interface Connector Pin Name 1/2 P5V_D_fused 3 RXIN0- 4 RXIN0+ 5/6 VO +5 V display supply voltage (fused in PCU/ TCU) I P3V3_D_fused Meaning Bit 0 (-) LVDS input signal VO Bit 0 (+) +3.3 V display supply voltage (fused in PCU/ TCU) 7 RXIN1- 8 RXIN1+ I LVDS input signal GND - System ground (reference potential) LVDS input signal 9/10 Type Bit 1 (-) Bit 1 (+) 11 RXIN2- 12 RXIN2+ I GND - System ground (reference potential) O LVDS cycle clock signal 13/14 15 RXCLKIN- 16 RXCLKIN+ 17/18 GND 19/20 N.C. Bit 2 (-) Bit 2 (+) (-) (+) System ground (reference potential) - Not connected LVDS display interface channel 2 Used for expanding the LVDS display interface channel 1 to control TFT displays with 1280 x 1024 pixels (SXGA). Associated interface cable: Connector type: Table 4-11 Allocation of the LVDS display interface Connector Pin Name Type 1/2 GND - 3 RXIN10- 4 RXIN10+ I GND - 5/6 7 RXIN1- 8 RXIN1+ I GND - 9/10 Meaning System ground (reference potential) LVDS input signal Bit 0 (-) Bit 0 (+) System ground (reference potential) LVDS input signal Bit 1 (-) Bit 1 (+) System ground (reference potential) 11 RXIN2- 12 RXIN2+ I GND V Ground O LVDS cycle clock sig (-) nal (+) V Ground 13/14 15 RXCLKIN- 16 RXCLKIN+ 17 GND 18-20 34 K3 2 x 10-pin socket connector P12VF VO LVDS input signal Bit 2 (-) Bit 2 (+) +12 V fused General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Rotary switch: Feed override X30 Connector designation: Connector type: Max. cable length: Table 4-12 X30 2 x 5-pin plug connector, according to EN 60603-13 with coding 0.6 m Assignment of X30 connector (on delivery) Pin Name Type Meaning 1 N.C. - Not connected 2 N.C. - Not connected 3 M V Ground 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 P5 V 5 V supply 6 OV_VS16 7 OV_VS8 8 OV_VS4 9 OV_VS2 Override rotary switch value 2 10 OV_VS1 Override rotary switch value 1 Override rotary switch value 16 Override rotary switch value 8 I Override rotary switch value 4 Rotary switch: Spindle override X31 Connector designation: Connector type: Max. cable length: Table 4-13 X31 2 x 5-pin plug connector, according to EN 60603-13 with coding 0.6 m Assignment of X31 connector (on delivery) Pin Name Type 1 N.C. - Not connected 2 N.C. - Not connected 3 M V Ground 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 P5 V 5 V supply 6 OV_SP16 7 OV_SP8 8 OV_SP4 9 OV_SP2 Override rotary switch value 2 10 OV_SP1 Override rotary switch value 1 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Meaning Override rotary switch value 16 Override rotary switch value 8 I Override rotary switch value 4 35 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Optional customer buttons IN (X51 / X52 / X55) Only switches (passive inputs) may be connected via the X51, X52 and X55 connectors. X51 and X52 are typically used for connecting illuminated pushbuttons. The lamps in the buttons are activated via X53 and X54. X55 has no corresponding outputs. Note Connection miniature handheld unit Alternatively, at the inputs X51, X52 and X55, one miniature handheld unit may be operated. For details, please refer to the corresponding section. 9 . ;L .7M,1 .7M,1 .7M,1 9 . 0 *1' 0 *1' L M Image 4-1 Main circuit diagram of the input circuit for X51, X52 and X55 Connector designation: Connector type: Max. cable length: Table 4-14 36 X51 / X52 / X55 4-pin plug connector 0.6 m Assignment of connector X51 Pin Name 1 KT-IN1 2 KT-IN2 3 KT-IN3 4 M Type Meaning Customer key 1 I Customer key 2 Customer key 3 V Ground General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Table 4-15 Assignment of connector X52 Pin Name 1 KT-IN4 2 KT-IN5 3 KT-IN6 4 M Table 4-16 Type Meaning Customer key 4 I Customer key 5 Customer key 6 V Ground Type Meaning Assignment of connector X55 Pin Name 1 KT-IN7 2 KT-IN8 3 KT-IN9 4 M Customer key 7 I Customer key 8 Customer key 9 V Ground Optional customer buttons OUT (X53 / X54) The short-circuit-proof outputs X53/X54 are provided to control lamps in the keys. Lamps with 24 V and 2.4 W per output are recommended. 3 .7287 ; .7287 .7287 0 *1' 0 3 .7287 ; .7287 .7287 0 *1' 0 Image 4-2 Main circuit diagram of the input circuit for X53 and X54 NOTICE Damage to the electronics Do not connect any relays, valves or other inductive loads. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 37 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Connector designation: Connector type: Max. cable length: Table 4-17 Assignment of connector X53 Pin Name 1 KT-OUT1 2 KT-OUT2 3 KT-OUT3 4 M Table 4-18 X53 / X54 4-pin plug connector 0.6 m Type Meaning Output 1 lamp O Output 2 lamp Output 3 lamp V Ground Type Meaning Assignment of connector X54 Pin Name 1 KT-OUT4 2 KT-OUT5 3 KT-OUT6 4 M Output 4 lamp O Output 5 lamp Output 6 lamp V Ground Interfaces for two handwheels X60 / X 61 Interface: Connector designation: Connector type: Max. cable length: Table 4-19 38 Handwheel 1 X60 15-pin Sub-D socket 25 m Handwheel 2 X61 Assignment of connectors X60/X61 Pin Name Type 1 P5HW V Meaning 5 V power supply 2 M V Ground 3 HW1_A / HW2_A I Handwheel pulses track A 4 HW1_XA / HW2_XA I Handwheel pulses track A (negated) 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 HW1_B / HW2_B I Handwheel pulses track B 7 HW1_XB / HW2_XB I Handwheel pulses track B (negated) 8 N.C. - Not connected 9 P5HW V 5 V power supply 10 N.C. - Not connected 11 M V Ground General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces Pin Name Type 12 N.C. - Meaning Not connected 13 N.C. - Not connected 14 N.C. - Not connected 15 N.C. - Not connected Note The handwheels can either be operated with TTL or differential signals. You set the signal type using S1 (wire bridge) on the COM board. The handwheels are supplied with 5 V 5% and 100 mA via the interface. Contour and velocity specification via handwheel are not supported. Interfaces for direct keys X11 on the operator panel (OP) fronts can be used to fetch the state of the direct keys. The connection of a 20-pin ribbon cable allows the direct keys to evaluate the following components: Direct key module (DTM) X70 in the machine control panels (MCP, MPP) and the handwheel connection module (HAM) X205 on the Thin Client Unit (TCU) The signals are then forwarded to the control over the various communications networks. Note that DTM and HAM can be operated only with PROFIBUS DP. '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 '7 Image 4-3 Assignment of the direct keys to the vertical softkeys of an operator panel front General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 39 Connecting 4.1 Pin assignment of the interfaces 16 digital inputs (5 V) can be fetched via the X11 connector. Connector designation: Connector type: Max. cable length: Table 4-20 X11 20-pin plug connector 0.85 m Assignment of connector X11 Pin Name 1 DT1 Type Meaning Direct key 1 O ... ... 16 DT16 Direct key 16 17 P5V + 5 V (fused) 18 P5V 19 GND 20 GND V ... + 5 V (fused) Ground Ground 16 digital inputs can be polled by the X70/X205/DTM connector. Connector designation: Connector type: Max. cable length: Table 4-21 Assignment of connector X70 (MCP, MPP, HAM) / X205 (TCU) / DTM Pin Name 1 DT1 ... ... 16 DT16 Type Meaning Direct key 1 I 1) ... Direct key 16 17 P5V / CON1 18 P5V / CON2 2) 19 GND 20 GND + 5 V input voltage 3) 2) V + 5 V input voltage 3) Ground Ground 1) The inputs are electrically isolated for MCP / MPP / HAM and DTM. 2) For the TCU, it is evaluated whether the direct keys have been connected. 3) Power consumption: 100 mA for MCP / MPP / HAM; 500 mA for DTM Table 4-22 40 X70/X205/DTM 20-pin plug connector 0.85 m Signal level HIGH level: 5 V or open Low level <= 0.8 V General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Connecting 4.2 Handling membrane connectors 4.2 Handling membrane connectors When replacing parts it can sometimes be necessary to disconnect membrane connectors from the boards and reconnect them again. This should be done as follows: (1) Clamping frame of socket Image 4-4 Removing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector Unplugging the membrane connector 1. Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pushing it up with your fingernails until it engages in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. left). 2. Carefully pull off the membrane connector upward. Plugging in the membrane connector 1. With the clamping frame in the upper position, carefully plug the membrane connector into the socket. 2. Lock it in place by pushing down the clamping frame (Figure right). General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 41 Connecting 4.2 Handling membrane connectors 42 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.1 System settings 5.1.1 Settings for SINUMERIK solution line 5 Range of validity This description is valid for: NCU 7x0.3 PN with NCU-Basesoftware (Linux-based) PCU 50.5 with PCU-Basesoftware (Windows XP, Windows 7) Introduction This manual describes the structure and commissioning of the system network with SINUMERIK solution line control and operator components with Ethernet-based communication. The fundamentals of the system network are described first, details and special cases are described in subsequent chapters. Fundamentals The system network for SINUMERIK solution line is structured as a star topology with a central Ethernet switch, to which all Ethernet-based components of the system are connected. For an NCU the connection is executed via the X120 Ethernet socket, for PCU it is executed via the "Ethernet 2" connection. There is no default for all other components with two Ethernet connections. These components have an internal 2-port switch and may be used to connect an additional operator component. Thus in this case there can be deviation from the strict star topology. System network In the system network the IP address 192.168.214.xxx with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 is preselected. Here there is precisely one DHCP server with DNS that can run on one NCU or one PCU. The server ensures assignment of IP addresses to the Ethernet components in the system network (DHCP clients) from a specified address band. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 43 Networking 5.1 System settings The following rules apply for assignment of IP addresses in the system network: For all NCUs and PCUs the commissioning engineer assigns fixed IP addresses in the associated address bands, as well as appropriate computer names (host names). All other (operator) components are automatically assigned an IP address from the DHCP server. Its name is generated automatically (for MCP, MPP, HT 8), or is entered at commissioning (TCU). If there are multiple NCU and/or PCU in the system network the system automatically (depending on the start-up sequence) specifies the DHCP server and automatically ensures synchronization of all necessary data so that the next time the system boots any other NCU or PCU could take on the role of DHCP server. However it is a good idea to specify a DHCP master. This is an NCU or PCU in the system network that is available at each system boot and which regularly takes over the task of the DHCP server and DNS server. Synchronization of data takes place in any event so that any other NCU or PCU can take over this task. All non-master NCU / PCU wait in the system boot an adjustable length of time for availability of the master. Note In a system network, on a boot server respectively - i.e. the NCU or PCU which accommodates the active DHCP server - a maximum of 30 operator stations may be operated simultaneously with a TCU. A maximum of 10 operator stations with a TCU may connect up simultaneously with the same HMI application when powering up. Connection to a company network Each NCU can be connected via X130, and each PCU can be connected via "Ethernet 1" to the company network. The company network is used to exchange operating software with servers or to execute part-programs directly from servers in the company network. Company network and system network should always be logically and also physically separated. Service interface X127 The service interface X127 of the NCU is used for direct connection of a PG/PC for service purposes. Here access with STEP 7 to the PLC, and with NCU 7x0.3 PN also to PROFINET is possible. With direct connection (peer-to-peer) of a PG/PC to X127 it is absolutely necessary that the PG is operated as a DHCP client. 44 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.1 System settings 5.1.2 System boot with system network System behavior at boot As of NCU system software V2.4 SP1 and PCU-Basesoftware V8.1, system boot behavior is based on the following principle: For configuration of an NCU 7x0 with a PU 50, the default for a network configuration is as follows: The NCU keeps the default IP address 192.168.214.1 on X120, the PCU 50 keeps the default IP address 192.168.214.241 on Eth2. For a configuration of more than 1 NCU 7x0 without PCU, with one or several PCU 50, then a differentiation must be made between two cases: - At boot automatically all address conflicts and DHCP conflicts are resolved and the system is ready for operation. In this configuration there is no guarantee that all NCUs and PCUs will always receive the same IP address at each system boot. - If in the user's view there is a requirement that all NCUs, and possibly also the PCUs, get a defined constant IP address at each boot, for example because the IP address is entered in the respective PLC program, then the user must configure a fixed IP address for each NCU 7x0/PCU 50 in question, in the basesys.ini file. The user can specify a DHCP master in the basesys.ini file. Assigning names: - The user should assign meaningful names for all NCUs in the basesys.ini file; if not the names will be generated automatically. - A PCU 50 always has a computer name that can be changed as needed. The IP addresses of TCUs and MCPs are freely assigned within the specified address band at each boot. The MCPs are identified in the PLC via their DIP switch setting. Using DNS name service Availability of the DNS (Domain Name System) name service offers the following advantages for system network administration: The name service enables easier configuration with names instead of IP addresses for management of operating units: All components in the system network can be addressed via a symbolic computer name. This name can to some extent be freely assigned, to some extent it is derived automatically from a DIP switch setting (MCP, MPP, EKS, HT 8, HT 2). A computer node in the system network (NCU, PCU, TCU, MCP, HT 8, etc.) can be addressed solely through assignment of the IP address, either via a freely selectable name or via an internally generated name in the system network, and thus becomes independent from its network address in the system network. Thus a change in the network address does not necessarily necessitate a series of additional setting changes. In addition, the name service is used by the system for address resolution for MCP/MPP, direct keys, and EKS when changing the user authorization. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 45 Networking 5.1 System settings 5.1.3 Thin Client Unit (TCU) TCU overview The Thin Client Unit (TCU) for the distributed configuration permits spatial separation of the SINUMERIK operator panel front (OP/TP) and the SINUMERIK PCU or NCU. On the SINUMERIK solution line, the TCU is used to display the user interface of the PCU 50 or the NCU. It is possible to connect one TCU to several PCUs/NCUs. All TCUs and PCUs/NCUs that are connected to one another via a switch form the "system network". The user interface of a PCU/ NCU is copied to several OPs with one TCU each. In other words, all of the TCUs display the same screen. Operator actions can only be performed on one TCU at a time. This TCU then has user authorization. The PCU can also have its own OP connected directly to it. The following diagram shows a configuration example for a distributed topology: 7&8 7&8 7&8 +7 3&8 6,180(5,.'VO 0&3 6ZLWFK The mobile SINUMERIK HT 8 handheld terminal works on the thin client principle and combines the functions of an operator panel with a machine control panel. The configuration and cabling of the whole plant system based on a permissible configuration is described in the chapter 'Network configurations". Supplementary conditions For operation of a TCU: In the system network, the number of active TCUs is limited: - a maximum of 2 TCUs: NCU 710.3 PN - a maximum of 4 TCUs: NCU 720.3 PN or NCU 730.3 PN - a maximum of 4 TCUs: PCU Any number of TCUs can be operated in the system network. CompactFlash Cards cannot be used on the TCU. A 16 bit or 32 bit depth of color setting may be selected. If a PC keyboard is connected to the TCU, it is not possible to ensure that all special keys, e.g., multi-media keys, will be transferred to the software of the NCU / PCU. 46 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.1 System settings Machine control panels connected via a PROFIBUS network are not supported for switchover. Distributed memory media that are connected to the TCU via USB can be used. 5.1.4 Factory default settings Meaning of the symbols: Eth 1 as a DHCP client Eth 2 as a DHCP server Eth 2 with a fixed IP address Preconfiguration of the TCU The TCU is configured as a DHCP client and primarily accepts IP addresses from SINUMERIK components, from the DHCP server of such components that are inherent to SINUMERIK, for example, an NCU at X120 or a PCU on the system network or from a default DHCP server. The behavior of the TCU cannot be modified here. A TCU is a SINUMERIK DHCP client. The TCU has a single Ethernet connection. 7&8 A TCU executes a boot via the network. The boot server is the computer node from which the TCU also obtains its IP address. Pre-configuration of the PCU A PCU has two Ethernet interfaces with default settings suitable for use with SINUMERIK solution line: 3&8 (WK (WK General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Eth 1 is pre-selected as a default DHCP client for connection to a company network. Eth 2 is pre-selected as a SINUMERIK DHCP server for connection to a system network. On Eth 2 the fixed IP address 192.168.214.241 is pre-selected. 47 Networking 5.1 System settings Preconfiguration of the NCU On the X120, the NCU is preconfigured for the SINUMERIK DHCP protocol. The NCU is preselected here as a SINUMERIK DHCP server. On X120, the NCU occupies the fixed IP address 192.168.214.1 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0 in its capacity as a DHCP server. The DHCP server of the NCU assigns IP addresses from the range 192.168.214.10 - 192.168.214.239 to the DHCP clients. The behavior of the NCU on X120 cannot be modified. Restricting the available address band that is managed by the DHCP server of the NCU frees up IP addresses 192.168.214.2 to 192.168.214.9 as well as addresses 192.168.214.241 to 192.168.214.254 for network nodes with fixed IP addresses. ; ; 1&8 ; The NCU has three Ethernet connections: - X120 to connect to the system network with an active DHCP serv er (Eth 0) - X130 to connect to the company network as a default DHCP client (Eth 1) - X127 as a service connection with an active DHCP server (Ibn 0) On X130, the NCU is set as a default DHCP client for the address reference from a company network. The IP address received here is specified by the DHCP server from the company network. On X127, an NCU is a standard DHCP server (in contrast to the SINUMERIK DHCP server). On X127, the NCU has the fixed IP address 192.168.215.1 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.224). The IP addresses 192.168.215.2 - 192.168.215.23 are dynamically assigned to the DHCP clients. The range 192.168.215.24 - 192.168.215.30 is reserved, and can be used by stations on the network with a fixed IP address, e.g. by a modem. Reserved IP addresses for NCU and PCU The following defaults apply on delivery: Connection to the system network with subnet mask 255.255.255.0: IP address Network station Remark 192.168.214.1 NCU on X120 Default 192.168.214.2 - 9 For additional NCUs with a fixed IP address on the system network Unassigned 192.168.214.10 - 239 For additional TCUs, subsequently for additional DHCP clients PCUs, NCUs, MCPs, MPPs 192.168.214.240 Reserved for EKS (Electronic Key System) Default 192.168.214.241 Fixed IP address of the PCU on Eth 2 Default 192.168.214.242 - 249 For additional PCUs with a fixed IP address Unassigned 192.168.214.250 - 254 For PGs with a fixed IP address (service con nection) Unassigned Service connection with subnet mask 255.255.255.224: 48 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU IP address Network station Remark 192.168.215.1 NCU on X127 Default 192.168.215.2 - 23 for service purposes with PG, PC DHCP clients 192.168.215.24 - 30 fixed IP address, for example for a modem Unassigned 5.2 Commissioning TCU 5.2.1 Using the TCU's main menu Key assignment Functions of the keys and softkeys in the "Operator panel service system": Softkey Key on OP External key board Description HSK1 <F1> Moves the cursor down a row HSK2 <F2> Moves the cursor up a row Page HSK3 <F3> Moves the cursor down a page Page HSK4 <F4> Moves the cursor up a page Char HSK5 <F5> Inserts text or digits Char HSK6 <F6> Inserts text or digits Cancel VSK7 Cancel / Return Ok VSK8 OK / Confirm --- Pos1 Moves the cursor to the top row --- End Moves the cursor to the bottom row Exceptions to the above are mainly the result of input fields. Where these are present, the left/ right cursor keys move the input cursor rather than performing an OK/cancel function. The Return key takes you to the next field (like the "down" key) rather than closing the entire dialog with OK. There are also Backspace (deletes character to the left) and Delete (deletes character to the right) keys for editing text and numbers. The F5, F6, Backspace, Delete, and Select keys (between the cursor keys on the panel) can be used to switch between Yes/No fields. Touch panels without any additional keys still have a special function which allows you to edit letters and numbers with HSK5/HSK6 by moving characters forwards or backwards. With a General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 49 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU touch screen, you can activate all the softkeys and even select rows in a menu simply by touching them. See also: How to calibrate a touch panel (Page 65) "Main menu" The dialog "Main menu (TCU1)" is started with the menu back key and the key <MENU SE LECT>: Image 5-1 TCU menu: Main menu The main menu contains: A "Main menu" title followed by the TCU name in brackets A central area listing the servers from config.ini. This is followed by two more fixed items, "Select service session" and "Service this panel". - The penultimate menu item, "Select service session", triggers a server scan which detects all the VNC servers in the local (system) network. These are then displayed in a session menu which largely reflects the main menu. - The last menu item on the main menu, "Service this panel", opens the "Service menu for operator panel" submenu. 50 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU The right-hand side of the menu has a column containing 8 softkeys for use on a contextspecific basis. The lower section of the menu has a row of 4 softkeys for navigating with the cursor. There is an error line for displaying error messages directly above the row of softkeys. Transient status messages also occasionally appear in this line. There is a further message line above this error line. The contents of this line can be set from the servers using HWS commands. "Details" softkey The following connection data for the selected device appears when the "Details" softkey is pressed: Image 5-2 5.2.2 TCU menu: Connection data Using additional TCU menus "Service sessions" dialog When "Select service session" is selected from the main menu, the resulting process begins by triggering a server scan: General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 51 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Image 5-3 TCU menu: Scanning After this, the following dialog appears: 52 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Image 5-4 TCU menu: Active sessions Central area with the server list: The individual server lines contain either "Show WHAT on NAME (IP)" or the IP address only where the name is unknown. Session number VNC server Session 0 HMI Session 4 Command shell Session 5 System logfile Session 6 System Network Center (SNC) ... Session <N> other server These details are followed by a status message regarding the accessibility of the VNC server. "Connection not ok" appears if it is already impossible to access the VNC server from the IP side (if switched off, for example). If it can be accessed, a message shows whether an HMIVNC server is also accessible ("HMI running/not running"). The VSK8, Return or right cursor keys can be used to launch a VNC viewer for the selected server. Connection status: Further details on the connection status can be called with the "Details" softkey. In the next dialog, "not ok" or "not running" are accompanied by an additional error message with more General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 53 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU precise details on the reason for the loss of function. With more favorable scenarios, the session name for the VNC server will also be specified along with its resolution. The connection and HMI status are monitored on a regular basis in the background. This may mean that these details change spontaneously if a change is made on the relevant server (for example, it may be switched off, the HMI may become available, etc.). "Service menu for operator panel (TCU)" dialog The following dialog appears when "Service this panel" is selected from the main menu: Image 5-5 54 TCU menu: Service menu General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU The following menu items are available here: "Show status" displays status information including the software version, HW information, TCU network data, and the contents of the config.ini. Image 5-6 TCU menu: OP status "Show local logfile" displays a filtered version of the system logfile in the /var/log/ messages directory containing local TCU messages only. Syslog messages received via the network are not displayed. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 55 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Image 5-7 TCU menu: Local logfile "Show logfile of remote devices" displays the logfile of the other devices in the network: The syslog messages of devices in the system network which send syslog messages by broadcast, such as NCU 7x0, ... "Modify operator panel settings" calls a further submenu. Please refer to the next section. "Calibrate touch screen" is only active if there is a touch screen. This menu item recalibrates the touch screen. "Reboot" restarts the TCU. Note Where the contents of a line exceed the space available, the remaining text runs onto the next line so that you do not have to waste time scrolling across. When this occurs, the line has a right-facing arrow at its right edge. 56 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU "Modify settings for operator panel (TCU)" dialog The following dialog appears when "Modify settings" is selected from the main menu: Image 5-8 TCU menu: Settings The central area is for setting the TCU parameters: "HT 8 individual mode" (yes/no) This is only visible with HT 8, and is used to switch between Auto Mode and Individual Mode. There is no need to make any settings if an HT 8 is in Auto Mode, as the name is determined automatically: ("DIP<n>") the MCP address and TCU index are determined by the DIP setting ("DIP<n>"). It is possible, however, that another device is registered for the name selected. Such situations may only prove to be temporary, as is the case when DIP settings or two HT 8 have been confused. For this reason, this status is not reported as an error immediately, but identified as a possible problem instead ("potential name/DIP setting collision"). The text will only read ("Name/DIP settings collision") if the situation remains unchanged after some time has elapsed. The process itself is unaffected, as the changes only relate to how the warning or error is displayed. The explanatory text informs the user that they have probably assigned the same DIP number twice and suggests they change one of them before rebooting the HT 8. "Operator panel index - TCU" (0-255)" This specifies the TCU index. It matches the [Station] tcuIndex setting from the config.ini file. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 57 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU "Machine control panel address - MCP" (0-255) This specifies the address of the associated MCP. It matches the [Station] mcpIndex setting from config.ini. "Electronic key system index - EKS" (0-255)" This specifies the index of the associated EKS. It matches the [Station] eksIndex setting from config.ini. "Enable direct keys" (yes/no) This specifies whether direct keys (if present) should communicate with the PLC (yes) or be treated as ordinary keys (no). "OK" saves any modified values to the config.ini file or to the Flashstore (HT 8 individual mode). Parameters for the "config.ini" file Two steps need to be performed: 1. Select "New" or "Replacement for existing panel". 2. Select what is to be replaced. When an unknown TCU (i.e. not yet registered with the boot server) is started, a selection menu containing both the "New" and "Replacement for existing panel" items will appear. The accessibility of all the registered TCUs is tested in the background. The status of this test process appears in the message line: "(0/3 panels inactive)". Image 5-9 58 TCU menu: New TCU General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU If all the TCUs are active, the new one cannot be a replacement. The system will then automatically switch to the name assignment phase after a set period of time has elapsed. Image 5-10 TCU menu: Name of TCU Replacing a device If "Replacement" is selected, all the registered TCUs will appear in a selection menu. Those which are active in the network will be grayed out. (As these are functioning, there should be no question of replacing them.) The cursor automatically defaults to the first row for selection. As the accessibility test is still running in the background, the active status of the rows may change if panels are switched on or off. If a name is ultimately chosen, it will be applied to the new TCU along with the associated saved settings. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 59 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Image 5-11 60 TCU menu: Spare TCU General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Assigning a name If, as described above, the system automatically follows the "New" path, an additional message will appear: "This operator panel (TCU) must be new, because there are no inactive panels." This message will not appear if "New" is selected manually. Image 5-12 TCU menu: Name of TCU An available TCU name is suggested in the input field, although the user is able to change this. The default name is "TCU<N>", where <N> is the lowest number yet to be used. If, however, the name is already allocated after the OK softkey has been pressed (which may happen if a number of TCUs log on at the same time) and the suggestion has not changed, a new and unused name will be specified. If the name selected was still available, this will now be allocated, and the TCU settings can still be adapted if required. To enable any changes to be made, a new dialog will appear in which all the parameters have been pre-assigned their default values. You can make any changes you like or just select "OK" to accept the existing values. 5.2.3 How to register a TCU on the system network Preconditions The boot server (NCU or PCU 50) defined in the system network as a DHCP master, must be switched on and be available in the network. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 61 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Sequence for a TCU Procedure: 1. Connect TCU. This opens the dialog "New operator panel (TCU)". 2. Select "New" to connect a new TCU and "OK" to confirm. 3. In the next dialog, accept the name suggested by the system or enter a name and confirm this with "OK". The following parameters are pre-selected for the TCU: Operator panel index - TCU [0-255] 1_ Machine control panel address - MCP [0-255] Electronic key system index - EKS [0-255] 192 Enable direct keys No 0 4. Restart the TCU to apply the new settings. 5. If you want to change the parameters, select "Main menu" "Service this panel" "Modify operator panel settings". 62 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Sequence for the HT 8 Procedure: 1. Connect HT 8 to a connection module and calibrate the touch screen. Additional softkeys are available for convenient touch panel operation: - "OK" has the same effect as the <INPUT> key - Select "DEF" to save the "Default" settings. - "Edit" has the same effect as the <F10> or <MENU SELECT> key. 2. Select HT 8 Individual Mode: According to the default setting for an HT 8, "HT 8 Individual Mode" is deselected with "No". This means "Auto" mode is activated for automatic detection in the system network. The HT 8 is automatically detected based on its name "DIP_". If "HT 8 Individual Mode" is activated with "Yes", the HT 8 is identified by its MAC address on the system network. 3. For an HT 8, confirm the "DIP..." name proposed by the system or adapt the name. You can select any other characters. Press the <INPUT> key to apply the following values as default settings for the HT 8: HT8 Individual Mode Operator panel index - TCU [0-255] No 10 Machine control panel address - MCP [0-255] Electronic key system index - EKS [0-255] 10 0 Enable direct keys No The following message will then appear: "New TCU 'DIP10' registered." Note The TCU index is used to evaluate the direct keys. Direct keys can only be activated by appropriate devices. For an HT 8 the TCU index cannot be set, but is assigned by the system. Activate direct keys The signals from pressing the direct keys are sent directly to the PLC. In the PLC, the keys appear as 16 digital inputs. Additional information on programming the PLC is provided in: References: Function manual basic functions, basic PLC program (P3 sl) Definition: Operator panel The term operator panel designates a unit that consists of an OP/TP, a TCU or PCU and a machine control panel (MCP), that are connected to each other via Ethernet. All TCUs and PCU 50 can be used along with OP/TP with "integrated TCU", e.g.: OP 08T, OP 015T, TP 015AT. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 63 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Specifying settings without machine control panel If a PCU or a TCU has no Machine Control Panel (MCP), you must set one of the two following options: MCP address = 0 or no entry After the change of user authorization, there is no switchover of the machine control panel; the previously active MCP remains active. MCP address = 255 If the user authorization is transferred to this PCU or TCU, the previous machine control panel is deactivated and there is no active machine control panel from this point on. Connecting a replacement TCU Procedure: 1. Connect the new TCU. The following dialog lists the TCUs on the system network along with their "active" or "inactive" status. Image 5-13 TCU menu: New operator panel (TCU) 2. Select the name previously assigned to the faulty TCU from the "New operator panel (TCU)" dialog. As a result, the new TCU is recognized on the network and acquires all of the configuration settings from the TCU that has been replaced. 64 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU See also How to calibrate a touch panel (Page 65) 5.2.4 How to calibrate a touch panel NOTICE Service life of the touch screen Do not touch the operating elements of the display with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives. With each HT 8-device, a Touchpen (order no. 6FC5348-0AA08-4AA0) is delivered. This should be used for calibration purposes and during operation. Calibrate touch screen The calibration is automatically started after switching on HT 8. 1. Follow the instructions on the screen: 2. Press the three calibration items one after the other. This completes the calibration. 3. Press the corresponding horizontal softkey on the touch screen to close the command shell and to re-establish the connection to the desired PCU. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 65 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Recalibrate touch screen Procedure: 1. The key combination below can be used to initiate further TCU calibration during operation, if required: <F9> + <F10>. This corresponds to the key combination on an OP: Menu back key + <MENU SELECT>. 2. Select the menu item "Calibrate touch screen" to start calibration. Operator panel service system - service menu for operator panel (TCU) Show status Show local logfile Show logfile of remote devices Modify operator panel settings Calibrate touch screen Reboot TOUCHSCREEN CALIBRATION (Screen Orientation) Please touch upper left corner Cancel Ok Page Image 5-14 Page HT8 calibrating points Note The "Touchware" program, which is available with Windows XP, is deactivated on the TCU. The calibration process on the HT 8 can alternatively be started with the following key combination: <Recall> + <MENU SELECT> and then the <U> key. 66 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU 5.2.5 Connecting-up the SIMATIC Thin Client Touch Panel Registration in the system network The SIMATIC Thin Client Touch Panel behaves just like a TCU when connecting-up. When registering in "Operator Panel Service System" enter a name in the system network. After this, the device is available in the "Service Network Center" with the hardware ID "SIMATIC TC": Image 5-15 SIMATIC Thin Client Note The SIMATIC Thin Client Touch Panel has a USB connection at the rear, which behaves just like the USB connection X204 of a TCU. An external keyboard is recommended for commissioning and to operate the "Operator Panel Service System". General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 67 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Operating the Touch Panel To operate the Touch Panel, use the integrated keyboard: Image 5-16 Virtual Keyboard The integrated keyboard is activated using the button to the far right on the start bar. See also How to register a TCU on the system network (Page 61) Using the TCU's main menu (Page 49) Reference SIMATIC HMI, Operating instructions: Thin Client, Thin Client PRO 5.2.6 This is how you configure the SIMATIC Thin Client Touch Panel Operating the start bar The following functions are available in the start bar of the SIMATIC Thin Client: To select the SINUMERIK mode, press the button: 68 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU The following buttons are important for operation as SINUMERIK operator panel: To configure the SIMATIC Thin Client, press the button "Settings". You therefore open the "Operator panel service system": 2SHQ 6HWWLQJV &ORVH To exit the SINUMERIK mode, press the button "Close". To make the configuration settings, press the button: Select "Configure Thin Client": &RQILJXUH7KLQ&OLHQW &ORVH To exit the SIMATIC configuration menu, press the button "Close". Press the button to activate the integrated keyboard: Preconditions To make the following settings, you must be logged on as administrator. 1. Press the "Settings" button: 2. Log on as a administrator using the specified password. Result: As administrator you can see the complete menu of the SIMATIC Thin Client. Note All changes only become effective after pressing the "Enter" button on the "Virtual Keyboard" on the relevant side. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 69 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU SINUMERIK mode when restarting In order to return to the SINUMERIK mode automatically after a restart, proceed as follows: 1. In the "Applications" menu, select the "Autostart client application" tab. 2. Select the "SINUMERIK" option. Calibrate Touch Panel To calibrate the Touch Panel, proceed as follows: 1. In the "Device setup" menu, select the "Touch calibration" tab. 2. Follow the instructions and touch the Touch Screen at the appropriate points to calibrate. 5.2.7 Settings in the "config.ini" file Boot server The active boot server (DHCP server) is detected and displayed in the System Network Center (SNC). The boot server accesses this configuration file accordingly. Changes to the config.ini file do not become effective until the relevant TCU or PCU is next booted. Note If too much time (> 15 min.) elapses between commands when the user is making entries (e.g. TCU name) as part of the initial TCU log-on process, the time-out error will be suppressed. No error message will appear and the FTP connection will be reopened. The config.ini file is created in the following directories: NCU: /user/common/tcu/<TCU name>/common/tcu/ PCU (Windows XP): F:\user_base\common\tcu\<TCU name>\common\tcu\ PCU (Windows 7): C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\user\common \tcu\<TCU name>\common\tcu\ Configuration of the config.ini file The config.ini file has the following configuration: Parameter Range of values Default setting Meaning tcuIndex = Number 0 ... 255 DIP | 1 for TCU mcpIndex = Number 1 ... 254 DIP | 192 for MCP via Industrial Ethernet eksIndex = Number 0 ... 255 DIP | 0 for EKS dckEnable = 0 0 or 1 0 for DCK [Station] MaxHostIndex = Number 70 Number of nodes (NCU, PCU or PC) to which you can switch over. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Parameter Range of values Default setting Meaning SuspendLock = Number 0 or 1 0 0: No displacement disable SuspendPriority = Number 1 ... 10 1 [DEFAULT] SessionNumber = Number Password = String 1: Displacement disable set 1: Lowest priority 10: Highest priority Boot sequence: StartupPrio = Number The lower the number the higher the priority ScreenOnFocus = String | Number Not relevant ChannelOnFocus = Number Not relevant [host_1] From data file structure Address = [hostname | IP-Adresse] SessionNumber = NUMBER Password = STRING SuspendLock = NUMBER 0 or 1 0 0: No displacement disable 1: Displacement disable set SuspendPriority = NUMBER 1 ... 10 1 1: Lowest priority 10: Highest priority StartupActive = 0 0 or 1 Display screen after boot StartupPrio = NUMBER 0 ... not too high Boot sequence: The lower the number the higher the priority ScreenOnFocus = STRING | NUMBER Not relevant ChannelOnFocus = NUMBER Not relevant [host_2] ... [host_MaxHostIndex] [T2M2N] SK1 = ch_grp x 2 x 8 characters Empty Softkey inscription (2 lines) SK2 = ch_grp x 2 x 8 characters Empty Softkey inscription (2 lines) SK3 = ch_grp y 2 x 8 characters Empty Softkey inscription (2 lines) 2 x 8 characters Empty Softkey inscription (2 lines) ... SK32 = ch_grp z ... General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 71 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Note Connecting an MCP via PROFIBUS If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS, then the MCP Index = 0 should be set. Compatibility of software versions If a "config" file is available for the TCU, the data file structures of older versions are transferred to the config.ini file and the data file structure is then deleted. Comment In the config.ini file comment lines are indicated by the # character preceding a line. 5.2.8 Settings in the "TCU.ini" file Directories The tcu.ini files is created in the following directories: NCU: PCU (Windows XP): PCU (Windows 7): /siemens/system/etc/tcu.ini /user/system/etc/tcu.ini /oem/system/etc/tcu.ini F:\addon_base\system\etc\tcu.ini F:\user_base\system\etc\tcu.ini F:\oem_base\system\etc\tcu.ini C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\siemens\System \etc\tcu.ini C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\user\System \etc\tcu.ini C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\oem\System\etc \tcu.ini Note Only the following entries are evaluated by SINUMERIK Operate: VNCServer/VetoMode VNCServer/AlarmBoxTimeOut VNCServer/FocusTimeout VNCServer/AdaptResolution VNCServer/MaxActiveTCUs VNCViewer/ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy 72 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Structure and content In the tcu.ini file comment lines are indicated by the # character preceding a line. [VNCServer] # VETO MODE # VetoMode enabled: # VNC server notifies the HMI regie before another # panel gets the focus. # VetoMode disabled: # Focus timeout mode enabled (implicitly; see FOCUS TIMEOUT) # (0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE) VetoMode=1 # FOCUS TIMEOUT # Guaranteed time period (in sec) a panel can hold the # focus at least before another panel can get the focus. # The time period starts from the moment the panel has # gained the focus. FocusTimeout=10 # ALARMBOX TIMEOUT # The time period (in sec) a messagebox is shown (i.e. is # operable) in the case of VetoMode=1; no meaning else AlarmBoxTimeOut=5 # RESOLUTION 0 = SYSTEM 1 = AUTO_OP_1 (default) 2 = AUTO_OP_2 3 = AUTO_MON_1 4 = AUTO_MON_2 5 = 640X480 6 = 800X600 7 = 1024X768 8 = 1280X1024 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 73 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU # RESOLUTION ADAPTION # AdaptResolution enabled: # At system runtime, the system resolution is automatically # adapted to the resolution of that panel which # currently owns the focus. # AdaptResolution disabled: # The system resolution is set at system startup phase. # At system runtime, system resolution remains unchanged # whichever resolution the currently focused panel owns. # (0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE) AdaptResolution=1 # COLOR DEPTH # The value the system color depth is set at system # startup phase # ColorDepth SYSTEM: # System color depth remains unchanged whichever value # the color depth is currently set to. # COlorDepth 16_BIT # System color depth is set to 16 bit. # COlorDepth 32_BIT # System color depth is set to 32 bit. # (0=SYSTEM, 1=16_BIT, 2=32_BIT) ColorDepth=1 # INIT TIMEOUT # Guaranteed time period (in sec) the HMI manager waits # for VNC server initialization. InitTimeout=300 # PCU STARTUP TIMEOUT # Attention: The parameter is only provided for a PCU # configuration with local attached OP ! # # The startup phase is completed if this timeout period 74 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU # has passed and no registration of a TCU has been car# ried out at this time. PCUStartupTimeout = 90 # TCU STARTUP STEP TIME # The startup phase starts at the first TCU registration. # The startup phase is completed if the TCUStartupStepTime # period has passed and no registration of another TCU has # been carried out at this time. TCUStartupStepTime = 30 [VNCViewer] # EXTERNAL VIEWER MAX CONNECTIONS # Maximum number of external Viewer Connections (1 or 2) # ExternalViewerMaxConnections=2 ExternalViewerMaxConnections=1 # EXTERNAL VIEWER SECURITY POLICY # The user rights, assigned to an external VNCViewer # ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy=0 : no external viewers allowed # ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy=1 : Guest Mode (View-Only) # ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy=2 : Administrator Mode # ExternalViewerSecurityPolicy=1 # EXTERNAL VIEWER MAX REFUSED REQUEST # Number of refused external viewer requests, after which # a timeout period is carried out for the viewer. ExternalViewerMaxRefusedRequest=3 # EXTERNAL VIEWER CONNECTION TIMEOUT # Timeout Period in seconds, after MaxRefusedRequest # is reached. No viewer request is possible during the # Timeout Period. ExternalViewerConnectionTimeout=240 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 75 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU # EXTERNAL VIEWER REQUEST TIMEOUT # The time period (in sec) the request-messagebox is shown (i.e. is # operable) ExternalViewerRequestTimeout=20 # EXTERNAL VIEWER REQUEST TIMEOUTMODE # The behaviour if request-timeout elapsed # ExternalViewerReqTimeoutMode=0 : dismiss request # ExternalViewerReqTimeoutMode=1 : accept request ExternalViewerReqTimeoutMode=1 # REMOTE ACCESS IP-ADDRESS # IP-V4-format X127RemoteAccessIP=192.168.215.29 # MODEM IP-ADDRESS # IP-V4-format X127ModemIP=192.168.215.30 # SERVICE HOST # NCU with teleservice adapter on its X127 interface # Use "Self" for your own X127 interface # IP-V4-format or DNS-Name or Self X127ServiceHost=Self [PingService] # PING SERVICE MODE # (0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE) PingServiceMode=0 # PING SERVER IP-ADDRESS # IP-V4-format PingServerIP= # PING SENDING DATA 76 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU PingTransmissionData= # PING SERVER PORT-NUMBER PingServerPort= # PING TRANSMISSION PERIOD # Period in minutes, in which transmission data will be sent PingTransmissionPeriod=2 # PING TRANSMISSION INTERVAL # Time interval in seconds between two pings PingTransmissionInterval=5 [externalTcu] # EXTERNAL TCU IP-ADDRESSES # List of accepted TCUs in IP-V4-format (index 1 to maximal 16) ExternalTcuIP_1= [TCU_HWSService] # TCU CONNECT TIMEOUT # Guaranteed time period (in sec) the HMI manager waits # for TCUs recognized as connected TCUs by the TCU_HWS # service. TCUConnectTimeout=30 # TCU CONNECT TIMEOUT FOR HEADLESS STARTUP # Guaranteed time period (in sec) the HMI manager waits # for TCUs recognized as connected TCUs by the TCU_HWS # service, if a PCU panel doesn't exist and no TCUs are # connected till now. This time period is effective ad# ditionally to the time period TCUConnectTimeout. HeadlessTCUConnectTimeout=60 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 77 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Prerequisite Note The "Operation without SINUMERIK OP" option is required when using more than 1 external VNC Viewer. Operator control without SINUMERIK OP If the "Operation without SINUMERIK OP" option is set, then a list of viewers that can be assigned in tcu.ini is handled by the system just like internal viewers (=TCU); this means that these viewers have full user authorization and participate in the user rights management. Towards the outside, they behave just the same as the viewer on the SINUMERIK operator panels. Restrictions Restrictions for such external operator control units are: Neither MCP and direct keys nor an EKS system can be assigned. This also means that these devices cannot be activated to be an operator control unit in the system. Direct control keys cannot be triggered, i.e. the softkeys to the direct keys can be triggered in the operating software. However, the keys do not appear in the direct key image to the PLC. There is no configuration file config.ini, as for a TCU, i.e. the settings to be made to a TCU are not possible for such an operator control unit (power-up behavior, displacement, t:m:n); however, the displacement mechanism to the external operator control units is effective. An external operator control unit is never signaled as active operator station in the PLC. Configuring the external operator control units in the tcu.ini file in section: [externalTcu] # EXTERNAL TCU IP-ADDRESSES # List of accepted TCUs in IP-V4-format (index 1 to maximal 16) ExternalTcuIP_1= The desired screen resolution can also be set in the file tcu.ini: [VNCServer] Resolution = ... 5.2.9 Displacement mechanism for TCUs Supplementary conditions The following supplementary conditions apply when operating the TCU: 78 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU 2 active TCU connected in parallel to NCU 710.3 PN 4 active TCU connected in parallel to NCU 720.3 PN, NCU 730.3 PN 4 active TCU connected in parallel to PCU To operate a machine with more operating stations then the maximum number the displacement mechanism ensures that only the permitted number of TCUs are active in shadowing grouping. The remaining TCUs are switched to a passive mode, which means they no longer represent a load relative to the resources. Thus the number of TCUs that can be connected to one HMI application is practically no longer limited, the limitation is the number of concurrently active TCUs. Configuration There are two new entries in the config.ini file for a TCU for the displacement mechanism: SUSPENDLOCK: controls whether the TCU can be displaced via the displacement mechanism. SUSPENDLOCK = 0 means that a displacement disable is not set (preset), i.e. the TCU may be displaced by any other TCU. SUSPENDLOCK=1 means that this TCU can never be displaced. SUSPENDPRIORITY: This entry specifies a priority for the displacement mechanism to the TCU. In a displacement process the TCUs among the active TCUs with the lowest priority that do not have a displacement disable will displaced. The priority is specified as numeric value in the range 1 - 10. The preset is 1 (lowest priority). Note If you set a displacement disable for a TCU then specification of a displacement priority is unnecessary because it never is used due to the displacement disable. Displacement rules The TCU can assume the following states: The TCU is active and has user authorization: This can be identified as the TCU shows the screen of the operating software and the screen is bright. The TCU is active, however, in the monitoring mode (i.e. it presently has no user authorization): This can be identified as the TCU shows the screen of the operating software, however, it is darkened in comparison to the TCU with user authorization. The TCU is passive: The TCU shows the selection menu of the possible connections instead of a screen of the operating software, and the softkey for selection of the last active connection of the TCU is shown in color. When a TCU boots, the TCU always attempts to establish the first connection specified in its config file. The TCUs from a shadowing group establish their specified connection one after the other as long as the maximum number of permissible active operator units is not exceeded. If a TCU encounters the situation that this number is already reached in its power up, then it attempts to obtain a connection via the displacement mechanism. If it can displace a formerly General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 79 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU active operator unit then it takes on the active status itself, otherwise it transitions to passive status immediately after booting. 5.2.10 Disable switchover between TCU via PLC Overview The TCU switchover disable offers the option of dynamically disabling switchover from one TCU to the next when the system is running via the PLC. For the duration of the disable, a user authorization request to change user authorizations between TCUs will be ignored by the system and rejected. The rejected user authorization request causes a message to be output in the dialog line of the HMI, in the form of a feedback message for the requester. The message disappears after five seconds. HMI PLC data interface The "switchover disable" function is always active and does not have to be switched on explicitly. The function is controlled by a data bit in the PLC. The HMI transfers the active OP to the PLC, thus forming the basis of the control function in the PLC. The control bits and control information for this function are stored in the m:n data interface of the PLC. In terms of m:n, this function can be operated separately for the currently overridden HMIs in both m:n online interfaces (DB19.DBW120 ff for HMI1 and DB19.DBW130 ff for HMI2). If a system is not running an m:n, only the first m:n online interface is used for this function. Switchover disable is controlled by a TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit, managed by the user, on each HMI in the PLC. The bit address for the first HMI is DB19.DBB126.6 and DB19.DBB136.6 for the second HMI. The PLC m:n online interface is expanded so that byte DB19.DBB118 is still added to the first interface and byte DB19.DBB119 to the second. These bytes acquire the index of the active TCU (of the active OP) for the appropriate HMI. The byte is called TCU_INDEX. The appropriate HMI uses the TCU index configured for the active TCU to describe the TCU_INDEX byte. The TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit is monitored by the appropriate HMI. A value = 1 triggers the switchover disable; switchover is enabled if the value returns to 0. The TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit can be set, for example, to the PLC by the user pressing a key or it can be managed by the PLC user program according to its own logic. The TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit is managed in the PLC exclusively by the user; the HMI only accesses this bit in read-only mode. The HMI assigns the configured index of the TCU or PCU whose OP currently possesses user authorization in the shadow grouping. If no OP is active, a value of 0 is entered in TCU_INDEX. If no TCU index is configured for the active TCU (active OP), the value 255 = undefined is presented as the TCU index. This means that the values 0 and 255 may not be configured as the TCU index. 80 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU Configuration The TCU index and machine control panel address (MCP address) are configured on the PCU. The TCU index is set in the "OP Properties" dialog of the "System Network Center" program. Operating principle If the TCU_SHIFT_LOCK bit is set for switchover disable, a user authorization request is not carried out independently of the mode set on the HMI for allocation of user authorizations (veto mode), i.e., a change of user authorization is rejected. This message appears on all OPs for approximately 5 seconds: "No switchover: Switchover disable set in current PLC." While this message is displayed, operations on the OP with the user authorization can still be carried out unaffected. Note The switchover disable only relates to changing the user authorization on the OPs in a shadowing grouping on a PCU. Active switching from one OP to another PCU is not prevented. Special features The following special cases should be noted: Even if switchover disable is set, the TCU_INDEX field value may change in the PLC. This is the case if: - The OP in possession of the user authorization is actively switched to another PCU. Depending on whether another TCU takes on the user authorization or whether no TCU is currently active, either the index of the TCU or the PCU itself (if its directly connected OP becomes active) is entered, in exactly the same way as when there is a user authorization switchover. This can also be the value 255, if no TCU index is available for the OP. 0 is entered if an OP is no longer available in the shadow grouping. - An m:n switchover is in progress. The HMI program of the incoming PCU deactivates the HMI program which is active on it. An OP from the shadow grouping of the new (incoming) PCU must receive the user authorization. The TCU index of this OP is entered in the TCU_INDEX field. - A PCU is disconnected from a NCK/PLC in the context of m:n. No HMI program and, therefore, no OP with user authorization is then available on the exited NCK/PLC. This is signaled independently of a switchover disable by entering the value 0 into the TCU_INDEX field. If a TCU is actively switched over to another PCU, it can be deactivated there, i.e. it does not obtain the user authorization, if a switchover disable is set for the destination PCU. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 81 Networking 5.2 Commissioning TCU With an m:n PCU switchover - the PCU is switched to another NCK and, therefore, to another PLC - the PCU takes on the switchover disable settings of that PLC. The m:n interlock options on the PLC side have priority over the TCU switchover disable, so that a set TCU switchover disable cannot prevent an m:n switchover. If necessary, the m:n interference options should be synchronized here with those for the TCU in the PLC. It may, for example, be practical to set or remove the m:n displacement disable simultaneously with the TCU switchover disable. Obtaining user authorization On a TCU that has no user authorization, the first key that is pressed serves exclusively to request the user authorization, i.e. this key is not evaluated by the operating software. The settings for the right to veto are stored in file tcu.ini and are only effective if the operating software is installed on the PCU. At the OP of the TCU, the operating software can be operated in exactly the same way as an OP directly connected to the PCU. Note These operator input sequence steps must only be carried out by qualified personnel! 5.2.11 Example: How to select the behavior of the TCUs during boot up Example: Distributing boot support across two PCUs To distribute boot support over two PCUs, "Boot support runtime and configuration only (TFTP/ FTP)" must be selected on PCU_1 and "Boot support IP address only (DHCP)" must be selected on PCU_2. The "No boot support" configuration must be selected on PCU_3: Table 5-1 "TCU support" settings TCU_1 TCU_2 TCU_3 TCU_4 192.168.214.10 192.168.214.11 192.168.214.12 192.168.214.13 VNC connections: VNC connections: VNC connections: VNC connections: 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.242 192.168.214.243 192.168.214.243 192.168.214.242 192.168.214.243 Switch to system network PCU_1 PCU_2 PCU_3 192.168.214.241 192.168.214.242 192.168.214.243 82 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.3 Network configuration Services: Services: Services: X DHCP DHCP X DHCP TFTP X TFTP X TFTP FTP X FTP X FTP VNC VNC VNC Company network In this case, PCU_2 serves as the DHCP server which provides the IP addresses for the connected TCUs. PCU_3 is not involved in booting the TCUs, it is however displayed by the TCUs using VNC. 5.3 Network configuration 5.3.1 Permissible network topologies Ethernet connection A SINUMERIK 840 D sl can only be operated as a network within which the individual components communicate with one another via Ethernet connections. This network must be set up. The individual components are factory-set so that the most frequently occurring standard configurations can be operated without changing the settings related to the network. Division into system network and company network On the SINUMERIK solution line, the components are generally split into a company network on the one hand and a system network on the other. The connection to the company network provides access to the network drives, for example. On the system network, process data communication and image transmission runs from the components with operator software to the display units - the respective TCU. This split is performed physically by means of the prescribed use of the Ethernet interfaces on the components: A TCU is connected exclusively to the system network. An NCU is always connected to the system network via X120. Ethernet interface Eth 2 of the PCU is preconfigured for connection to the system network; while Ethernet interface Eth 1 is used for connection to the company network. An NCU is connected to the company network via X130. Meaning of the connections: Eth 1 as a DHCP client Eth 2 as a DHCP server General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 83 Networking 5.3 Network configuration Green connection Gray connection Eth 2 with a fixed IP address Uncrossed Ethernet cable Crossed Ethernet cable (crossover) 5.3.2 Networks without connection to the company network 5.3.2.1 Configuration 1: NCU and TCU Description 6\VWHPQHWZRUN 7&8 ; 1&8 &RPSDQ\QHWZRUN A direct Ethernet connection is used to connect a TCU to X120 of the NCU. NCU and TCU are suitably preconfigured with IP addresses. The IP addresses are not significant for further operation. The TCU is connected to the NCU via a crossed Ethernet cable. The direct connection of the NCU via X120 to the TCU automatically forms a simple system network consisting of two computer nodes. 84 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.3 Network configuration 5.3.2.2 Configuration 2: NCU and PCU with direct OP Description 6\VWHPQHWZRUN ; (WK 1&8 3&8 &RPSDQ\QHWZRUN The NCU and PCU are connected via a crossed Ethernet cable. The NCU is the DHCP server with the IP address 192.168.214.1. For this Eth 2 configuration, the PCU is assigned a fixed IP address in the range 192.168.214.241 - 192.168.214.249 with a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 . General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 85 Networking 5.3 Network configuration 5.3.3 Networks with NCU connection to the company network 5.3.3.1 Configuration 3: NCU and TCU Description 6\VWHPQHWZRUN 7&8 ; 1&8 ; 6ZLWFK &RPSDQ\QHWZRUN The TCU is connected to the NCU (directly) using a crossed Ethernet cable. On X130, the NCU is connected to a switch to the company network with a straight cable. As in configuration 1, there is a direct Ethernet connection between a TCU and X120 of the NCU. NCU and TCU are suitably preconfigured with IP addresses. The IP addresses used here are not significant for further operation. IP configuration: DHCP server on the company network On X130, the NCU is set to the address reference via DHCP. If the company network has a DHCP server that provides the NCU with an IP address (IP configuration), the NCU is integrated into the company network. Depending on the infrastructure available or the level of network administration of the company network, the following network parameters must be set for the NCU on X130: Computer name on the company network Address of a DNS server Address of a gateway (default router) The IP address of the NCU to this connection is also assigned via network administration. 86 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.3 Network configuration If the company network offers a low level of administration (in the worst case scenario the network has only one DHCP server that assigns the addresses from a predefined address range) the NCU receives an IP address that is initially unknown. 5.3.3.2 Configuration 4: NCU and PCU with direct OP Description 6\VWHPQHWZRUN ; (WK 1&8 3&8 (WK ; 6ZLWFK &RPSDQ\QHWZRUN The NCU and PCU are connected via a crossed Ethernet cable. On X120, the NCU occupies the fixed IP address 192.168.214.1 in its capacity as a DHCP server (not used in this configuration). For this Eth 2 configuration, the PCU is assigned a fixed IP address in the range 192.168.214.241 - 192.168.214.249 with a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 . The observations made for configuration 3 also apply here in relation to the connection to the company network. The connection to a switch on the company network is made via a noncrossed Ethernet cable. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 87 Networking 5.3 Network configuration 5.3.3.3 Configuration 5: PCU with TCU on NCU Description 6\VWHPQHWZRUN 7&8 6ZLWFK (WK ; 1&8 3&8 ; (WK 6ZLWFK &RPSDQ\QHWZRUN In this configuration, a switch is also required for the system network. All components are connected using straight Ethernet cables. In terms of address allocation and the settings that need to be made, this configuration is identical to that of configuration 4. However, in this case, the DHCP server of the NCU actually supplies the TCU with an IP address and serves as a boot server for the TCU. The observations made for configuration 3 also apply here in relation to the connection to the company network. The connection to a switch on the company network is made via a straight Ethernet cable. To connect one TCU to both HMI systems you must create an additional connection to the NCU for the TCU, as described in the following chapter: 88 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.3 Network configuration 5.3.3.4 Connecting the programming device (PG) to the NCU Description $QODJHQQHW] 7&8 6ZLWFK ; ; 3* (WK 1&8 3&8 ; (WK 6ZLWFK )LUPHQQHW] For service purposes a programming device is connected to the NCU at X127 as a standard DHCP client (automatically obtain an IP address). An NCU is a standard DHCP server on X127. On X127, the NCU occupies the fixed IP address 192.168.215.1 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.224. At X127, IP addresses from 192.168.215.2 onwards are assigned via DHCP; e.g. to connect a programming device. This is the reason that a fixed IP address must not be set at the programming device. 5.3.4 Example: Configuring a VNC connection to a PC Requirements In order to use a TCU to get visual access to a computer from a SINUMERIK system via VNC, the following requirements apply: The boot server (active DHCP server) in the system network must be an NCU. This NCU must be integrated via X130 or X120 into the network to which the computer to be monitored is connected. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 89 Networking 5.3 Network configuration The computer to be monitored must be configured in the config.ini configuration file of the TCU according to the general configuration for a TCU in a separate host section as a switchover target for this TCU. Where necessary, a password has to be specified in the configuration, if the VNC server requires one on the target system (see below). To ensure that the TCU recognizes the new switchover target, the TCU requires a restart and reboot. The screen resolution of the computer to be monitored must be adjusted to the conditions of the TCU, since otherwise the TCU scales the image received to its possible range of representation, which would adversely affect the representation on the TCU. Configuration 6\VWHPQHWZRUN 7&8 ; 1&8 ; 3*3& 1HWZRUN Image 5-17 Configuration example Configuration The config.ini file is located in the following directory: NCU: PCU (Windows XP): PCU (Windows 7): /user/common/tcu/<TCU name>/common/tcu F:\user_base\common\tcu\<TCU name>\common\tcu C:\ProgramData\Siemens\MotionControl\user\common \tcu\<TCU name>\common\tcu The config.ini file must be stored on the boot server (active DHCP). Example: 90 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.3 Network configuration [Station] maxhostindex=2 /* Number of nodes that are defined under [host_1] and [host_2]. mcpIndex=192 tcuIndex=1 eksIndex=0 [host_1] Address=192.168.214.1 /* Address of the NCU to which the connection is established during booting. [host_2] Address=157.163.230.202 password=123456 /* Address of the PC /* Password of the VNC server on the PC Switching over between the nodes With the "Menu back" + MENU SELECT keys, the following actions are triggered: In the header of the displayed window you will see the TCU name, for example TCU1. A selection list for connecting to the other nodes will be displayed on the TCU. See also Settings in the "config.ini" file (Page 70) 5.3.5 Application example Application The configuration is suitable for the following application: Machine with concurrent operating option to two operator panels , a full-featured operating panel with PCU and an operator panel reduced to tool management. Parallel operation of HMI-Advanced or SINUMERIK Operate on the PCU 50.3 and SINUMERIK Operate as component of the CNC software on the SINUMERIK 840D sl NCU: Any OP connected to PCU 50.3 and any OP connected to the NCU can be simultaneously operated: in the example, OP 08T. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 91 Networking 5.3 Network configuration 3&8 237 237 237 6ZLWFK 6\VWHPQHWZRUN 6,180(5,.'VO Image 5-18 Configuration example Proceed as follows To configure the application example, proceed as follows: 1. PCU 50.3 with HMI Advanced Deactivate the DHCP server on the PCU: For this select the option "Boot support runtime and configuration only (TFTP/FTP)" on the "TCU support" tab of the "System Network Center" program. 2. SINUMERIK 840D sl from CNC software, version 2.4 and higher The systemconfiguration.ini configuration file is included on the SINUMERIK 840D sl product DVD. 3. OP 08T operator panel Once the installation of the OP 08T operator panel with SINUMERIK Operate has been completed, copy the systemconfiguration.ini file from the /Siemens/ sinumerik/hmi/appl/systemconfig/tm/ directory to the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/ cfg/ directory. After this, a system restart is necessary. Note Subsequent changes Once the file has been copied, no further settings (e.g. changing language) can be implemented on the SINUMERIK Operate. If you want or need to implement changes later, the systemconfiguration.ini file can be renamed (e.g., as systemconfiguration.save). After this, a system restart is necessary. Following the restart, the full functional scope of SINUMERIK Operate is available once again. 92 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Networking 5.4 Service and diagnostics 5.4 Service and diagnostics 5.4.1 Booting of the TCU Messages when booting While the TCU is booting, progress is displayed after the BIOS has booted and before the operating system is loaded. In addition to messages, the current booting status is also indicated by a progress bar. While the IP address is being determined via DHCP and the TFTP is being downloaded (boot image), a progress bar indicates that booting of the TCU is not yet complete, or that a fault has occurred. The structure of these messages is shown below: Thin Client Boot loader V04.50.11.00 IP address <1/F1> diagnosis window You can see the current boot phase in the third line. Below that you are told whether you can call up information via <F1> if a fault occurs. Diagnostics options during booting In the following cases, the diagnostics window is displayed and booting of the TCU is interrupted: When the <1 / F1> function is selected during booting When a warning message is displayed When a fault occurs Note You can select the <1 / F1> to <F8> functions shown below using the horizontal softkeys on the OP. For example, to select <F7>, press the horizontal softkey 7. Press the appropriate key <1> for <F1> at an HT8. General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 93 Networking 5.4 Service and diagnostics Calling up the diagnostics window with <1 / F1> 7hin Client Boot loader V04.05.11.00 Boot progress: BIOS MAC address Hardware ID Network link IP address Netmask Boot server Image metadata Image version Linux image (linux.bin) Booting <1/F1>details V03.04.00.00 08:06:00:F1:F7:F8 7.7.0.0 1000MB, full duplex 192.168.214.1 255.255.255.0 192.168.214.1 98 bytes V04.50.11.00 3295436 bytes ready <7/F7>continue Key / text Meaning F1 details Display detailed information F7 continue Continue booting of the TCU F8 reboot Restart the TCU <8/F8>reboot Press <1 / F1> to continue If you select function <F1> in the diagnostics window, the, detailed diagnostic information is output. Key / text Meaning F1 ... F6 Navigate within the window (alternatively, the relevant keys on the OP can be used). 94 F7 + Display more information F8 - Display less information F9 back Return to diagnostics window General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Index B H Backup battery Connection conditions, 19 Boot server, 88 Heat dissipation Means of heat dissipation, 21 HT 8 Calibrate, 65 Rotary coding switch, 63 C Calibrate touch panel HT 8, 65 TCU, 66 Calibrate Touch Panel, 70 CompactFlash Card, 46 Company network, 44 Configuration file config.ini, 58, 70 tcu.ini, 73 Connecting a PG, 89 Connection conditions Backup battery, 19 EMC measures, 15 Membrane connectors, 41 Protective separation, 15 User interface, 15 D DCK (Direct Control Keys), 63 DHCP client, 47 DHCP server, 47 Direct control keys, 63 DNS (Domain Name System), 45 E EMC measures, 17 Connection conditions, 15 Ethernet connection, 83 Ethernet interface, 83 F Factory default settings, 47 Faults when booting, 93 I IP address PG, 89 M Membrane connectors Connection conditions, 41 Messages during TCU boot up, 93 N Network topology, 83 O Operator components Overview, 13 Overview Operator components, 13 SINUMERIK 840D sl, 12 P Potential equalization, 16 Protective separation Connection conditions, 15 R Replacement TCU, 64 S Signal cables, 16 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 95 Index SIMATIC Thin Client, 67 SINUMERIK 840D sl System overview, 12 SINUMERIK DHCP client, 47 SINUMERIK DHCP server, 48 SINUMERIK mode, 70 Star structure, 43 Start bar, 68 Switchover disable, 80 System Boot behavior, 45 System network, 43 Configuring, 61 T TCU Assign index, 81 Assign names, 61 Boot-up messages, 93 Main menu, 50 Settings, 61 Supplementary conditions, 46 Thin Client Unit, 46 TCU diagnostics, 93 U User authorization, 46, 82 User interface Connection conditions, 15 V Validity Manual, 43 96 General information and networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl Operator panels Manual Operator panel front: OP 08T 1 Operator panel front: OP 010 2 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4 Operator panel front: OP 012 5 Operator panel front: OP 015 6 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11 Operator panel front: OP 019 12 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13 Direct control key module 14 PCU 50.5 15 TCU x0.2 16 Valid for: SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl control 03/2016 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 1 2 3 Operator panel front: OP 08T.....................................................................................................................11 1.1 Description.............................................................................................................................11 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 Control and display elements.................................................................................................12 View.......................................................................................................................................12 Keyboard................................................................................................................................13 Screen saver..........................................................................................................................14 1.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................15 1.4 Installation..............................................................................................................................16 1.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................18 1.6 Spare parts.............................................................................................................................18 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 Accessories............................................................................................................................19 Overview................................................................................................................................19 Labeling the slide-in labels.....................................................................................................19 Printing the slide-in labels......................................................................................................24 Operator panel front: OP 010.....................................................................................................................27 2.1 Description.............................................................................................................................27 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 Operator control and display elements..................................................................................28 View.......................................................................................................................................28 Keyboard................................................................................................................................29 Screen saver..........................................................................................................................30 2.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................31 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 Installation..............................................................................................................................33 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................33 Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU........................................................................................34 Mounting on the mounting wall..............................................................................................35 Softkey labeling......................................................................................................................35 2.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................36 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 Spare parts.............................................................................................................................36 Overview................................................................................................................................36 Replacement..........................................................................................................................38 Operator panel front: OP 010S...................................................................................................................43 3.1 Description.............................................................................................................................43 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 Operating and display elements.............................................................................................44 View.......................................................................................................................................44 Keyboard................................................................................................................................44 Screen saver..........................................................................................................................45 3.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................45 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Table of contents 4 5 6 4 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 Mounting................................................................................................................................46 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................46 Mounting on the mounting wall..............................................................................................48 Assembling an OP 010S and a PCU.....................................................................................49 3.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................49 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 Spare parts.............................................................................................................................50 Overview................................................................................................................................50 Replacement..........................................................................................................................50 Operator panel front: OP 010C...................................................................................................................51 4.1 Description.............................................................................................................................51 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 Operating and display elements.............................................................................................52 View.......................................................................................................................................52 Keyboard................................................................................................................................53 Screen saver..........................................................................................................................54 4.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................55 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 Mounting................................................................................................................................57 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................57 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU.....................................................................................58 Mounting on the mounting wall..............................................................................................59 4.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................59 4.6 4.6.1 Spare parts.............................................................................................................................60 Overview................................................................................................................................60 Operator panel front: OP 012.....................................................................................................................61 5.1 Description.............................................................................................................................61 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Operator control and display elements..................................................................................62 View.......................................................................................................................................62 Keyboard................................................................................................................................63 Screen saver..........................................................................................................................64 5.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................64 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 Installation..............................................................................................................................66 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................66 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU........................................................................................68 Mounting on the mounting wall..............................................................................................71 Softkey labeling......................................................................................................................72 5.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................72 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 Spare parts.............................................................................................................................73 Overview................................................................................................................................73 Replacement..........................................................................................................................75 Operator panel front: OP 015.....................................................................................................................79 6.1 Description.............................................................................................................................79 6.2 6.2.1 Operating and display elements.............................................................................................80 View.......................................................................................................................................80 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 7 8 6.2.2 6.2.3 Keyboard................................................................................................................................80 Screen saver..........................................................................................................................81 6.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................81 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 Mounting................................................................................................................................82 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................82 Assembling an OP 015 and a PCU........................................................................................84 Mounting on the mounting wall..............................................................................................85 6.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................85 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 Spare parts.............................................................................................................................86 Overview................................................................................................................................86 Replacement..........................................................................................................................87 Operator panel front: OP 015A...................................................................................................................91 7.1 Description.............................................................................................................................91 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 Operating and display elements.............................................................................................92 View.......................................................................................................................................92 Keyboard................................................................................................................................93 Screen saver..........................................................................................................................94 7.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................94 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 Mounting................................................................................................................................96 Preparation for mounting........................................................................................................96 Assembling an OP 015A and a PCU.....................................................................................96 Mounting on the mounting wall..............................................................................................99 Softkey labeling....................................................................................................................100 7.5 Technical specifications.......................................................................................................101 7.6 7.6.1 7.6.2 Spare parts...........................................................................................................................102 Overview..............................................................................................................................102 Replacement........................................................................................................................104 Operator panel front: OP 015AT...............................................................................................................111 8.1 Description...........................................................................................................................111 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Operator controls and indicators..........................................................................................112 View.....................................................................................................................................112 Keyboard..............................................................................................................................113 Screen saver........................................................................................................................114 8.3 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................115 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 Installation............................................................................................................................116 Mounting..............................................................................................................................116 Softkey labeling....................................................................................................................117 8.5 Technical data......................................................................................................................118 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 Replacement parts...............................................................................................................119 Overview..............................................................................................................................119 Replacement........................................................................................................................120 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 5 Table of contents 9 10 11 6 Operator panel front: TP 015A.................................................................................................................127 9.1 Description...........................................................................................................................127 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 Operating and display elements...........................................................................................128 View.....................................................................................................................................128 Operation.............................................................................................................................129 Keyboard..............................................................................................................................129 Screen saver........................................................................................................................131 9.3 interfaces..............................................................................................................................131 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 Mounting..............................................................................................................................132 Preparation for mounting......................................................................................................132 Assembling TP 015A and PCU............................................................................................133 Mounting on the mounting wall............................................................................................133 Touchscreen calibration.......................................................................................................134 Softkey labeling....................................................................................................................135 9.5 Technical specifications.......................................................................................................135 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 Spare parts...........................................................................................................................136 Overview..............................................................................................................................136 Replacement........................................................................................................................138 Operator panel front: TP 015AT...............................................................................................................147 10.1 Description...........................................................................................................................147 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 Operator controls and indicators..........................................................................................148 View.....................................................................................................................................148 Operation.............................................................................................................................149 Keyboard..............................................................................................................................149 Screen saver........................................................................................................................151 10.3 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................151 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 Installation............................................................................................................................153 Mounting..............................................................................................................................153 Touchscreen calibration.......................................................................................................154 Softkey labeling....................................................................................................................154 10.5 Technical data......................................................................................................................155 10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2 Replacement parts...............................................................................................................156 Overview..............................................................................................................................156 Replacement........................................................................................................................157 Operator panel front: OP 015 black..........................................................................................................163 11.1 Description...........................................................................................................................163 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 Operator control and display elements................................................................................164 View.....................................................................................................................................164 Operation.............................................................................................................................165 Keyboard..............................................................................................................................167 Screen saver........................................................................................................................168 11.3 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................168 11.4 Assembly..............................................................................................................................170 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 12 13 14 15 11.4.1 Touchscreen calibration.......................................................................................................174 11.5 Technical data......................................................................................................................174 11.6 Spare parts/accessories.......................................................................................................175 Operator panel front: OP 019...................................................................................................................177 12.1 Description...........................................................................................................................177 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.2.3 12.2.4 Operator control and display elements................................................................................179 View.....................................................................................................................................179 Keyboard..............................................................................................................................180 Softkeys...............................................................................................................................181 Screen saver........................................................................................................................181 12.3 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................182 12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4 Mounting..............................................................................................................................184 Preparation for mounting......................................................................................................184 Assembling an OP 019 and a PCU......................................................................................186 Assembling an OP 019 and a TCU......................................................................................187 Mounting on the mounting wall............................................................................................188 12.5 Technical data......................................................................................................................189 Operator panel front: OP 019 black..........................................................................................................191 13.1 Description...........................................................................................................................191 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 Operator control and display elements................................................................................192 View.....................................................................................................................................192 Operation.............................................................................................................................193 Screen saver........................................................................................................................194 13.3 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................195 13.4 Installation............................................................................................................................197 13.5 Technical specifications.......................................................................................................201 13.6 Spare Parts/Accessories......................................................................................................202 Direct control key module.........................................................................................................................203 14.1 Description...........................................................................................................................203 14.2 Operating and display elements...........................................................................................203 14.3 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................204 14.4 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 Mounting..............................................................................................................................205 Overview..............................................................................................................................205 Combination with OP 012....................................................................................................206 Combination with OP 015A / TP 015A.................................................................................208 14.5 Technical data......................................................................................................................210 PCU 50.5..................................................................................................................................................213 15.1 Description...........................................................................................................................213 15.2 15.2.1 Operator control and display elements................................................................................216 On/off switch........................................................................................................................216 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 7 Table of contents 8 15.2.2 Service module....................................................................................................................217 15.3 15.3.1 15.3.2 15.3.2.1 15.3.2.2 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................219 External interfaces...............................................................................................................219 Internal interfaces.................................................................................................................222 Connector assignment of motherboard................................................................................222 Connector assignment of bus board....................................................................................226 15.4 15.4.1 15.4.2 15.4.3 15.4.4 15.4.5 15.4.6 15.4.7 Mounting..............................................................................................................................231 Preparation for mounting......................................................................................................231 Assembly of PCU and operator panel front (standard mounting)........................................234 Flat mounting.......................................................................................................................234 Upright mounting..................................................................................................................236 Notes on installation.............................................................................................................239 Connecting Ethernet/USB strain relief.................................................................................240 Relocating the service module.............................................................................................241 15.5 15.5.1 15.5.2 15.5.3 Connecting...........................................................................................................................242 Power supply........................................................................................................................242 Equipotential........................................................................................................................243 I/O devices...........................................................................................................................244 15.6 15.6.1 15.6.1.1 15.6.1.2 15.6.2 15.6.3 15.6.4 15.6.5 15.6.6 Commissioning.....................................................................................................................245 BIOS.....................................................................................................................................245 BIOS powering up................................................................................................................245 Changing the BIOS settings.................................................................................................247 System start.........................................................................................................................248 Switching off / reset..............................................................................................................248 Touchscreen calibration.......................................................................................................249 Operation with an S7-CPU (without NCU)...........................................................................252 Configuring the 'fb9_proxy.ini' file.........................................................................................253 15.7 15.7.1 15.7.2 15.7.3 15.7.4 15.7.5 Alarm, error and system messages.....................................................................................257 Boot error messages............................................................................................................257 BIOS beep codes.................................................................................................................258 Status codes of the diagnostics display during the system power up..................................261 Status codes of the diagnostics display during operation....................................................262 Status codes of the diagnostics display during the shutdown process................................262 15.8 15.8.1 15.8.2 15.8.3 Technical data......................................................................................................................262 PCU 50.5..............................................................................................................................262 Calculating the power...........................................................................................................264 Power failure detection.........................................................................................................264 15.9 15.9.1 15.9.2 15.9.2.1 15.9.2.2 15.9.2.3 15.9.2.4 15.9.2.5 Spare parts...........................................................................................................................265 Overview..............................................................................................................................265 Replace................................................................................................................................265 SSD module.........................................................................................................................266 Power supply........................................................................................................................268 Power supply fan..................................................................................................................269 Device fan............................................................................................................................270 Backup battery.....................................................................................................................271 15.10 15.10.1 15.10.2 Accessories..........................................................................................................................274 Overview..............................................................................................................................274 Installing and removing expansion modules........................................................................274 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 15.10.2.1 15.10.2.2 15.10.2.3 16 Memory expansion...............................................................................................................274 PCI cards.............................................................................................................................276 CompactFlash card..............................................................................................................278 TCU x0.2..................................................................................................................................................281 16.1 16.1.1 16.1.2 Description...........................................................................................................................281 Overview..............................................................................................................................281 Configurations......................................................................................................................282 16.2 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................283 16.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front.....................................................................285 16.4 Technical data......................................................................................................................289 16.5 Accessories..........................................................................................................................289 Index.........................................................................................................................................................291 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 9 Table of contents 10 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.1 1 Description The compact SINUMERIK OP 08T operator panel front enables a spatially distributed configuration of the operator panel front and control. The OP 08T operator panel front has a membrane keyboard with 79 keys (layout similar to SINUMERIK CNC full keyboard KB 310C) as well as 2x8 horizontal and 2x8 vertical soft keys. The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance of two network nodes / access points. The OP 08T operator panel front is connected to the PCU / NCU via the Ethernet as thin client in its own subnet (via DHCP server to PCU / NCU). The mixed operation with an operator panel front is possible directly at the PCU. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to the OP 08T operator panel front Article number: 6FC5203-0AF04-1BA1. Features Ethernet 3x USB for connecting the mouse, keyboard and USB flash drive (1x front / 2x rear) 7.5" TFT flat screen with VGA resolution 640x480 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Softkeys / direct keys - 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key function Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Limited mounting depth Panel cutout (W x H): 285 x 304 mm Degree of protection IP65 Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 11 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.2 Control and display elements 1.2 Control and display elements 1.2.1 View Menu forward key Menu select key Numeric pad Cursor pad Control pad Interface USB 1.1 Full Speed Alphabetic pad Machine area button Menu back key Vertical softkeys (direct keys) Horizontal softkeys Image 1-1 12 View of OP 08T operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.2 Control and display elements 1.2.2 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic block contains the letters A - Z (QWERTY), the space character and special characters. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "-", "/", "=", "+" and ".". The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The softkeys call up functions that are available on the screen via a menu bar. The "Menu back" key switches back to the higher-level horizontal menu. The "Menu forward" key advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The "Menu select" key calls the main menu to select the operating area. The "Machine area" key selects the "Machine" operating area. Switching between upper and lower case Upper case is always activated as standard. To switch to lower case, keep the SHIFT key pressed. Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete 13 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.2 Control and display elements Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 1.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 14 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.3 Interfaces 1.3 Interfaces Front USB 1.1 Full Speed (socket, type A) for connecting an external keyboard, mouse and USB flash drive (see Image 1-1 View of OP 08T operator panel front (Page 12)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s (without crossover function) 2 x USB 2.0 Hi-Speed 24 VDC power supply 9 9 3( Image 1-2 Rear view of OP 08T operator panel front Designation Type Strain relief for connecting cables Ethernet interface Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 X3 8-pin RJ45 socket 15 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.4 Installation Designation USB interfaces Ground terminal Power supply Type X203/ X204 Type A socket M5 screw (for screw connection with cable lug) X81 3-pin terminal block Cable clamp Pin assignment For the pin assignment of the interfaces, see "General information and networking" "Connecting". 1.4 Installation The OP 08T operator panel front is fixed in a rectangular section with clamps. For this reason, bore holes or screw holes are not needed. The tightening torque of the clamp set screws must not exceed 0.5 Nm. Table 1-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening OP 08T Width (mm) Height (mm) Mounting depth (mm) 285 304 35 *) *) Plus 10 mm cable connector and ventilation clearance 16 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.4 Installation 0RQWDJHZDQG 'LFKWXQJVEHUHLFK s 'UXFNSXQNWH I3/4U6SDQQHU s Image 1-3 LP'LFKWXQJVEHUHLFK Dimension sheet for installing the OP 08T operator panel front Image 1-4 5] 6SDQQHUPLW*HZLQGHVWLIWHQ Dimensions of the OP 08T Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 17 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.6 Spare parts 1.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Supply voltage 24 V DC Power consumption Max. approx. 15 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Weight Height: 330 mm Depth: 46 mm approx. 2.9 kg (without tension jack) Tightening torques, max. Tension jacks: 0.4 - 0.5 Nm M5 grounding screw: 3 Nm Display Size / resolution 7.5" TFT / 640x480 pixel (VGA) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 1.6 Spare parts The following components are available as spare parts for the OP 08T operator panel: 18 Spare part Article number Remark Tension jacks (for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm) 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Caps for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0BA0 Set of 5 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.7 Accessories 1.7 Accessories 1.7.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the OP 08T operator panel front: 1.7.2 Component Description Slide-in labels Slide-in labels, inscribable (3 films, DIN A4) Quantity Article number 1 6FC5248-0AF04-1BA0 Labeling the slide-in labels The OP 08T operator panel front is delivered ex-factory with two vertical slide-in labels (unprinted / background color: grayed-out). Teil 1 Teil 2 Image 1-5 Position of the vertical OP 08T slide-in labels Upon request, a spare part packet with three blank films can be ordered, in order to print the slide-in labels with the key symbols. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 19 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.7 Accessories Files for printing the blank film Teil 2 M 06/1142 skpeth40000062 23.05.06 CR Teil 1 Teil 2 1. Medium basic 701 HD Teil 1 SINUMERIK Panel Slide-in strips, inscribable (3 membrane sheets A4) for OP08T A5E00801829 6FC5248-0AF04-1BA0 Beschriftungsplan/template: A5E00801907B siehe/as: DOCONCD Print direction Image 1-6 Blank film OP 08T The DOConCD or Catalog NC 61/62 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: Template_OP08T_13.doc Symbols_OP08T_13.doc The file "Template_OP08T_13.doc" is a template for the exact positioning of the symbols on the printable film. 20 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.7 Accessories Outer edges Image 1-7 Template_OP08T_13.doc (blank template for film) The "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" file contains a wide range of key symbols: Table 1-2 Key symbols OP 08T 5000 5001 5002 5003 5068 5069 5070 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 5076 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 6019 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 21 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.7 Accessories 22 6074 6075 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6040 6041 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6039 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 7133 7134 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7012 7013 7014 7015 7017 7018 7020 7021 7024 7025 7026 7027 7029 7030 7031 7040 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 7049 7051 7052 7053 7054 7055 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.7 Accessories 7056 7057 7058 7059 7060 7061 7062 7063 7064 7065 7066 7067 7068 7069 7070 7071 7072 7073 7074 7075 7076 7077 7078 7086 7079 7080 7081 7082 7083 7084 7085 7087 7088 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094 7095 7096 7099 7100 7101 7102 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7150 7151 7152 7153 7154 7155 7156 7157 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 23 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.7 Accessories 7158 7159 7163 7164 7160 7161 7162 Preparing slide-in labels Inserting symbols 1. Open the files "Template_OP08T_13.doc" and "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" in MS Word. 2. Select a key symbol from the file "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" by left-clicking. 3. Copy the desired key symbol to the clipboard via "Edit" "Copy" or "Ctrl + C" 4. Return to the template file "Template_OP08T_13.doc" 5. Position the cursor before the insertion point in the desired table cell (in Fig.: "Template_OP08T_13.doc the insertion point is displayed by "+"). 6. Insert the key symbol via "Edit" "Paste" or "Ctrl + V". 7. Repeat steps 2. to 6. until you have inserted all the key symbols. Inserting characters/text 1. Open the "Template_OP08T_13.doc" files in the MS Word text processing program. 2. Set the "Arial" font to format characters. (This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.) 3. Position the cursor in the desired table cell and enter characters/text. 1.7.3 Printing the slide-in labels Printing the slide-in labels 1. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see figure Image 1-6 Blank film OP 08T (Page 20)). 2. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 3. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note For labeling the slide-in labels, HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 4. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (see Image 1-7 Template_OP08T_13.doc (blank template for film) (Page 21)).. 5. Round off the corners of the slide-in labels approx. 3 mm to facilitate insertion. 24 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.7 Accessories Dimension drawing %ODQNILOP ',1$ 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO &HQWHURIWKHNH\ 5 Image 1-8 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels Creating your own symbols Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Freehand, CorelDraw) - Draw a 13 x 13 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Group the square and symbol together and add this group in the MS Word document Template_OP08T_13.doc. Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Paintshop Pro) - Draw a square 13 x 13 mm (37 x 37 pixels), filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the symbol and the square together and add the group in the MS Word document Template_OP08T_13.doc. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 25 Operator panel front: OP 08T 1.7 Accessories 26 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.1 2 Description The SINUMERIK OP 010 operator panel front has a 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) and features a 62-key membrane keyboard (with 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys) that has been optimized for programming parts programs. It is fixed from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery scope. Validity The description below applies to the OP 010 operator panel front. Article number: 6FC5203-0AF00-0AA1 Features 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Limited mounting depth 10.4" flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels using TFT technology Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, control and hotkey key groups Softkeys: 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Front USB interface Degree of protection IP65 Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 27 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.2 Operator control and display elements 2.2 Operator control and display elements 2.2.1 View (5) (5) (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP Lit LEDs indicate increased wear. (3) Alphabetic key group (4) Numerical key group (5) Softkeys (6) Control key group (7) Hotkey group (8) Cursor key group (9) Front USB interface (10) Menu select key (11) Menu forward key (12) Machine area key (13) Menu back key Image 2-1 28 View of OP 010 operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.2 Operator control and display elements 2.2.2 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are arranged on the OP 010 operator panel front: The alphabetic key group contains the letters A, ..., Z on two levels, arranged in accordance with programming requirements. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "-", "/", "=", "+" and ".". The control key group includes special functions. The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas. The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The softkeys call up functions that are available on the screen via a menu bar. The "Menu back" key switches back to the higher-level horizontal menu. The "Menu forward" key advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The "Menu select" key calls the main menu to select the operating area. The "Machine area" key selects the "Machine" operating area. Switching between upper and lower case To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the key combination Ctrl + Shift Upper case is always activated as standard. Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key 29 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.2 Operator control and display elements Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 2.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, the screen must be switched dark (screensaver) in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "freezing" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: IM9 SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual 30 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.3 Interfaces 2.3 Interfaces This operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front USB 1.1 (type A) for connecting an external keyboard, mouse and USB FlashDrive (see View of the operator panel front (Page 28)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 31 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.3 Interfaces Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Direct key interface X11 (under cover plate) Interface X12 - reserved (under cover plate) (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) PCU main board (3) Cable clamp for connecting the direct key module (4) Keyboard controller (5) Direct key interface X11 (6) Interface X12 (reserved) (7) Connection X14 for backlight (8) Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 (9) Display cable K2 Image 2-2 Connections on rear of housing Connections with PCU 50 Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". 32 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.4 Installation See also View (Page 28) 2.4 Installation 2.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 2-1 Dimensions of the installation opening Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 290 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also enables the IP65 degree of protection (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). s 6HDOLQJDUHD s Image 2-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010 operator panel front Table 2-2 Dimensions to be observed when installing 5] 3UHVVXUH SRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQ MDFNV 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s s s s s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Mounting depth T3 + clear ance (mm) Opening depth T5 (mm) Protrusion P (mm) PCU 50.3 / 50.5 101 + 10 377 39 TCU x0.2 50 + 10 350 -12 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 33 Operator panel front: OP 010 6SDFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ 7s 3&8VZLYHOHGWKURXJKr 2.4 Installation 7 3&8LQILQDOSRVLWLRQ s s Image 2-4 2.4.2 s Dimension sheet for mounting the OP 010 with PCU Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU When combining an OP 010 and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installing them in the assembly panel. Procedure To do this, proceed as described in Section: "OP 012", Section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU". 34 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.4 Installation 2.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm in order to ensure that it is adequately ventilated (see Image 2-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010 operator panel front (Page 33)). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and in "General information and networking", Section: "Application planning", Section: "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounted components (PCU). Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Image 2-4 Dimension sheet for mounting the OP 010 with PCU (Page 34)). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 2.4.4 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the vertical softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. DIN A4 films are available for making the strips (for the article number, see Chapter Spare parts (Page 36)). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Procedure 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Remove the PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 35 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.6 Spare parts 4. Insert the strips into the slots provided on the rear of the operator panel front. 5. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. If the operator panel front and PCU are dismantled, omit steps 3 and 5. 2.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply (via K1 and K2) Voltage Current (typ./max.) Display Backlight inverter Logic / USB (with / without load) 5 V +/- 5% approx. 280/380 mA Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 5.2 V +/- 2% approx. 750/1000 mA approx. 350/1000 mA Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm approx. 5 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Display Size / resolution 10.4" / 640 x 480 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 2.6 Spare parts 2.6.1 Overview The following diagram shows the OP 010 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. 36 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.6 Spare parts Image 2-5 Individual parts for the OP 010 operator panel front Display with backlighting and backlight inverter Display support Keyboard controller Spare parts Order number Remarks Cap for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Operator panel front without display 6FC5248-0AF00-0AA0 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 DIN A4 film 6FC5248-0AF07-0AA0 for slide-in labels for softkey labeling*) Set of 3 *) The dimensions for production of film slide-in labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 37 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.6 Spare parts 6OLGHLQODEHOV 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Image 2-6 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 5 Dimensions for DIN A4 film Note The symbols for the four softkeys for navigation in the menus shown in the figure are not contained in the blank film. You can obtain the symbols from the "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" document that accompanies the DOConCD. Alternatively, you can also use the "Template_OP010.pdf" file as print template also provided on the DOConCD - under Separate supply > Slide-in labels > OP010. To print the film, proceed as described in the associated manual "Operator panel front: OP08T" under "Accessories" in Section "Printing the slide-in labels". 2.6.2 Replacement NOTICE Risk of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! 38 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.6 Spare parts USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Film labels The procedure for replacement is as described in Section: "OP 012", Section: "Softkey labels". Operator panel front When replacing the operator panel front, the previous display and keyboard controller can continue to be used. They are therefore disassembled and reassembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend reusing the keypad controller to prevent any loss of the control parameters that have been programmed in. Procedure :LGWK 'LVSOD\ VXSSRUWSODWH &RYHUSODWHIRU &RQQHFWLRQV .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU &DEOH FODPS 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH. 0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV 6OLWIRUVRIWNH\ODEHOLQJVWULSV Image 2-7 +HLJKW WRS &DEOHVKRZQIROGHGWRJHWKHU &DVLQJVFUHZV OP 010 rear side Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 39 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.6 Spare parts 1. Put the OP 010 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 housing screws (see figure above). 2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate. 3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see following Figure): Backlight (socket X14) and I/O USB cable K1. 4. Lift off the display support with the display. In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USB interface become visible. 5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface. 6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure). 7. Remove the retaining screws from the keyboard controller. 40 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.6 Spare parts 8. Lift USB interface and keyboard controller off the front plate. The interconnections may remain plugged. 9. Install the components into the new operator front panel in reverse order (procedure: see Note). Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting", Section: "Handling membrane connectors". When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to Section: "Technical data"). (1) USB interface (2) Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 (3) Direct key connection X11 (4) Membrane connector for connecting the keyboard of the operator panel front (5) Keyboard controller (6) Connection X12 (reserved) (7) Connection X14 for backlight (8) Connection X4 for mouse Image 2-8 Changing the operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 41 Operator panel front: OP 010 2.6 Spare parts 42 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3.1 3 Description The slimline SINUMERIK OP 010S operator panel front and 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features 8 +4 horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys. It is fixed from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery scope. Validity The description below applies to the OP 010S operator panel front Article number 6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0 Features The OP 010S operator panel front described in the following is characterized by: Mounting dimensions 310 x 330 mm Panel cutout (W x H): 285 x 304 mm Limited mounting depth 10.4" TFT flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels Mechanical keys: - 8 horizontal softkeys - 8 vertical softkeys - 4 control keys Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface Degree of protection: IP54 Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU and a CNC full keyboard Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 43 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3.2 Operating and display elements 3.2 Operating and display elements 3.2.1 View Status LED: POWER Status LED: TEMP Lit LEDs indicate increased wear. Softkeys Menu forward key Menu select key Front USB interface Machine area button Menu back key Image 3-1 3.2.2 View of the OP 010S operator panel front Keyboard Keyboard Several keys are arranged on the operator panel front: The eight vertical and horizontal softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The "Menu back" key switches back to the higher-level horizontal menu. 44 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3.3 Interfaces The "Menu forward" key advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The "Menu select" key calls the main menu to select the operating area. The "Machine area" key selects the "Machine" operating area. The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function <Shift> F9 F9 <Shift> F10 F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 3.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 3.3 Interfaces Front USB 1.1 Full Speed (socket, type A) for connecting an external keyboard, mouse and USB flash drive (see Image 3-1 View of the OP 010S operator panel front (Page 44)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 45 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3.4 Mounting Rear Two flat ribbon cables for connecting the PCU/TCU: I/O USB cable K1 : All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) Display cable K2 Image 3-2 Connections on rear of housing Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". 3.4 Mounting 3.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 3-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) 285 304 Mounting depth T3 + clearance (mm) with PCU 50.5 120 + 10 With TCU x0.2 69 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010S, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also enables the IP65 degree of protection (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). 46 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3.4 Mounting ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s Image 3-3 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 6HDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 47 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3.4 Mounting 7s Clearance for cables and ventilation M4x8 housing screws for attaching the PCU M3x8 housing screws for attaching the PCU/TCU Image 3-4 Attaching the PCU to the OP010S operator panel front Note The 100 mm clearance above and below the PCU is not necessary when assembled with a TCU as a TCU does not have any fan in its housing. 3.4.2 Mounting on the mounting wall When you are using a combination of OP 010S and PCU, it is advisable to install the OP 010S in the assembly panel first and then mount the PCU on the OP 010S. NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounted components (e.g. PCU). 48 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3.5 Technical data Procedure 1. Insert the OP 010S in the panel cutout from the front. 2. Use six tension jacks to secure it in the panel cutout from the rear (see Image 3-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front (Page 47)). 3. Tighten the setscrews (tightening torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 3.4.3 Assembling an OP 010S and a PCU Procedure 1. Position the PCU approximately at right angles to the OP. 2. Insert cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP into the corresponding counterpieces behind the opening in the PCU housing. Ensure that the connectors snap in and that the locks are closed. 3. Fold the PCU onto the OP. 4. Using the four M3 and four M4 screws supplied, attach the PCU to the side of the OP (tightening torques: M3 0.8 Nm; M4 1.8 Nm). The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Image 3-4 Attaching the PCU to the OP010S operator panel front (Page 48)). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and in "General information and networking", Section: "Application planning", Section: "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". Note The OP 010S and TCU assembly is similar to that for a PCU. 3.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side IP54 Rear side IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data (without PCU) Power supply (via K1 and K2) Voltage Current (typ./max.) Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Display Backlight inverter Logic / USB (with / without load) 5 V +/- 5% approx. 420/600 mA 12 V +/- 10% 5.2 V +/-2% approx. 900/1050 mA approx. 350/1000 mA 49 Operator panel front: OP 010S 3.6 Spare parts Power consumption Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 330 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Depth: 45 mm approx. 5.5 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Display Size / resolution 10.4" TFT / 640 x 480 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 3.6 Spare parts 3.6.1 Overview Spare part 3.6.2 Article number Remark Caps for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 Replacement NOTICE Risk of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. 50 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.1 4 Description The SINUMERIK OP 010C operator panel front and 10.4" TFT color display with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features a 65-key mechanical keyboard with 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys and 8 vertical softkeys. The 6 hotkeys are designed with replaceable key covers for machine-specific adaptation. The key covers can be freely inscribed using a laser. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to the OP 010C operator panel front Article number 6FC5203-0AF01-0AA0 Features 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Limited mounting depth 10.4" TFT flat screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels Mechanical short-stroke keys with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, control and hotkey key pad Softkeys: - 1 horizontal row of 8 keys with softkey functions - 1 vertical row of 8 keys with softkey functions Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface Degree of protection IP 54 Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 51 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.2 Operating and display elements 4.2 Operating and display elements 4.2.1 View Status LED: POWER Status LED: TEMP Lit LEDs indicate increased wear. Vertical softkeys Alphabetic key group Numeric key group Cursor key group Control key group Front USB interface Hotkey group Menu forward key Menu select key Horizontal softkeys Machine area button Menu back key Image 4-1 52 View of operator panel front OP 010C Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.2 Operating and display elements 4.2.2 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are installed on the OP 010C operator panel front: The alphabetic block contains the letters A - Z and the space character. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "-" and ".". The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas. The softkeys call up functions that are available on the screen via a menu bar. The "Menu back" key switches back to the higher-level horizontal menu. The "Menu forward" key advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The "Menu select" key calls the main menu to select the operating area. The "Machine area" key selects the "Machine" operating area. Switching between upper and lower case To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the key combination Ctrl + Shift Upper case is always activated as standard. Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key 53 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.2 Operating and display elements Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 4.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 54 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.3 Interfaces 4.3 Interfaces This operator panel front has the following interfaces: Front USB 1.1 Full Speed (type A) for connecting an external keyboard, mouse and USB flash drive (see Fig. "View of operator panel front" in Section: "Control and display elements" "View"). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 55 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.3 Interfaces Rear Two flat ribbon cables for connecting the PCU: - I/O USB cable K1 all signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Direct key interface X11 (under the cover plate) Interface X12 - reserved (under the cover plate) 3&8 23& I/O USB cable K1 Display cable K2 Retainer for direct control key module connection Direct key interface X11 Interface X12 (reserved) Image 4-2 Connections on rear of housing Connections to PCU Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". 56 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.4 Mounting 4.4 Mounting 4.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 4-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 290 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010C, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. s 5] 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s 6HDOLQJDUHD ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Image 4-3 Dimension drawing for mounting the OP010C operator panel front Table 4-2 Dimensions to be observed when installing Mounting depth T3 + clear ance (mm) Opening depth T5 (mm) Protrusion P (mm) PCU 50.5 101 + 10 377 39 TCU x0.2 50 + 10 350 -12 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 57 Operator panel front: OP 010C 6SDFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ 7s 3&8VZLYHOHGWKURXJKr 4.4 Mounting 7 3&8LQILQDOSRVLWLRQ s s Image 4-4 4.4.2 s Dimension sheet for mounting the OP 010C with PCU Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU When combining an OP 010C and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installing them in the assembly panel. Procedure To do this, proceed as described in the section: "OP 012", section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU." 58 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.5 Technical data 4.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Figure: "Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front", Section: "OP 012", Section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU"). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and in "General information and networking", Section: "Application planning", Section: "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounted components (e.g. PCU). Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Image 4-3 Dimension drawing for mounting the OP010C operator panel front (Page 57)). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 4.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side IP54 Rear side IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply (via K1 and K2) Voltage Current (typ./max.) Display Backlight inverter Logic / USB (with / without load) 5 V +/- 5% approx. 280/380 mA Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 5.2 V +/- 2% approx. 750/1000 mA approx. 350/1000 mA Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Height: 310 mm Depth: 30 mm Approx. 5 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Display Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 59 Operator panel front: OP 010C 4.6 Spare parts Size / resolution 10.4" TFT / 640 x 480 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 4.6 Spare parts 4.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 010C front plate as an individual part. The components available as spare parts are combined in an overview. Image 4-5 Front plate of OP 010C Spare part (1) 60 Article number Remark Caps for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Key cover (for labeling) 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0 Set with 90 ergo-gray items 20 red items 20 yellow items 20 green items 20 medium gray items Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.1 5 Description The SINUMERIK OP 012 operator panel front and 12.1" TFT color display with a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) features a 59-key membrane keypad as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. It is fixed from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery scope. Validity The description below applies to the OP 012 operator panel front. Order number 6FC5203-0AF02-0AA1 Features 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Limited mounting depth 12.1" TFT flat screen (color) with SVGA resolution 800 x 600 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Soft keys/direct keys: - 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key functions - Direct keys via direct key / handwheel module (optional), machine control panel, TCU or directly connectable to the I/Os Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface Degree of protection IP65 Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 61 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.2 Operator control and display elements 5.2 Operator control and display elements 5.2.1 View (1) Status LED: POWER (2) Status LED: TEMP Lit LEDs indicate increased wear. (3) Alphabetic key group (4) Numeric key group (5) Softkeys and direct keys (6) Cursor key group (7) Control key group (8) Front USB interface (9) Mouse (10) Menu select key (11) Menu forward key (12) Softkeys (13) Machine area key (14) Menu back key Image 5-1 62 Front view of operator panel front OP 012 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.2 Operator control and display elements 5.2.2 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic block contains the letters A - Z and the space character. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "-", "/", "=", "+" and ".". The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the center actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two keys for the left and right mouse key. The softkeys call up functions that are available on the screen via a menu bar. The "Menu back" key switches back to the higher-level horizontal menu. The "Menu forward" key advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The "Menu select" key calls the main menu to select the operating area. The "Machine area" key selects the "Machine" operating area. Switching between upper and lower case To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the key combination Ctrl + Shift Upper case is always activated as standard. Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown in the overview along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key 63 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.3 Interfaces Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 5.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, the screen must be switched dark (screensaver) in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "freezing" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: IM9 SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual 5.3 Interfaces The operator panel front has the following interfaces: 64 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.3 Interfaces Front side USB 1.1 (type A) for connecting an external keyboard, mouse and USB FlashDrive (see Image 5-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 012 (Page 62)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear side Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below): - I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable): All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Direct key interface X11 (under the cover plate); signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct keys Interface X12 - reserved (under the cover plate) Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 65 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.4 Installation 3&8 23 (1) I/O USB cable K1 (2) PCU main board (3) Cable clamp for connecting the direct key module (4) Keyboard controller (5) Direct key interface X11 (6) Interface X12 (reserved) (7) Connection X14 for backlight (8) Connection X1 for I/O USB cable K1 (9) Display cable K2 Image 5-2 Connections on rear of housing: Connections to the PCU Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". See also View (Page 62) 5.4 Installation 5.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 5-1 66 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 290 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.4 Installation Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 012, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also enables the IP65 degree of protection (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). s 6HDOLQJDUHD s Image 5-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 012 operator panel front Table 5-2 Dimensions to be observed when installing 5] 3UHVVXUH SRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQ MDFNV 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s s s s s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Mounting depth T3 + clear ance (mm) Opening depth T5 (mm) PCU 50.3 / 50.5 101 + 10 377 39 TCU x0.2 50 + 10 350 -12 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Protrusion P (mm) 67 Operator panel front: OP 012 &OHDUDQFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ 7s 3&8VZLYHOHGRXWE\r 5.4 Installation 7s 3&8LQWKHHQGSRVLWLRQ s s Image 5-4 5.4.2 s Dimension sheet for attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU When combining an OP 012 and PCU and possibly a direct key module, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel. When combining with a PCU 50.3, you must then undo the transport lock for the hard-drive, otherwise the system will not boot. 68 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.4 Installation Requirement If this has not already been done, the PCU must now be bolted to the mounting brackets prior to assembly (see the associated "PCU 50.5" manual in the Section "Installation") :LGWK 'LVSOD\ VXSSRUWSODWH &RYHUSODWHIRU &RQQHFWLRQV .H\ERDUGFRQWUROOHU &DEOH FODPS 'LVSOD\ FDEOH. ,286% FDEOH. 0RXQWLQJVORWVIRU3&8OXJV 6OLWIRUVRIWNH\ODEHOLQJVWULSV Image 5-5 +HLJKW WRS &DEOHVKRZQIROGHGWRJHWKHU &DVLQJVFUHZV Rear side of the OP 012 Procedure 1. Place the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft (to avoid scratches) surface. - To install the direct control key module (see the associated manual: "Direct key module"). - Install or replace the softkey labeling strips (see Softkey labeling (Page 72)) 2. Remove the PCU's interface cover. 3. Place the PCU with the lugs of the bolted-on mounting brackets into the mounting slots on the OP 012 as shown by the white arrows in diagram (A). To make it easier to insert the lugs, it can be helpful to reduce the 90 angle between the PCU and OP 012 by tilting the PCU as shown by the black arrow in the picture. 4. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 012 into the plug connectors behind the opening in the PCU casing (see gray arrows in diagram (A)]. Ensure that the plug connectors lock in audibly and that the locking elements [see arrows in the diagram: (B)] are closed. 5. Swivel the PCU into its final position and secure it with knurled screws, tightening torque of 1.8 Nm [see diagram: (C)]. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 69 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.4 Installation 3&8 23 (1) I/O / USB cable K1 (2) Display cable K2 Image 5-6 (A) Assembling PCU and OP 012 3&8 (1) I/O / USB cable K1 (2) Display cable K2 Image 5-7 70 (B) Correct connection of IO/USB and display cables to the PCU Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.4 Installation 3& 8 2 3 (1) Knurled screw Image 5-8 (C) OP 012 and PCU after assembly Note The OP 010 and TCU assembly is similar to that for a PCU. 5.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU/TCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Image 5-4 Dimension sheet for attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front (Page 68)). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and in "General information and networking", Section: "Application planning", Section: "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounted components (e.g. PCU). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 71 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.5 Technical data Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Image 5-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 012 operator panel frontOP 012Dimension sheet (Page 67)). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 5.4.4 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the vertical softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. DIN A4 films are available for making the strips (for the article number, see Chapter Overview (Page 73)). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Procedure 1. Letter the mat side of the film using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Remove the PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from the operator panel front. 4. Insert the strips into the slots provided on the rear of the operator panel front. 5. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. If the operator panel front and PCU are dismantled, omit steps 3 and 5. 5.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply (via K1 and K2) 72 Display Backlight inverter Logic / USB (with / without load) Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.6 Spare parts Voltage Current (typ./max.) 5 V +/- 5% 12 V +/- 10% 5.2 V +/- 2% approx. 280 / 380 mA approx. 750 / 1000 mA approx. 350 / 1200 mA Power consumption Typical, approx. 16 W Maximum approx. 21 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Depth: 30 mm Approx. 5 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Display Size / resolution 12.1" TFT / 800 x 600 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is provided in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 5.6 Spare parts 5.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 012 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components provided with an order number are available as individual spare parts. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 73 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.6 Spare parts Image 5-9 Individual parts for the OP012 operator panel front Display with backlighting and backlight inverter Spare part Direct key module Order number Remark 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 Display support Keyboard controller Spare part Order number Remark Caps for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 Operator panel front 6FC5248-0AF02-0AA0 Without display, without mouse, without key board controller, without direct control key mod ule Inscribable slide-in labels*) (DIN A4 films) 6FC5248-0AF08-0AA0 Set of 3 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 *) The dimensions for production of slide-in film labels for softkey labeling can be seen in the following diagram. 74 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.6 Spare parts 7HLO 5 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 6OLGHLQODEHOV &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Image 5-10 5.6.2 Dimensions for DIN A4 film Replacement NOTICE Risk of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Film labels The procedure for replacement is described in Section: "Softkey labels". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 75 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.6 Spare parts Operator panel front/mouse When replacing the operator panel front, the previous mouse, LCD unit and keyboard controller can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and reassembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. This description is therefore valid for both the operator panel front and the mouse. Note We recommend reusing the keypad controller to prevent any loss of the control parameters that have been programmed in. Procedure 1. Put the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 housing screws (see Figure: "OP 012", Section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU"). 2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate. 3. Remove connector X14 for the backlight and the IO-USB cable K1 from the keyboard controller (see following Figure). 4. Lift off the display support and the display. In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USB interface become visible. 5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface. 6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10 (Procedure: see Note). 7. Remove the fastening screws from the mouse and keyboard controller. 76 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.6 Spare parts 8. Lift USB interface, mouse and keyboard controller off the front plate. The interconnections may remain plugged. 9. Install the components into the new operator front panel in reverse order (procedure: see Note). Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting", Section: "Handling membrane connectors". When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to Section: "Technical data"). (1) Mouse (2) USB interface (3) Keyboard controller (4) Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1 (5) Direct key connection X11 (6) Membrane connector for connecting the keyboard of the operator panel front (7) Connection X12 (reserved) (8) Connection X14 for backlight (9) Connection X4 for mouse Image 5-11 Replacement of operator panel front OP 012 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 77 Operator panel front: OP 012 5.6 Spare parts 78 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.1 6 Description The SINUMERIK OP 015 operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) features 8 +4 horizontal and 8 vertical membrane softkeys. The KB 483C full CNC keyboard can be used as an input keyboard. It is fixed from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery scope. Validity The description below applies to the OP 015 operator panel front. Article number 6FC5203-0AF03-0AA0 Features 19" mounting format, 7 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Limited mounting depth 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Membrane keyboard: - 8 + 4 horizontal softkeys - 8 vertical softkeys Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Front USB interface Degree of protection: IP65 Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 79 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.2 Operating and display elements 6.2 Operating and display elements 6.2.1 View Status LED: POWER Status LED: TEMP Lit LEDs indicate increased wear. Softkeys Menu select key Menu forward key Softkeys Menu back key Machine area button Front USB interface Image 6-1 6.2.2 View of operator panel front OP 015 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys are arranged on the operator panel front: The eight vertical and horizontal softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The "Menu back" key switches back to the higher-level horizontal menu. 80 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.3 Interfaces The "Menu forward" key advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The "Menu select" key calls the main menu to select the operating area. The "Machine area" key selects the "Machine" operating area. The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function <Shift> F9 F9 <Shift> F10 F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 6.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 6.3 Interfaces Front USB 1.1 Full Speed (type A) for connecting an external keyboard, mouse and USB flash drive (see Image 6-1 View of operator panel front OP 015 (Page 80)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 81 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.4 Mounting Rear Two flat ribbon cables for connecting the PCU: - I/O USB cable K1 : All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 3&8 23 Image 6-2 Connections on rear of housing Connections to the PCU Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". 6.4 Mounting 6.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 6-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 290 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also enables the IP65 degree of protection (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). 82 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.4 Mounting s 5] 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s 6HDOLQJDUHD ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Image 6-3 Dimension drawing for mounting the OP015 operator panel front Table 6-2 Dimensions to be observed when installing Mounting depth T3 + clear ance (mm) Opening depth T5 (mm) Protrusion P (mm) PCU 50.5 125 + 10 402 21 TCU x0.2 75 + 10 376 -30 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 83 Operator panel front: OP 015 6SDFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ 7s 3&8VZLYHOHGWKURXJKr 6.4 Mounting 7s 3&8LQILQDOSRVLWLRQ s s Image 6-4 6.4.2 s Dimension drawing for attaching the PCU to the OP015 operator panel front Assembling an OP 015 and a PCU When combining an OP 015 and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel. Procedure To do this, proceed as described in Section: "OP 012", Section: "Assembling the OP 012 and PCU." 84 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.5 Technical data 6.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU/TCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Image 6-4 Dimension drawing for attaching the PCU to the OP015 operator panel front (Page 84)). For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and in "General information and networking", Section: "Application planning", Section: "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounted components (e.g. PCU). Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Image 6-3 Dimension drawing for mounting the OP015 operator panel front (Page 83)). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 6.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply (via K1 and K2) Voltage Current (typ./max.) Display Backlight inverter Logic / USB (with / without load) 5 V +/- 5% approx. 420/600 mA Power consumption 12 V +/- 10% 5.2 V +/- 2% approx. 900/1050 mA approx. 350/1000 mA Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 24 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Height: 310 mm Depth: 52 mm approx. 7 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Display Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 85 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.6 Spare parts Size / resolution 15" TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 40,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 6.6 Spare parts 6.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 015 operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. The components listed with an article number are available as spare parts. Image 6-5 86 Individual parts for the OP 015 operator panel front Spare part Article number Remark 6FC5248-0AF03-0AA0 Without LCD unit, USB port and keyboard control ler Operator panel front Background lighting with backlight inverter Display support with keyboard controller (rear) LCD unit Caps for the USB port 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.6 Spare parts 6.6.2 Replacement NOTICE Risk of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Operator panel front When changing the operator panel front, the existing USB interface and the display support (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused. They are therefore disassembled and reassembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend reusing the keypad controller to prevent any loss of the control parameters that have been programmed in. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 87 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.6 Spare parts Procedure 1. Put the OP 015 and the replacement operator panel front face down on a flat, soft surface. 2. Remove the housing screws and the housing cover plate. M3 housing screws M4 housing screws Image 6-6 Rear of the OP 015 The display support with the keyboard controller is visible underneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USB interface. 88 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.6 Spare parts 3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from sockets X7, X8 and X10. I/O USB cable K1 Connection X11 (reserved) Membrane lines from the operator panel front keyboard X7 X8 X10 Connection X12 (reserved) Display cable K2 USB membrane line Connection X14 for display and backlight Connection X4 (reserved) Image 6-7 Keyboard controller Note Descriptions of how to disconnect and connect the membrane connector can be found in "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting", Section: "Handling membrane connectors". When tightening the screws, observe the torques (see Technical data (Page 85)). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 89 Operator panel front: OP 015 6.6 Spare parts 4. Remove the membrane connector of the USB connecting cable. Display support USB membrane cable (refer to the diagram above) USB interface Fastening screw M4 Image 6-8 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side 5. Remove the screws of the display support and lift it off. 6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement operator panel front. 7. Place the display support on the replacement operator panel front. 8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order. 90 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.1 7 Description The SINUMERIK OP 015A operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) features a 62-key membrane keyboard with 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integral mouse. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to the OP 015A operator panel front Article number 6FC5203-0AF05-0AB0 Features 19" mounting format, 8 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm Limited mounting depth 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Softkeys / direct keys: - 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key functions - Direct keys connectable via direct key / handwheel connection module or MCP interface PN (optional), machine control panel, TCU or directly to the I/Os Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature USB front interface (USB 1.1 Full Speed) Degree of protection IP65 (front) Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 91 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.2 Operating and display elements 7.2 Operating and display elements 7.2.1 View Status LED POWER Status LED TEMP: Lit LEDs indicate increased wear. Softkeys and direct keys Alphabetic key group Numeric key group Cursor key group Control key group Mouse Menu forward key Menu select key Softkeys Machine area button Menu back key Front USB interface Image 7-1 92 Front view of the OP 015A operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.2 Operating and display elements 7.2.2 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic block contains the letters A - Z and the space character. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "-", "/", "=", "+" and ".". The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the center actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two keys for the left and right mouse key. The softkeys call up functions that are available on the screen via a menu bar. The menu select key displays the area menu. The menu forward key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The menu back key returns to the higher-level menu, one window is closed. Switching between upper and lower case To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the key combination Ctrl + Shift Upper case is always activated as standard. Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key 93 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.3 Interfaces Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 7.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 7.3 Interfaces The OP 015 operator panel front has the following interfaces: 94 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.3 Interfaces Front USB 1.1 Full Speed (type A) for connecting an external keyboard, mouse and USB flash drive (see Image 7-1 Front view of the OP 015A operator panel front (Page 92)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear Two cables for connecting the PCU: - I/O USB cable K1 : All signals that are used for the display interface and the connection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Below the interface cover : Direct key interface X11 : Signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct keys Interface X12 (reserved) Image 7-2 OP015A - Connections on rear of housing: Connections to the PCU Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 95 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.4 Mounting 7.4 Mounting 7.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 7-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 335 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015A, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also enables the IP65 degree of protection (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV Image 7-3 7.4.2 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015A operator panel front Assembling an OP 015A and a PCU If you want to combine the OP 015A with a PCU and possibly a direct key module (see Section: "Direct key module"), assemble the components before installing them on the mounting wall. 96 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.4 Mounting Requirement The PCU must now be bolted to the mounting brackets prior to assembly (if this has not already been done), see Assembly of PCU and operator panel front (standard mounting) (Page 234)) Mounting slots for PCU lugs Slots for inserting softkey labeling strips Display cable K2 I/O / USB cable K1 Cover plate for keyboard controller connections Retaining screw for the cover plate Image 7-4 OP 015A rear side Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 97 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Place the front of the OP 015A on a soft, horizontal surface to avoid damaging the surface of the operator panel front. 2. Remove the interface cover of the PCU. 3. Position the PCU so that the mounting lugs engage in the OP 015A. 3&8 4. Connect cable connectors K1 and K2 to the interfaces of the PCU. 5. Make sure that you hear the connectors lock in and that the locks are closed (see marked rings) 6. Swivel the PCU in the direction of the OP 015A and make sure that the cables fold correctly into place. 98 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.4 Mounting 7. Secure the PCU using two knurled screws at each end of the two mounting angles (torque: 1.8 Nm). Note The OP 010 and TCU assembly is similar to that for a PCU. 7.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU/TCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation. For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and in "General information and networking", Section: "Application planning", Section: "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounted components (e.g. PCU). Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Image 7-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015A operator panel front (Page 96)). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the twelve tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.5 Nm). Table 7-2 Dimensions to be observed when installing Mounting depth T3 + clear ance (mm) Opening depth T5 (mm) Protrusion P (mm) PCU 50.5 127 + 10 402 32 TCU x0.2 76 + 10 376 -19 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 99 Operator panel front: OP 015A &OHDUDQFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ 7s 3&8VZLYHOHGRXWE\r 7.4 Mounting 7s 3&8LQWKHHQGSRVLWLRQ s s Image 7-5 7.4.4 s Attaching the PCU to the OP015A operator panel front Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already factory-installed. 100 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.5 Technical specifications DIN A4 films are available for preparing the vertical strips. You can find the article number in Section "Spare parts" "Overview". Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Procedure 1. Label the mat side of the film with a laser printer or another printer that allows "Film" to be set as a printable medium. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to figure: "OP 015A housing open" in section: "Spare parts" "Replacement". Note In order to facilitate insertion of the "Teil 1" strip when the PCU is mounted, it is recommended that you - unscrew the four retaining screws of the PCU and - swing the PCU up. Once you have inserted the strip, swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. 7.5 Technical specifications Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side: IP65 Rear side: IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply (via K1 and K2) Voltage Current (typ./max.) Display 4.9 V - 5.25 V approx. 420/700 mA Power consumption Backlight inverter Logic / USB 12 V +/- 5% 5.0 V - 5.2 V approx. 900/1100 mA approx. 350/1050 mA Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 25 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Weight Max. tightening torques: Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Height: 355 mm Depth: 53 mm Approx. 8.4 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm 101 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts Display Size / resolution 15" TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 7.6 Spare parts 7.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 015A operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. Image 7-6 Individual parts for the OP 015A operator panel front The components listed in the following table with an article number are available as spare parts. 102 Spare part Article number Remark Operator panel front A5E00405090 Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard controller Keyboard controller Background lighting with backlight inverter Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts Spare part Article number Remark LCD unit Display support USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 USB caps 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Slide-in strips that can be la beled 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 Set with 3 foils, DIN A4 The dimensions for creating slide-in labels from the foil for labeling the vertical softkeys can be seen in the following diagram. 3DUW 3DUW )LOP ',1$ &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Image 7-7 Dimensions for slide-in labels Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 103 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts 7.6.2 Replacement NOTICE Risk of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, mouse, and USB interface can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and reassembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend reusing the keypad controller to prevent any loss of the control parameters that have been programmed in. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1. Place the OP 015A on a soft, horizontal support. Remove the retaining screw (M3) from the cover plate and lift off the cover plate. 2. Release the 13 housing screws (M4). 3. Lift off the cover. 104 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts Screws (M4) for display support Slide-in labels (Teil 1) Display support Slide-in labels (Teil 2) Slide-in labels (Teil 3) Slide-in labels (Teil 4) USB interface Display cable K2 Ribbon cable keyboard controller / USB connection Retainer for the mouse / keyboard controller cable Interface for the mouse Cable plug for mouse / keyboard controller Backlight inverter cable I/O USB cable K1 Keyboard cable Image 7-8 OP 015A housing open Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 105 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts Backlight inverter cable 4. Remove the two cables to the backlight inverter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clips with a flat screwdriver and pull ing out the cables. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 5. Undo the connection between the keyboard controller and the mouse by carefully pushing the connector back with a screwdriver. 6. Remove the retainer for the cable between the keyboard controller and mouse. Connection of keyboard controller / USB interface 7. Disconnect the connection from the USB inter face to the keyboard controller by pulling back the terminal clamps to the left and right of the plug. 106 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts 8. Remove the plug of the USB cable from the keyboard controller. Keyboard cables 9. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables out of the holder. For detailed information about removal and in sertion of membrane connectors, see also "General information and networking", Section: "Connecting", Section: "Handling membrane connectors". Display supports Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 10. Remove the twelve screws from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the dis play support, refer to Figure: "OP 015A housing open". 107 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts 11. Insert the USB ribbon cable in the direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. 12. Lift off the display support. 13. Lay the display support down on its back to avoid damaging the display. USB board 14. Remove the USB interface by sliding up both retaining clamps and pulling out the board. Mouse board 108 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts 15. Loosen the four screws (M3) on the holder for the mouse board. Lift off the holder and the mouse board. Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective sheeting from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: NOTICE Damage to the screws Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see Technical specifications (Page 101)). 15. 14. Mouse board and bracket USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. Check the secured position of the USB cable behind the guide pins . 13. - 10. Display support Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 109 Operator panel front: OP 015A 7.6 Spare parts 13. Bend the keyboard cables back slightly before inserting the display support to prevent pinching and damage, which could render them inoperable. 11. 9. 8. - 7. 6. - 5. 4. 3. - 1. 110 Insert the USB ribbon cable in the op posite direction of the arrow through the opening and pull it out. Keyboard cables Connection of keyboard controller / USB interface 8. Ensure that the contact side of the USB plug faces upwards. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse Backlight inverter cable Cover Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 8 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.1 Description The SINUMERIK OP 015AT operator panel front with 15" TFT color display and 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) enables the spatially distributed installation of the operator panel front and the control. It features a membrane keyboard with 62 keys and 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integrated mouse. The OP 015AT operator panel front is linked to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as thin client in a dedicated subnet (via DHCP server on the PCU/NCU). The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes / access points (100 m). Mixed operation with several TCUs and one operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity This description applies to: Type Description OP 015AT As a thin client, operator panel front with membrane key board Article number 6FC5203-0AF05-1AB1 Features Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s 4 x USB (3 x rear, 1 x front) 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Softkeys / direct keys: - 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key functions Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm Degree of protection IP65 (front) Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 111 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2.1 View Status LED POWER Status LED TEMP: Lit LEDs indicate increased wear. Softkeys and direct keys Alphabetic key group Numeric key group Cursor key group Control key group Mouse Menu forward key Menu select key Softkeys Machine area key Menu back key Front USB interface Image 8-1 112 Front view of the OP 015AT operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2.2 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic block contains the letters A - Z and the space character. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "-", "/", "=", "+" and ".". The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the center actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two keys for the left and right mouse key. The softkeys call up functions that are available on the screen via a menu bar. The menu select key displays the area menu. The menu forward key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The menu back key returns to the higher-level menu, one window is closed. Switching between upper and lower case To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the key combination Ctrl + Shift Upper case is always activated as standard. Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key 113 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.2 Operator controls and indicators Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 8.2.3 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 114 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.3 Interfaces 8.3 Interfaces Overview The OP 015AT operator panel front has the following interfaces: Function Designation Type Ethernet interface X202 8-pin RJ45 socket Double USB interface X203 / X204 USB 2.0 Hi-Speed socket A USB interface X213 USB 2.0 Hi-Speed socket A 24 VDC power supply X206 3-pin terminal block Front USB interface - USB 1.1 Full Speed socket A Rear 3( 9 9 Teil 1 Slide-in labels for vertical softkeys (see Chpater Spare parts) X206 Power supply (with connector that can be screwed in place) Teil 2 Slide-in labels for vertical softkeys (see Chpater Spare parts) X202 Ethernet interface X203 / X 204 / X213 USB interfaces - Strain relief for connecting cables Teil 3 Slide-in labels for horizontal softkeys (for these, there is no foil as template) ; ; ; ; Teil 4 - Image 8-2 M5 grounding screw (for screw connection with cable lug) OP 015AT - Rear with interfaces Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 115 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.4 Installation Front USB 1.1 Full Speed for connecting an external keyboard, mouse or USB flash drive (see Image 8-1 Front view of the OP 015AT operator panel front (Page 112)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Pin assignment The pin assignment of the interfaces, see "General information and networking" "Connecting". Installation 8.4.1 Mounting 8.4 Image 8-3 116 OP 015AT with TCU (integrated) Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.4 Installation Table 8-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) Mounting depth + clearance (mm) 450 335 42 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 015AT, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also enables the IP65 degree of protection (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV Image 8-4 8.4.2 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015AT operator panel front Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the vertical labels, DIN A4 foils are available (see Chapter, "Spare parts" Overview (Page 119) ). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 117 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.5 Technical data Procedure 1. Letter the matt side of the foil using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the strips into the slots provided on the rear side of the operator front panel (see Image 8-2 OP 015AT - Rear with interfaces (Page 115)). 8.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side: IP65 Rear side: IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply 24 VDC Current consumption Typical, approx. 0.9 A Max. approx. 2.4 A Power consumption Typical, approx. 22 W Max. approx. 47.5 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Depth: 53 mm Approx. 7.6 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm M5 grounding screw: 3 Nm Display Size / resolution 15" TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight Typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 118 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.6 Replacement parts 8.6 Replacement parts 8.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the OP 015AT operator panel front disassembled into its individual parts. Image 8-5 Individual parts for the OP 015AT operator panel front The components listed in the following table with an article number are available as spare parts. Spare part Article number Remark Operator panel front A5E00405090 Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard con troller Keyboard controller Background lighting with backlight inverter LCD unit Display support Mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 USB caps 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Slide-in strips that can be labeled 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 Set with 3 foils, DIN A4 The dimensions for creating slide-in labels from the foil for labeling the vertical softkeys can be seen in the following diagram. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 119 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.6 Replacement parts 3DUW 3DUW )LOP ',1$ &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Image 8-6 8.6.2 Dimensions for slide-in labels Replacement NOTICE Damage to sensitive components due to static electricity Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. 120 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.6 Replacement parts Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, mouse, and USB interface can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend reusing the keypad controller to prevent any loss of the control parameters that have been programmed in. Expansion of the individual parts of the operator panel front 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Place the OP 015AT on a soft horizontal surface. Loosen the 13 housing screws (M4) using a Torx screwdriver T25 . 2. Remove the cover. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 121 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.6 Replacement parts Screws (M4) for display support Display support USB interface Ribbon cable for keyboard controller / USB interface Display cable Cable, mouse / keyboard controller Connector, mouse interface Backlight inverter cable I/O USB cable Direct key cable Keyboard cables Keyboard controller Image 8-7 122 OP 015AT housing opened Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.6 Replacement parts Cables, backlight inverter 3. Remove the two cables to the backlight in verter by lifting the clips with a flat screwdriver and withdrawing the cables. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 4. Undo the connection between the keyboard controller and the mouse by carefully pushing the connector back with a screwdriver. USB board 5. Release the connection to the keyboard con troller by releasing both retaining clamps next to the USB board and withdrawing them. Do not remove the cable from the board! Keyboard cables 6. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables out of the holder. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 123 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.6 Replacement parts For detailed information about removal and insertion of membrane connectors, see "Gen eral information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting", Section: "Handling membrane connectors". Display support 7. Remove the 12 screws from the display support. For the arrangement of the screws on the display support, refer to Figure: "OP 015AT housing opened". 8. Lift off the display support. 9. Lay the display support down on its back to avoid damaging the display. 124 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.6 Replacement parts Mouse board 10. Loosen the 4 screws (M3) at the support for the mouse board using a Torx screwdriver T10. Lift off both the holder and the mouse board. Installing the individual parts of the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective foil from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: NOTICE Damage to the screws Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see Technical data (Page 118)). 2.1 Mouse board and bracket 2.2 Display support Slightly bend the keyboard cables to the rear before installing the display carrier. Otherwise, they could jam or be damaged and therefore no longer function. 2.3 USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. 2.4 Keyboard cables 2.5 Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 2.6 Cables, backlight inverter 2.7 Cover Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 125 Operator panel front: OP 015AT 8.6 Replacement parts 126 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.1 9 Description The SINUMERIK TP 015A touch operator panel front and 15" TFT color display with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) and touch screen features a 62-key membrane keyboard as well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integrated mouse. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description below applies to the TP 015A operator panel front. Article number 6FC5203-0AF08-0AB2 Features 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Touch screen (analog resistive, 5-wire) Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Softkeys / direct keys: - 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key function - Direct keys connectable via direct key / handwheel connection module or MCP interface PN (optional), machine control panel, TCU or directly to the I/Os Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature USB front interface (USB 1.1 Full Speed) Degree of protection IP65 (front) Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Can be combined with PCU, TCU Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 127 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.2 Operating and display elements 9.2 Operating and display elements 9.2.1 View Status LED POWER Status LED TEMP: Lit LEDs indicate increased wear. Softkeys and direct keys Alphabetic key group Numeric key group Cursor key group Control key group Mouse Menu forward key Menu select key Softkeys Machine area button Menu back key Front USB interface Image 9-1 128 Front view, TP 015A operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.2 Operating and display elements 9.2.2 Operation The operator panel front is operated by Using the touch screen to select the application-specific functions, e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons. Softkeys Keys Mouse NOTICE Damage to the operator elements Do not touch the operating elements with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives. 9.2.3 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic block contains the letters A - Z and the space character. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "-", "/", "=", "+" and ".". The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises a touchpad, for finger operation, as well as for cursor navigation and also for the left and right mouse buttons. The softkeys call up functions that are available on the screen via a menu bar. The "Menu back" key switches back to the higher-level horizontal menu. The "Menu forward" key advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The "Menu select" key calls the main menu to select the operating area. The "Machine area" key selects the "Machine" operating area. Switching between upper and lower case To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the key combination Ctrl + Shift Upper case is always activated as standard. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 129 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.2 Operating and display elements Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown in the overview along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 130 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.3 interfaces 9.2.4 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 9.3 interfaces Front USB 1.1 Full Speed (type A) for connecting an external keyboard, mouse and USB flash drive (see Image 9-1 Front view, TP 015A operator panel front (Page 128)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Rear Two cables for connecting the PCU: - I/O-USB cable K1 : all signals, which in addition to the display interface, are required to connect operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - Display cable K2 Below the interface cover : Direct key interface X11 : Signals from the 16 "vertical softkey" direct keys Interface X12 (reserved) Image 9-2 TP 015A - connections at the rear of the enclosure: Connections to the PCU Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 131 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.4 Mounting Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connection". 9.4 Mounting 9.4.1 Preparation for mounting Table 9-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 335 Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 015A, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also enables the IP65 degree of protection (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV Image 9-3 132 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for mounting the TP 015A operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.4 Mounting 9.4.2 Assembling TP 015A and PCU The assembly functions in the same way as described in Section Assembling an OP 015A and a PCU (Page 96). 9.4.3 Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU/TCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation. For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU sections and in "General information and networking", Section: "Application planning", Section: "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounted components (e.g. PCU). Procedure 1. Insert the assembled components (operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Image 9-3 Dimension sheet for mounting the TP 015A operator panel front (Page 132)). 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the twelve tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.5 Nm). Table 9-2 Dimensions to be observed when installing Mounting depth T3 + clear ance (mm) Opening depth T5 (mm) PCU 50.5 127 + 10 402 32 TCU x0.2 76 + 10 376 -19 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Protrusion P (mm) 133 Operator panel front: TP 015A &OHDUDQFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ 7s 3&8VZLYHOHGRXWE\r 9.4 Mounting 7s 3&8LQWKHHQGSRVLWLRQ s s Image 9-4 9.4.4 s Attaching the PCU to the TP 015A operator panel front Touchscreen calibration Whenever a new operator panel front is connected, a screen calibration must be performed. Procedure For a description of the calibration, refer to Chapter Touchscreen calibration (Page 249). 134 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.5 Technical specifications 9.4.5 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already factory-installed. DIN A4 films are available for preparing the vertical strips. You can find the article number in Section "Spare parts" "Overview". Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Procedure 1. Label the mat side of the film with a laser printer or another printer that allows "Film" to be set as a printable medium. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operator panel front (refer to figure: "TP 015A housing open" in section: "Spare parts" "Replacement". Note In order to facilitate insertion of the "Teil 1" strip when the PCU is mounted, it is recommended that you - unscrew the four retaining screws of the PCU and - swing the PCU up. Once you have inserted the strip, swing the PCU back to the operator panel and secure by tightening the screws. 9.5 Technical specifications Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side: IP65 Rear side: IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply (via K1 and K2) Voltage Current (typ./max.) Power consumption Display 4.9 V - 5.25 V approx. 420/700 mA Backlight inverter Logic / USB 12 V +/- 5% 5.0 V - 5.2 V approx. 900/1100 mA approx. 350/1050 mA Typical, approx. 15 W Maximum approx. 25 W Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 135 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Weight Depth: 53 mm Approx. 8.4 kg Max. tightening torques: Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm Display Size / resolution 15" TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 9.6 Spare parts 9.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the TP 015A operator panel front dismantled into its individual parts. Image 9-5 136 Individual parts for the TP 015A operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts The components listed in the following table with an article number are available as spare parts. Spare part Article number Remark Operator panel front A5E01136461 Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard con troller Keyboard controller Background lighting with backlight inverter LCD unit Display support USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 USB caps 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Slide-in strips that can be labeled 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 Set with 3 foils, DIN A4 The dimensions for creating slide-in labels from the foil for labeling the vertical softkeys can be seen in the following diagram. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 137 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts 3DUW 3DUW )LOP ',1$ &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Image 9-6 9.6.2 Dimensions for slide-in labels Replacement NOTICE Risk of damage to sensitive components due to static electricity Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. 138 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, touch controller, mouse and USB interface can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and reassembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend reusing the keypad controller to prevent any loss of the control parameters that have been programmed in. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1. Place the TP 015A on a soft, horizontal sup port. Remove the retaining screw (M3) from the cover plate and lift off the cover plate. 2. Release the 13 housing screws (M4). 3. Lift off the cover. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 139 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts Screws (M4) for display support Slide-in labels (Teil 1) Display support Slide-in labels (Teil 2) Retainer for the cable of the touch controller Touch controller Slide-in labels (Teil 4) Slide-in labels (Teil 3) USB interface Display cable K2 Ribbon cable keyboard controller / USB connection Retainer for the mouse / keyboard controller cable Interface for the mouse Cable plug for mouse / keyboard controller Backlight inverter cable I/O USB cable K1 Keyboard cables Image 9-7 140 TP 015A housing opened Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts Touch controller 4. Remove the three M3 screws that are holding the touch controller to the display sup port. Do this with a TX10 screwdriver. 5. Release the two plug connectors (left/right) from the touch controller. Left: Hold the connector at the upper and low er detent lugs, and carefully withdraw it up wards. Right: Slight depress the cable clamp down wards and withdraw it towards the rear. 6. Release the retainer of the touch screen / touch controller cable using a flat screwdriver. Backlight inverter cable 7. Remove the two cables to the backlight inver ter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clamps with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 141 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 8. Undo the connection between the keyboard controller and the mouse by carefully pushing the connector back with a screwdriver. 9. Remove the retainer for the cable between the keyboard controller and mouse. Connection of keyboard controller / USB interface 10. Release the connection between the USB in terface and keyboard controller. Use a screw driver to push up the black terminal clamp on the USB interface and then pull the cable out of the holder. Keyboard cables 142 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts 11. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables out of the holder. For detailed information about removal and insertion of membrane connectors, see also "General information and networking", Sec tion: "Connecting", Section: "Handling mem brane connectors". Display support 12. Remove the twelve screws from the dis play support. For the arrangement of the screws on the dis play support, refer to Figure: "TP 015A hous ing opened". 13. Lift off the display support. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 143 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts 14. Lay the display support down on its back to avoid damaging the display. USB board 15. Remove the USB board (see diagram: "TP 015AT housing open") by releasing the 2 screws. Mouse board 16. Loosen the four screws (M3) on the holder for the mouse board. Lift off the holder and the mouse board. Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation locks (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective foil from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: 144 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts NOTICE Damage to the screws Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see Technical specifications (Page 135)). 16. Mouse board and holder 15. USB board 14. - 12. Display support 14. Bend the keyboard cables back slightly before inserting the display support to prevent pinching and damage, which could render them inoperable. 11. 10. Keyboard cables Connection of keyboard controller / USB interface Ensure that the contact side of the USB plug faces outwards. 9. - 8. 7. 6. - 4. 3. - 1. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse Backlight inverter cable Touch controller Cover Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 145 Operator panel front: TP 015A 9.6 Spare parts 146 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 10 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.1 Description The SINUMERIK TP 015AT operator panel front with 15" TFT color display and 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) and touch screen enable the spatially distributed installation of the operator panel front and the control. It features a membrane keyboard with 62 keys and 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys and an integrated mouse. The TP 015AT operator panel front is linked to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as thin client in a dedicated subnet (via DHCP server on the PCU/NCU). The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes / access points (100 m). Mixed operation with several TCUs and one operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity This description applies to: Type Description Article number TP 015AT Operator panel front as thin client, with touch screen and membrane keyboard 6FC5203-0AF08-1AB3 Features Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s 4 x USB (3 x rear, 1 x front) 15" TFT flat screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Membrane keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor, and control keypad Softkeys / direct keys: - 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal rows of keys with softkey function - 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct key functions Shift key for switchover to the second key level (not for switching over the letters, since they are uppercase only) Integrated mouse Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 335 mm Degree of protection IP65 (front) Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 147 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.2 Operator controls and indicators 10.2 Operator controls and indicators 10.2.1 View Status LED: POWER Status LED: TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear) Softkeys and direct keys Alphabetic key group Numeric key group Cursor key group Control key group Mouse Menu forward key Menu select key Softkeys Machine area key Menu back key Front USB interface Image 10-1 148 Front view of the TP 015AT operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.2 Operator controls and indicators 10.2.2 Operation The operator panel front is operated by using the touch screen to select the application-specific functions, e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons. Softkeys Keys Mouse NOTICE Damage to the operator controls Do not touch the operating elements with pointed or hard objects. This may considerably reduce their service lives. 10.2.3 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic block contains the letters A - Z and the space character. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "-", "/", "=", "+" and ".". The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. The mouse comprises the center actuation field (corresponds to the function of a tracker ball) and two keys for the left and right mouse key. The softkeys call up functions that are available on the screen via a menu bar. The menu select key displays the area menu. The menu forward key enables an expansion of the horizontal softkey bar in the same menu. The machine area key switches directly into the "Machine" operating area. The menu back key returns to the higher-level menu, one window is closed. Switching between upper and lower case To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the key combination Ctrl + Shift Upper case is always activated as standard. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 149 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.2 Operator controls and indicators Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Home Ctrl key Page up Alt key Page down Delete Cursor up Insert Cursor left Enter Cursor right F9 Cursor down F10 5 (in numeric key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> F9 <Shift> A, ..., Z <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 150 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.3 Interfaces 10.2.4 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 10.3 Interfaces The TP 015AT operator panel front has the following interfaces: Function Designation Type Ethernet interface X202 8-pin RJ45 socket Double USB interface X203 / X204 USB 2.0 Hi-Speed socket A USB interface X213 USB 2.0 Hi-Speed socket A 24 VDC power supply X206 3-pin terminal block Front USB interface - USB 1.1 Full Speed socket A Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 151 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.3 Interfaces Rear 3( 9 9 Teil 1 Slide-in labels for vertical softkeys (see Chpater Spare parts) X206 Power supply (with connector that can be screwed in place) Teil 2 Slide-in labels for vertical softkeys (see Chpater Spare parts) X202 Ethernet interface X203/X204/ X213 USB interfaces ; ; ; ; - Strain relief for connecting cables Teil 3 Slide-in labels for horizontal softkeys (for these, there is no foil as template) Teil 4 - Image 10-2 M5 grounding screw (for screw connection with cable lug) TP 015AT - Rear with interfaces Front USB 1.1 Full Speed for connecting an external keyboard, mouse or USB flash drive (see Image 10-1 Front view of the TP 015AT operator panel front (Page 148)). Note Note that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices operated via the USB interface is usually rated for office use only. For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certification are recommended. Pin assignment The pin assignment of the interfaces, see "General information and networking" "Connecting". 152 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.4 Installation Installation 10.4.1 Mounting 10.4 Image 10-3 TP 015AT with TCU (integrated) Table 10-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) Mounting depth + clearance (mm) 450 335 42 + 10 Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 015AT, drill-holes or screw holes are not needed. This retaining method also enables the IP65 degree of protection (but only in conjunction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 153 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.4 Installation 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQMDFNV Image 10-4 10.4.2 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Dimension sheet for installing the TP 015AT operator panel front Touchscreen calibration Whenever a new operator panel front is connected the touchscreen must be calibrated. Procedure For a description of the calibration, refer to Chapter Touchscreen calibration (Page 249). 10.4.3 Softkey labeling User-specific functions can be assigned to the horizontal and vertical softkey bars. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys. Blank labels are already installed on delivery. To make the vertical labels, DIN A4 foils are available (see Chapter, "Spare parts" Overview (Page 156) ). Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. 154 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.5 Technical data Procedure 1. Letter the matt side of the foil using a laser printer. 2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines. 3. Insert the strips into the slots provided on the rear side of the operator front panel (see Image 10-2 TP 015AT - Rear with interfaces (Page 152)). 10.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front side: IP65 Rear side: IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply 24 VDC Current consumption Typical, approx. 1.0 A Max. approx. 2.5 A Power consumption Typical, approx. 24 W Max. approx. 50 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 355 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Depth: 53 mm Approx. 7.6 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm M5 grounding screw: 3 Nm Display Size / resolution 15" TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight Typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 155 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.6 Replacement parts 10.6 Replacement parts 10.6.1 Overview The diagram shows the TP 015AT operator panel front disassembled into its individual parts. Image 10-5 Individual parts for the TP 015AT operator panel front The components listed in the following table with an article number are available as spare parts. Spare part Article number Remark Operator panel front A5E01136461 Without LCD unit, mouse, USB port and keyboard con troller Keyboard controller Background lighting with backlight inverter LCD unit Display support Mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 USB caps 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10 Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9 Slide-in strips that can be labeled 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 Set with 3 foils, DIN A4 The dimensions for creating slide-in labels from the foil for labeling the vertical softkeys can be seen in the following diagram. 156 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.6 Replacement parts 3DUW 3DUW )LOP ',1$ &HQWHURIWKHNH\ Image 10-6 10.6.2 Dimensions for slide-in labels Replacement NOTICE Damage to sensitive components due to static electricity Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel! USB cap / tension jack The replacement of the USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described since it is simple and self-explanatory. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 157 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.6 Replacement parts Operator panel front When the operator panel front is replaced, the display, keyboard controller, touch controller, mouse and USB interface can be used again. They are therefore disassembled and reassembled after the appropriate component has been replaced. Note We recommend reusing the keypad controller to prevent any loss of the control parameters that have been programmed in. Dismounting individual parts from the operator panel front 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Place the TP 015AT on a soft horizontal surface. Loosen the 13 housing screws (M4) using a Torx screwdriver T25 . 2. Remove the cover. 158 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.6 Replacement parts Screws (M4) for display support Display support Cable of the touch controller Touch controller USB interface Ribbon cable for keyboard controller / USB interface Display cable Cable, mouse / keyboard controller Connector, mouse interface Backlight inverter cable I/O USB cable Direct key cable Keyboard cables Keyboard controller Image 10-7 TP015AT housing opened Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 159 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.6 Replacement parts Cables, backlight inverter 3. Remove the two cables to the backlight inver ter (to the left and right of the display support) by raising the clips with a flat screwdriver and pulling out the cables. Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 4. Undo the connection between the keyboard controller and the mouse by carefully pushing the connector back with a screwdriver. USB board 5. Release the connection to the keyboard con troller by releasing both retaining clamps next to the USB board and withdrawing them. Do not remove the cable from the board! Keyboard cables 160 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.6 Replacement parts 6. Disconnect the 3 keyboard cables by pushing up the terminal holders on the keyboard controller and pulling the keyboard cables out of the holder. For detailed information about removal and insertion of membrane connectors, see also "General information and networking", Chap ter: "Connecting", Section: "Handling mem brane connectors". Display support 7. Remove the 12 screws from the display support and lift it off. For details of how the screws are arranged on the display support, refer to Figure: "TP 015AT housing opened". 8. Lift off the display support. 9. Lay the display support down on its back to avoid damaging the display. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 161 Operator panel front: TP 015AT 10.6 Replacement parts Mouse board 10. Loosen the 4 screws (M3) on the holder for the mouse board. Lift off both the holder and the mouse board. Installing the individual parts in the operator panel front 1. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securing cables) and the screen protective foil from the inside. 2. Install the components in the new operator panel front in the order indicated: NOTICE Damage to the screws Pay attention to the torques when tightening the screws (see Technical data (Page 155)). 2.1 Mouse board and holder 2.2 Display support Slightly bend the keyboard cables to the rear before installing the display carrier. Otherwise, they could jam or be damaged and therefore no longer function. 2.3 USB board Press the USB board into place until you hear it lock into the retaining clamps. 2.4 Keyboard cables 2.5 Connection of keyboard controller / mouse 2.6 Cables, backlight inverter 2.7 Cover 162 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 11 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.1 Description The SINUMERIK OP 015 black operator panel front has a touch-sensitive glass surface with multiple finger operator control. The integrated TCU enables the operator panel front and control to be installed separately. The OP 015 black operator panel front is linked to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as thin client in a dedicated subnet (via DHCP server on the PCU/NCU). The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes / access points (100 m). Mixed operation with several TCUs and one operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible. The operator panel front is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity This description applies to: Type Description Article number OP 015 black Operator panel front as thin client with touch screen 6FC5303-0AF14-0AA0 Features Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s 3 x USB (max. high speed) on the rear 15" LCD flat screen (color) in widescreen format Multiple finger operation in the screen area Printed keyboard with alphabetic, numeric, cursor and control keypad Status LEDs for power supply, key feedback and keylock / Caps lock key Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm Can be installed by one person (see Section "Mounting") Degree of protection: IP65 / IP66 Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear - Min./max. thickness of the wall 1.5 to 6 mm Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 163 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.2 Operator control and display elements Note Connecting USB devices The OP 015 black does not have any USB interfaces on the front. If required, the rear USB interfaces can be routed to the front via a USB extension (see Section "Keyboards and additional components"). 11.2 Operator control and display elements 11.2.1 View Multiple finger operating area for operating software (softkeys) in the display area Green LED bars for POWER OK (left) and key feedback (right) Alphabetic key group Caps lock key incl.keylock - green LED (displays keylock active or Caps lock key) Numeric key group Cursor key group Control key group Image 11-1 164 Front view of the OP 015 black operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.2 Operator control and display elements 11.2.2 Operation The operator panel front is operated through finger contact with the touch-sensitive glass surface: Depending on the application-specific functions shown in the display area, for example, by: - pressing a softkey or a displayed button - gestures with up to eight fingers Depending on the displayed keys. Two keys (plus modifier keys) can be pressed simultaneously. - Modifier: CTRL, ALT, SHIFT Note Notes regarding operation of the touch-sensitive glass surface with multi-finger operation function using gestures. Observe the following notes in order to avoid incorrect operation of the touch-sensitive glass surface with multi-finger operation function. Otherwise, entries made at the device will either be incorrectly identified/implemented - or not at all. The OP 015 black does not support safety-relevant functions and these may also not be implemented in the touch-sensitive glass surface. The touch-sensitive glass surface reacts to contact with its surface, not to pressure. Therefore, do not attach a protective film subsequently to the touch-sensitive glass surface. Also remove all protective and packaging films, as these have a negative impact/prevent data from being entered and initiate incorrect operator entries. Only operate the touch-sensitive glass surface with your finger tips, not with your fingernails. Touch the touch-sensitive glass surface either perpendicularly or at a maximum angle of 45 to the surface. Avoid unintentional multiple contact, e.g. with the knuckles or by leaning against the display. Make sure that the surface of the touch-sensitive glass screen does not get dirty. Cleaning information can be found on the Internet in the following article in the Service & Support portal of Siemens Industry: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39718397. Constantly check whether the operator actions are recognized by the device. Note Please observe the valid C standards for the particular machine type (e.g. for turning machines: EN ISO 23125-2010, pages 36 and 49). These state that a button that initiates motion with the protective door open must be implemented using an additional acknowledgment device; this is because for single-channel keyboards - such as the OP 015 black - generally no PL (performance level) "d" can be achieved. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 165 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.2 Operator control and display elements Displaying the TCU menu To display the TCU menu, simultaneously touch the left-hand and right-hand lower corner of the active display area in order to display the TCU menu. If you have connected a USB PC keyboard to the OP 015 black, you can also display the TCU menu by simultaneously pressing keys F9 and F10. Gloves Do not wear thick gloves, such as work gloves, when operating the touch-sensitive glass surface. You can wear thin gloves made of cotton or gloves for touch-sensitive glass surfaces with capacitive touch function. You can wear the following gloves for operating the touch-sensitive glass user interface of the operator panel: Dermatril L Camatril Velours Art. 730 Uvex Profas Profi ENB 20A Comasec PU 900 (4342) Camapur Comfort Art. 619 KCL Men at Work Art. 301 Carex Art. 1505/k (leather) Cotton Cat. 1 Note The gloves listed here are recommendations only. The type designations can change. Keylock E.g. it is advisable to use the keylock when cleaning the device: Activate the keylock by pressing the Caps lock key for at least five seconds, the LED flashes. Deactivate the keylock by pressing the Caps lock key again for at least five seconds. The keylock can also be triggered by the software. Note The keylock only applies to the keys next to the display and not for the display touch. 166 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.2 Operator control and display elements 11.2.3 Keyboard Keyboard Several keys and keypads are installed on the operator panel front: The alphabetic block contains the letters A - Z, the space character and the Caps lock key with keylock. The numeric block contains the digits 0 - 9, and the characters "/", "*", "-", "+", "=" and ".". The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen. The control key group includes special functions. Switching between upper and lower case Upper case is always activated as standard. To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the Caps lock key. Overview of the key symbols The key symbols used on the operator panel front are shown below along with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Esc End F11 Backspace F12 Tab Space (only intended for internal key board changeover) Caps lock Ctrl key Home Alt key Page up Delete Page down Insert Cursor up Enter 167 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.3 Interfaces Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Key Function corresponds to the PC key function Cursor left 5 (in numeric key group) Cursor right A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z Cursor down Display Pixel error according to DIN EN ISO 9241-307, Error class II. 11.2.4 Screen saver If an image with high contrast is displayed without change for longer than one hour, the darkON function must be activated for energy efficiency reasons. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 11.3 Interfaces The OP 015 black operator panel front has the following interfaces: 168 Interface name Connector name Speed Permissible to tal length Connector type Ethernet interface X202 1000 Mbps Max. 100 m 8-pin RJ45 socket Double USB interface 1 X203, X204 480 Mbps each Max. 1.8 m Double USB socket 24 V power supply X206 - Max. 10 m 3-pin Combicon con nector USB interface 2 X213 480 Mbps Max. 1.8 m Single USB socket Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.3 Interfaces Rear X206 Power supply (with connector that can be screwed in place) - Strain relief for connecting cables - M5 grounding screw (for screw connection with cable lug) X203 / X 204 / USB interfaces X213 X202 Image 11-2 Ethernet interface OP 015 black - rear with interfaces Pin assignment The pin assignment of the interfaces, see "General information and networking" "Connecting". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 169 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.4 Assembly 11.4 Assembly 37 483 11 310 289* 10* OP 015 black with TCU (integrated) * Clearance for cable and ventilation Table 11-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) Mounting depth + clearance (mm) 450 290 37 + 10 The OP 015 black is mounted using the tension jacks provided (2.5 mm profile; 20 mm long). When using the tension jacks, holes or threaded holes are not required. This mounting method also enables the IP65/IP66 degree of protection if the mounting panel corresponds to the requirements specified in the dimension drawing. The seal (PU foam seal) to the mounting panel is already provided on the OP 015 black. 170 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.4 Assembly 6HDODUHD 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRUWHQVLRQMDFNV Image 11-3 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNZLWKJUXEVFUHZ WLJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P PD[ )RU,3 PLQ PD[ )RU,3 PLQ PD[ [ [ ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Dimension drawing for installing the OP 015 black operator panel front One person installation You should also observe the data provided in Section "General information and networking" "Application planning" "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 45 from the vertical. NOTICE Damage to the glass front Do not use suction grippers to lift the glass front. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 171 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.4 Assembly 1. Insert the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the front. Image 11-4 Inserting the operator panel NOTICE Damage to the sealing The seal must not be damaged when installing the device so that the maximum achievable degree of protection can be fulfilled. Therefore, insert the OP 015 black centered in the panel cutout. 2. Tilt and press the operator panel front into the panel cutout. The catches must be pressed down. 172 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.4 Assembly Image 11-5 Tilting and pressing in 3. Make sure that the operator panel front sits firmly in the panel cutout and cannot fall out before you secure it at the rear with the tension jacks. 4. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the 12 tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). Image 11-6 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Tightening the tension jacks 173 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.5 Technical data 11.4.1 Touchscreen calibration Whenever a new operator panel front is connected the touchscreen must be calibrated. Procedure For a description of the calibration, refer to Chapter Auto-Hotspot. 11.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front: IP65 / IP66 Rear: IPXXB Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply 1) 24 VDC (20.4 V ... 28.8 V) Current consumption Typical, approx. 1.0 A Maximum, approx. 2.0 A Power consumption Typical, approx. 24 W Maximum, approx. 42 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 310 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Depth: 48 mm Approx. 7 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm M5 grounding screw: 3 Nm Permissible ambient temperatures Operation 0 ... 45 C (front) 0 ... 55 C (rear) Storage -20 to 60 C Display Size / resolution 15.6" / 1366 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight Typical 70 000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) 1) The power supply must be provided as protective extra low-voltage with safe isolation (according to EN 60204-1, PELV). Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 174 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.6 Spare parts/accessories 11.6 Spare parts/accessories The following can be ordered for the OP 015 black: Spare part: Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 (9 units) Accessories: USB extension 6FC5347-0AF01-1AA0 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 175 Operator panel front: OP 015 black 11.6 Spare parts/accessories 176 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 12 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.1 Description The SINUMERIK OP 019 operator panel front is equipped with a 19" TFT color display with a resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels and with 16 + 4 horizontal and 16 vertical softkeys. The 2 x 8 vertical softkeys can be used as direct keys. The KB 483C full CNC keyboard can be used as an input keyboard. It is fixed from the rear using special clamps that are included in the delivery scope. Note It is not possible to use slide-in labels for the softkeys. Validity The description applies to the operator panel front: Type Key type OP 019 Capacitive keys behind a glass front Article number 6FC5303-0AF13-0AA0 Features Anti-glare glass front over the entire panel 19" mounting format, 9 HU (height units) Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 380 mm Limited mounting depth 19" TFT flat screen (color) with a resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels (SXGA) Capacitive keys, including optical feedback using LEDs when actuated: - 16 + 4 horizontal softkeys - 16 vertical softkeys Status LED for the power supply Degree of protection: IP65 / IP66 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 177 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.1 Description Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear The tension jacks can be re-ordered as spare part: 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 (9 units) Can be combined with PCU 50.5 and TCU 30.2 Note Connecting USB devices OP 019 has no USB interfaces. If required, the USB interfaces of the PCU 50.5 / TCU 30.2 can be routed to the front via a USB-extension (see Chapter: "Keyboards and additional components"). 178 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.2 Operator control and display elements 12.2 Operator control and display elements 12.2.1 View Status LED: POWER Window for slide-in labels "System" (e.g. 840D sl) Vertical softkeys Menu forward key Menu select key Horizontal softkeys Machine area key Menu back key and key disable Image 12-1 Front view of the OP 019 operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 179 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.2 Operator control and display elements 12.2.2 Keyboard Keyboard The following keys are arranged on the operator panel front: The 16 vertical and horizontal softkeys call up functions that are available on screen via a menu bar. The menu back key switches to the higher-level horizontal menu back and is used to lock the keys. The menu forward key advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The Menu Select key calls the main menu to select the operating area. The machine area key selects the "Machine" operating area. The key symbols used on the operator panel front are juxtapositioned with the corresponding function keys on the PC keyboard. Key Description PC function key Menu back key / keyboard lock F9 Menu forward key <Shift> F9 Menu select key F10 Machine area key <Shift> F10 Display Note Pixel error acc. to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 Class II. 180 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.2 Operator control and display elements 12.2.3 Softkeys Operation The capacitive keys respond quickly and directly. In order to prevent accidental operation, the following measures must be applied: When the key is pressed a second time, the function is revoked Keyboard lock, e.g. when cleaning the keys/keyboard: - Press the menu back key for longer than 5 seconds to activate it - The associated LED flashes while the key lock is active - Deactivate the keyboard lock by pressing again (> 5 s) Traversing motion that is initiated using direct keys must be additionally interlocked: For example, using an acknowledgment button that is appropriately linked in the PLC Note Please observe the valid C standards for the particular machine type (e.g. for lathes: EN ISO 23125-2010, pages 36+49). This states that a button that initiates motion with the protective door open must be implemented using an additional acknowledgment device; this is because for single-channel keyboards - such as the OP 019 - generally no PL (performance level) level "d" can be achieved. Special situations: 2 keys can be simultaneously pressed. The keys can also be actuated when operators are wearing gloves. However, especially thick, protective gloves can restrict operation or even prohibit it. LED displays All keys with LEDs flash green: As long as the operating system has not started while booting. If communication to the PCU/TCU has failed and this state lasts for more than 5 s. Remedy: Re-install the standard keyboard driver. 12.2.4 Screen saver If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than an hour, then the screensaver must be activated in order to protect the TFT display against so-called "burning in" of the last displayed screen. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 181 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.3 Interfaces 12.3 Interfaces All interfaces of the OP 019 operator panel front are located at the rear: Insertion slot for the "System" labeling strips Mounting slots for PCU/TCU lugs Cover plate for the direct key interface X11 I/O USB cable K1 LVDS display cable K2 LVDS display cable K3 Image 12-2 182 Rear of the OP 019 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.3 Interfaces Interface description Three flat ribbon cables for connecting the PCU/TCU: - I/O USB cable K1: all signals, which in addition to the display interface, are required to connect operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages) - LVDS display cable K2 - LVDS display cable K3 Direct key interface X11 for the two vertical softkey bars (16 keys). Here, one of the following operator components can be connected: - MCP 483 / MCP 483 PN / MPP 483 / MPP 483 IE (X70) - TCU 30.2 (X205) Pin assignment The pin assignment of the interfaces, see "General information and networking" "Connecting". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 183 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.4 Mounting 12.4 Mounting 12.4.1 Preparation for mounting Overview 6SDFHIRUFDEOHVDQGYHQWLODWLRQ 7s 3&8VZLYHOHGWKURXJKr 7 3&8LQILQDOSRVLWLRQ Image 12-3 184 s s Dimension sheet for attaching the PCU to the OP 019 operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.4 Mounting Table 12-1 Dimensions to be observed when installing Mounting depth T3 + clear ance (mm) Opening depth T5 (mm) Protrusion P (mm) PCU 50.5 132 + 10 408 2 TCU 30.2 81 + 10 382 -49 Mounting opening Table 12-2 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) 450 380 The OP 019 is mounted using the tension jacks provided (2.5 mm profile; 20 mm long). When using the tension jacks, holes or threaded holes are not required. This mounting method also enables the IP65/IP66 degree of protection if the mounting panel corresponds to the requirements specified in the dimension drawing. The seal (PU foam seal) to the mounting panel is already provided on the OP 019. IRU,3 IRU,3 s 5] 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 6HDOLQJDUHD 3UHVVXUHSRLQWVIRUWHQVLRQMDFNV s 0RXQWLQJSDQHO ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Image 12-4 Dimension drawing for installing the OP 019 operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 185 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.4 Mounting Precondition for the assembly with a PCU/TCU Before you mount a PCU/TCU onto an OP 019, you must attach the mounting brackets on the PCU/TCU. The mounting brackets for a TCU 30.2 are attached the same way as for a PCU. Exception: When attaching, only 4x M4x8 fillister head screws are required. 12.4.2 Assembling an OP 019 and a PCU If you wish to combine the OP 019 with a PCU, assemble the components before installing them into the mounting panel. This procedure is described in detail below. Alternatively, you can first install the OP 019 in the panel cutout and then mount the PCU on the installed OP. Procedure 1. 2. 3. Place the front of the OP 019 on a soft, horizontal surface to avoid damaging the surface of the operator panel front. Remove the interface cover of the PCU . Position the PCU so that the mounting lugs engage in the OP 019. 4. 5. 186 Connect cables K1 and K2 to the interfaces of the PCU. K3 is first routed through the opening behind K2. Ensure that the connectors of cables K1 and K2 snap audibly into place and that the interlocks are closed. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.4 Mounting 6. 7. 8. 9. Swivel the PCU in the direction of the OP 019 and make sure that the cables fold correctly into place. Secure the PCU using two knurled screws at each end of the two mounting angles (torque: 1.8 Nm). In order to insert cable K3 , you must remove the housing cover of the PCU hard disk, seeSSD module (Page 266) Chapter PCU 50.5. Connect cable K3 to the interface of the PCU, directly above K2, and secure the connector using the fixing bracket and two M2.5 screws (0.4 Nm). 10. 12.4.3 Close the housing cover of the PCU (see 8.). Assembling an OP 019 and a TCU If you wish to combine the OP 019 with a TCU, assemble the components before installing them into the mounting panel. This procedure is described in detail below. Alternatively, you can first install the OP 019 in the panel cutout and then mount the TCU on the installed OP. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 187 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.4 Mounting Procedure 1. 2. Place the front of the OP 019 on a soft, horizontal surface to avoid damaging the surface of the operator panel front. Position the TCU so that the mounting lugs engage in the OP 019 . 3. 4. 5. 6. 12.4.4 Connect cables K1 , K2 and K3 to the appropriate interfaces of the TCU. Ensure that the connectors of cables K1 to K3 snap audibly into place and that the in terlocks are closed. Swivel the TCU in the direction of the OP 019 and make sure that the cables fold correctly into place. Secure the TCU using two knurled screws at each end of the two mounting angles (torque: 1.8 Nm). Mounting on the mounting wall The clearance at the rear of the PCU/TCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation (see Section: Preparation for mounting (Page 184)). 188 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.5 Technical data You should also observe the data provided in Section "General information and networking" "Application planning" "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical. This value can be further restricted by mounted components (e.g. PCU). Procedure NOTICE Damage to the glass front Do not use suction grippers to lift the glass fronts in order to avoid damaging it. 1. Install the assembled components (e.g. operator panel front and PCU) from the front into the panel cutout (see Image 12-4 Dimension drawing for installing the OP 019 operator panel front (Page 185)). NOTICE Damage to the sealing It is not permissible that the seal is damaged when installing the device so that the maximum achievable degree of protection can be fulfilled. Therefore, locate the assembled components, centered in the middle of the panel cutout. 2. Secure the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). 12.5 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 Front, IP65 / IP66 Rear, IP20 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical and mechanical data Power consumption Typical, approx. 35 W Maximum approx. 45 W Dimensions Width: 483 mm Weight Tightening torques screws, max. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Height: 399 mm Depth: 58,5 mm approx. 11 kg Tension jacks: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm 189 Operator panel front: OP 019 12.5 Technical data Display Size / resolution 19" TFT / 1280 x 1024 pixels MTBF backlight typ. 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 190 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 13 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.1 Description The SINUMERIK OP 019 black operator panel front has a touch-sensitive glass user interface with multiple finger operator control. The integrated TCU enables the operator panel front and control to be installed separately. The OP 019 black operator panel front is coupled to the PCU/NCU via Ethernet as thin client in a dedicated subnet (via DHCP server on the PCU/NCU). The distance to the operator panel fronts is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points (100 m). Mixed operation with several TCUs and one operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible. The operator panel front is fastened from the rear with special clamping elements provided in the scope of delivery. Validity This description applies to: Type Description Article number OP 019 black Operator panel front as thin client with touch screen 6FC5303-0AF17-0AA0 Characteristics 18.5" LCD flat screen (color) in widescreen format Resolution: 1366 x 768px Aspect ratio 16:9 LED backlight with integrated power supply Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s 3 x USB (max. high speed) on the rear Multiple finger operation in the screen area (gesture operation possible) Installation opening (W x H): 465 x 319 mm2 Can be installed by one person (see Chapter "Installation") Degree of protection: IP65 Attachment: Tension jacks at the rear - Min./max. thickness of the wall 1.5 to 6 mm Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 191 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.2 Operator control and display elements Note Connecting USB devices The OP 019 black does not have any USB interfaces at the front. If required, the rear USB interfaces can be routed to the front via a USB extension (see Section "Keyboards and additional components" in the related Equipment Manual "Operator Components and Networking"). 13.2 Operator control and display elements 13.2.1 View 1 Multiple finger operating area for operating software (softkeys) in the display area Image 13-1 192 Front view of the OP 019 black operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.2 Operator control and display elements 13.2.2 Operation The operator panel front is operated through finger contact with the touch-sensitive glass user interface: Depending on the application-specific functions displayed in the display area, for example, by: - Gestures with up to 5 fingers Note Notes regarding operation of the touch-sensitive glass surface with multi-finger operation function using gestures. Observe the following notes in order to avoid incorrect operation of the touch-sensitive glass surface with multi-finger operation function. Otherwise, entries made at the device will either be incorrectly identified/implemented - or not at all. The OP 019 black does not support safety-relevant functions and these may also not be implemented in the touch-sensitive glass user interface. The touch-sensitive glass user interface reacts to contact with its surface, not to pressure. Therefore, do not subsequently attach a protective film to the touch-sensitive glass user interface. Also remove all protection and packaging foils, as these have a negative impact/ prevent data from being entered and initiate incorrect operator entries. Only operate the touch-sensitive glass user interface with your finger tips, not with your fingernails. Touch the touch-sensitive glass user interface either perpendicularly or at a maximum angle of 45 to the surface. Avoid unintentional multiple touches, e.g. with the knuckles or by leaning on or against the display. Make sure that the surface of the touch-sensitive glass screen does not get dirty. Cleaning information can be found on the Internet in the following article in the Service & Support portal of Siemens Industry: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39718397. Always check whether the executed operator actions were recognized by the device. Note Please observe the valid C standards for the particular machine type (e.g. for turning machines: EN ISO 23125-2010, pages 36 and 49). These state that a button that initiates motion with the protective door open must be implemented using an additional acknowledgment device; this is because for single-channel keyboards - such as the OP 019 black - generally no PL (performance level) "d" can be achieved. Displaying the TCU menu To display the TCU menu, simultaneously touch the left-hand and right-hand lower corner of the active display area in order to display the TCU menu. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 193 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.2 Operator control and display elements If you have connected a USB PC keyboard to the OP 019 black, then you can also display the TCU menu by simultaneously pressing keys F9 and F10. Gloves Do not wear thick gloves, such as work gloves, when operating the touch-sensitive glass user interface. You can wear thin gloves made of cotton or gloves for touch-sensitive glass user interfaces with capacitive touch function. You can wear the following gloves for operating the touch-sensitive glass user interface of the operator panel: Dermatril L Camatril Velours Art. 730 Uvex Profas Profi ENB 20A Comasec PU 900 (4342) Camapur Comfort Art. 619 KCL Men at Work Art. 301 Carex Art. 1505/k (leather) Cotton Cat. 1 Note The gloves listed here are recommendations only. The type designations can change. 13.2.3 Screen saver If an image with high contrast is displayed without change for longer than one hour, the darkON function must be activated for energy efficiency reasons. The time can be adapted individually. Further information can be found at: Commissioning of Basic Software and Operating Software, SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) 194 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.3 Interfaces 13.3 Interfaces The OP 019 black operator panel front has the following interfaces: 1 2 3 4 5 6 - Strain relief for connecting cables - M5 grounding screw (for screw connection with cable lug) X203 / X 204 / X213 USB interfaces X202 Ethernet interface - Not relevant X206 Power supply (with connector that can be screwed in place) Image 13-2 OP 019 black - rear with interfaces Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 195 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.3 Interfaces NOTICE Electrostatically endangered interface Electronic modules contain components that are electrostatically endangered. These modules can be easily destroyed if they are not handled properly. To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below. Do not touch the open plug pins, Interface name Connector designation Velocity Permissible to tal length Connector type Ethernet interface X202 1000 Mbit/s max. 100 m 8-pin RJ45 socket Double USB interface 1 X203, X204 480 Mbps each Max. 1.8 m Double USB socket 24 V power supply X206 - max. 10m 3-pin Combicon con nector USB interface 2 X213 480 Mbit/s Max. 1.8 m Single USB socket Note Restricted use of the USB interfaces Please note that the USB interfaces installed in the OP 019 black cannot be used with every USB-capable device. You can only connect keyboard, mouse and USB storage devices to the 019 black via the USB interfaces. Pin assignment The pin assignment of the interfaces, see "General information and networking" "Connecting". 196 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.4 Installation 13.4 Installation 337 20 337 317 20 120* 483 8,9 33,8 64,9 Image 13-3 OP 019 black with TCU (integrated) * Clearance for cable and ventilation Table 13-1 Dimensions of the mounting opening Width (mm) Height (mm) Installation depth + ventilation clearance (mm) 465 319 56 + 64 The OP 019 black is mounted using the tension jacks provided (2.5 mm profile; 20 mm long). When using the tension jacks, holes or threaded holes are not required. This mounting method also IP65 degree of protection to be achieved if the mounting panel corresponds to the requirements specified in the dimension drawing. The seal (PU foam seal) to the mounting panel is already provided on the OP 019 black. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 197 Operator panel front: OP 019 black [ [ 6HDODUHD 115 3UHVVXUH SRLQWVIRU WHQVLRQHUV 194.1 63.25 61.25 194.1 115 115 68.1 115 63.25 61.25 68.1 IRU,3 PLQ PD[ IRU,3 PLQ PD[ 5] 194.1 7HQVLRQMDFNZLWKVHWVFUHZ 7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P PD[ 13.4 Installation 194.1 68.1 68.1 ,QWKHVHDODUHD Image 13-4 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 019 black operator panel front One person installation You should also observe the data provided in Chapter "General information and networking" "Application planning" "Climatic and mechanical environmental conditions" "Cooling". NOTICE Impermissible mounting positions can cause malfunctions Observe the permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 45 from the vertical. NOTICE Damage to the glass front Do not use suction grippers to lift the glass front. 198 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.4 Installation 1. Install the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the front. Image 13-5 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Attaching the operator panel 199 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.4 Installation NOTICE Damage to the sealing The seal must not be damaged when installing the device so that the maximum achievable degree of protection can be fulfilled. Therefore, install the OP 019 black centered in the panel cutout. 2. Tilt and press the operator panel front into the panel cutout. The catches must be pressed down. Image 13-6 200 Press down on the catch Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.5 Technical specifications 3. Make sure that the operator panel front sits firmly in the panel cutout and cannot fall out before you secure it at the rear with the tension jacks. 4. Attach the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the 16 tension jacks by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 - 0.5 Nm). Image 13-7 13.5 Tightening the tension jacks Technical specifications Safety Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 Approvals Front side: IP66 Rear side: IP20 CE / cULus Electrical specifications Power supply 1) Power consumption 24 VDC (20.4 V ... 28.8 V) Typical, approx. 1.0 A Maximum, approx. 2.0 A Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 201 Operator panel front: OP 019 black 13.6 Spare Parts/Accessories Power consumption Typical, approx. 24 W Maximum approx. 42 W Mechanical specifications Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 337 mm Weight Tightening torques, max. Depth: 64.9 mm Approx. 7.6 kg Tension jack screws: 0.5 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm M5 grounding screw: 3 Nm Permissible ambient temperatures Operation 0 ... 45 C (front) 0 ... 55 C (rear) Storage -20 to 60 C Display Size / resolution 18.5" / 1366 x 768 pixels MTBF backlight Minimum 50,000 h at 25 C (dependent on the temperature) 1) The power supply must be provided as functional extra low-voltage with protective separation (SELV or according to NEC Class 2). Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 13.6 Spare Parts/Accessories The following can be subsequently ordered for the OP 019 black: Spare part: Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 (9 units) Accessories: USB extension 6FC5347-0AF01-1AA0 202 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 14 Direct control key module 14.1 Description The task of the direct key module is to directly transfer the operating signals for the two rows of keys on the sides of an operator panel front to the control (PLC) without diversion through intermediate firmware. The signal-to-key assignments are shown in the table and figure in Section: "Interfaces" "Operator panel front." The DKM can be combined with operator panel fronts OP 012, OP 015A and TP 015A. The DKM converts the key signals to the PROFIBUS DP protocol by means of the ASIC LSPM2 (EN 50170-2, 12 MBaud). Power is supplied via the operator panel front. The PROFIBUS is completely isolated from the DKM / operator panel front by means of an opto-coupler and DC/DC converter. The DKM is operated as a slave on PROFIBUS. The address can be set between 1 and 99 using rotary switches. Two bytes of data are transferred. In the control, the keys are handled as if they were 16 ordinary digital inputs. Validity This description applies to the following components Designation 14.2 Article number Direct key module (with kit for OP 012) 6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 Direct key module mounting kit for OP 015A, TP 015A 6FC5247-0AF30-0AA0 Operating and display elements On the front of the direct key module there are Top coding switches: One position of the PROFIBUS address Coding switch below: Tens position of the PROFIBUS address Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 203 Direct control key module 14.3 Interfaces LED on the left-hand side: If the DKM is not connected to PROFIBUS (or in the event of another fault), the "bus error" LED lights up. LED on the right-hand side: Diagnostics Coding switches LEDs Image 14-1 14.3 View of the direct key module Interfaces The direct key module has a PROFIBUS connection and a Connection for the direct keys of the operator panel front . Image 14-2 204 Direct key module with connections Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Direct control key module 14.4 Mounting Operator panel connection The ribbon cable of the operator panel front is inserted through the cut-out in the housing . Here, the switching states of the vertical direct keys can be picked up without intermediate firmware. These signals can be evaluated by the PLC. PROFIBUS connection 9-pin connector for connection to an NCU. Note The used PROFIBUS cable should have a connector with a straight cable outlet. Pin assignment For the pin assignment of the interfaces and other information about the direct keys connection, refer to Chapter: "General notes and interconnection" "Connecting". 14.4 Mounting 14.4.1 Overview The DKM is installed to one side of the PCU on the operator panel front and connected to the keyboard controller via a short ribbon cable. Mounting the DKM requires an installation kit appropriate to the operator panel front used (kit for the OP 012 already included with the DKM). The following mounting kit is required for OP 015A and TP 015A: Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 205 Direct control key module 14.4 Mounting Cover plate for keyboard controller for OP 015A DKM cable for OP 015A DKM cable for TP 015A Image 14-3 DKM installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A You can find the article number in Section "Description (Page 203)". 14.4.2 Combination with OP 012 The OP 012 outputs the signals from the direct control keys at connector X11, see AutoHotspot. Preparation 1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU, see Chapter Auto-Hotspot. 2. Remove the retainer next to the keyboard controller cover plate by inserting a pointed tool in each of the two slits and loosening the fixing cams by levering in the direction shown. 3. Unscrew the cover plate for the keyboard controller . It is no longer needed for assembly. 4. Remove the rubber rim from the edge of the housing cutout, which is used to secure a pushbutton panel cable. 206 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Direct control key module 14.4 Mounting 23 Previous cover plate Rubber rim Retainers Image 14-4 Removing the retainer Assembly 1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the ribbon cable supplied with the DKM through the slit in the cover also supplied with the DKM and into socket X11 on the keyboard controller. 2. Screw down the new cover tightly using the screws supplied. 3. Mount the PCU as described in Chapter Auto-Hotspot. 4. Set PROFIBUS addresses 01 to 99 using the top (units) and bottom (tens) coding switches of the DKM (see Image 14-1 View of the direct key module (Page 204)). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 207 Direct control key module 14.4 Mounting 5. Connect ribbon cable to the DTM. 6. Screw the DKM firmly to the cover using the two knurled screws using the fixing nipple . 3&8 '70 7. Insert the PROFIBUS plug (with straight outgo ing cable) into the socket of the DKM. Note The direct key module must be removed first on deinstallation of the PCU. 14.4.3 Combination with OP 015A / TP 015A Note The installation of the direct key module on the TP 015A is described in the following. The procedure for assembly with the OP 015A is identical. 208 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Direct control key module 14.4 Mounting Preparation 1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU. 2. Unscrew the cover plate for the keyboard controller . The plate is required for reinstallation. Cover plate for keyboard controller Image 14-5 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 TP 015A rear side 209 Direct control key module 14.5 Technical data Assembly 1. Insert DKM ribbon cable into socket X11 of the keyboard controller. The cable is already prefolded. . . 2. Screw on the cover plate and when doing this fold over the cable . . . 3. Mount the PCU as described in Chapter Auto-Hotspot. 4. Set PROFIBUS addresses 01 to 99 using the top (units) and bottom (tens) coding switches of the DKM (see Image 14-1 View of the direct key module (Page 204)). 5. Connect ribbon cable with the DKM, and 3&8 screw the DKM using the two knurled screws '70 to the securing nipple . 14.5 Technical data Safety Degree of protection to DIN EN 60529 IP20 Electrical data Input voltage 210 5 VDC Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Direct control key module 14.5 Technical data Power consumption Max. 0.75 W Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Width: 106 mm Height: 42 mm Depth: 80 mm approx. 0.6 kg Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 211 Direct control key module 14.5 Technical data 212 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 15 PCU 50.5 15.1 Description The powerful SINUMERIK PCU 50.5 not only has an integrated 150 W power supply, but also all of the interfaces for communication via Ethernet and PROFIBUS (depending on the particular device) are already on board. Four USB ports (USB 2.0 Hi-Speed) offer points where a keyboard, mouse and other I/O devices can be connected. A covered slot is available for a CompactFlash Card (CF card). Validity The description applies to the following devices: WinXP ProEmbSys (32-bit) operating system Win7 EmbSys (64-bit) operating system PCU 50.5-C PCU 50.5-P PCU 50.5-C PCU 50.5-P Article number 6FC5210-0DF52-2AA0 6FC5210-0DF53-2AA0 6FC5210-0DF52-3AA0 6FC5210-0DF53-3AA0 Processor Celeron 1.8 GHz Core i5 2.4 GHz Celeron 1.8 GHz Core i5 2.4 GHz Work memory 1024 MB 2048 MB 4096 MB 8192 MB Mass storage 40 GB 40 GB 80 GB 80 GB PROFIBUS DP Yes No No No Slots 2 x PCI PCI + PCIe x16 PCI + PCIe x16 PCI + PCIe x16 Features Robust design (continuous operation, high noise immunity) The installation location and length vary due to the different types of mounting and mounting brackets Can be expanded using two plug-in boards (min. 140 mm up to max. 185 mm long) For diagnostics (e.g. for operation without a monitor), two 7-segment displays, status LEDs and one service switch with power button are integrated. Graphic: QM57 Express chipset Work memory (with ECC): - For WinXP: Max. 4 GB - For Win7: Max. 8 GB Mass storage: Electronic SSD drive Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 213 PCU 50.5 15.1 Description Screen resolutions, CRT monitor: - Up to 1280 x 1024 at 100 Hz / 32-bit color depth - Up to 1600 x 1200 at 60 Hz / 32-bit color depth - Max. resolution: 2038 x 1536 at 75 Hz / 16-bit color depth Screen resolution, LCD monitor via DVI: 1600 x 1200 at 60 Hz / 32-bit color depth Power supply: 24 VDC, max. 210 W with on/off switch Connections: - PROFIBUS (max. 12 Mbit/s, isolated, compatible with CP 5611, optional) - DVI-I interface for external monitor - 2 x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s - 4 x USB 2.0 Hi-Speed High-Current - Serial interface COM1 (RS 232C) 214 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.1 Description View Housing cover, service module Housing cover, motherboard Windows license label Rating plate for power supply Print for the interfaces on the right-hand side of the housing Housing cover, power supply Ratingplate PCU Housing cover, SSD Image 15-1 Top view of PCU 50.5 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 215 PCU 50.5 15.2 Operator control and display elements 15.2 Operator control and display elements 15.2.1 On/off switch On/Off switch Image 15-2 PCU 50.5 On/off switch The integrated 24 V power supply for the PCU is switched on and off using the on/off switch . It also serves as a substitute for the reset button, which is no longer provided, see Switching off / reset (Page 248). 216 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.2 Operator control and display elements 15.2.2 Service module The service module is located, depending on the device mounting, at two positions: Side panel, next to the equipment fan for upright mounting in the control cabinet Cover above the equipment fan for standard installation in the operator panel 2 x 7-segment display 2 x LED: Diagnostics display H1 and H2 Service switch Power button Image 15-3 Service module 7-segment display When the device is switched on, a HW self-test of the service module is first carried out; Code 88 is output in the process. While the BIOS boots, the PCU base software runs through a self test, where the codes of the corresponding test step are displayed. Code 00 is displayed if booting is completed without any error. The code of the most recently started test step is displayed when an error occurs. See BIOS beep codes (Page 258). Display of the service switch positions. Codes of applications can also be displayed if required. LEDs H1 and H2 While the BIOS boots, the two LEDs light up in two colors (red and green) in order to test their operation. The two LEDs switch off when booting is completed without errors. Applications can control the two LEDs if required. The diagnostics displays display the following information: The diagnostics display "H1" displays status codes of the PCU-Basesoftware. The diagnostics display "H2" is assigned to the application software. The meaning of the displayed status codes depends on whether the PCU 50.5 is in system startup (Page 261) mode, running mode (Page 262), or shutdown (Page 262) mode. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 217 PCU 50.5 15.2 Operator control and display elements Service switch The service switch is a rotary switch with 16 possible positions. The following table provides an overview of the switch positions. When delivered, the switch is in position "0": Normal operation Note A change of the switch position only becomes effective after the next restart. Selector position Mode 0 Function Normal operation (default setting) 6 - Reserved for end users B Service Performing a BIOS recovery after a failed update. 9 Service Restore the default values automatically at the next boot (e.g. with BIOS update or SSD replacement). E Service After a restart, booting is preferably from another storage medium (e.g. USB flash drive) as from the installed SSD. The PCU base software is capable of reading out the switch positions if this was set beforehand in the BIOS setup. The default setting is "evaluate (Operation mode switch -> Enabled)". Power button The power button is located below the diagnostics display; it can be used to start up and shut down the Windows operating system. This means that the power button is an alternative to the on/off switch. Additional references For details on diagnostics and service, refer the to the following manual: Basic Software and Operating Software Commissioning Manual (IM8) 218 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces 15.3 Interfaces 15.3.1 External interfaces Right-hand housing side Image 15-4 PCU 50.5 side view from the right with interfaces (without plug-in card) Interface/connection Function S0 Line side switch On/Off switch (only standby) for the power supply unit X0 Power supply 24 VDC (SELV) X2 Ethernet 2 10/100/1000 Mbit/s, connection for the system network (e.g. operator panels) X1 Ethernet 1 10/100/1000 Mbit/s, connection for the company network (LAN) PCI slot (Slot 1 / Slot 2) 2 slots for expansion modules X70 DVI-I interface Bus for external monitor (VGA monitors via optional adapter) X50 CompactFlash card Slot for CF card under cover plug, not hot-plug capable X30 COM1 (V.24) Serial interface, e.g. for a modem X60 USB port 1 / 2 4 external USB connections (USB 2.0 Hi-Speed type A) - max. 2 can be operated at the same time as High-Current *) USB port 3 / 4 X4 PROFIBUS DP/MPI *) 12 MBit/s connection for connecting an S7 automation unit, isolated (only for PCU 50.5-C with WinXP) The max. current carrying capacity of the four USB connections is a total of 1.2 A. The max. current carrying capacity of a USB connection is 500 mA. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 219 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces Left-hand housing side Cover plate with retaining screws Rating plate of the PC unit Device fan Cover plate for battery Image 15-5 Side view of the PCU 50.5 from left Housing rear Image 15-6 PCU 50.5 interfaces for connecting operator panel fronts Interface/connection 220 X44 I/O interface for connecting the I/O cable of the operator panel front X42 Optional connection for operator panel fronts with USB 2.0 Hi-Speed front interface X400 1. LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display cable X401 Access for 2nd LVDS interface for Dual LVDS display (e.g. OP 19) - located behind X400 (can be accessed when the SSD module is removed) Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces Pin assignment for external interfaces In principle you will find the pin assignments of the individual external interfaces in "General information and networking", Section "Connecting", except for: PCI slots: See Connector assignment of bus board (Page 226). CompactFlash card: See the description in Chapter "Keyboards and additional components". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 221 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces 15.3.2 Internal interfaces 15.3.2.1 Connector assignment of motherboard Overview ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Image 15-7 222 ; PCU 50.5 - motherboard interfaces Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces Connector Interface X1 Description Processor X10 Bus expansion Socket for bus expansion, uses PCI bus signals X13 Power supply 20-pin connection plug for power supply Memory 2 x SDRAM DDR3 with ECC Backup battery Power supply for backup battery, 2-pin male connector X19 / X20 X24 X26 SATA 4 (optional) X27 X28 SATA 3 (optional) Power supply Power supply for serial ATA SATA 2 X29 SATA 1 X30 SATA 0 X50 SATA 0 X51 X52 SATA 1 Serial ATA Data cable for serial ATA SATA 2 X53 SATA 3 (optional) X54 SATA 4 (optional) X3 X131 HD-lock Interlock identification for the optional MC hard disk module SATA Connection for PS fan Power supply for CPU fan, 3-pin male connector X132 Connection for device fan Power supply for device fan, 3-pin male connector X2400 Tap for backup battery Voltage tap ( = 3V) of the backup battery, 2-pin, male con nector X44 I/O interface Connection of the I/O cable of the operator panel front X400 1st LVDS interface Connection of the display cable X401 2nd LVDS interface Additional display interface K3 for OP019 X71 RS485-SYNC (opt.) Synchronizing several PCI boards to a common system clock cycle Signal type: I Input O Output V Power supply Ground (reference potential) or N.C. (not connected) Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 223 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces DC interface of the power supply X13 Table 15-1 X13 connector assignment Connector Pin Name 1 P5V 2 P5V 3 P5V 4 P5V Type Remark +5 V +5 V V +5 V +5 V 5 P5V Sense 6 PS_NAU_N Power loss early warning signal 7 PS_PWROK Power Good Signal 8 GND 9 GND 10 GND 11 N12V 12 GND 13 GND O Sense 5 V Ground - Ground Ground V -12 V Ground - 14 GND 15 P12V 16 P12V V 17 P3V Sense O 18 P3V 19 P3V 20 P3V Ground Ground +12 V +12 V Sense 3.3 V +3.3 V V +3.3 V +3.3 V Connector for backup battery X24 The battery for backing up the CMOS-RAM is connected to this connection. A 3V lithium battery with a capacity of 750 mAh is used for this purpose. Table 15-2 Assignment of the X24 connector Connector Pin Name Type Remark 1 + VI Plus pole 2 - VI Minus pole 224 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces SYNC interface for PCI expansion modules X71 Using this interface, several PCI boards can synchronize to a common system clock (Global Control Telegram clock cycle duration of PROFIBUS DP operated in the isochronous mode). Their SYNC interfaces must be connected with one another using a looped through cable. The system clock transfer to the interface is realized differentially (RS485 signals). Table 15-3 Pin assignment of connector X71 Connector Pin Name Type Remark 1 NC - 2 XSYNC I/O Ground via 100K Negated clock signal 3 SYNC I/O Clock signal Connection for power supply fan X131 Table 15-4 Pin assignment of connector X131 Connector Pin Name Type Remark 1 GND - Ground (reference potential) 2 +12 V V Switched voltage supply 3 PG1 FAN_CLK I Clock signal Connection for device fan X132 Table 15-5 Pin assignment of connector X132 Connector Pin Name Type Remark 1 GND - Ground (reference potential) 2 +12 V V Switched voltage supply 3 CPU FAN_CLK I Clock signal Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 225 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces Tap for backup battery X2400 This connection is intended for expansion modules with their own CMOS-RAM. The voltage of the backup battery can be tapped here to back up the CMOS-RAM data of the expansion module. Table 15-6 Assignment of connector X2400 Connector Pin Name Type Remark 1 + VO Plus pole of battery over 100 Ohm 2 - VO Minus pole Note No battery should be connected to this connection. 15.3.2.2 Connector assignment of bus board The bus board is designed as a link between the motherboard and the expansion modules. It is mounted using two screws. The expansion modules are supplied with power via the bus PCB to motherboard connection. The bus PCB has two PCI slots (max. 185 mm long). Expansion modules for 5 V and 3.3 V according to the following PCI specification can be installed. - PCI: Rev. 2.2 - PCIe x16: Rev. 1.0 All PCI slots support the master mode. Slot 1 PCI Slot 2 PCI Express x16 12 V power supply connection for WinAC module Image 15-8 226 Bus PCB PCU 50.5-P Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces PCI slot pin assignment 5V System Environment Side B Side A 1 - 12 V TRST# 2 TCK + 12 V 3 Ground TMS 4 TDO TDI 5 +5V +5V 6 +5V INTA# 7 INTB# INTC# 8 INTD# +5V 9 PRSNT1# Reserved 10 Reserved +5V (I/O) 11 PRSNT2# Reserved 12 Ground Ground 13 Ground Ground 14 Reserved Reserved 15 Ground RST# 16 CLK +5V (I/O) 17 Ground GNT# 18 REQ# Ground 19 +5V (I/O) Reserved 20 AD[31] AD[30] 21 AD[29] + 3.3 V 22 Ground AD[28] 23 AD[27] AD[26] 24 AD[25] Ground 25 + 3.3 V AD[24] 26 C/BE[3]# IDSEL 27 AD[23] + 3.3 V 28 Ground AD[22] 29 AD[21] AD[20] 30 AD[19] Ground 31 + 3.3 V AD[18] 32 AD[17] AD[16] 33 C/BE[2]# + 3.3 V 34 Ground FRAME# 35 IRDY# Ground 36 + 3.3 V TRDY# 37 DEVSEL# Ground 38 Ground STOP# 39 LOCK# + 3.3 V 40 PERR# SDONE Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 227 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces 5V System Environment Side B Side A 41 + 3.3 V SBO# 42 SERR# Ground 43 + 3.3 V PAR 44 C/BE[1]# AD[15] 45 AD[14] + 3.3 V 46 Ground AD[13] 47 AD[12] AD[11] 48 AD[10] Ground 49 Ground AD[09] 50 CONNECTOR KEY 51 CONNECTOR KEY 52 AD[08] C/BE[0]# 53 AD[07] + 3.3 V 54 + 3.3 V AD[06] 55 AD[05] AD[04] 56 AD[03] Ground 57 Ground AD[02] 58 AD[01] AD[00] 59 +5V (I/O) +5V (I/O) 60 ACK64# REQ64# 61 +5V +5V 62 +5V +5V Connector assignment, PCI Express slot x16 5V System Environment 228 Side B Side A 1 P12V PRSNT1_N 2 P12V GND 3 P12V P12V 4 GND GND 5 SMBCLK PTCK 6 SMBDAT PTDI 7 GND PTDO 8 P3V3 PTMS 9 PTRST_N P3V3 10 Aux_3V3 P3V3 11 PCIE_Wake_N PCI RST_N 12 Reserved GND 13 GND GND 14 PCIE_TX_P(1) GND Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces 5V System Environment Side B Side A 15 PCIE_TX_N(1) GND 16 M PCIE_RX_P(1) 17 PRSNT2_N PCIE_RX_N(1) 18 GND GND 19 PCIE_TX_P(2) Reserved 20 PCIE_TX_N(2) GND 21 GND PCIE_RXP(2) 22 GND PCIE_RX_N(2) 23 PCIE_TX_P(3) GND 24 PCIE_TX_N(3) GND 25 GND PCIE_RX_P(3) 26 GND PCIE_RX_N(3) 27 PCIE_TX_P(4) GND 28 PCIE_TX_N(4) GND 29 GND PCIE_RX_P(4) 30 GND PCIE_RX_N(4) 31 PRSNT2_N GND 32 GND Reserved Pin assignment 12V power supply connection for WinAC module Pin Name Signal type 1 + 12 V V 12 V voltage 2 GND - Ground (reference potential) 3 GND - Ground (reference potential) 4 +5V V 5 V voltage Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Remark 229 PCU 50.5 15.3 Interfaces Interrupt assignment (PCI-IRQ) ,541XPEHU &RPPHQWV $&3,,54 ,54 +RVW3&,,54/LQH )XQFWLRQ 6ORW 3&, $ % & ' ( ) * + 3&,,173LQ$ = < 3&,,173LQ% = < 3&,,173LQ& = < 3&,,173LQ' = < 3&,,173LQ$ = < 3&,,173LQ% = < 3&,,173LQ& = < 3&,,173LQ' = < 3&,,173LQ$ = < 6ORW 3&, 6ORW 3&,H[SUHVV 3&,,173LQ% < 3&,,173LQ& = < 3&,,173LQ' < 1) In the APCI mode, host PCI-IRQ A to H is permanently assigned to IRQ 16 to 23. In the PIC mode, host PCI-IRQ A to H is automatically assigned to IRQ 0 to 15 from the BIOS. A certain assignment cannot be forced. Y Interrupt in the APIC mode (e.g. Windows XP) Z BIOS default interrupt in the PIC mode (e.g. DOS) Image 15-9 Interrupt assignment of the slot connectors on the bus PCB Exclusive PCI hardware interrupt Applications, which have high requirements regarding the interrupt performance, need a fast interrupt response time of the hardware. The PCI hardware interrupt should only be occupied by a resource in order that a fast hardware response time is possible. Exclusive interrupt in the APIC mode IRQ assignments for Windows systems, (APIC mode) Ethernet 1 16 1) 2) Ethernet 2 17 1) Profibus/MPI 19 1) PCI slot 1 20 1) PCI slot 2 21 1) PCI Express slot 16 1) 3) Precondition: The modules in the PCI slots each require only one interrupt Precondition: VGA and PCIexpress do not require an interrupt 3) Precondition: VGA does not require an interrupt - and Ethernet1 is disabled 1) 2) 230 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting Exclusive interrupts in the PIC mode The system BIOS is set when delivered so that for the system start, the interrupts are automatically assigned to the slots. Depending on the system expansion, it is therefore possible that the same interrupt is assigned to several slots. In this case this is called interrupt sharing. No exclusive interrupts are available in the PIC mode. You must disable system resources in order to obtain exclusive interrupts. It cannot be predicted which PIC interrupts will be assigned by BIOS at the next start. 15.4 Mounting 15.4.1 Preparation for mounting Mounting of the PCU 50.5 depends on how it is going to be used. A distinction is made between the following types of mounting: 1. Standard mounting: Operator panel on the machine - for assembly of PCU and operator panel front 2. Flat mounting: In the control cabinet - for PCU flat on the control cabinet rear wall 3. Book mounting: In the control cabinet - for PCU at an angle of 90 to the control cabinet rear wall You require a suitable set of mounting brackets for each mounting method. You can find the corresponding article number in Section "Accessories". Note First, screw the appropriate mounting brackets onto the PCU before you mount the PCU on an operator panel front. NOTICE Damage to the mainboard For installing the mounting brackets for the upright installation, use only M4x10 screws. For all remaining mounting brackets, use M3x8 and M4x8, (provided). The mainboard will be damaged if you screw in the M3x8 and M4x8 screws without mounting brackets, - or if you use other 8 mm screws (without a flat washer or tension ring) or - longer screws, - use the M4x10 screws for mounting the brackets on the PCU 50 (previous model). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 231 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting WARNING Securing the PCU on the wall or to the ceiling Ensure that the wall or ceiling can support four times the total weight of the PCU (including mounting brackets and additional expansion modules). The total weight of the PCU is max. 7 kg. Dimension drawings for mounting Image 15-10 PCU 50.5 dimension drawing for mounting without ETH strain relief 232 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting Image 15-11 PCU 50.5 dimension drawing for mounting with ETH strain relief Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 233 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting 15.4.2 Assembly of PCU and operator panel front (standard mounting) The figures shows the PCU and mounting bracket for standard mounting correctly aligned before screwing together (tightening torque M3: 0.8 Nm, tightening torque M4: 1.8 Nm). M4x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer M3x8 countersunk screw with high tension ring and washer Mounting bracket Image 15-12 PCU 50.5 with mounting brackets (standard mounting) Mounting the PCU 50.5 with an operator panel front depends on the size of the operator panel front: When mounting a PCU 50.5 and operator panel fronts with screen diagonals 15 inch, refer to Chapter: "OP 012," section: "Mounting" "Assembling OP 012 and PCU." Mounting a PCU 50.5 with an operator panel front OP 019 is described in Chapter: "OP 019," Section: "Mounting" "Assembling OP 019 and PCU 50.5". 15.4.3 Flat mounting Use the 'flat' mounting bracket (see section: "Accessories" "Overview") to mount the PCU flat onto the side panel of the control cabinet. 234 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Mount the two brackets on the right and left of the PCU one after the other. 2. Mount the PCU on the side panel of the control cabinet in accordance with the mounting instructions (see Section: "Mounting instructions"). Image 15-13 PCU 50.5 with bracket for flat mounting Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 235 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting Dimension drawing $ 6ORWVIRU0PRXQWLQJVFUHZV WLJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P $ Image 15-14 Dimension drawing, PCU 50.5 mounted flat 15.4.4 Upright mounting Use the 'upright' mounting bracket (see Section: "Accessories" "Overview"), to mount the PCU in the control cabinet. 236 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting Two mounting positions are possible: Power switch at the top Power switch at the bottom Procedure 1. Mount the rear panel bracket on the right side of the PCU (see the diagram). 2. Mount the PCU at a 90 angle in the control cabinet. 'Upright' mounting bracket Image 15-15 PCU 50.5 with mounting bracket for upright mounting (power switch at the top) Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 237 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting Dimension drawing $ $%6ORWVIRUPRXQWLQJVFUHZV 0 WLJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P RU 0 WLJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P $ % % Image 15-16 Dimension drawing for the upright mounting of the PCU 50.5 (power switch at the top) 238 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting $ $ % 0 WLJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P RU 0 WLJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P $%6ORWVIRUPRXQWLQJVFUHZV % Image 15-17 Dimension drawing for the upright mounting of the PCU 50.5 (power switch at the bottom) 15.4.5 Notes on installation Observe the following during installation: Avoid extreme environmental conditions as far as possible. Protect the PCU from severe vibrations, jolts, dust, humidity and heat. An external fire protection housing is required. Do not expose the PCU directly to the sun's rays. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 239 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting Install the device in such a way that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result. Ventilation clearances: - Both fan sides: 50 mm each. - On top, on the bottom, on the rear side: 10 mm (see Fig.) Make sure that the vent slots are not covered. Permissible mounting positions of the PCU 50.5 acc. to UL508 Position of hard disk Inclined position On the basis of the standard mounting positions shown above (checked with a variance of 5), an inclined position of up to 20 is permitted if sufficient ventilation is still ensured. 15.4.6 Connecting Ethernet/USB strain relief The Ethernet/USB strain relief supplied in the product package is used to prevent accidental removal of the Ethernet cable and Industrial Ethernet FastConnect connector from the device. You need two cable ties to use the strain relief. In addition to the Ethernet cables, you can also use this strain relief to protect the four USB cables from inadvertent removal. Preconditions Take the strain relief , the cable tie and the two screws (M3) from the accessories pack provided. To secure the strain relief, you will need a TORX T10 screwdriver. 240 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.4 Mounting Procedure 1. Fasten the Ethernet/USB strain relief to the de vice enclosure using two oval-head screws (M3 thread). 2. Connect the network/USB cable and attach it to the strain relief using cable ties . 15.4.7 Relocating the service module When delivered, the service module is integrated in the cover, see the top view of the PCU 50.5 in ChapterDescription (Page 213). For upright mounting in the control cabinet, due to the serviceability, the service module should be relocated onto the side panel next to the equipment fan. Preparations 1. Disconnect the device from the line supply. 2. Remove the enclosure cover of the motherboard. Procedure 1. Loosen the screws for the enclosure cov er of the service module and swing out the housing cover to the rear with the still attached service module. 2. Release the fixing screws of the service module and place it down in the direction of the new mounting location. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 241 PCU 50.5 15.5 Connecting 3. Remove the cover for the service mod ule and mount it at the new location. 4. Now mount the service module at the new location. Before closing the cover of the housing, ensure that the ribbon cable is correctly folded. 15.5 Connecting 15.5.1 Power supply The PCU 50.5 is supplied with 24 V DC. Preconditions WARNING Impermissible cable cross-sections can damage the PCU The cable cross-section must be adapted to the short-circuit current of the 24 V DC power source so that no damage is caused by the cables if a short-circuit occurs. Only cables with a cross-section of at least 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) and maximum 3.3 mm2 (AWG12) may be connected. Note The 24 V DC power source must be adapted to the input data of the PCU (see Calculating the power (Page 264)). Ensure that the PCU's On/Off switch is in the '0' (Off) position to prevent unintentional startup of the device when connecting it to the power supply. 242 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.5 Connecting Procedure 1. Switch off the 24 V DC power source. 2. Connect the DC connector 24 V DC Ground Protective conductor 3. Fasten the cable with the supplied line con nector interlock, if necessary. Note Reverse polarity protection The DC power supply (24 V; -15% / +20%) has a mechanism to protect against reverse polarity. The unit is not damaged if the cables and ground are connected, interchanged. The unit does not switch on. After the power supply has been connected correctly, the unit will again be ready to operate. 15.5.2 Equipotential A low-impedance ground connection ensures that interference signals generated by external power supply cables, signal cables or cables to the I/O modules are safely discharged to ground. The equipotential bonding terminal on the device (large surface, large-area contact) must be connected with the central grounding point of the cabinet or plant in which the PCU is to Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 243 PCU 50.5 15.5 Connecting be installed. The minimum cross section must not fall below 5 mm2. Image 15-18 PCU 50.5 equipotential bonding connection 15.5.3 I/O devices Note When connecting up I/O devices, check that they are suitable for industrial applications acc. to EN 61000-6-2:2001. Operator panel front If you are using the PCU together with an operator front panel, before switching on the PCU first connect up the operator front panel. Note Simultaneous operation of the operator panel and monitor is no longer activated as standard under Windows XP. If required, activate in the Windows user interface. DVI / VGA monitor Only switch on the PCU once you have connected the external monitor. Otherwise, this interface is automatically deactivated. CF card Only switch on the PCU once you have plugged in the CompactFlash card. The CompactFlash interface is not capable of acting as a hot-plug. Never plug-in or pull a card while the PCU is operating. 244 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning Units based on USB You can connect or disconnect devices based on USB (USB 1.1 Full Speed or 2.0 Hi-Speed) during PCU operation if this is supported by the operating system (e.g. Windows XP). Note If you are using commercially available USB devices, the interference immunity of the entire system can be reduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices. Information on which connection cable is required and how to adapt and set the interface can be found in the User's Manual for your I/O device. 15.6 Commissioning 15.6.1 BIOS 15.6.1.1 BIOS powering up Once you have switched the PCU on, the preinstalled system powers up automatically. During powering up, the parameters saved in the BIOS setup take effect. If necessary, you can reactivate the factory-preset parameters (default values) at anytime during the setup using the <F2> key. 1. Press the <F9> (default load) key to do this. 2. Store the settings by pressing the <F10> button (save settings). Once powering up is complete, the start screen is displayed (see IM8: Commissioning the PCU base software). Checking the boot sequence If you want to check or change the boot sequence: 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. By pressing <F12>, the boot menu and the boot options are displayed. Booting can also be optionally started from other devices (e.g. USB-FlashDrive). Note When setting up the boot operation, observe the service switch position, see SectionService module (Page 217). 3. Select the desired boot device and press the enter key. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 245 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning Booting using the USB FlashDrive If you connect an external USB device or start from a boot-capable USB FlashDrive for servicing purposes, you have to manually call up the USB device from setup. You have three options: USB device automatically boots 1. Set the service switch to position "E". 2. After a restart, booting is realized automatically from the USB device. 3. For normal operation, set back to "0". USB device is entered in the boot list (normal operation) 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. When requested, press the <F12> key. 3. Select the desired device from the boot list and confirm. USB device is not entered in boot list 1. Switch on the PCU. 2. Press the <F2> key. 3. Go to the menu bar for <Boot>. 4. Use the '' button to reach the "Legacy Boot Type Order" entry and select the USB device you want to enter in the boot list. 5. If you want to change the sequence of devices within the boot list, select the corresponding device and press the '+' key to move further up the list or the '-' key to move further down the list. 6. Save the settings by pressing the <F10> key and confirm the changes with "Yes". 7. Then restart the PCU. PCU doesn't boot up If the PCU no longer boots up as a result of incorrect settings in the BIOS: 1. Take the battery out (see section: "Spare parts" "Replacement" "Battery"). 2. Bridge the pins of the PCU's battery connector for approx. 10 seconds with a conductive object. 3. Then wait approx. 1 minute. 4. Put the battery back in. All the BIOS settings (including time and date) are thereby reset. 5. You can set the time and date using the <F2> key. 6. Use the <F9> button to load the default values and the <F10> button to save these. 246 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning 15.6.1.2 Changing the BIOS settings If additional components (e.g. an external USB diskette drive) are attached or removed, you may need to change the BIOS settings (see Section: "BIOS start up" "Booting using the USB FlashDrive"). NOTICE Incorrect BIOS settings can prevent the system startup Only change the BIOS settings if you are fully aware of the consequences of doing so! Incorrect settings may result in the entire system (including the operating system) no longer starting (see Section: "BIOS start up" "PCU not booting up"). Changing the BIOS settings using the standard keyboard Creating your own user profile Use the "User" profile in the setup menu if you need your own settings in the BIOS and want to permanently save these settings (also used after changing the battery). 1. Switch on the PCU and wait a few seconds. 2. Once you have been prompted to switch to the BIOS setup, press the <F2> button. The BIOS Setup menu will appear. 3. Select "User" under "Exit" "Profile". 4. Make your specific settings in the other menu items. 5. Save the new settings permanently using the <F10> button by confirming the dialog with "Yes". 6. Your specific settings will be available once the machine has been restarted. Calling up your own user profile As soon as you select the "User" selection from the "Exit" "Profile" setup setting and save with the <F10> button and "Yes" the values saved originally appear after a reboot, provided that you do not change any data (with the exception of the date and time). Changing data (with the exception of the date and time) is the same as creating a new user profile (see "Creating your own user profile"). Changing the BIOS settings via an operator panel front 1. Switch on the PCU and wait a few seconds. 2. Once you have been prompted to switch to the BIOS setup, press the <F2> button. The BIOS Setup menu will appear. 3. Use the cursor keys for navigating in the menu to the desired selection field (e.g. "Disk A:"). 4. Change the setting using the <+> key (press <SHIFT> and <X> at the same time) or the <-> key on in the numeric keypad. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 247 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning 5. You can also use the cursor keys <> (right) and <> (left) to reach other setup menu items. 6. Press the <Esc> button (<Alarm Cancel> button) to go to the "Exit" menu. (This menu can also be reached by pressing and holding down the <> (right) cursor key.) 7. Press the <Input> key to quit the setup menu. 8. Press the <Input> key to confirm your decision to exit BIOS Setup with "Yes". The system then starts (see Section: "BIOS startup"). 6+,)7 $/$50 &$1&(/ 6KLIWNH\ (VFDSHNH\ ,QSXWNH\ ,1387 SUHVV)!WRHQWHU%,26VHWXS )NH\ Image 15-19 Using the BIOS Setup via an operator panel front 15.6.2 System start More information on the system start can be found in the manual "IM8 start-up of PCU base software." 15.6.3 Switching off / reset Exiting Windows To close the operating system, select "Start" "Shut down". This ensures that the system and operating system can be restarted without any problems. Switching off the PCU Once you have closed and shut down Windows, the power supply module of the PCU is still switched on. If you also want to switch off the power supply, tip the PCU's On/Off switch to the "0" position. 248 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning Reset The PCU does not have a special reset button to restart the system. If you want to enforce a system restart, use the On/Off switch to switch your PCU off and on again. CAUTION Residual currents can cause injuries When undertaking service work (opening the PCU), also withdraw the line connector to the 24 V power supply. This is the only way of totally de-energizing the unit! 15.6.4 Touchscreen calibration If you connect a touch panel (e.g. TP 015A) to the PCU, you must recalibrate the touch screen of this operator panel front. The touch software, required for the calibration, is included in the PCU base software. Procedure A functioning "touch panel with PCU 50.5" is required. Note If you take too long to calibrate the device, the whole process is canceled by a "timeout" and you have to start again from the beginning. 1. Boot up the system in service mode. 2. Start the SINUMERIK desktop (password-protected). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 249 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning 3. Call the calibration menu via "Start" "Programs" "Touchware" "UPDD" (see figure). Note On the TP 015A the default calibration is centrosymmetric to the center point. This means that you must press the top right of the screen to activate the "Start" button (bottom left). Image 15-20 Menu for touch screen calibration (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) Note Depending on the software version and setting, the screen can include 2, 4 or 5 calibration points. You can toggle between 2 and 5 points (Touchware version 5.63 SR3) or between 2 and 4 points (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) from the menu "Tools" "Options" "Advanced" "Style". 250 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning 4. Press the "Calibrate" button. The following display appears on the screen: Image 15-21 Calibration screen 5. Using the tip of one finger, touch the calibration point indicated by the hand symbol as accurately as possible for as long as the "Hold" prompt is displayed. The "Hold" prompt disappears after a few seconds and the hand moves to the next calibration point. 6. Repeat the instructions in step 5 until all available points have been calibrated. Once the calibration point parameters have been saved, the following menu appears: Image 15-22 Test menu 7. To test the calibration values, move your finger around the screen and observe the cursor. If necessary, recalibrate using "Calibrate". 8. Exit the calibration menu via "Done" "Close". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 251 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning 15.6.5 Operation with an S7-CPU (without NCU) Application range MCP communication is understood to be the transfer of I/O images to the following components: two machine control panels one HHU two direct key units of an OP The machine control panel signals are communicated on SINUMERIK systems using the FB1 (MCP communication). On more complex systems, the FB9 is used to carry out the M:N switchover. The parameters are filed in DB7 and can be changed by the FB9. Since these blocks are not available in the SIMATIC environment, the FB9 Proxy assumes these tasks. Preconditions It is a requirement that a DB19 is available on the installed S7-CPU in accordance with SINUMERIK specifications: PCU 50.5 with HMI application The FB9 proxy only functions if the MCP client (mcpdrv) is also running. Creating DB19 in the PLC user program The user must create the DB19 for the PLC user program. If the DB19 is copied from an existing PLC project to a NCU, it may be that it is not saved during the series machine startup. The DB19 copied from the existing SINUMERIK project was generated by the basic program and a corresponding generic bit set. This bit is evaluated during a series machine startup and the block would NOT be saved, as it has been generated by the system. A new data block (DB19) is created via STEP 7 with the following structure: STRUCT: Array [-32768..-32371] type: BYTE Address Name 0.0 Type Start value STRUCT +0.0 DB_VAR ARRAY(-32768 ... -32371) +1.0 BYTE =398.0 END_STRUCT A flag is not set for blocks created by the user, i.e. not created by the system, and the block is always saved during the series machine startup. Operation with a PCU 50.5 and SINUMERIK Operate The two utility programs, FB9 proxy and MCP Client, are not started automatically by the system on the PCU 50.5. To start the two utilities, changes are made in the following files: systemconfiguration.ini file with the following contents: 252 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning In the [processes] section, the MCP Client and the FB9 Proxy need to be entered after the CP entry. ... [processes] PROC000= image:=cp_840di, process:=CP_840di, background:=true PROC001= image:=slsmhmihost, process:=SlHmiHost1, deferred:=true PROC002= image:=mcpdrv, process:=mcpdrv, background:=true PROC003= image:=fb9proxy, process:=fb9proxy, background:=true 15.6.6 Configuring the 'fb9_proxy.ini' file Configuring the fb9_proxy.ini file Example of configuration file when supplied: [PLC] ;# Set GET_IP_BY_HMI to '0', if you want a static connection to PLC ;# with specified IP address ;# otherwise FB9-Proxy tries to determine IP address and CP interface ;# from mmc.ini of HMI ;GET_IP_BY_HMI = 1 ;# if GET_IP_BY_HMI is set to '1' the following key 'IP ADDRESS' ;# has no effect ;# otherwise this key determines the static IP address of the PLC ;IP-ADDRESS = 192.168.214.241 ;# if GET_IP_BY_HMI is set to '1' the following key ' CP-INTERFACE ' ;# has no effect ;# otherwise this key determines the interface to the shared memory ;# of the CP software. ;# The key is useful to avoid collisions between FB9-Proxy and ;# the HMI. The CP software supports two shared memory interfaces. ;# Normally one interface is used by the HMI. ;# HMI Embedded and HMI sl use the interface with index 1. ;# So the FB9-Proxy uses by default the interface with index 2. ;# HMI Advanced uses the interface with index 2, so you have ;# to instruct the FB9-Proxy to use the interface with index 1. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 253 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning ;CP-INTERFACE = 2 ;# 2 bytes for PLC alarms ;ALARM = AB80 ;# address of 2 bytes for life sign of fb9proxy ;LIFESIGN = AB82 ;# cycle for transmission of life sign ;# (valid values between 200 and 2000 milliseconds) ;LIFECYCLE = 200 [MCP1] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB0 ;OUT = AB0 [MCP2] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB64 ;OUT = AB64 [HHU] ;BUS-ADDRESS = ? ;PROFILE = 0 ;IN = EB32 ;OUT = AB32 [DCK1] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 ;PROFILE = 1 ;IN = EB16 ;OUT = AB16 [DCK2] ;BUS-ADDRESS = 6 254 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning ;PROFILE = 1 ;IN = EB48 ;OUT = AB48 Connection to the PLC In the [PLC] section, the "IP-ADDRESS" key specifies the IP address of the S7-CPU. A connection is made to this PLC. This key is only evaluated if no IP address for the PLC is found in the mmc.ini file. The IP address of the S7-CPU can be set via GET_IP_BY_HMI : The operator can define whether the IP address of the PLC is obtained from the mmc.ini or whether a static IP address is defined. GET_IP_BY_HMI = 1 IP address is obtained from the mmc.ini. GET_IP_BY_HMI = 0 Static IP address is defined via fb9_proxy.ini. The "LIFESIGN" key can be used to obtain a sign of life from the FB9 Proxy on the PLC. The "ALARM" key indicates the location in the PLC to which the two alarm bytes should be written. If this key does not exist, the alarm bytes are not transferred. Triggering alarms In contrast to the original FB9, it is not possible for the FB9 Proxy to trigger PLC alarms. The user program on the SIMATIC CPU can decide whether or not alarms are triggered. When the cause of the alarm has been remedied and this is detected by the FB9 Proxy, the relevant bit is reset. If the alarms are acknowledged, the user program on the SIMATIC CPU can reset the bits itself. The alarms are entered in a byte array that can be transferred to the PLC. For this purpose, the variable "ALARM" must be specified in the [PLC] section in the INI file. In the case of transitional edges 01, the PLC user program can trigger the relevant alarms and, in the case of transitional edges 10, it can cancel the alarms again. The alarm bits are written to AB30 and AB31 by default. List of alarms that can be triggered by FB9 Proxy via MCP communication: Alarm number Alarm text 400260 Failure of machine control panel 1 AB30.0 400261 Failure of machine control panel 2 AB30.1 400262 Failure of manual operating device AB30.2 400274 Direct key 1 failed AB30.3 400275 Direct key 2 failed AB30.4 410900 M:N - call waiting discontinued AB31.0 410901 M:N - HMI 1 not responding to displacement AB31.1 410902 M:N - HMI 1 is not going offline AB31.2 410903 M:N - HMI 2 not responding to displacement AB31.3 410904 M:N - HMI 2 is not going offline AB31.4 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Bit 255 PCU 50.5 15.6 Commissioning Alarm number Alarm text 410905 M:N - HMI connection to assigned interface not available AB31.5 Bit 410906 M:N - No sign of life on an HMI AB31.6 References: Diagnostics Manual, PLC Alarms Connection to additional components The contents of the [MCP1], [MCP2], [HHU], [DCK1] and [DCK2] sections are configured in exactly the same way and are used to configure the connections to the MCP/DCK devices: If the "BUS-ADDRESS" key exists, a static connection is set up for the relevant device, i.e. no dynamic request is required in the DB19 from an HMI application. If, however, a dynamic request is made by an HMI application, the static connection is stopped and the dynamic connection is made. The "PROFILE" key indicates whether the standard parameter set or the direct key parameter set should be used from the MCP_CLIENT.INI file. Default: PROFILE=0 PROFILE=1 for machine control panels and HHU for direct keys The "IN" key is used for addressing the inputs (key information) and indicates the address to which information should be written. The "OUT" key is used for addressing the outputs (LED information) and indicates the address from which information is read. The length of the inputs and outputs is determined directly by the device and, therefore, does not need to be indicated. However, it is important to ensure that the addressing range is adequately dimensioned, so that information does not overlap. For example, if the address EB0 is configured for the MCP1 inputs and an HT 8 and an MCP483 are available for the M:N switchover, the direct key inputs can only be configured from EB16. The MCP483 inputs are 14 bytes long. Note m:n configuration If there is an HMI application in the system that supplies the m:n interface in the DB19, the FB9 proxy dynamically establishes the connections with the names "MCP1" and "DCK1". In this case, these two connections cannot be configured statically. Therefore, use to the connections with the names "MCP2", "HHU" and "DCK2" instead. The names have been selected with reference to the FB9 and are not linked to any semantics. The connection with the name "HHU" can also be used for an MCP. For addresses for the memory areas in the PLC, expressions such as EBx, ABx, MBx and DBy.DBBx can be used. These are always byte addresses. 256 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.7 Alarm, error and system messages Examples: IN = EB0 OUT = DB100.DBB20 Inputs are written to the PLC from EB0. Outputs are read from DB100 from byte 20. 15.7 Alarm, error and system messages 15.7.1 Boot error messages BIOS first performs a Power On Self Test (POST) within the boot routine to verify proper operation of certain functional units of the PC. The boot sequence is interrupted immediately if fatal errors occur. If the test does not return an error, the BIOS initializes and tests additional functional units. In this startup phase, the graphics controller is initialized and any error messages are output to the screen. The error messages output by the system BIOS are listed below. For information on error messages output by the operating system or programs, refer to the corresponding manuals. On-screen error messages On-screen error message Meaning / suggestions Error - CMOS battery failed The battery on the CPU module is defective or dead. Contact your technical support team. Error - SMART failure detected on HDD Hard disk error: An error bound suggested by the manufacturer has been exceeded. The operation of the hard disk is not secure. The hard disk must be replaced. Contact your technical support. Error - Keyboard error Check whether the keyboard is properly connected. Keyboard faults Contact your technical support. Notice: This error is not displayed per default, and must first be activated in the setup. No bootable device -- Please re start system Possible causes: No operating system present Wrong drive addressed (disk in drive A/B) Incorrect active boot partition Incorrect drive entries in the setup Hard disk is not connected / defective Error - Realtime clock has lost power Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Clock chip error. Contact your technical support team. 257 PCU 50.5 15.7 Alarm, error and system messages 15.7.2 BIOS beep codes The essential POST codes are subsequently listed in the sequence in which they occur. Contact Technical Support for information on all other POST codes. Display Description 4DH MonoTonicCounter Initial MonoTonicCounter initialization Service case 4EH CPU Middle Initial CPU initialization Service case 4FH Multi-processor Middle Initial Multiprocessor initialization Service case 50H SMBUS Driver Initial SMBUS driver initialization Service case 51H SMART-Timer Initial SMART timer initialization Service case 52H RTC Initial RTC initialization Service case 53H SATA Controller early initial Preliminary initialization of the SATA controller Service case 54H Setup SMM Control service SSM control service Service case 55H Setup Legacy Interruput service Setup Legacy Interrupt service 01H CPU power on and switch to Protec Switch to protected mode ted mode Service case 02H Patching CPU microcode Load CPU microcode Service case 03H Setup Cache as RAM Setup cache as RAM Service case 04H PCIE MMIO Base Address initial Initialize PCIE Service case 05H CPU Generic Machine Status Regis Initialize CPU Machine Status Regis ter initial ter Service case 06H Setup CPU speed Define CPU speed Service case 07H Cache as RAM test Perform RAM test on cache Service case 08H Tune CPU frequency ratio to maxi mum level Set CPU frequency Service case 09H Setup BIOS ROM cache Setup BIOS ROM cache Service case 0AH Enter Boot Firmware Volume Call the boot firmware memory area Service case 70H Super I/O initial Initializing the super I/O Service case 71H CPU Early Initial Initialize CPU register Service case 72H Multi-processor Early initial Multiprocessor initialization Service case 73H HyperTransport initial Initialize hyper transport functionality Service case 74H PCIE MMIO BAR Initial Initialize PCIE register Service case 75H North Bridge Early Initial Initializing the North bridge Service case 76H South Bridge Early Initial Initializing the South bridge Service case 77H PCIE Training Training phase of the PCIE devices Service case 79H SMBUS Early Initial Initializing the SM bus Service case 41H South bridge Serial Peripheral Inter Initializing the serial peripheral inter face initial face in the South bridge Service case 42H Setup Reset service Setup Reset service Service case 43H South bridge Serial GPIO initial Initializing the serial GPIO Service case 44H Setup SMM ACCESS service Setup SMM access service Service case 45H North bridge Middle initial Initializing the North bridge Service case 46H Super I/O DXE initial Initializing the super IO Service case 47H Setup Legacy Region service Setup service legacy area Service case 258 Remedy Service case Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.7 Alarm, error and system messages Display Description 48H South Bridge Middle Initial Initializing the South bridge Remedy Service case 49H Identify Flash device Identify the FLASH type Service case 4AH Fault Tolerant Write verification Testing the write error tolerance Service case 4BH Variable Service Initial Initialization of the variable service Service case 4CH Fail to initial Variable Service Error when initializing the variable service Service case 26H Dispatch option ROMs Calling the legacy option roms Service case 27H Get boot device information Determining the boot device informa tion Service case HD-Lock active HD interlocking not released Release lock: Set HD-lock to "Op erating". 28H End of boot selection Boot selection exited Service case 29H Enter Setup Menu Call in setup Service case 2AH Enter Boot manager Call boot manager Service case 2BH Try to boot system to OS Booting the OS Service case 2CH Shadow Misc Option ROM Copying the legacy option ROM to the RAM Service case 2DH Save S3 resume required data in RAM Prepare RAM for the operating state S3 Service case 2EH Last Chipset initial before boot to OS Final chipset initialization before the OS boot Service case 2FH Start to boot Legacy OS Boot legacy OS Service case 30H Start to boot UEFI OS Boot UEFI OS Service case 31H Prepare to Boot to Legacy OS Preparation for booting the legacy OS Service case 32H Send END of POST Message to ME via HECI Exit the boot service Service case 33H Last Chipset initial before boot to Legacy OS. Final chipset initialization before the legacy OS boot Service case 34H Ready to Boot Legacy OS. Call to boot the OS Service case 35H Fast recovery start flash Starting the BIOS recovery function Service case F9H No Boot Device No BOOT device found Service case FBH UEFI Boot Start Image Booting from a UEFI image Service case FDH Legacy 16 boot entry Start legacy 16 boot Service case FEH Try to Boot with INT 19 Booting with INT 19 Service case E5H System wakeup from S5 Reboot from operating state S5 Service case 10H Enter Boot Device Selection entry Phase boot device selection Service case 11H Install Hotkey service Installation of the hotkey service Service case 12H Alert Standard Format Initial Initialize alert standard format Service case 13H PCI enumeration Enumerate PCI bus Service case 14H PCI resource assign complete Assign PCI resources As a test, disable HW compo nents in setup or remove expan sion modules that have been in stalled. 15H PCI enumeration complete PCI enumeration completed Service case Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 259 PCU 50.5 15.7 Alarm, error and system messages Display Description 16H Keyboard Controller, Keyboard and Mouse initial Initialization of keyboard and mouse Run a test by replacing the key board/mouse 17H Video device initial Initialize the graphic interface Service case 18H Error report device initial Initialize standard error output Service case 19H USB host controller initial Initialize USB host controller Service case 1AH USB BUS driver initial Initialize USB bus driver Service case 1BH USB device driver initial Initialize USB device driver Service case 1CH Console device initial fail Initializing the error of the console Service case 1DH Display logo or system information Display logo or system information Service case 1EH IDE controller initial Initializing the IDE controller Service case 1FH SATA controller initial Initializing the SATA controller Service case 20H Super IO controller initial Initializing the super IO Service case 21H ISA BUS driver initial Initializing the ISA bus driver Service case 22H Floppy device initial Initializing the floppy interface Service case 23H Serial device initial Initializing the serial interface Service case 24H IDE device initial Initializing the IDE interface Service case 25H AHCI device initial Initializing the AHCI interface Service case 56H Relocate SMM BASE Reassign SMM basis Service case 57H SMI test Test SMI Service case 58H VTD Initial Initialize the I/O virtualization (VTD) Service case 59H Legacy BIOS initial Legacy BIOS initialization Service case 5AH Legacy interrupt function initial Legacy interrupt initialization Service case 5BH ACPI Table Initial ACPI tables initialization Service case 5CH Setup SB SMM Dispatcher service SMM dispatcher service Service case 5DH Setup SB IOTRAP Service SouthBridge IOTRAP service Service case 5EH Build AMT (Active Management Technology) Table Initializing the AMT (Active Manage ment Technology) table Service case 5FH Processor Power Management Ini tial Initializing the processor power man agement Service case 60H Host Embedded Controller Interfa ces Initial Initializing the host embedded control Service case ler interface 61H Variable store garbage collection and reclaim operation Loading the variable memory Service case 7AH Clock Generator Initial Initializing the clock generator Service case 7BH Internal Graphic device early initial, First initialization of the graphic inter face Service case 7CH Host Embedded Controller Interfa ces Initial Initializing the host embedded control Service case ler interface 7DH Watchdog timer initial Initializing the watchdog timer Service case 7EH Memory Initial for Normal boot Memory initialization during the PEI phase Replace the memory modules 7FH Memory Initial for Crisis Recovery Memory initialization for BIOS recov ery Replace the memory modules 80H Simple Memory test Memory test Replace the memory modules 260 Remedy Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.7 Alarm, error and system messages Display Description Remedy 81H Trusted Execution Technology func Initializing the Trusted Execution tion early initial Technology Service case 82H Start to use Memory Start memory use Service case 83H Set cache for physical memory Use cache as physical memory Service case 84H Recovery device initial Initialize the device for BIOS recovery Service case 85H Found Recovery image BIOS recovery image found Service case 86H Recovery image not found BIOS recovery image not found Check whether the BIOS recov ery image exists on the recovery medium (e.g. USB FlashDrive). 87H Load Recovery Image complete Load BIOS recovery image exited Service case 88H Start Flash BIOS with Recovery im age Starting with flash BIOS recovery im age Service case 89H Loading BIOS image to RAM Copy BIOS image to RAM Service case 8AH Loading Driver Execution Environ ment (DXE) core Load Driver Execution Environment (DXE) program Service case 8BH Enter DXE core Start DXE program Service case Special codes The BIOS does not generate any beep codes. 15.7.3 Status codes of the diagnostics display during the system power up Table 15-7 Status codes of the diagnostics display during the system power up LED H1 LED H2 7-segment display H1/H2 Status Orange Orange Output of the BIOS post co des After switching on the system Orange Off Orange Off Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 After cycling the BIOS After starting Windows 1 0 Starting Windows Loading of the device drivers required by Windows 2 0 PCU hardware service The PCU hardware service has been started. 5 0 Network Wait for network interfaces to be ready 8 0 TCU support test step 1 Wait for FTP server to start 9 0 TCU support test step 2 Wait for TCU network boot proc ess and starting of the TCU hardware service A 0 TCU support test step 3 Wait for VNC server to start 261 PCU 50.5 15.8 Technical data LED H1 15.7.4 7-segment display H1/H2 Status B 0 - - E 0 PCU-Basesoftware General fault: see Windows "Event Viewer" Status codes of the diagnostics display during operation Table 15-8 15.7.5 LED H2 Status codes of the diagnostics display during operation LED H1 LED H2 Flashing green -- Flashing red -- 7-segment display H1/H2 Status 0 0 OK 1 0 Temperature alarm Housing or CPU temperature; temperature above limit value (SOM error) 2 0 Fan alarm Housing or CPU: Low fan speed or fan failure (SOM error) 3 0 Hard disk alarm S.M.A.R.T hard disk error 6 0 Error: VNC server failure or VNC serv er service stopped Status codes of the diagnostics display during the shutdown process Table 15-9 Status codes of the diagnostics display during the shutdown process LED H1 LED H2 Flashing red/ green -- 15.8 Technical data 15.8.1 PCU 50.5 7-segment display H1/H2 5 0 Status Shutdown in progress Safety Safety class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 262 I (SELV) according to EN 61140 IP 20 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.8 Technical data Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage 24 VDC (20.4 V ... 28.8 V) Input current max. 8 A (starting current: max. 14 A at max. 30 ms) Max. current output Power consumption USB external, each 0.5 A (in total: 1.2 A) 3.3 V 2A 5V 2A 12 V 0.3 A -12 V 0.05 A PCU basic unit PCI slots typ. 48 W (at 55 C) max. 15 W 1) Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 297 mm Height: 267 mm Depth: 82 mm Weight approx. 4.5 kg Slot 1/2: Card length, max. 185 mm (measured without the slot plate) Mechanical environmental condi tions Operation Transport (in transport packaging) Vibratory load 10 - 58 Hz: 0.075 mm 58 - 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 DIN IEC 60068-2-6 5 - 9 Hz: 6.2 mm 9 - 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2 DIN IEC 60068-2-6 Shock load 50 m/s2, 30 ms 18 shocks DIN IEC60068-2-27 300 m/s2, 6 ms 18 shocks DIN IEC60068-2-27 Noise < 55 dB (A) according to EN ISO 7779 Climatic environmental conditions Heat dissipation Open-circuit ventilation Condensation, spraying water, and icing Supply air Applicable standards Climate class Temperature limits Temperature change Limits for relative humidity Not permitted Without aggressive gases, dusts and oils Operation Transport (in transport packaging) DIN IEC 60068-2-1 DIN IEC 60068-2-2 / -2-14 3K5 1K3 / 2K4 5 ... 55 C Max. 10 K/h Max. 18 K/h 5 ... 80% at 25 C 5 ... 95% at 25 C Perm. change in the relative air humidity 1) -20 ... 60 2) max. 0.1 %/min All of the slots must not exceed this total power. Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 263 PCU 50.5 15.8 Technical data 15.8.2 Calculating the power Component Power Base device with SSD typ. 48 W / max. 76 W USB expansion max. PCI/PCIe expansion max. 15 W* (55C) Panel interface max. 53 W *) Total max. 150 W *) 6W with the onboard graphic disabled, max. 30 W (50C) Active power drawn at 24 V DC: max. 190 W / 210 W 15.8.3 Power failure detection If the power supply fails for longer than 5 ms, a power supply failure signal is output using the NAU signal. This signal is evaluated in the software, and transferred to the corresponding application. This means that e.g. data can be saved within 20 ms before the device hardware stops as the result of a central reset (POWER GOOD end). Power failure alarm schematic: '&9 32:(5*22' 1$8 7 7 T1 preset time: min. 5 ms T2 hold-up time: min. 20 ms (data save time) Image 15-23 NAU signal of the 24 V DC power supply 264 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts 15.9 Spare parts 15.9.1 Overview The following spare parts are available for the PCU 50.5: Component Article number SSD 80 GB-SATA for Win7 6FC5247-0AF08-6AA0 for 6FC5210-0DF52-3AA0, 6FC5210-0DF53-3AA0 SSD 40 GB-SATA for WinXP 6FC5247-0AF08-5AA0 for 6FC5210-0DF52-2AA0, 6FC5210-0DF53-2AA0 15.9.2 Device fan A5E02268846 Power supply fan A5E02268847 Power supply 24 VDC / 150 W A5E30947477 24 VDC power supply connector, 3-pin (5 units) A5E03404000 CMOS battery 3 V Lithium CR 1/2 AA, PC A5E00331143 Service module A5E02518244 Replace To maintain high system availability, we recommend the preventative replacement of those PC components that are subject to wear. The table below indicates the intervals for this replacement. Component Replacement interval Hard disk drive SSD > 5 years Fan 5-7 years CMOS backup battery 4/5 years SSD When compared to conventional hard disks, solid-state disks are significantly more rugged against mechanical vibration and shock and are less sensitive to temperature. However, due to the fact that the write cycles are limited, SSDs are wearing parts, i.e. write access operations progressively wear the internal flash blocks. However, a long availability can be achieved through preventive internal measures such as wear leveling, keeping reserve blocks or error correction mechanisms. In the industrial environment, a service life can be assumed that is higher than for conventional mechanical hard disks and according to what we know today, is > 5 years. The write load that occurs is a significant factor that influences the life expectancy. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 265 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts Fan Fans are wearing parts. The fan speed is monitored and in the event of a failure an alarm is issued. Pollution is the main cause of fan failure. A visual inspection should be made as a first criterion for replacement. If the fan has a high degree of accumulated dirt, it should be replaced. If no pollution is present, then the usage time should be used as the criterion. The service life of the fans also depends on the operating conditions (temperature, humidity, number of operating hours per day), so that no fixed limits for all applications can be specified. In the field, under average industrial conditions, a replacement interval of 5-7 years has proven itself. Backup battery Batteries are wearing parts. They should be replaced every 5 years to ensure that the device functions permanently. If an integrated PCI plug-in card is also supplied (central battery concept), preventive replacement intervals are shortened to 4 years. 15.9.2.1 SSD module Preparation Disconnect the device from the line supply. Note The new module must be of the same type or a compatible successor. 266 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts Replacing an SSD module 1. Remove the module racks of the SSD and place this on the device. 2. Disconnect the power supply cable and the data cable from the main board and replace the SSD module rack completely (mounting plate with SSD). Article number of the SSDs, see "Over view" (Page 265). 3. Connect the power supply cable and the data cable with the main board. 4. Mount the SSD module rack on the PCU. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 267 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts 15.9.2.2 Power supply WARNING Unqualified tampering in the power supply causes severe injuries Only authorized trained personnel are allowed to replace the power supply unit. Preparations 1. Isolate the device from the line supply and disconnect all connecting cables from the device. 2. Remove the hard disk drive. Removing the power supply 1. Loosen the screws and re move the power supply cover. 2. Remove the fixing screws of the power supply. 268 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts 3. Withdraw the power supply plug from the power supply. 4. Withdraw the power supply towards the top. Installing the power supply Install the new power supply in the reverse order. Note Observe the correct position of the power supply latches for upright bus PCBs. 15.9.2.3 Power supply fan Preparations 1. Disconnect the device from the line supply. 2. Remove the power supply. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 269 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts Removing the power supply fan 1. Withdraw the fan connector . 2. Loosen the four screws on the enclosure. 3. Remove the fan from the enclosure. Installing the power supply fan Install the new fan in the reverse sequence. Ensure the correct installation position - fan blows air towards the outside. Note Only a fan of the same type may be installed. 15.9.2.4 Device fan Preconditions 1. Disconnect the device from the line supply. 2. Remove the covers from the service module and motherboard. 270 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts Removing the device fan 1. Withdraw the fan plug from the motherboard. 2. Loosen the four two plastic rivets on the enclosure. 3. Remove the fan from the enclosure. Installing the device fan Install the new fan in the reverse sequence. Ensure the correct installation position - fan blows air towards the outside. Note Only a fan of the same type may be installed. 15.9.2.5 Backup battery The backup battery supplies voltage not only to any plug-in cards used during operations but also to the hardware clock once the device has been switched off. In addition to the time, the BIOS settings of the device are also saved. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 271 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts To be noted before you replace the battery NOTICE Excessive voltages can damage plug-in cards The lithium battery may only be replaced with an identical battery or with a type recommended by the manufacturer. For the PCU 50.5, only use 3.0 V lithium batteries, as any plug-in cards being used cannot tolerate any voltage exceeding 3.0 V. WARNING Risk of explosion and release of harmful substances! For this reason, do not burn lithium batteries, do not solder on the cell body, do not open, do not short circuit, do not reverse polarity, do not heat above 100 C, dispose of correctly, and protect against direct sunlight, dampness and dew. Disposal NOTICE Environmental contamination Dispose of used batteries using the local connection point specifically set-up locally so that they are correctly recycled or are disposed of as hazardous waste. Preparation Note For the BIOS setting "Profile: Standard" the configuration data of the device is deleted when the battery replacement takes more than 30 seconds. For the BIOS setting "Profile: User" the configuration data of the device is retained; only the date and time has to be reconfigured. The content of the SRAM is lost if the battery replacement takes more than 30 seconds. 1. Note down the current settings of the BIOS Setup. A list in which you can note down this information is found in the BIOS manual. 2. Isolate the device from the line supply and disconnect all connecting cables from the device. Note You can also replace the battery while the device is running, but do not touch anything in the device. We recommend switching off the device beforehand. 272 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.9 Spare parts Replacing the battery 1. Open the battery compart ment. 2. Remove the battery holder. 3. Release the connecting ca ble. 4. Remove the old battery. 5. Fasten the new battery and reinsert the battery holder. 6. Close the battery compartment. Reconfiguring the BIOS setup If the battery replacement took longer than 30 seconds, the configuration data of the device has been deleted and you need to reconfigure these in the BIOS Setup. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 273 PCU 50.5 15.10 Accessories 15.10 Accessories 15.10.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the PCU 50.5: Component Article number Mounting bracket (1 set = 2 items) Memory expansion CompactFlash card Mounting bracket for PCU, video link receiver or TCU behind the operator panel front 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 Flat mounting bracket for PCU with or without video link transmitter in the control cabinet 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 Book mounting bracket for PCU with or without vid eo link transmitter in the control cabinet 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA1 1 GB DDR3 1066 MHz DIMM with ECC 6ES7648-2AJ40-1KA0 2 GB DDR3 1066 MHz DIMM with ECC 6ES7648-2AJ50-1KA0 4 GB DDR3 1066 MHz DIMM with ECC 6ES7648-2AJ60-1KA0 1 GB (empty) 6FC5313-5AG00-0AA1 2 GB (empty) 6FC5313-5AG00-0AA2 8 GB (empty) 6FC5313-6AG00-0AA0 USB FlashDrive 8 GB 6ES7648-0DC50-0AA0 SINUMERIK service pack Recovery Media WIN XP ProEmbSys for PCU with Windows XP ProEmbSys on DVD 6FC5253-1CX10-1XU8 Part 1: Windows XP ProEmbSys incl. SP3 Part 2: Ghost of basic software; emergency boot Part 3 up to part 5: Multilingual user interface pack (Chinese simplified, Chinese traditional, Danish, German, Finnish, French, Ital ian, Japanese, Korean, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese/Brazilian, Russian, Swed ish, Czech, Turkish, Hungarian) Documentation (German/English) PCI Multi I/O module 2 x COM, LPT 15.10.2 Installing and removing expansion modules 15.10.2.1 Memory expansion 6ES7648-2CA01-0AA0 Expansion options On the motherboard there are two slots for memory modules (RAM banks). Depending on what is inserted in the slots, you can expand the memory capacity of the PCU from 1 GB up to 8 GB. 274 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.10 Accessories 184-pin DDR3 memory modules can be used, unbuffered, with ECC; memory size 1, 2 or 4 GB. Note We urgently recommend to use memory modules approved by Siemens. No liability can be accepted for restricted functionality when using memory modules from third-party suppliers. Preparations NOTICE Damage to the module as result of missing EMC measures The electrostatic components on the PCBs are highly sensitive to electrostatic discharge. It is therefore vital to take precautionary measures when handling these components. Refer to the directives for handling components that are sensitive to electrostatic charge. 1. Disconnect the device from the mains and withdraw all cables from the device. 2. Remove the covers from the service module and motherboard. Twist proof element Latches Image 15-24 Inserted memory module Installation of a memory module 1. Insert the module into the socket. When doing so, pay attention to the recess and/or twist proof element on the connector side of the RAM module. 2. Press the module downwards, applying slight pressure, until the catches snap into place . The PCU automatically detects the memory module that is installed. When switching on the device, the split between "Base-Memory" and "Extended-Memory" is displayed. Removal of the memory module 1. Release the latches at the left-hand and right-hand sides of the memory module. 2. Withdraw the memory module from the slot. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 275 PCU 50.5 15.10 Accessories 15.10.2.2 PCI cards The PCU 50.5 is designed for use with a maximum of two modules conforming to PCI specifications V 2.2. 5 V 32-bit PCI modules, universal (5 V & 3.3 V) 32-bit PCI modules and PCI Express x16 modules can be used. Image 15-25 Dimension drawing of a short PCI module Note The dimensions of the boards must not exceed the specified dimensions. Otherwise, contact problems, malfunctions and installation difficulty cannot be ruled out. Installing PCI cards Note When installing PCI cards, ensure that you do not touch or smudge the golden plug connections of the card. This protects the card from malfunctioning. 276 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.10 Accessories Slider Module retainer Retaining screw for the module retainer Expansion module Fixing screw for the slot sheet plate Image 15-26 Expansion module inserted Procedure 1. Disconnect the PCU from the line supply by withdrawing the line connector. 2. Remove the covers from the service module and motherboard. 3. Release the fixing screw of the module retainer and remove the retaining bracket. 4. Release the retaining screws of the slot cover plate for the corresponding upper or lower slot and remove the slot plate. 5. Carefully but firmly insert the PCI card into the appropriate slot. 6. Mount the module retainer . 7. Lock the PCI card by inserting a slider through the guide slot until it securely holds the edge of the module in its groove. NOTICE Damage to the module caused by squeezing the slider No pressure should be applied to the module. Therefore, do not apply excessive force to the slider when you push it onto the module. 8. Using a diagonal cutter, cut off the protruding part of the slider . 9. Mount the enclosure covers. For half-height PCI cards, the following points do not apply: 7. and 8. Note If you use cards with a battery connection, connect the connecting cable to the battery before you mount the enclosure covers (see Section: "Installing battery connecting cable"). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 277 PCU 50.5 15.10 Accessories PCI multi I/O module If you use the PCI multi I/O module, install the driver from the driver CD provided according to the instructions. The BIOS setup must be modified in order that the card functions error-free. In the menu, set: Advanced I/O Device Configuration Internal COM 1: Disabled Installing the battery connecting cable Only for MC-specific PCI cards. Connect the PCI module via the connecting cable to the battery connection . Plug for connecting the backup battery Connector plug for connecting the PCI module to the battery Plug for connecting the device fan Image 15-27 Installing the battery connecting cable for PCI modules 15.10.2.3 CompactFlash card The PCU 50.5 provides a protected slot for CompactFlash cards (types I/II). The slot is located behind the cover plate . We recommend using CompactFlash cards from Siemens for industrial applications because they offer special data security, service life and data transfer speeds. Note The slot for the CompactFlash card is not suitable for hot-plugging. You should therefore insert the CompactFlash card before you switch on the PCU and only remove the card after you have switched off the PCU. Installing the CompactFlash card behind the cover plate 1. Separate the PCU from the power supply by disconnecting the main power connector. 2. Release the fixing screw for the cover plate of the slot. 3. Fold up the cover plate and slide it towards the DVI-I interface . Lift the cover plate slightly until it releases on the left-hand side. Then slide it back until it releases on the righthand side. 278 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 PCU 50.5 15.10 Accessories 4. Carefully slide the CompactFlash card straight into the card slot until it snaps in. Hold the CompactFlash card so that its label side faces toward the front panel of the PC. 5. Close the card slot by inserting the cover plate (lock it on the left and right) and screw in the fixing screw . DVI-I interface Cover plate of the CompactFlash card slot Retaining screw for cover plate Image 15-28 Installing the CompactFlash card behind the cover plate Note The slot for the CompactFlash card is coded against incorrect insertion of the card. If it is incorrectly inserted, then approx. 1 cm protrudes out of the enclosure and it does not function. NOTICE Damage to the CompactFlash card caused by forced insertion If the CompactFlash card is difficult to insert, then turn the card over. Never insert the CompactFlash card with force. Removing the CompactFlash card behind the cover plate 1. Open the card slot as described under "Installing the CompactFlash card ..." (points 1-3). 2. Press the eject button on the right-hand side of the module slot (e.g. using the narrow end of the cover plate). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 279 PCU 50.5 15.10 Accessories 3. Remove the CompactFlash card. 4. Close the card slot. 280 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 16 TCU x0.2 16.1 Description 16.1.1 Overview A Thin Client Unit (TCU) allows the spatial separation between an OP/TP operator panel front and the PCU/NCU. For this reason, the user interface is copied to one/several operator panel fronts, each with a TCU. Validity The description applies to the following TCU: Designation Article number Thin Client Unit 20.2 6FC5312-0DA00-0AA2 Thin Client Unit 30.2 6FC5312-0DA00-1AA0 Features Design of flat operator panels through the shallow installation depth and low power loss. Graphic: Resolution for 16-bit color depth: - TCU 20.2: 640 x 480 to 1024 x 768 pixels - TCU 30.2: 640 x 480 to 1280 x 1024 pixels Low-vibration installation of the PCU in the control cabinet Effective operation of larger machines. Signal transmission between PCU/NCU and operator panel via Industrial Ethernet The distance of the components is determined by the maximum distance between two network nodes / access points (100 m). The same operator control screen is displayed simultaneously on all operator panel fronts; it can also be operated from all operator panel fronts. The operation on an operator panel front connected via TCU has the same access rights as the operation on an operator panel front connected directly to the PCU. The mixed operation of operator panel fronts connected via TCU and an operator panel front connected directly to the PCU is possible. TCU x0.2 is compatible with previous models, which means that mixed operation is possible. Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 281 TCU x0.2 16.1 Description Preconditions NCU 7x0 Operator panel fronts: - TCU 20.2: OP 010 / OP 010C / OP 010S / OP 012 / OP 015 / OP 015A / TP 015A - TCU 30.2: OP 019 Design The TCUs are coupled via Ethernet as Thin Clients in a dedicated subnetwork (via DHCP server on the PCU/NCU) to the PCU/NCU. Interfaces: To connect the mouse, keyboard and USB flash drive - TCU 20.2: 3 x USB 2.0 Hi-Speed - TCU 30.2: 5 x USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s The speed in Ethernet system networks automatically sets itself to the maximum possible value. 1000 Mbit/s can only be achieved with NCU 7x0.3 PN and PCU 50.5 (if a PCU is required). Note The Ethernet interfaces have what is called autocrossing functionality, i.e. when required, send and receive lines switch over. If, however, the partner does not permit "Autocrossing", a crossover cable is required. 16.1.2 Configurations Configurations The following configurations of the distributed structure are possible with a TCU x0.2: 7&8[ 1&8 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWUHTXLUHG IRU7&8[)&$)$$ RPLWWHGIRU236 $GGLWLRQDO7&8[IRURSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWVZLWKLQWHJUDWHG7&8QRWQHFHVVDU\ Image 16-1 282 Minimum configuration with an operator panel front Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 TCU x0.2 16.2 Interfaces 7&8[ 3&8 3&8 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWUHTXLUHG IRUPRXQWLQJLQWKHFRQWUROFDELQHW 3&8b )&$)$$RU )&$)$$ ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW IRUPRXQWLQJRQRSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 7&8[3&8 )&$)$$ QRWIRU236 1&8[31 ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW 7&8[ 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW 6ZLWFK ,QGXVWULDO (WKHUQHW Image 16-2 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW ZLWKLQWHJUDWHG 7&8 Maximum configuration, several TCUs connected to an NCU 7x0 Information about TCU commissioning can be found in "General information and networking", Chapter: "Networking". 16.2 Interfaces Overview Function Designation Description Double USB interface 1 1) X203 / X204 2 x USB 2.0 Hi-Speed type A Double USB interface 2 1) X212 2 x USB 2.0 Hi-Speed type A 2) / X213 Interface for direct keys X205 2 x 10-pin plug connector 24 VDC power supply X206 3-pin terminal block I/O USB interface K1 3) 4) X207 2 x 13-pin plug connector LVDS display interface K2 3) 4) X208 LVDS display interface K3 4) X209 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 2 x 10-pin plug connector 2) 2 x 10-pin plug connector 283 TCU x0.2 16.2 Interfaces Function Designation Description Ethernet interface X202 8-pin RJ45 socket USB interface X211 USB 2.0 Hi-Speed type A 2) 1) One of the interfaces can be loaded with 500 mA, the other with 100 mA. 2) Only TCU 30.2 3) To connect to an operator panel front 10" up to 15" 4) To connect to an operator panel front OP 019 3( 9 7&8 9 View X203 / X204 USB interfaces X212/X213 USB interfaces (for TCU 20.2, there is no X212) X202 Ethernet interface - Grounding screw X205 Interface for direct keys X206 24 VDC power supply Image 16-3 284 Front view of the TCU 30.2 with interfaces Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 TCU x0.2 16.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front X209 LVDS display interface K3 (not for TCU 20.2) X208 LVDS display interface K2 X211 USB interface (not for TCU 20.2) X207 I/O USB interface K1 Image 16-4 Rear view of the TCU 30.2 with interfaces Pin assignment The pin assignment of the interfaces, see "General information and networking" "Connecting". 16.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front Before assembling the two components, the interface cables of the operator panel front (IO/ USB cable K1, K2 display cable and, if necessary, K3) must be inserted into the corresponding socket of the TCU (visible behind the housing cut-out). Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 285 TCU x0.2 16.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front OP 010S The operator panel front OP 010S and the TCU are screwed together without additional mounting brackets. 236 7&8 4 x M3 screws to fasten the TCU support plate to the OP 010S TCU support plate Image 16-5 286 Mounted TCU with OP 010S, front, side and rear view Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 TCU x0.2 16.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front OP 010, OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 015A Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required for mounting these operator panel fronts (see Section: "Accessories"). 1. Screw the mounting bracket onto the TCU. 2. Use the two hinge catches to suspend the TCU mounting bracket unit (like a PCU) in the operator panel front. 3. Insert cables K1 and K2. 4. Close the cabled TCU mounting bracket unit and attach it using the four knurled screws . 2 x hinge catches 4 x knurled screws for attaching the mounting brackets to the operator panel front 2 x mounting brackets Image 16-6 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Mounted TCU (example with OP 012) in front, side and rear view 287 TCU x0.2 16.3 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front OP 019 Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required for mounting this operator panel front (see Section: "Accessories"). 1. Screw the mounting bracket onto the TCU. 2. Use the two hinge catches to suspend the TCU mounting bracket unit (like a PCU) in the operator panel front. 3. Insert cables K1, K2 and K3. 4. Close the cabled TCU mounting bracket unit and attach it using the four knurled screws . 23 7&8 2 x hinge catches 4 x knurled screws for attaching the mounting brackets to the operator panel front 2 x mounting brackets Image 16-7 288 Mounted TCU 30.2 with OP 019, front, side and rear views Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 TCU x0.2 16.5 Accessories Tensile strain relief Since some of the interfaces do not have a cable strain relief for the cables to be connected, it is recommended to secure the cables to the u-shaped lugs on the supporting plate using cable ties. 16.4 Technical data Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to DIN 40050 IP20 (mounted) Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Power supply 1) 24 VDC (20.4 V ... 28.8 V) Power consumption, max. TCU 20.2: 9 W 2) / 40 W 3) TCU 30.2: 10 W 2) / 60 W 4) Mechanical data (without packing) Dimensions Width: 260 mm Weight 1) Height: 265 mm Depth: 34 mm 1.96 kg The power supply must be provided as protective extra low-voltage with safe isolation (according to EN 60204-1, PELV). 2) Only TCU 3) TCU with OP 015 and 2 x 0.5 A at USB 4) TCU with OP 019 and 2 x 0.5 A / 4 x 0.1 A at USB Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 16.5 Table 16-1 Accessories Accessories for TCU Components Description Quantity Article number Mounting bracket Mounting bracket for PCU, video link re ceiver or TCU behind operator panel front 1 set (2 items) 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0 Direct key cable Ribbon cable for connection of the direct key interfaces for OP and TCU. 1 6FC5347-0AF10-0AA0 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 289 TCU x0.2 16.5 Accessories Components Description Quantity Article number 1 6XV1840-2AH10 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug 180/90 for use in trailing cables; PROFINET-compatible; without UL approval; sold by the meter (max. 1000 m; min. 20 m); 1 6XV1840-3AH10 IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal housing and integrated cutting/clamping contacts; with 180 outgo ing cable 1 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 Industrial IE FC Standard Ca 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for Ethernet ca ble GP 2 x 2 (Type A) connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ ble IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter (max. 1000 m; min. 20 m); IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C) Plug-in con nector 290 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Index B Backlight inverter OP 015, 86, 87 OP 015A, 102 OP 015AT, 119 TP 015A, 137 TP 015AT, 156 Battery replacement, 272 BIOS BIOS post code, 261 BIOS setup PCU 50.5, 245, 248 Boot sequence Error messages, 257 Booting Error messages, 257 C Coding switches Direct key module, 203 CompactFlash card PCU 50.5, 278 Configurations TCU 30.2, 282 D DB19, 252 DHCP server Thin Client Unit, 282 Direct key module Coding switches, 203 Dimensions, 211 DKM cable, 206 LEDs, 204 Power consumption, 211 PROFIBUS cable, 205 PROFIBUS DP, 203 Display OP 010, 39 Display support OP 010, 40 OP 012, 76 OP 015, 86, 87 OP 015A, 103 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 OP 015AT, 119 TP 015AT, 156 DKM cable Direct key module, 206 E Error messages Booting, 257 Ethernet cable Thin Client Unit, 290 Ethernet strain relief, 240 Ethernet, industrial Thin Client Unit, 281 F FB9 Proxy, 252 fb9_proxy.ini, 253 Film labels OP 010, 39 OP 012, 75 Front USB interface OP 010, 27, 28 OP 010C, 52 OP 010S, 43, 44 OP 012, 61, 62 OP 015, 79, 80 OP 015A, 91 TP 015A, 127 G Gestures Displaying the TCU menu, 166, 193 H Hard disk drive PCU 50.5, 213 I Individual parts OP 010, 36 OP 010C, 60 OP 012, 73 291 Index OP 015, 86 OP 015A, 102 OP 015AT, 119 TP 015A, 136 TP 015AT, 156 Installation Mounting opening, 197 One person installation, 198 Interfaces, 168, 195 K Key symbols OP 010, 29 OP 010C, 53 OP 010S, 45, 81 OP 012, 63, 130 OP 015, 45, 81 OP 019, 180 OP 08T, 13 TP 015A, 63, 130 Keyboard, 167 Keyboard controller OP 010, 39 OP 012, 76 OP 015, 86, 87 OP 015A, 102 OP 015AT, 119 TP 015A, 137, 139 TP 015AT, 156, 158 L LCD unit OP 012, 76 OP 015, 86 OP 015A, 103 OP 015AT, 119 TP 015A, 137 TP 015AT, 156 LEDs Direct key module, 204 PCU 50.5, 217 Lithium battery, 272 M Membrane connector OP 012, 76 Memory expansion PCU 50.5, 274 292 Mounting Mounting opening, 170 One person installation, 171 Mounting bracket OP 012, 69 OP 015A, 97 Thin Client Unit, 287, 288, 289 O On/off switch PCU 50.5, 216 OP 010 Dimension sheet, 33 Dimensions, 36 Front USB interface, 27, 28 Individual parts, 36 Installation, 33 Installation opening, 33 Key symbols, 29 Keypads, 29 Mounting opening, 46, 57 Power consumption, 36 Slide-in labels, 37 TFT flat screen, 27 Tightening torques, 36 VGA resolution, 27 OP 010C Dimension drawings, 57 Dimensions, 59 Front USB interface, 52 Individual parts, 60 Key symbols, 53 Keypads, 53 Power consumption, 59 TFT flat screen, 51 Tightening torques, 59 VGA resolution, 51 OP 010S Dimension drawings, 46 Dimensions, 50 Front USB interface, 43, 44 Key symbols, 45, 81 Power consumption, 50 TFT flat screen, 43 Tightening torques, 50 VGA resolution, 43 OP 012 Dimension sheet, 67 Dimensions, 73 Front USB interface, 61, 62 Individual parts, 73 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Index Installation opening, 66 Key symbols, 63, 130 Keypads, 63, 129 Mounting bracket, 69 Power consumption, 73 SVGA resolution, 61 TFT flat screen, 61 Tightening torques, 73 OP 015 Dimension drawings, 82, 185 Dimensions, 85 Front USB interface, 79, 80 Individual parts, 86 Key symbols, 45, 81 Mounting opening, 82 Power consumption, 85 TFT flat screen, 79 Tightening torques, 85 OP 015 black Accessories, 175 Features, 163 Order number, 163 Spare parts, 175 OP 015A Dimensions, 101 Front USB interface, 91 Individual parts, 102 Mounting bracket, 97 Mounting opening, 96 Power consumption, 101 TFT flat screen, 91 Tightening torques, 101 OP 015AT Article number, 111 Dimension sheet, 117 Dimensions, 118 Individual parts, 119 Power consumption, 118 TFT flat screen, 111 Tightening torques, 118 OP 019 Article number, 177 Dimensions, 189 Key symbols, 180 LED displays, 181 Mounting opening, 185 Power consumption, 189 TFT flat screen, 177 Tightening torques, 189 View, 179 OP 019 black Accessories, 202 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Article number, 191 Characteristics, 191 Spare parts, 202 OP 08T Dimensions, 18 Power consumption, 18 Tightening torques, 18 Operation Gloves, 166, 194 Keylock, 166 P PCI card PCU 50.5, 277 PCI hardware interrupt, 230 PCI multi I/O module, 278 PCU 50.5 BIOS setup, 245, 248 CompactFlash card, 278 Dimension drawings for mounting, 232 Dimensions, 263 Hard disk drive, 213 Insert the battery connecting cable, 278 LEDs, 217 Memory expansion, 274 Mounting bracket, 231, 274 Mounting positions, 240 On/off switch, 216 PCI card, 277 Power consumption, 263 Screen resolution, 214 Touch software, 249 USB FlashDrive, 246 Work memory, 213 PLC alarms, 255 Power supply PCU 50.5, 268 PROFIBUS cable Direct key module, 205 PROFIBUS DP Direct key module, 203 R Replacement intervals, 265 Replacing Battery, 272 293 Index S Screen calibration TP 015A, 134 TP 015AT, 154, 174 Screen resolution PCU 50.5, 214 Slide-in labels OP 010, 37 OP 012, 74 OP 015A, 103 OP 015AT, 119 TP 015A, 137 TP 015AT, 156 SVGA resolution OP 012, 61 T TCU 30.2 Configurations, 282 Technical specifications Dimensions, 174, 202 Power consumption, 174, 202 Tightening torques, 174, 202 TFT flat screen OP 010, 27 OP 010C, 51 OP 010S, 43 OP 012, 61 OP 015, 79 OP 015A, 91 OP 015AT, 111 TP 015AT, 147 Thin Client Unit DHCP server, 282 Dimensions, 289 Ethernet cable, 290 Ethernet, industrial, 281 Mounting bracket, 287, 288, 289 Touch controller TP 015A, 139 TP 015AT, 158 Touch screen TP 015A, 127 Touch software PCU 50.5, 249 TP 015A Dimensions, 136 Front USB interface, 127 294 Individual parts, 136 Key symbols, 63, 130 Keypads, 63, 129 Mounting opening, 132 Power consumption, 135 Tightening torques, 136 Touch screen, 127 XGA resolution, 127 TP 015AT Dimension sheet, 154 Dimensions, 155 Individual parts, 156 Power consumption, 155 TFT flat screen, 147 Tightening torques, 155 U USB FlashDrive PCU 50.5, 246 V VGA resolution OP 010, 27 OP 010C, 51 OP 010S, 43 View, 165, 193 W Work memory PCU 50.5, 213 X XGA resolution TP 015A, 127 Operator panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl Handheld units Manual Valid for: SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl control 03/2016 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2 Mini-handheld unit 3 Electronic handheld handwheel 4 Handwheel connection module 5 Table of contents 1 Handheld Terminal HT 2..............................................................................................................................7 1.1 Description...............................................................................................................................7 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 Operator control and display elements....................................................................................9 Overview..................................................................................................................................9 Description.............................................................................................................................10 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.2.1 1.3.2.2 1.3.2.3 1.3.2.4 1.3.3 1.3.3.1 1.3.3.2 1.3.3.3 1.3.3.4 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7 Connecting.............................................................................................................................14 Overview................................................................................................................................14 Terminal Box PN....................................................................................................................15 Description.............................................................................................................................15 PN Plus terminal box..............................................................................................................17 Interface assignment on the PN Plus terminal box................................................................18 PN Basic terminal box............................................................................................................25 Connection module Basic PN................................................................................................27 Features.................................................................................................................................27 interfaces................................................................................................................................27 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................31 Installing the terminating connector.......................................................................................32 Connection examples of enabling button and emergency stop button..................................34 Connecting cable...................................................................................................................38 Power Supply.........................................................................................................................41 Unplugging/plugging during operation...................................................................................41 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.1.1 1.4.1.2 1.4.1.3 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 Commissioning.......................................................................................................................42 BIOS.......................................................................................................................................42 BIOS powering up..................................................................................................................42 Settings in the BIOS menu.....................................................................................................42 Error handling.........................................................................................................................44 Interface signals ....................................................................................................................45 Application example for HT8 and HT 2 involving mixed operation.........................................52 Application example for two HT 2 units connected to SINUMERIK.......................................54 1.5 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................55 1.6 Maintenance and Service.......................................................................................................55 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................56 Handheld Terminal HT 2........................................................................................................56 Connection module Basic PN................................................................................................59 PN terminal box......................................................................................................................60 1.8 Spare parts.............................................................................................................................61 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.2 1.9.3 1.9.4 1.9.4.1 Accessories............................................................................................................................61 Overview................................................................................................................................61 Mount.....................................................................................................................................62 Retaining magnet...................................................................................................................63 Slide-in label...........................................................................................................................66 Labeling the slide-in labels.....................................................................................................66 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Table of contents 1.9.4.2 2 3 Handheld Terminal HT 8............................................................................................................................73 2.1 Description.............................................................................................................................73 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................75 View.......................................................................................................................................75 Description.............................................................................................................................77 Screen brightness control......................................................................................................80 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 interfaces................................................................................................................................81 Overview................................................................................................................................81 Description.............................................................................................................................81 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.2.1 2.4.2.2 2.4.2.3 2.4.2.4 2.4.3 2.4.3.1 2.4.3.2 2.4.3.3 2.4.3.4 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 Connecting.............................................................................................................................83 Overview................................................................................................................................83 Terminal Box PN....................................................................................................................85 Description.............................................................................................................................85 PN Plus terminal box..............................................................................................................86 PN Basic terminal box............................................................................................................87 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................88 Connecting module Basic PN................................................................................................89 Description.............................................................................................................................89 interfaces................................................................................................................................89 Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................93 Installing the terminating connector.......................................................................................94 Connecting cable...................................................................................................................95 Power Supply.........................................................................................................................97 Unplugging/plugging during operation...................................................................................98 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.1.1 2.5.1.2 2.5.1.3 2.5.1.4 2.5.1.5 2.5.2 2.5.2.1 2.5.2.2 Commissioning.......................................................................................................................98 SINUMERIK Operate.............................................................................................................98 Activating/deactivating the virtual keyboard...........................................................................98 Configuring the traversing keys..............................................................................................99 Configuring user-specific key labeling..................................................................................104 Configuring the function display at user-specific keys (U keys)...........................................106 Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................108 HMI Advanced......................................................................................................................108 Configuring the traversing keys of the HT 8.........................................................................108 Configuring user-specific key labeling..................................................................................110 2.6 Maintenance and Service.....................................................................................................112 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 Technical data......................................................................................................................113 Handheld Terminal HT 8......................................................................................................113 Connection module Basic PN..............................................................................................115 PN terminal box....................................................................................................................115 2.8 Spare parts...........................................................................................................................116 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 Accessories..........................................................................................................................116 Overview..............................................................................................................................116 Wall holder...........................................................................................................................117 Mini-handheld unit....................................................................................................................................119 3.1 4 Replacing the slide-in labels..................................................................................................70 Description...........................................................................................................................119 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 4 5 3.2 Operator controls.................................................................................................................120 3.3 Dimension drawing...............................................................................................................123 3.4 Connecting...........................................................................................................................124 3.5 Configuration........................................................................................................................128 3.6 Maintenance and Service.....................................................................................................130 3.7 Technical specifications.......................................................................................................130 3.8 Spare parts / accessories.....................................................................................................131 Electronic handheld handwheel................................................................................................................135 4.1 Description...........................................................................................................................135 4.2 Dimension drawing...............................................................................................................137 4.3 Connection...........................................................................................................................138 4.4 Technical specifications.......................................................................................................139 4.5 Accessories..........................................................................................................................140 Handwheel connection module................................................................................................................143 5.1 Description...........................................................................................................................143 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................144 Overview..............................................................................................................................144 Input / output images............................................................................................................145 5.3 Settings via DIP switch S3...................................................................................................147 5.4 Mounting..............................................................................................................................148 5.5 Technical data......................................................................................................................149 5.6 Accessories..........................................................................................................................150 Index.........................................................................................................................................................151 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 5 Table of contents 6 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 1 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.1 Description The SINUMERIK HT 2 (Handheld Terminal 2) has been designed for manual operation of machine tools and distinguishes itself as a result of its ruggedness and ease of handling. The low weight and the ergonomic design make this unit easy to use, even over longer periods of time. The HT 2 should be preferably used if it is necessary to be mobile while monitoring or controlling the machine tool (e.g. during setting-up procedures). In this case, the HT 2 can be connected at any system location via a PN Basic terminal box or a PN Plus terminal box outside the control cabinet. If used in conjunction with the PN Plus terminal box, the HT 2 can simply be withdrawn and inserted during actual operation without initiating an emergency stop. For mounting in the control cabinet, the HT 2 is connected with a connection module PN Basic. The HT 2 is suitable for right-handed and left-handed personnel as it has two enabling buttons. The magnetic handwheel allows intuitive axis feed motion. All of the HT 2 keys can be freely configured and labeled. The HT 2 can be mounted using a retaining magnet or an appropriate bracket. The retaining magnet as well as the holder are available as accessory (refer to Section: "Accessories"). Validity The following description applies to the following components: Name Features HT 2 Enabling button, emergency stop button, override rotary switch Article number 6FC5303-0AA00-2AA0 The safety related accessories are marked in the "Accessories" section with *). Function blocks In the unit: PCB with CPU, memory Ethernet controller Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 7 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.1 Description Device front: LC display (black / white) - Resolution: 128 x 64 pixels - LCD controller on board - 4 lines each with 16 characters can be displayed 20-key membrane keyboard - 16 machine control keys - 4 keys (upper row of keys) can be assigned as softkey or system key Emergency stop button, 2-channel Rotary override switch (19 positions) Magnetic handwheel Device rear: Recess for the bracket or retaining magnet Cable duct for the HT 2 connecting cable to - terminal box PN (Basic / Plus) - PN Basic connection module Right-hand side of the device Key-operated switch (3 positions, 2 keys) Enabling button (2-channel, 3-stage) Left-hand side of the device: Enabling button (2-channel, 3-stage) 8 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.2 Operator control and display elements 1.2 Operator control and display elements 1.2.1 Overview (1) Emergency stop button (stop button) (2) Rotary override switch (3) Display (4) Keyboard (5) Handwheel (6) Enabling button (left) (7) Enabling button (right) (8) Opening for the cable entry (9) Cable duct cover (10) Type plate (11) Standard position mounting bracket (optional: Retaining magnet) (12) Standard position retaining magnet (optional: Mounting bracket) (13) Key-operated switch Image 1-1 Operator control and display elements of the HT 2 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 9 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.2 Operator control and display elements 1.2.2 Description Display The Handheld Terminal HT 2 is equipped with an LCD display (black / white). The display has a resolution of 168 x 72 pixels. This means that for a normal font of 16 pixels high, 4 lines each with 16 characters can be displayed. Keyboard On the HT 2 there are a total of 20 keys each assigned 1 LED. Of which All 4 keys in the upper row of keys can be used as softkeys as well as system keys. The remaining 16 keys are reserved for the machine control. When supplied from the factory, the HT 2 has 5 horizontal slide-in labels. One of these slide-in labels is not printed. The remaining four slide-in labels have standard symbols for the machine control printed on them. The standard symbols used and their position on the slide-in labels are listed together with the corresponding symbol number in the table. Table 1-1 - Standard symbols on the slide-in labels (spec.) - (spec.) - (spec.) - (spec.) 7001 7015 7048 7011 7025 7026 7112 7022 7013 7124 7027 7028 7020 7021 7111 7029 Symbols that you specify can be printed on all of the slide-in labels. Blank films are available for this purpose. Information on the article number for the blank films and for printing as well as exchanging the slide-in labels is provided in Section "Accessories" "Slide-in labels". NOTICE Damage to the keys when using pointed or hard objects Only use your fingers to touch the membrane keyboard and not sharp or hard objects, which can damage or even destroy the keys. Further, please note that the touch pen is also not suitable for using the membrane keyboard. 10 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.2 Operator control and display elements Rotary override switch The rotary override switch of the HT 2 has 19 positions. The evaluation scale (0 to max.) is specified by the machine's manufacture in the form of machine data. Handwheel The HT 2 handwheel has magnetic bearings. A turning knob is integrated in the handwheel knob. This allows fast rotary motion to be executed using a finger (run-on < 1 revolution). Individual increments can be reliably moved at the machine - as the transition from one position to another can be clearly sensed. The handwheel operates with 100 pulses/revolution and has a cogging torque of approx. 1.5 Ncm (+/- 0.3). The max. speed is 1000 rpm Emergency stop button The red emergency stop mushroom pushbutton has a yellow ring. Directly under the mushroom pushbutton, there is also a black ring which identifies the position status of the emergency stop button. State Ring (black) Visible Not visible Emergency stop button Not pressed Pressed If an emergency stop is triggered, the button locks into place. If the button is locked into place, it can be unlocked by rotating it to the right. Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the emergency stop button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the emergency stop: Refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions! The signals are sent via the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring. Enabling button The HT 2 has two enabling buttons that are logically grouped. This allows the enabling function to be triggered by either the left or the right hand during normal operation. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 11 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.2 Operator control and display elements The enabling buttons comprise a 3-stage operator element and separate evaluation electronics. They have a 2-circuit configuration. The actuatior comprises two symmetrically arranged rockers whose position is determined using electrical sensors and which is transferred to the evaluation electronics. The enabling buttons can assume one of three different switch positions. Switch position Function Enabling button Switching contact 1 Zero position Not actuated Off (open) 2 Agreement Actuated On (closed) 3 Panic Pressed Off (open) The switching sequences, shown in the diagrams are possible for the enabling buttons. Normal actuation Zero position X Agreement Y Zero position [ (YDOXDWLRQ HOHFWURQLFV &LUFXLW =7[ $JUHHPHQW EXWWRQ =7[ &LUFXLW 2)) 21 &LUFXLW 2)) 21 \ =7[ Image 1-2 &LUFXLW =7[ &LUFXLW 2)) 21 &LUFXLW 2)) 21 Switching distance diagram for normal actuation Panic actuation Completely pressing the actuator to the panic position is evaluated by the fact that when released, the agreement position is skipped. Zero position X Agreement U Panic Y Zero position [ =7[ =7[ (YDOXDWLRQ HOHFWURQLFV &LUFXLW 2)) &LUFXLW 2)) &LUFXLW $JUHHPHQW EXWWRQ Image 1-3 12 &LUFXLW &LUFXLW &LUFXLW X 21 21 2)) 2)) Y =7[ =7[ 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) Switching distance diagram for panic actuation Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.2 Operator control and display elements The signals are sent via the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring. WARNING Danger of death resulting from the misuse of the enabling button It is not permitted to fix the enabling button in the "Enable" position by mechanical means. Key-operated switch The key-operated switch has three positions: I - 0 - II. , Image 1-4 ,, Key-operated switch positions The key can be removed in the switch position 0. Remove the key after use. This avoids possible damage to the key if the HMI device falls down. Note The key for the key-operated switch is provided with the HMI device. Its coding is not specific to the device. This means the key can be used on any Handheld Terminal HT 2. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 13 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3 Connecting 1.3.1 Overview SINUMERIK Handheld Terminal HT 2 Article no. Prefabricated cable Emergency stop / enabling circuit Terminal box PN Basic / PN Plus 6XV1440-4B... 6FC5348-0AA08-3AA0 or Ethernet cable SINUMERIK NCU 7x0.3 PN Connection module Basic PN or SINUMERIK PCU 50.5 Emergency stop / enabling circuit SINUMERIK MPP 310 IEH/ MPP 483 IEH Emergency stop / enabling circuit Image 1-5 Connection overview HT 2 The Handheld Terminal HT 2 communicates with a control unit via PN Basic terminal box/PN Plus terminal box, or PN Basic connection module (for control cabinet installation) or MPP 310 IEH / MPP 483 IEH +7 +0, &RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH %DVLF31 (WKHUQHW3URILQHW IDFWRU\QHWZRUN Image 1-6 &RQWUROOHUV 1&8[ 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV Example: Communication between HT 2 and NCU 7x0 via the PN Basic connection module Note The handwheel signals are only effective at a SINUMERIK control. The system keys (machine control panel functionality / override) are transferred to a SINUMERIK PLC as well as also to a SIMATIC CPU in a DB interface. 14 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting The safety signals for Emergency Stop and enabling are retrieved from the terminal box, the connection module or MPP via the connecting cable and connected to the safety relays in the control cabinet. If no HT 2 is connected, observe the following: WARNING Danger of death resulting from improper access After disconnection, the HT 2 must be locked away. Emergency Stop buttons that are inactive must not be identified as such or must be inaccessible. This is to prevent the emergency stop button from being used inadvertently. 1.3.2 Terminal Box PN 1.3.2.1 Description LED displays Screwed joint for power supply cable and shield Screwed joint for cable with supplementary stop and agreement button signals and for PLCaccompanying signals Connecting socket for the connector plug of the connecting cable (covered with dummy cap) Screwed joint for process data line (Ethernet) Image 1-7 Terminal Box PN Note Protection class IP65 at the terminal box is ensured with plugged-in HT 2 or plugged-in dummy cap. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 15 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting The PN terminal box is available in two versions. PN Basic terminal box The PN Basic terminal box can be used if no hot-plug capability is required. The Emergency Stop circuit can be overridden here by external mechanisms. PN Plus terminal box The PN Plus terminal box features hot-plug capability. This means that disturbance-free hot-swapping is possible in operation. The Emergency Stop circuit is automatically maintained while switching over. Note The exterior of the PN terminal box versions only differs in terms of what is printed on the side. Clearance The following clearances are required around the PN terminal box: Additional references You can find a detailed description in the operating instructions (compact) of the Mobile Panel 177 HMI device (WinCC flexible): http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/22166637 16 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3.2.2 PN Plus terminal box The PN Plus terminal box differs from a PN Basic terminal box in that it has four relays mounted on the board. Board Relays Image 1-8 PN Plus terminal box Switching states of the emergency stop circuit HT 2 Emergency Stop button Switching status, emergency stop circuit Connected Not pressed Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. Connected Pressed Not connected - The emergency stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. WARNING Danger of death resulting from the inadvertent disconnection of the HT 2 If you disconnect the HT 2 from the PN Plus terminal box, the emergency stop circuit is closed, thereby clearing the stop state of the system to be monitored. This occurs irrespective of whether the emergency stop button has been pressed on the HT 2. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 17 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3.2.3 Interface assignment on the PN Plus terminal box Location of the interfaces Fast connector Terminal strip 1 Terminal strip 2 Note The PN Basic connection box has the same interfaces. 18 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting Fast Connector, 4-pin The terminal box contains two fast connectors for connecting the PROFINET data cables. The figure below illustrates the assignment of the fast connector: Pin Signal name 1 RD+ 2 TD+ 3 RD- 4 TD- Terminal strip 1, for power supply, 3-pin Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Pin Signal name 1 PE 2 M24 3 P24 19 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting Terminal strip 2, 12-pin The safety and additional functions are connected to this terminal strip. The terminal strip is mechanically coded to prevent it from being confused with terminal strip 1. Pin Internal intercon nection Signal name 1 STOP13 2 STOP14 Circuit Emergency Stop button 3 STOP23 4 STOP24 5 +24 V 1) 6 CTRL32 1) 2) 7 PRESENT31 3) 8 +24 V 1) 9 ENABLE2+ 10 ENABLE1- 11 ENABLE1+ 12 ENABLE2- 1) Is only applicable for the PN Plus connection box 2) Active, if the Emergency Stop pushbutton is pressed 3) Active, if HT 2 / HT 8 is inserted Accompanying control sig nals Enabling button HT 2 / HT 8 to the connection box Signal at digital input of the control Not connected "0" Connected "1" Note The "Emergency Stop button pressed" signal has no error detection facility and must, therefore, not be used for safety-critical applications. 20 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting Typical circuit diagrams for PN Plus terminal box 9 . 7HUPLQDOVWULSSLQ . 9 . . . . . . 6723 6723 9 &75/ 35(6(17 9 . . . 6723 . . . . . 9 9 6723 . . Image 1-9 Circuit example 1: HT 2 not connected and power supply switched on: Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 21 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 6723 6723 +7 35(6(17 35(6(17 &RQQHFWLQJFDEOH 9 . 7HUPLQDOVWULSSLQ . 9 9 9 6723 6723 6723 9 &75/ 35(6(17 9 . . . . . . . . . . . 6723 . . . . . Image 1-10 22 Circuit example 2: HT 2 connected, power supply switched on and emergency stop inactive Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 6723 6723 +7 35(6(17 35(6(17 &RQQHFWLQJFDEOH 9 . 7HUPLQDOVWULSSLQ . 9 9 . . 9 . . . . . . . . 6723 6723 6723 9 . . . . 6723 &75/ 35(6(17 9 . . Image 1-11 Circuit example 3: HT 2 connected, power supply switched on and emergency stop active Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 23 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 6723 6723 +7 35(6(17 35(6(17 &RQQHFWLQJFDEOH 7HUPLQDOVWULSSLQ 9 . . 9 9 . . 9 . . . . . . . . 6723 6723 6723 9 . . . . 6723 &75/ 35(6(17 9 . . Image 1-12 Circuit example 4: Power supply switched off The "CTRL32 / STOP button pressed" signal is not present at the Basic connection box. The signal has no error detection facility and must, therefore, not be used for safety-critical applications. Note the following when connecting the "Present31 HT 2 / HT 8 connected" signal: Connect Pin 7 of the connection box to the digital input of the control Basic connection box: Pin 8 of the connection box remains not assigned Plus connection box: +24 V must be supplied at Pin 8 24 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3.2.4 PN Basic terminal box In contrast to the PN Plus terminal box, the "Stop loop through" function is not implemented on the PN Basic terminal box. Relays are so not required. Image 1-13 PN Basic terminal box Note The emergency stop circuit is controlled via the emergency stop button when the HT 2 is connected. If the connecting cable of the HT 2 is disconnected from the PN Basic terminal box, the emergency stop circuit is interrupted. This leads to a safe machine stop or an emergency stop of the system to be monitored. Note The "CTRL32 / STOP button pressed" signal is not present at the Basic connection box. The signal has no error detection facility and must not be used for safety-critical applications. Switching states of the emergency stop circuit HT 2 Emergency Stop button Switching status, emergency stop circuit Connected Not pressed Emergency stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. Connected Pressed The emergency stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. - The emergency stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. Not connected Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 25 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting WARNING Danger of death resulting from the premature emergency stop unlocking If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. 26 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3.3 Connection module Basic PN 1.3.3.1 Features The connection module Basic PN was specially developed for installation in the control cabinet. The terminating connector protrudes through the panel of the control cabinet so that the HT 2 can be connected from the outside. 2SHUDWRU3DQHO +0, 6\VWHPQHWZRUN 0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO +7 (PHUJHQF\6WRSFLUFXLWV &RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH31 3 &RPELFDEOH 3 +7 3 &RQWURO 1&8[ 6WDWXVVLJQDOV (PHUJ6WRS 3DQHOSUHVHQW 6DIHW\ &RPELQDWLRQ 7. Image 1-14 )DFWRU\QHWZRUN System configuration (example) The connection module Basic PN is not hot plug-capable. The HT 2 can either be connected to the NCU or to the PCU as thin client. 1.3.3.2 interfaces The HT 2 is connected to the connection module Basic PN via a round connector. The interfaces of the connection module are located at the rear: Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 27 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting Grounding screw M5 for potential equalization connection Image 1-15 Rear of the Basic PN connection module Setting the box ID You can use rotary coding switches S1 and S2 to set a unique ID on any connection module for station identification purposes. Use a screwdriver to set the IDs. The setting is entered in hexadecimal format. Values in the decimal format between 0 and 255 can be entered. By way of an example, the figure below illustrates address 27H, which corresponds to decimal address 39. Rotary coding switch for higher-order bits (S1) Rotary coding switch for lower-order bits (S2) Image 1-16 Example for address "27H" Connector pin assignments Signal type: I Input O Output B Bi-directional signals P Potential 28 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting X1, X2: Ethernet interfaces The pin assignment of the Ethernet interfaces X1, X2 can be found in "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting", Section: "Pin assignment of the interfaces". X3: Power supply The pin assignment of the power supply interface X3 can be found in "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting", Section: "Pin assignment of the interfaces". X7: Panel Present Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 1-2 1) X7 6-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 PRES O "High": Panel (HT 2) plugged in 2 XCTL O "Low": EMER STOP button pressed 1) 3 XFAULT O "Low": Error in emergency stop electronics 1) 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 M P Ground Function not implemented in Basic PN variant, output is not switched to "High" X8: Emergency Stop wiring terminal Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 1-3 X8 4-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the emergency stop wiring terminal X8 Pin Protective circuit 1 On-board jumper between 1 and 2 2 3 4 On-board jumper between 3 and 4 Note Use this terminal for simple routing of the emergency stop cables, optional. The connector is only used to assist looping through. The connected pins 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 have no additional function on the connection module. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 29 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting X20: Enabling buttons Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 1-4 Pin X20 8-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the interface enabling buttons X20 Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 ZUST1P I Electronic enabling button 1 P 2 ZUST1M O Electronic enabling button 1 M 3 ZUST2P I Electronic enabling button 2 P 4 ZUST2M O Electronic enabling button 2 M 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 N.C. - Not connected 7 N.C. - Not connected 8 N.C. - Not connected X21: Emergency stop and module supply voltage Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 1-5 X21 10-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the interface Emergency Stop and Module Supply Voltage Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 STOP23 2 STOP24 3 STOP13 4 STOP14 5 M P 6 N.C. - - 7 IN_E9 P Connected P24 (jumpered to Pin8 during opera tion) Emergency Stop circuit B Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit Ground 8 P24_FILT Filtered 24V module power supply 9 IN_E9_EXT Feedback signal via connected P24 10 IN_E12_EXT O "High": Terminating connector plugged in Note Pins 7 and 8 must be jumpered in order to supply a handheld terminal with power. 30 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3.3.3 Dimension drawing ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 0 JURXQGLQJ 0D[WLJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P 0 DO RQ SWL R 0 0RXQWLQJKROHV 0 RSWLRQDO (ORQJDWHGKROHVLIPRGXOHVDUHVFUHZHGWRWKHLQVLGHRIWKHFRQWUROFDELQHW Image 1-17 Connection module Basic PN - dimension drawing for control cabinet installation Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 31 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3.3.4 Installing the terminating connector Procedure Note If you never remove the HT 2 from the connection module, it is not necessary to attach the terminating connector. 32 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.Unscrew the fixing nut . 2.Attach the bracket for the terminating connector . 3.Tighten the retaining nut and insert the ter minating connector into the bracket. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 33 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3.4 Connection examples of enabling button and emergency stop button This section contains connection examples for enabling and emergency stop buttons corresponding to Category 3 PL d in accordance with EN ISO 13849-1:2008. Note To ensure Category 3 PL d in accordance with EN ISO 13849-1:2008, be sure to follow the operating instructions for the monitoring device being used. The monitoring devices shown in the following examples satisfy Category 4 PL e in accordance with EN ISO 13849-1:2008. The monitoring device and downstream components should be taken into consideration when calculating the overall "Enabling" safety function. 34 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting Connection - enabling button with evaluation unit The diagram shows the connection of an evaluation unit with the enabling buttons of the HT 2. (QDEOLQJEXWWRQRQWKHOHIW OHYHOVFLUFOHV (QDEOLQJEXWWRQRQWKHULJKW OHYHOVFLUFOHV &LUFOH &LUFOH +7 (YDOXDWLRQHOHFWURQLFV &LUFOH &LUFOH 7HUPLQDOER[313OXV%DVLF RU FRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH%DVLF31 (1$%/( (1$%/( (1$%/( (1$%/( &RQQHFWLQJFDEOH V 7HUPLQDOVWULS PPPLQ&X .$ (YDOXDWLRQXQLWIRU HQDEOLQJEXWWRQ .% .$ .% / 0 / / Image 1-18 Enabling button with evaluation unit All contacts of the safety relay (contactor) KA and KB are fitted with positively-driven contacts in accordance with EN 50205:2002. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 35 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting Connection - enabling button with safety relay The diagram shows the connection of safety switching device SIRIUS 3TK2841 with the enabling buttons of the HT 2. (QDEOLQJEXWWRQRQWKHOHIW OHYHOVFLUFOHV (QDEOLQJEXWWRQRQWKHULJKW OHYHOVFLUFOHV &LUFOH &LUFOH +7 (YDOXDWLRQHOHFWURQLFV &LUFOH &LUFOH '&9 &RQQHFWLRQER[313OXV%DVLF RU FRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH%DVLF31 (1$%/( (1$%/( (1$%/( (1$%/( &RQQHFWLQJFDEOH V 7HUPLQDOVWULSSLQ PPPLQ&X $ < < < < 0RQLWRULQJGHYLFH .$ 6,5,86 7. .% .$ .% / 0 $ < .$ *1' Image 1-19 / / .% *1' Enabling button with safety relay All contacts of the safety relay (contactor) KA and KB are fitted with positively-driven contacts in accordance with EN 50205:2002. 36 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting Connection - emergency stop button with safety relay The following figure shows the connection of the SIRIUS 3TK2822 or SIRIUS 3TK2841 safety relay to the emergency stop button of the HT 2. (PHUJHQF\VWRSEXWWRQ FLUFXLWSRVLWLYHRSHQLQJRSHUDWLRQ +7 &LUFXLW &LUFXLW &RQQHFWLRQFDEOH 7HUPLQDOVWULS SLQ 6723 &7/ 6723 35(6 6723 35(6 6723 0RQLWRULQJGHYLFH '&9 .$ .% $ 2Q < 6WRSFLUFXLW RU HPHUJHQF\VWRS FLUFXLW &LUFXLW &7/ &LUFXLW 7HUPLQDOVWULS SLQ < < < / 0 / / .$ 6,5,86 7. 7. .% $ < *1' Image 1-20 .$ .% *1' Emergency stop button with safety relay All contacts of the safety relay (contactor) KA and KB are fitted with positively-driven contacts in accordance with EN 50205:2002. Monitoring outputs may not be used for safety-related functions. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 37 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.3.5 Connecting cable The connecting cable is an industrial cable and, thus, resistant to many solvents and lubricants. The flexural strength is geared to the actual usage conditions. The connecting cable is available in different lengths. You will find information in Section: "Accessories". Metallic push-pull circular connector (ODU connector) Strain relief and kink protection for connecting cable Plug connector for enabling button, emergency stop, 24 V and safety signals RJ45 connector (Ethernet connection) Image 1-21 Connecting cable of the HT 2 The connecting cable is connected to the HT 2 via the RJ 45 connector (3) and the plug connector (4). The ODU connector (1) serves to connect the connecting cable to the terminal box PN or the connection module PN (control cabinet installation). The tightening torque for the nut of the ODU socket is 6.5 Nm. The HT 2 has one cable entry on its rear side for connecting the cable. It is located under the cover (see Section: "Control and display elements" "Overview"). Laying the connecting cable NOTICE Damage to components Only open the connection slot when the power supply voltage is switched off. Otherwise, components could be destroyed or non-defined signal states can occur. When the connection slot is open, the Handheld Terminal HT 2 is sensitive with respect to electrostatic discharge. Do not remove the ESD protection when opening the device. 38 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 1.Place the device on a soft, horizontal surface so that the operator control components are not me chanically damaged. Open the cable duct cover (2) by unscrewing the six PT screws (4 x 20 mm) approximately 1 cm (1). To do this, use a crosstip size 2 screw driver. Cable duct cover open (1) Cable entry Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 39 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 2.Insert the connecting cable into the cable entry. Gently press the cable downwards until it is com pletely retained by the retaining elements (1). Ensure that the cable doesn't sag away from the mounting surface, but is located flush to the mounting surface. Otherwise, the device could be pulled down to the floor and damaged. In order to avoid damaging the cable sheath, do not route it over sharp edges. 3.Connect the RJ-45 connector(1) to the Ethernet socket. Press the plug connector (2) firmly into the pow er supply socket. WARNING Improper installation of the cable can result in failure of the safety functions. When plugging in the connector plug, ensure that all cables are lying straight in the cable guide. Check to ensure that all wires are aligned and straight and check the firm seating of the plug connector before replacing the cable duct cover. Make sure that the cable sleeve is installed correctly. Note Check to see that the cable label is not jammed in the seal. 40 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.3 Connecting 4.Put the cable duct cover on and secure it by tightening the six screws. NOTICE Damage to the thread in the fastening holes The housing of the HT 2 is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. Therefore, do not exceed 0.4 to 0.5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws (also for protecting the connecting cable). If you use a power screwdriver, ensure the max. speed of 600 rpm is adhered to (torque: 1 Nm). The screws of the cable duct cover may only be loosened or tightened a maximum of 20 times. Otherwise, there is the danger that the threads might become damaged and the seal of the housing will be compromised which could lead to failure of the device. 1.3.6 Power Supply The HT 2 is supplied with power via the connecting cable of the terminal box PN or of the connection module PN. The input voltage range is designed for +24 VDC. For further details, see: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning" "General electrical conditions" "Power supply". 1.3.7 Unplugging/plugging during operation The ability to detect a connected HT 2 in the PLC 1. HW solution: The X7 interface of the connection module PN Basic signals "HT 2 Present" at pin 1 for the "active" connection module (see Section: "Connections" "Connection module PN Basic" "Interfaces"). If the connection module is "inactive", this signal is not set. This makes the "active" connection module detectable in the PLC by wiring the abovementioned pins of all connection modules to digital I/Os on PLC I/O modules. 2. Permanently configured MCPs / HT 2 on one control: If there are only permanently configured MCPs / HT 2 on a control, removal of the MCP or HT 2 triggers the PLC alarm "400260 Machine Control Panel failed". Based on this, an "active" or "inactive" MCP / HT 2 in the PLC can be detected. The failure of an MCP / HT 2 is, however, only detected in the PLC if max. 2 MCP / HT 2 are permanently configured and no MCP changeover by means of FB9 (e.g. triggered by HMI when operator focus is switched). Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 41 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning 1.4 Commissioning 1.4.1 BIOS 1.4.1.1 BIOS powering up After you have switched-in the power supply voltage of the HT 2, the BIOS initializes the hardware and boots the system. All LEDs are briefly activated after the hardware has been initialized. The HT 2 is ready for operation. Note If errors occur while booting, an appropriate message is displayed (see Section: "Error messages"). 1.4.1.2 Settings in the BIOS menu You can activate the BIOS menu by keeping the upper left key pressed while booting. The BIOS main menu is opened. Main menu MAIN MENU Image 1-22 BIOS - main menu of the HT 2 The available sub-menus are displayed at the center of the screen. The functions that can be executed with the four keys of the upper row of keys (softkeys) are listed in the bar at the lower edge. Functions 42 Key < ESC > Exiting the main menu Left (outside) <> Scrolling upwards Left (center) <> Scrolling downwards Right (center) < OK > Activating the selected menu item Right (outside) Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning Submenu: Display Submenu Menu item Significance Display Brightness Setting the display brightness Contrast Setting the display contrast Submenu: Diagnostics Submenu Menu item Significance Notes Diagnostics LEDs The LEDs are switched-in one after the other in the form of a running light. With this test, ensure that all of the LEDs light up and no LED remains per manently lit up. Keyboard Visualizing the pressed keys. Multiple keys can be simultaneously pressed. In addition, the LEDs of all pressed keys are lit. The upper left key exits this test. Enabling switch Displays the state of the two enabling button cir cuits. - "Off" - "Enabled" - "Panic" This test only checks the functionality of the enabling buttons. This test does not include any of the other safety-relevant components (e.g. correct connection of the ena bling function at the machine)! If the state of a circuit is not correctly displayed, then the device must be im mediately disabled. Override switch Displays the position of the override rotary switch (value 0 to 18). Key switch Displays the key-operated switch position. - "Off" - "On (1)" - "On (2) Handwheel Displays the actual counter state of the handwheel. Each time that this menu item is called, the counter state is reset to zero. Submenu: Info Submenu Menu item Sub point Significance Info Hardware Memory Displays the size of the main memory in MB Flash Displays the size of the flash module in MB Supply Displays the power supply voltage in volt Temperature Displays the internal housing temperature in C BIOS Displays the version number of the BIOS Boot loader Displays the version number of the boot loader Coprocessor Displays the version number of the coprocessor firmware Hours counter Operating hours counter (units: hours) Power on Power-on counter Software Counters Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 43 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning 1.4.1.3 Error handling Faults # Problem Cause Solution 1 No display - all LEDs off The power supply is interrupted. Check the power supply connection. If the fault remains, then the device is defective. 2 No display - LEDs briefly flash once The display contrast is incorrectly set. 1. When powering-up, keep the lefthand (first) softkey pressed. 2. Press once, one after the other - the righthand (fourth) softkey - the third softkey - the righthand (fourth) softkey 3. Using the second and third softkeys, change the contrast until it is easy to read the display. 3 No display - all LEDs flash permanently The display is defective. 4 Displays the message: "Test commandhandler" The "Testcommandhandler" was activated. Re-boot the HT 2. Error messages # Display Description Cause 1 SDRAM data line test failed! An error has occurred while test ing the SDRAM data lines. The hardware is defective. 2 SDRAM data line test failed! An error has occurred while test ing the SDRAM address lines. The hardware is defective. 3 SDRAM access test failed! An error has occurred when ac cessing the SDRAM. The hardware is defective. 4 SDRAM fill test failed! An error has occurred when writ ing a test pattern to the SDRAM. The hardware is defective. 5 Unexpected SDRAM size! The size of the SDRAM deter mined, does not correspond to the expected size. The hardware is defective. 6 Wrong coprocessor ver The firmware of the ATmega88 is sion, update required! too old. 7 Coprocessor communi cation error! An error has occurred for the cy clic SPI communication with the ATmega88. 8 BIOS code corrupted! The BIOS checksum is invalid. 9 Hardware info block in valid! The hardware information block is The block was corrupted invalid. when updating or the flash module is defective. 44 Solution The BIOS was updated however not the ATmega88 firmware. Update the ATmega88 firm ware. The BIOS has been corrup ted due to an unsuccessful update or a defective flash module. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning # Description Cause 10 Serial number not set! Display The serial number is missing. It is possible that the serial number was deleted while updating. 11 MAC ID not set! There is no MAC ID. The MAC ID may have been deleted while updat ing. 12 No bootloader present! There is no bootloader. Solution 13 Bootloader code corrup The bootloader checksum is inva The bootloader has been ted! lid. damaged due to an unsuc cessful update or a defec tive flash module. 14 Pressed keys detected! One or several keys are pressed. The hardware is defective if no keys have been pressed. 15 Display error! Reading back the display status was unsuccessful. 1.4.2 The hardware is defective. Interface signals PLC module The FC13 "HHUDisp" supports the handling of the LC display. For a detailed description, please refer to: Literature: Function Manual, Basic Functions, Basic PLC Program (P3). Note The customer is responsible for programming the transfer of key signals to the interface in a PLC user program. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 45 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning User interface Layout of keys and LEDs 7 7 7 7 ; < = 7+ $;,6 Image 1-23 Operator keys, standard assignment The first row of keys (free keys T1 ... T4) is not assigned as standard. Input image HT 2 You can tap the signals for the keys, feed rate override switch, key-operated switch and acknowledgement of the digital display at the input area. The address range is set by parameter assignment with STEP7 tools. Byte no. Input signals to PLC Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 EB m+0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved EB m+1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved EB m+2 Feed start Free T2 key AUTOMATIC NC stop Spindle stop Feed stop Free T1 key JOG EB m+3 Free T3 key Handwheel 4. Axis Z Y X NC Start Spindle start EB m+4 Direction key - Direction key + Free T4 key EB m+5 Acknowl edgement digital display 46 Rapid tra verse override Keyswitch Rapid traverse / feed rate override switch E D C B A Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning Rotary switch positions HT 2 Position % EDCBA 0 0 00001 1 1 00011 2 2 00010 3 4 00110 4 6 00111 5 8 00101 6 10 00100 7 20 01100 8 30 01101 9 40 01111 10 50 01110 11 60 01010 12 70 01011 13 75 01001 14 80 01000 15 85 11000 16 90 11001 17 95 11011 18 100 11010 Output image HT 2 The signals for controlling the LEDs, HHU mode, display signals and digital display are present at the output area. Byte no. Output signals to the HHU Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 AB m+0 always 1 Free T4 key Free T3 key Free T2 key Free T1 key AB m+1 New data for se lected line Selection lines 3, 4 Selection lines 1, 2 AB m+2 Feed start Rapid tra verse override AUTOMATIC NC stop Spindle stop Feed stop Direction key + JOG AB m+3 Direction key - Handwheel 4. Axis Z Y X NC Start Spindle start Note Output byte AB m + 0, bit 7 must always have the value '1'! This sets the display's output mode. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 47 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning Output image of the digital display Control of the digital display in the HT 2 Byte no. Byte Output signals to the HHU Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 AB m+4 Default setting of 1st character (right) of selected line AB m+5 Default setting of 2nd character of selected line AB m+6 Default setting of 3rd character of selected line AB m+7 Default setting of 4th character of selected line AB m+8 Default setting of 5th character of selected line AB m+9 Default setting of 6th character of selected line AB m + 10 Default setting of 7th character of selected line AB m + 11 Default setting of 8th character of selected line AB m + 12 Default setting of 9th character of selected line AB m + 13 Default setting of 10th character of selected line AB m + 14 Default setting of 11th character of selected line AB m + 15 Default setting of 12th character of selected line AB m + 16 Default setting of 13th character of selected line AB m + 17 Default setting of 14th character of selected line AB m + 18 Default setting of 15th character of selected line AB m + 19 Default setting of 16th character (left) of selected line Bit 1 Bit 0 Display The digital display is used as a 4-line alphanumeric display with 16 digits per line. The display data is coded according to the character set given in the ASCII code table for the digital display via the ABm + 4...19 bytes. The decimal point is a separate character. The 48 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning display always starts line by line right-justified with the byte ABm + 4 and is built up towards the left up to ABm + 19. Selecting the line ABm + 1, bit 0 and bit 1 This bit is used to select the line to be written. Table 1-6 Line selection Bit 0 Bit 1 Selected line 0 0 1. 1st line 1 0 2. 2nd line 0 1 3. 3rd line 1 1 4. 4th line New data for selected line ABm + 1, bit 7 This bit is used to request writing in of new data into a line. The bit is set by the user program and can be reset on detection of the acknowledgement bit EBm + 5, bit 7. Bit 7 = 0: Reset request. Bit 7 = 1: Set request Acknowledgement of the digital display EBm + 5, bit 7 This bit is set by the system after the new data has been accepted. Bit 7 = 0: No new data Bit 7 = 1: New data has been accepted Example of a signal chart Example of a signal chart when writing data for two lines 1 and 2 1. Select the line with ABm + 1, bit 0 and bit 1. 2. Write new data with ABm + 4...19. 3. Set request: New data for selected line ABm + 1, bit 7 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 49 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning 4. Acknowledgement digital display EBm + 5, bit 7, via system. 5. Reset request Note The request must be reset before a new line is written! 1 /LQH 6HOHFWLQJWKHOLQH /LQH 0 1 'DWDIRU /LQH :ULWLQJQHZGDWD 'DWDIRU /LQH 0 1 5HTXLUHPHQWQHZGDWD b b 0 a a c c d d 1 $FNQRZOHGJHPHQWGLJLWDOGLVSOD\ 0 D3/&XVHUVHWVWKHVLJQDODQGZDLWVIRUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW E6\VWHPVHWVDFNQRZOHGJPHQW F8VHUVHWVUHTXHVWEDFN G6\VWHPVHWVDFNQRZOHGJPHQWEDFN Image 1-24 HT2 signal characteristic example for writing data into the HT 2 display Proceed in the same way for the selection of line 3 and line 4 ASCII code for digital display Representation of characters by specifying the corresponding number system (hexadecimal/ decimal) in the bytes ABm + 4...19. The characters from Hex 20 to Hex 7F are default values. Table 1-7 ASCII Standard character set Hex/dec Char acter 20 / 32 1) 30 / 48 0 40 / 64 @ 50 / 80 P 60 / 96 70 / 112 p 21 / 33 ! 31 / 49 1 41 / 65 O 51 / 81 Q 61 / 97 a 71 / 113 q 22 / 34 " 32 / 50 2 42 / 66 B 52 / 82 R 62 / 98 b 72 / 114 r 23 / 35 # 33 / 51 3 43 / 67 C 53 / 83 S 63 / 99 c 73 / 115 s 24 / 36 $ 34 / 52 4 44 / 68 D 54 / 84 T 64 / 100 d 74 / 116 t Hex/dec 50 Char acter ASCII ASCII Hex/dec Char acter ASCII Hex/dec Char acter ASCII Hex/dec Char acter ASCII Hex/dec Char acter Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning Hex/dec ASCII Char acter Hex/dec Char acter Hex/dec Char acter Hex/dec Char acter Hex/dec Char acter Hex/dec Char acter 25 / 37 % 35 / 53 5 45 / 69 E 55 / 85 U 65 / 101 e 75 / 117 u 26 / 38 & 36 / 54 6 46 / 70 F 56 / 86 V 66 / 102 f 76 / 118 v 27 / 39 ' 37 / 55 7 47 / 71 G 57 / 87 W 67 / 103 g 77 / 119 w 28 / 40 ( 38 / 56 8 48 / 72 H 58 / 88 X 68 / 104 h 78 / 120 x 29 / 41 ) 39 / 57 9 49 / 73 I 59 / 89 Y 69 / 105 i 79 / 121 y 2A / 42 * 3A / 58 : 4A / 74 J 5A / 90 Z 6A / 106 j 7A / 122 z 2B / 43 + 3B / 59 ; 4B / 75 K 5B / 91 [ 6B / 107 k 7B / 123 { 2C / 44 , 3C / 60 < 4C / 76 L 5C / 92 \ 6C / 108 l 7C / 124 | 2D / 45 - 3D / 61 = 4D / 77 M 5D / 93 ] 6D / 109 m 7D / 125 } 2E / 46 . 3E / 62 > 4E / 78 N 5E / 94 ^ 6E / 110 n 7E / 126 ~ 2F / 47 / 3F / 63 ? 4F / 79 O 5F / 95 _ 6F / 111 o 7F / 127 2) ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII 1) Space 2 Not defined Table 1-8 ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Extended character set Hex/dec Char acter Hex/dec Char acter Hex/dec Char acter Hex/dec Char acter Hex/dec Char acter 1) B0 / 176 C0 / 192 A D0 / 208 E0 / 224 a F0 / 240 A1 / 161 B1 / 177 C1 / 193 A D1 / 209 N E1 / 225 a F1 / 241 n A2 / 162 B2 / 178 C2 / 194 A D2 / 210 O E2 / 226 a F2 / 242 o A3 / 163 B3 / 179 C3 / 195 A D3 / 211 O E3 / 227 a F3 / 243 o A4 / 164 B4 / 180 C4 / 196 A D4 / 212 O E4 / 228 a F4 / 244 o A5 / 165 B5 / 181 C5 / 197 A D5 / 213 O E5 / 229 a F5 / 245 o A6 / 166 | B6 / 182 C6 / 198 AE D6 / 214 O E6 / 230 ae F6 / 246 o A7 / 167 B7 / 183 * C7 / 199 C D7 / 215 x E7 / 231 c F7 / 247 / A8 / 168 B8 / 184 C8 / 200 E D8 / 216 O E8 / 232 e F8 / 248 o A9 / 169 (c) B9 / 185 C9 / 201 E D9 / 217 U E9 / 233 e F9 / 249 u AA / 170 BA / 186 CA / 202 E DA / 218 U EA / 234 e FA / 250 u Hex/dec A0 / 160 Char acter ASCII AB / 171 BB / 187 CB / 203 E DB / 219 U EB / 235 e FB / 251 u AC / 172 BC / 188 1/4 CC / 204 I DC / 220 U EC / 236 i FC / 252 u AD / 173 2) BD / 189 1/2 CD / 205 I DD / 221 Y ED / 237 i FD / 253 y AE / 174 (R) BE / 190 3/4 CE / 206 I DE / 222 EE / 238 i FE / 254 AF / 175 BF / 191 CF / 207 I DF / 223 EF / 239 i FF / 255 y 1) Protected space 2) Conditional separator Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 51 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning 1.4.3 Application example for HT8 and HT 2 involving mixed operation Prerequisite The following example relates to an 840D sl plus TCU with MCP xxx PN and an optional HT 8 or HT 2 connected to a PN box. All the components are connected to X120 of the NCU. The application example is equally valid for an MPP xxx IE H (with connection for HT 2/HT 8) instead of a connection module /erminal box. The TCU and HT 8 function as "thin client units" and as soon as they assume the operating focus, they use their MCP address (db19.dbb123) and index (db19.dbb118) to register with the PLC. This setting is specified for both devices during the initial connection and is stored on the NCU's CompactFlash card (config.ini). By contrast, the HT 2 does not function as a "thin client unit". Consequently, it does not inform the PLC whether it is connected; it is addressed in the PLC via the DIP switch position of the connection point (PN box/module or MPP xxx IEH). 7&8 0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO (LWKHU +7 RU +7 &RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH31RU DOWHUQDWLYHO\DWHUPLQDOER[31 1&8 52 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning Configuration involving HT 8 The following is assumed: TCU: MCP address = 192, index = 7 HT 8: MCP address = 10, index = 10 PN box DIP switch position = 10 Depending on whether we are dealing with the TCU or HT 8, either the MCP xxx PN or the integrated HT8_MCP should now be activated. To do this, perform the following on the PLC: Depending on whether it is the TCU or the HT 8 that has the operating focus (db19.dbb123), the relevant MCP bus address must be modified in DB7 ("gp_par"): Deactivate MCP via Define MCP address via Activate MCP via "gp_par".MCP1Stop = 1 "gp_par".MCP1BusAdr = db19.dbb123 "gp_par".MCP1Stop = 0 Configuration involving HT 2 To activate the HT 2, proceed as follows: Check whether the TCU has the operating focus (HT 8 disconnected/db19.dbb123==192). Activate the HT 2, e.g. via button using "gp_par".BHGStop = 0. Relevant entries in OB100: CALL FB 1, DB 7 MCPNum := 1 MCP1In := P#E 0.0 MCP1Out := P#A 0.0 MCP1StatSend := P#A 8.0 MCP1StatRec := P#A 12.0 MCP1BusAdr := 10 //<<-- MCP_addr. for HT 8 corresp. TCU settings / or for MCP 483 xxx PN MCPBusType := B#16#55 //55=Ethernet BHG := 5 //5=Ethernet = HT 2 BHGIn := P#M 300.0 BHGOut := P#M 320.0 BHGRecGDNo := 10 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 //= DIP switch position on PN box (or MPP xxx IE) to which HT 2 is connected 53 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.4 Commissioning 1.4.4 Application example for two HT 2 units connected to SINUMERIK Prerequisite The following example relates to the operation of two HT 2 units on one network. The aim is to switch over from one HT 2 to the other. The following is assumed: There are two PN boxes on the network (with DIP switch positions 10 and 11). There is an HT 2 unit connected to each of these, but only one of them is activated. The application example is equally valid for an MPP xxx IE H (with connection for HT 2) instead of a connection module / terminal box. Activating an HT 2 The HT 2 that is being activated is addressed by specifying the DIP switch position in "gp_par".BHGRecGDNo. Switchover during operation: Deactivate HHU via Modify the PN box assignment via Activate HHU via "gp_par".BHGStop = 1 "gp_par".BHGRecGDNo = 10 or 11 "gp_par".BHGStop = 0 If there is only one HT 2, it is sufficient to specify these parameters by means of FB1 parameter assignment in OB100 (DIP switch position 10): CALL FB 1, DB 7 54 MCPNum := 1 MCP1In := P#E 0.0 MCP1Out := P#A 0.0 MCP1StatSend := P#A 8.0 MCP1StatRec := P#A 12.0 MCP1BusAdr := 10 //<<-- MCP_addr. for HT 8 corresp. TCU settings / or for MCP 483 xxx PN MCPBusType := B#16#55 //55=Ethernet BHG := 5 //5=Ethernet = HT 2 BHGIn := P#M 300.0 BHGOut := P#M 320.0 BHGRecGDNo := 10 //= DIP switch position on PN box (or MPP xxx IE) to which HT 2 is connected Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.6 Maintenance and Service 1.5 Dimension drawing (1) Standard position mounting bracket (optional: Retaining magnet) (2) Standard position retaining magnet (optional: mounting bracket) (3) Position for the type plate Image 1-25 1.6 HT 2 - dimension drawing Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing, display and operator control elements of the HT 2. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the HT 2, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 55 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.7 Technical data Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the HT 2 against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button and the enabling button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. Check the enabling button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly in the enable and panic position. WARNING Danger of death caused by damaged HT 2 Immediately check the functioning of the emergency stop button and the enabling button if the device was subject to significant shock (e.g. because it was dropped). 1.7 Technical data 1.7.1 Handheld Terminal HT 2 Handheld Terminal HT 2 Safety Safety class III according to EN 61131-2 / EN 50178 Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Current carrying capacity 24 V DC Enabling button: Emergency Stop button: Power consumption, max. 0 - 500 mA / 2-channel, 3-stage 1 - 1000 mA / 2-channel Approx. 2.5 W Mechanical data 56 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.7 Technical data Dimensions Height (without operator control elements): 76.2 mm Wi dth : 10 0 m m Depth: 255 m Weight 0.69 kg Fall height, max. 1.20 m Display Resolution 128 x 64 pixels Climatic ambient conditions Condensation and ice formation Not permissible Dripping water, spray, splash water, jet-water Permissible Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 Perm. ambient temperature 0 ... 50 C -25 ... 60 C Limit values for relative humidity at 25 C 5 ... 65% 5 ... 95% Operation Storage and transport Emergency Stop button Rated voltage 24 V DC Current rating, max. 1A Current rating, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 1000 A, 6A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d (if no PN terminal box used) 100 000 When the PN Plus connection box is used: PFHd 1.01 * 10-7 Service life 20 years Forced dormant error detection interval (mechanical actua 1 year tion to the test the emergency stop) Category 3 Performance Level PL d Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 57 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.7 Technical data Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d value corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d value only applies when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. When using the PN Plus terminal box, the specified failure probability (PFHd) must be taken into account. This value only applies when the technical properties of the PN Plus terminal box and the quantitative conditions specified here (e.g. service life) are observed. Enabling button Output type Solid-state output Nominal voltage that can be switched 24 VDC (voltage tolerance 19.2 VDC up to 30 VDC according to EN 61131-2) Rated current that can be switched 500 mA (max.) Switch-off current (max.) Circuit1 1.5 mA Circuit2 0.8 mA Inductive load ( max.) Circuit1 / circuit2 145 mJ / 1.16 H @ 24 VDC, 500 mA (comparable, DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1) Reverse polarity protection Circuit1 / circuit2 Yes Short-circuit and overload protection Circuit1 Yes (integrated in the output FET) Circuit2 Yes (using a protective circuit) Operating cycles Switch position 2 105 Switch position 3 104 Actuation forces From switch position 1 to 2, typically 6N From switch position 2 to 3, typically 12 N PFHd 1.35 * 10-7 Service life 20 years Forced dormant error detection interval (mechani 1 year cal actuation to the test the enable and panic po sition) 58 Category 3 Performance Level PL d Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.7 Technical data Note The PFHd value only applies when the technical properties of the enabling button and the quantitative conditions specified here (e.g. service life) are observed. The permissible number of switching cycles must also be observed in the application. Handwheel The handwheel of HT 2 is operated in the system as 3rd handwheel. General machine data: MD 11350 $MN_HANDWHEEL_SEGMENT[0] = 7 MD 11351 $MN_HANDWHEEL_MODULE[0] = 1 MD 11352 $MN_HANDWHEEL_INPUT[0] = 5 1.7.2 Connection module Basic PN Safety Safety class III according to IEC 60536 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 IP54 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Current carrying capacity Max. power consumption Max. total power consumption 24 VDC (via X3 connector) Enabling button contacts (X20 connector) max. each 0.5 A / 2-chan nel Emergency stop button contacts (X21 con nector) max. each 0.5 A / 2-chan nel Connection module without external loading 0.3 A Panel (HT 2) 0.12 A 5 status signals (X7 and X21) 2.5 A (0.5 A each) Total: 2.92 A Approx. 70 W Mechanical data Dimensions Height (without holder for termi nating connector): 66 mm Weight 0.75 kg Fall height, max. 1.20 m Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Width: 165 mm Length: 166 mm 59 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.7 Technical data Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 1.7.3 PN terminal box General data Weight without packaging Approx. 700 g Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (with connected HT 2 or with inserted blanking cover) Electrical data Rated voltage +24 V DC Range, permissible 20.4 to 28.8 V (-15%, +20%) Transients, maximum permissible 35 V (500 ms) Time between two transients, minimum 50 s Current consumption of PN terminal box without HT 2 Typical Approx. 100 mA Continuous current, maximum Approx. 150 mA Inrush current I t Approx. 0.5 A2s Current consumption of PN with HT 2, typical Approx. 100 mA Fuse, internal Electronic Current load PLC-accompanying signals Max. 100 mA 2 Note Recovery time Wait for approximately one second after withdrawing the connecting cable from the connection box before reinserting. After power failures lasting less than one second the connecting cable has to be disconnected. 60 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories 1.8 Spare parts The following service set is available for SIMATIC connecting boxes PN Basic and PN Plus: Designation Remark Quantity Article number Service set for mobile pan Dummy plugs for cable compartment els PG screw glands for connection box 1 6AV6574-1AA04-4AA0 2 Blanking cover for connecting a handheld ter minal 1 Terminal strips for connection box 3 1.9 Accessories 1.9.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the HT 2: Designation Remark Quantity Article number PN Basic terminal box Without automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system 1 6AV6671-5AE01-0AX0 *) PN Plus terminal box With automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system 1 6AV6671-5AE11-0AX0 *) PN Basic connection module Without automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the control cabinet 1 6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0 *) Connecting cable Length: 2 m 1 6XV1440-4BH20 *) Length: 5 m 1 6XV1440-4BH50 *) Length: 8 m 1 6XV1440-4BH80 *) Length: 10 m 1 6XV1440-4BN10 *) Length: 15 m 1 6XV1440-4BN15 *) Length: 20 m 1 6XV1440-4BN20 *) Length: 25 m 1 6XV1440-4BN25 *) 1 6FC5348-0AA08-3AA0 *) 1 set 6AV6574-1AG04-4AA0 Spiral connecting cable Length: 1.5 m, can be expanded to 3.5 m Set of keys Set of 5 Retaining magnet for HT 2 Holder for HT 2 For safekeeping, also suitable for stationary op eration Slide-in labels Can be labeled (3 films, DIN A4) 2 6FC5348-0AA08-0AA0 2 6FC5348-0AA08-1AA0 1 set 6FC5348-0AA08-2AA0 *) Safety related accessories Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 61 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories 1.9.2 Mount Note There is no counterpiece to the holder on the HT 2 in the scope of delivery and must be provided by the customer depending on the circumstances. The HT 2 can be retained using the mounting rack. Image 1-26 HT 2 mounting bracket The mounting bracket is mounted the same way as the retaining magnets. A description about this can be found in Section: "Retaining magnet". Note Please ensure that the HT can be ergonomically mounted. Therefore, choose a suitable mounting height. 62 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories Dimension drawing $ $ 0 $$ Image 1-27 1.9.3 Dimension drawing of the HT 2 mounting bracket Retaining magnet The HT 2 can be mounted onto all sheet metal parts using the retaining magnets. Image 1-28 HT 2 retaining magnet Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 63 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories Mounting the retaining magnets Note A second magnet can be mounted at position (2) to increase the holding forces. 1. Open the cable duct cover by unscrewing the six PT screws approximately 1 cm. To do this, use a crosstip size 2 screw driver. 64 (1) Standard position retaining magnet (optional: Mounting bracket) (2) Standard position mounting bracket (optional: Retaining magnet) A second retaining magnet can be used when required. (3) PT screws (4 x 20 mm) (4) Cable duct cover Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories 2. Locate the retaining magnets under the cable duct cover and retain them from the rear using the screw. To do this, use a slotted size 4 screwdriver. 3. Re-attach the cable duct cover of the HT 2. Ensure that the tightening torque does not ex ceed max. 0.4 - 0.5 Nm. (1) Retaining magnet with retaining screw (2) Retaining magnet mounted Working with retaining magnets CAUTION Danger of injury from flying sparks Do not install the magnets in hazardous locations as they can cause arcing and sparking. WARNING Danger of death due to strong magnetic fields Even at a considerable distance apart, magnets can be attracted to one another, repel one another or splitter when they collide. This involves strong forces. This is the reason that you should avoid that magnets collide and work with the appropriate protection in order to prevent skin crushing and other injuries. Strong magnetic fields can destroy electronic or mechanical elements and devices. This also applies to heart pacemakers. Therefore observe the necessary safety clearances. Information on this is provided in the documentation of the corresponding devices. Carefully observe the appropriate packing regulations when shipping by air. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 65 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories 1.9.4 Slide-in label 1.9.4.1 Labeling the slide-in labels In the factory, the Handheld Terminal HT 2 is supplied with five horizontal slide-in labels. With the exception of the slide-in label for the first row of keys, standard symbols for the machine control are printed on the slide-in labels. Image 1-29 HT2 slide-in labels When requested, an accessory package with three blank slide-in labels can be ordered, so that these strips can be printed with the key symbols according to your specifications (see Section: "Accessories" "Overview"). 66 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories Files for printing the blank film Image 1-30 Blank film HT 2 [printing direction (1)] The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: Template_HT2_13.doc Symbols_OP08T_13.doc The file "Template_HT2_13.doc" is a template for the exact positioning of the symbols on the printable film. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 67 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories Image 1-31 Template_HT2_13.doc (blank template for the film) The "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" file contains a broad range of key symbols. An overview of these can be found via "Operator panels" > "OP 08T operator panel front" > "Accessories" > "Labeling the slide-in labels". Preparing slide-in labels 1. Open the files "Template_HT2_13.doc" and "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" in MS Word. 2. Select a key symbol from the file "Symbols_OP08T_13.doc" by left-clicking. 3. Copy the desired symbol to the clipboard via "Edit" "Copy" or "Ctrl + C" 4. Return to the template file "Template_HT2_13.doc" 5. Position the cursor before the insertion point in the desired table cell. 6. Insert the key symbol via "Edit" "Paste" or "Ctrl + V". 7. To format the graphics, double click on the inserted symbol with the lefthand mouse key. - Select the "size" tab and set the symbol height to 1.1 cm. - Click on <OK> to accept the change. 8. Repeat steps 2. to 7. until you have inserted all the key symbols. 68 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories Printing the slide-in labels 1. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see Fig.: "Blank film HT 2"). 2. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 3. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note For labeling the slide-in labels, HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 4. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (see Fig.: "Template_HT2_13.doc"). 5. Round off the corners of the slide-in labels approx. 3 mm to facilitate insertion. Dimension drawings Image 1-32 Dimensions for slide-in labels Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 69 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories Creating your own symbols Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a 13 x 13 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Group the square and symbol together and add this group in the MS Word document Template_HT2_13.doc. Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint) - Draw a square 13x13 mm (37x37 pixel), filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the symbol and the square together and add the group in the MS Word document Template_HT2_13.doc. 1.9.4.2 Replacing the slide-in labels The slots to insert the slide-in labels are located under a cover on the lefthand side of the HT 2 that is integrated into the device design. Image 1-33 Cover of the slide-in labels (1) The retaining screws of the cover are accessible from the rear of the HT 2. 1. 2. 70 Remove the three Phillips screws (5x14) using a screw driver, size PH1. Remove the cover. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories 3. 4. 5. (1) (2) Withdraw the required slide-in label. Insert the new slide-in labels. Re-attach the cover and screw it into place. Slide-in labels inserted Slide-in labels withdrawn Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 71 Handheld Terminal HT 2 1.9 Accessories 72 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 2 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.1 Description The HT 8 mobile handheld terminal combines the functions of an operator panel and a machine control panel in one device, permitting complete operator control and monitoring of machines. It can be used according to the principle of a thin client (also see "Operator panels", Chapter: "Thin client unit") as a supplementary main operator panel or as a secondary control panel. The optional touch pen with a holding loop permits easy operation of the touch screen, even when operators are wearing gloves. Its safety concept permits working in the hazardous area of the machine, which is necessary, for example, when teaching in. Note Siemens declares that this device complies with the requirements and other regulations of the directives 2006/42/EC (machinery directive) and 2004/108/EC (EMC guideline). The full declaration can be found on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ document/109476859?dti=0&lc=en-WW). Features Operator control via touch screen and membrane keys Fully graphic 7.5" TFT color display Emergency Stop button and two enabling buttons for left-handed and right-handed operators Easy hot swapping during operation (hot plug and play), without triggering the emergency stop in combination with the PN Plus connection box and without an additional, manual actuating element / keyswitch The HT 8 can be safely kept and operated in a stationary manner in the wall holder (accessory). Validity The following description applies to the following components: Designation Features Article number HT 8 Enabling button, emergency stop button, override rotary switch 6FC5403-0AA20-0AA1 HT 8 Enabling button, emergency stop button, override rotary switch, handwheel 6FC5403-0AA20-1AA1 The safety-related accessories are marked in the "Accessories" section with a *). Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 73 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.1 Description Function blocks In the unit: PCB with CPU, memory Ethernet controller Device front: LC display as touch screen - 640 x 480 (VGA) Color TFT - Inverter on board 52-key membrane keyboard - 24 machine control keys - 28 control keys (number pad, cursor pad, function keys) Emergency Stop button, 2-channel Rotary override switch (19 positions) Handwheel (optional) Device rear: 2 enabling buttons (2-channel, 3-stage) Serial interfaces: - HT 8 connection cable to terminal box / connection module - USB interface (with dummy plugs) Power supply (+24 V) 74 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.2 Operator controls and indicators 2.2 Operator controls and indicators 2.2.1 View Front Emergency Stop button Handwheel Rotary override switch Protective collar Customer keys (user-defined) HMI control keys Function keys machine control panel Display / touch screen Traversing keys Image 2-1 User interface of the HT 8 with handwheel Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 75 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.2 Operator controls and indicators Rear Handle Cover Connector with integrated USB connection Sleeve for the connecting cable Connecting cable Enabling buttons (left and one right on the handle) Image 2-2 Connections and operator controls at the rear of the HT 8 Connector with integrated USB connection USB protective cap Image 2-3 76 USB connection of the HT 8 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.2 Operator controls and indicators Holes The HT 8 consists of a double-walled housing with upper shell and lower shell On the lower shell, the HT 8 has three small holes . These drill-holes are attached for the purpose of diverting the liquid that can penetrate into the space between the double-walled housing if the malleable protective shroud on the upper shell is pushed through. 2.2.2 Description Display / touch screen The display has LED background lighting. All the application-specific functions are displayed on the touch-sensitive display. The particular function is initiated by your finger or an optional touch pen at the appropriate location in the display. NOTICE Damage to the display by pointed or hard objects Do not touch the operating elements of the display with pointed or hard objects, as this can damage it, sometimes beyond repair. In order to achieve precise assignment by pixels, the touch-sensor must be calibrated and adjusted to the touch screen. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 77 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.2 Operator controls and indicators Information for calibrating the touch screen of the HT 8 can be found in: "General information and networking", Chapter: "Networking" Note Calibration of the touch sensor may also become necessary during operation, because the resistance values of the touch membrane change when there is a temperature change. Membrane keyboard On the front of the HT8, 52 keys are arranged in several key blocks (see Image 2-1 User interface of the HT 8 with handwheel (Page 75)). NOTICE Damage to the keys when using pointed or hard objects Only use your fingers to touch the membrane keyboard and not sharp or hard objects, which can damage or even destroy the keys. Further, please note that the touch pen is also not suitable for using the membrane keyboard. Function keys machine control panel Left: START, STOP, RESET, AUTO, JOG, TEACH, ALARM CANCEL Bottom: U (User button) Right: 2 x 6 traversing keys, 4 user keys (can be freely assigned) HMI control keys The number pad contains the numbers 1-9, the decimal point and the minus sign The cursor pad is used to navigate on the screen. Seven keys for - Input - Menu change - Switch-over of the softkey bars - Help function Emergency Stop button The red mushroom-shaped head of the Emergency Stop button is provided with a yellow ring. Directly under the mushroom-shaped head, there is also a black ring which identifies the position status of the Emergency Stop button. State 78 Ring (black) Visible Not visible Emergency Stop button Not pressed Pressed Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.2 Operator controls and indicators If an emergency stop is triggered, the button locks into place. If the button is locked into place, it can be unlocked by rotating it to the right. Emergency Stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the Emergency Stop button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Machine manufacturer For other responses to the Emergency Stop: Refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions! The signals are sent via the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring. Rotary override switch The rotary override switch of the HT 8 has 19 positions. The evaluation scale (0 to max.) is specified by the machine's manufacture in the form of machine data. Enabling button The HT 8 has two enabling buttons that are logically grouped. This allows the enabling function to be triggered by either the left or the right hand during normal operation. The enabling buttons are configured as 2-channel, 3-position switches for the following button positions: Released (no activation) Enabling (center position) - enabling for channel 1 and 2 is on the same switch. Panic (completely pushed through) Note Monitoring the enabling function The enabling duration is monitored to avoid that the enabling button is permanently bypassed. The enabling outputs are opened after max. 30 min permanent enabling. The enabling outputs are only closed again after first releasing the enabling button and then actuating it again. The enabling time of 30 min can be extended by switching to the second enabling button before the 30 min expires. The system checks the synchronism of the two enabling button circuits of the mechanical enabling button. The two enabling button circuits (of the button) must be closed within 2 seconds. As a consequence, it is not possible to actuate just one enabling circuit and therefore provoke a fault. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 79 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.2 Operator controls and indicators The signals are sent via the connecting cable to the terminal box or the connection module and are available for further wiring. Connection examples of the enabling and emergency stop button can be found in Chapter: "HT 2", Section: "Connections" "Connection examples of enabling button and emergency stop button" Handwheel The HT 8 is available with a handwheel. The handwheel operates with 50 pulses/revolution. HT 8 operated with the handwheel An HT 8 with a handwheel behaves in the same way as an MCP 483C PN (in Ethernet mode) with a handwheel. The handwheel pulses are transferred via Ethernet to the NCK using the HT 8 MCP process image. NOTICE Lack of care for traversing can cause damage to the tool/workpiece The increments per revolution for a handwheel on a mobile HT 8 amount to 50 increments/ revolution; for a stationary unit, it is 100 increments/revolution. A different length of the traverse path results from this difference. 2.2.3 Screen brightness control If a screen with high contrast is displayed unchanged for longer than 1 hour, the screen brightness control must be activated (screen switched dark) in order to protect the TFT display against a phenomenon known as "burn-in" of the last displayed screen. For more information see: IM9 Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate IM4 HMI-Advanced Commissioning Manual NOTICE You may do irreversible damage to your TFT display if the screen brightness control is not activated. 80 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.3 interfaces 2.3 interfaces 2.3.1 Overview The following diagram shows the connection options at the HT 8. +70DLQERDUG ; ; ; 9ROW (PHUJHQF\6WRS EXWWRQ (QDEOLQJEXWWRQ (WKHUQHW 86% VRFNHW &RQQHFWLQJFDEOH 7HUPLQDOER[ &RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH 033 Image 2-4 2.3.2 Block diagram of HT 8 interfaces Description Signal type B Bi-directional signal O Signal output V Supply voltage I Signal input VI Voltage input VO Voltage output K Contact X3: Ethernet connection The Ethernet interface is compatible to the 10/100/1000BASE-T IEEE 802.3 standard, without crossover function. Connector designa tion: Connector type: Pin assignment Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 X3 8-pole RJ45-socket with interlock (above) The pin assignment corresponds to the standard, see "General infor mation and networking" "Connecting". 81 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.3 interfaces X5: USB interface The USB interface corresponds to the USB 1.1 specification with full speed data rate. Connector designa tion: Connector type: Pin assignment X5 Type A socket The pin assignment corresponds to the standard, see "General infor mation and networking" "Connecting". NOTICE Damage to the plug by missing protective cap Replace the USB connector if its protective cap is torn, because in this case, the connector is no longer protected from dirt. NOTICE Damage to the inserted USB FlashDrive should the HT 8 fall A plugged-in USB FlashDrive can be damaged or broken off if the device falls. X51: Connection of the safety signals, power supply $ $ $ $ $ $ % % % % % Recess Connector designa tion: Connector type: Pin 82 % X 51 12-pole connector plug with coding and locking Signal Signal type A1 IDENT_P - A2 ENABLE 2+ A3 ENABLE 1+ I Meaning Box ID transfer + Enabling button channel 2, digital Enabling button channel 1, digital Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting Pin Signal A4 STOP -13 A5 STOP -23 K A6 P24 VI +24 V power supply Pin Signal Signal type Meaning B1 IDENT_N - B2 ENABLE 2- B3 ENABLE 1- B4 STOP -14 B5 STOP -24 K B6 M24 VI 2.4 Connecting 2.4.1 Overview Signal type O Article no. Prefabricated cable SINUMERIK Handheld Terminal HT 8 Meaning Emerg. Stop circuit 2 Emerg. Stop circuit 1 Box ID transfer Enabling button channel 2, digital Enabling button channel 1, digital Emerg. Stop circuit 2 Emerg. Stop circuit 1 External ground Emergency stop / enabling circuit Connection box PN Basic / PN Plus 6XV1440-4B... 6FC5348-0AA08-3AA0 or Ethernet cable SINUMERIK NCU 7x0.3 PN Connection module Basic PN or SINUMERIK PCU 50.5 Emergency stop / enabling circuit SINUMERIK MPP 310 IEH/ MPP 483 IEH/ MPP 483 HTC Emergency stop / enabling circuit USB interface Image 2-5 Connection overview HT 8 The HT 8 is designed for communication in an Ethernet network. The following connection options are available: PN Basic terminal box/PN Plus terminal box PN Basic connection module (for control cabinet installation) or MPP 310 IEH / MPP 483 IEH / MPP 483 HTC Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 83 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting HT 8 with PN Basic/PN Plus terminal box PN Basic connection module (WKHUQHW MPP 483 HTC (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV 6DIHW\ VLJQDOV (WKHUQHW Connection via the PN Plus terminal box allows quick connection and disconnection during machine operation without an emergency stop being triggered. If no HT 8 is connected, observe the following: WARNING Danger of death resulting from improper access After disconnection, the HT 8 must be locked away. Emergency Stop buttons that are inactive must not be identified as such or must be inaccessible. This is to prevent the emergency stop button from being used inadvertently. Note An example of TCU and MCP xxx PN as well as optionally an HT 8 or HT 2 on a PN box / PN module can be found in Chapter: "HT 2", Section: "Commissioning" "Application example of HT8 and HT 2 in mixed operation". 84 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting 2.4.2 Terminal Box PN 2.4.2.1 Description LED displays for the communication Screwed joint for power supply cable and shield Screwed joint for cable with safety signals and enabling button signals and for PLC accompa nying signals Connecting socket for the connector plug of the connecting cable (covered with blanking cover) Screwed joint for process data cables (Ethernet) Image 2-6 View of the PN terminal box Note Degree of protection IP65 at the terminal box is ensured with plugged-in HT 8 or plugged-in dummy cap. The PN terminal box is available in two versions. PN Basic terminal box The PN Basic terminal box can be used if no hot-plug capability is required. The Emergency Stop circuit can be overridden here by external mechanisms. PN Plus terminal box The PN Plus terminal box features hot-plug capability. This means that it is possible to connect and disconnect during operation without any disruption. The emergency stop circuit is automatically maintained during the switching of connectors. Note The exterior of the PN terminal box versions only differs in terms of what is printed on the side. The terminal boxes feature two rotary coding switches (S1 and S2) so that a unique ID can be set for the purpose of station identification. See Chapter interfaces (Page 89). Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 85 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting Clearance The following clearances are required around the PN terminal box: Additional references You can find a detailed description in the operating instructions (compact) of the Mobile Panel 177 HMI device (WinCC flexible): http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/22166637 2.4.2.2 PN Plus terminal box The PN Plus terminal box differs from a PN Basic terminal box in that it has four relays mounted on the board. Board Relays Image 2-7 86 Inner view of the PN Plus terminal box Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting Switching states of the emergency stop circuit HT 8 Emergency Stop button Switching status, emergency stop circuit Connected Not pressed Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. Connected Pressed Not connected - The emergency stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. WARNING Danger of death resulting from the inadvertent disconnection of the HT 8 If you disconnect the HT 8 from the PN Plus terminal box, the emergency stop circuit is closed, thereby clearing the stop state of the system to be monitored. This occurs irrespective of whether the emergency stop button has been pressed on the HT 8. 2.4.2.3 PN Basic terminal box In contrast to the PN Plus terminal box, the "Stop loop through" function is not implemented on the PN Basic terminal box. Relays are so not required. Image 2-8 PN Basic terminal box Note The emergency stop circuit is controlled via the emergency stop button when the HT 8 is connected. If the connecting cable of the HT 8 is disconnected from the PN Basic terminal box, the emergency stop circuit is interrupted. This leads to a safe machine stop or an Emergency Stop of the system to be monitored. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 87 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting Switching states of the emergency stop circuit HT 8 Emergency Stop button Switching status, emergency stop circuit Connected Not pressed Emergency Stop circuit in the terminal box remains closed. Connected Pressed The emergency stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. - The emergency stop circuit in the terminal box is open. The system to be monitored is stopped. Not connected WARNING Danger of death resulting from the premature emergency stop unlocking If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. 2.4.2.4 Interfaces Information about the interface assignment on the PN terminal box can be found in the "Handheld Terminal HT 2" manual under "Connecting" "Terminal Box PN" "Interface assignment on the PN Plus terminal box"connection. See also Interface assignment on the PN Plus terminal box (Page 18) 88 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting 2.4.3 Connecting module Basic PN 2.4.3.1 Description The connection module Basic PN was specially developed for installation in the control cabinet. The terminating connector protrudes through the panel of the control cabinet so that the HT 8 can be connected from the outside. 2SHUDWRUSDQHO 6\VWHPQHWZRUN 0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO +7 (PHUJ6WRSFLUFXLWV 31%DVLFFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH 3 &RQQHFWLQJFDEOH +7 3 3 &RQWUROV\VWHPV 1&8 1&8 1&8 6WDWXVVLJQDOV (PHUJHQF\6WRS 3DQHOSUHVHQW 6DIHW\ FRPELQDWLRQ 7. Image 2-9 )DFWRU\QHWZRUN System configuration (example) The connection module Basic PN is not hot plug-capable. The HT 8 can either be connected directly to the NCU or to the PCU as thin client. 2.4.3.2 interfaces The connector for the HT 8 is provided at the front of the PN connection module. The other interfaces of the connection module are located at the rear: Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 89 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting Grounding screw M5 for potential equalization connection Image 2-10 Rear of the Basic PN connection module Setting the box ID You can use rotary coding switches S1 and S2 to set a unique ID on any connection module for station identification purposes. Use a screwdriver to set the IDs. The setting is entered in hexadecimal format. Values in the decimal format between 0 and 255 can be entered. By way of an example, the figure below illustrates address 27H, which corresponds to decimal address 39. Rotary coding switch for higher-order bits (S1) Rotary coding switch for lower-order bits (S2) Image 2-11 Example for address "27H" Connector pin assignments Signal type: I Input O Output B Bi-directional signals P Potential 90 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting X1, X2: Ethernet interfaces The pin assignment of the Ethernet interfaces X1, X2 can be found in "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting", Section: "Pin assignment of the interfaces". X3: Power supply The pin assignment of the power supply interface X3 can be found in "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting", Section: "Pin assignment of the interfaces". X7: Panel Present Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 2-1 1) X7 6-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 PRES O "High": Panel (HT 8) plugged in 2 XCTL O "Low": EMER STOP button pressed 1) 3 XFAULT O "Low": Error in emergency stop electronics 1) 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 M P Ground Function not implemented in Basic PN variant, output is not switched to "High" X8: Emergency Stop wiring terminal Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 2-2 X8 4-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the emergency stop wiring terminal X8 Pin Protective circuit 1 On-board jumper between 1 and 2 2 3 4 On-board jumper between 3 and 4 Note Use this terminal for simple routing of the emergency stop cables, optional. The connector is only used to assist looping through. The connected pins 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 have no additional function on the connection module. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 91 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting X20: Enabling buttons Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 2-3 Pin X20 8-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the interface enabling buttons X20 Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 ZUST1P I Electronic enabling button 1 P 2 ZUST1M O Electronic enabling button 1 M 3 ZUST2P I Electronic enabling button 2 P 4 ZUST2M O Electronic enabling button 2 M 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 N.C. - Not connected 7 N.C. - Not connected 8 N.C. - Not connected X21: Emergency Stop and key-operated switch Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 2-4 X21 10-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the interface Emergency Stop and Module Supply Voltage Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 STOP23 2 STOP24 3 STOP13 4 STOP14 5 M P 6 N.C. - - 7 IN_E9 P Connected P24 (jumpered to Pin8 during opera tion) Emergency Stop circuit B Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit Emergency Stop circuit Ground 8 P24_FILT Filtered 24V module power supply 9 IN_E9_EXT Feedback signal via connected P24 10 IN_E12_EXT O "High": Terminating connector plugged in Note Pins 7 and 8 must be jumpered in order to supply a handheld terminal with power. 92 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting 2.4.3.3 Dimension drawing ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 0 0 0 RSWLRQDO Elongated holes - if the module is screwed to the inside of the control cabinet Image 2-12 Connection module Basic PN - dimension drawing for control cabinet installation Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 93 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting 2.4.3.4 Installing the terminating connector Procedure Note If you never remove the HT8 from the connection module, it is not necessary to attach the terminating connector. 1.Unscrew the fixing nut . 2.Attach the bracket for the terminating connector . 3.Tighten the retaining nut and insert the ter minating connector into the bracket. 94 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting 2.4.4 Connecting cable The connecting cable is an industrial cable, can tolerate bending in-line with what is required in practice - and is resistant to many solvents and lubricants. The connecting cable is available in various lengths. You will find detailed information in Section: "Accessories". Metallic push-pull round connector (ODU connector) RJ45 plug to connect to the Ethernet Plug connector for enabling button, Emergency Stop, 24 V and safety signals Strain relief device and kink protection Image 2-13 Connecting cable for the HT 8 The connecting cable is connected to the HT 8 using the RJ45 plug connector and plug connector . ODU plug connector is used to connect the connecting cable with the terminal box/connecting module MPP. The tightening torque for the nut of the ODU socket is 6.5 Nm. The HT 8 has two cable entries at the rear for connecting the cable. This makes it possible to attach the connecting cable at either the right or left side. One of the cable entries is closed at the factory by a connector in which a USB connection is integrated (with IP65 cover). Routing the connecting cable 1. Open the cover by unscrewing the six PT screws (4 x 20 mm) approximately 1 cm. To do this, use a Phillips size 2 screwdriver. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 95 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting 2. Insert the connecting cable in the appropriate entry (left or right). Press the cable downward slightly until it rests completely on the fastening lugs Insert a plug in the cable entry that you do not intend to use. 3. Press the plug connector firmly into the power supply socket. 4. Connect the RJ-45 connector to the Ethernet socket. WARNING Improper installation of the cable can result in failure of the safety functions. Please observe the following before you reattach the cover: Check to ensure that all of the conductors are aligned and straight and check the firm seating of the plug connector. Make sure that the connecting cable sleeve is installed correctly. 96 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.4 Connecting Correctly routed connecting cable Connecting cable, left Connecting cable, right 5.Attach the cover by tightening the six PT screws. NOTICE Damage to the housing The housing of the HT 8 is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. Therefore, do not exceed 0.4 to 0.5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws (also for protecting the connecting cable). If you use a power screwdriver, ensure the max. speed of 600 rpm is adhered to (torque: 1 Nm). The screws of the cover may only be loosened or tightened a maximum of 20 times. Otherwise, there is the danger that the threads might become damaged and the seal of the housing will be compromised which could lead to failure of the device. 2.4.5 Power Supply The HT 8 is supplied with power via the terminal box/connection module. The input voltage range is designed for +24 VDC. For further details, see: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning" "General electrical conditions" "Power supply". Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 97 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning 2.4.6 Unplugging/plugging during operation The ability to detect a connected HT 8 in the PLC 1. HW solution: Interface X7 of the Basic PN connection module signals "HT 8 Present" at pin 1 for the "active" connection module (see interfaces (Page 89)). If the connection module is "inactive", this signal is not set. This makes the "active" connection module detectable in the PLC by wiring the abovementioned pins of all connection modules to digital I/Os on PLC I/O modules. 2. Permanently configured MCPs / HT 8 connected to one control: If there are only permanently configured MCPs / HT 8 that a control, removal of the MCP or HT 8 triggers the PLC alarm "400260 Machine Control Panel failed". Based on this, an "active" or "inactive" MCP / HT 8 in the PLC can be detected. The failure of an MCP / HT 8 is, however, only detected in the PLC if max. 2 MCP / HT 8 are permanently configured and no MCP switchover using FB9 (e.g. triggered when operator focus is switched at the operator panel). Note Removing an HT 8 where the integrated machine control panel is active Depending at which interface in the PLC (FB1: MCP1 or MCP2) the HT 8 is configured, before removing the HT 8, the transfer of the machine control panel signals must be stopped. This is possible as direct axis via data block DB7 (instance of the FB1). To do this, set the corresponding interface signal to "true": 1. Interface: DB7.DBX62.1 (MCP1Stop) 2. Interface: DB7.DBX62.2 (MCP2Stop) If the machine control panel signals are not stopped, then the message "400260 machine control panel x failed" is displayed at the user interface: Transfer of the machine control panel signals can be restarted after inserting the HT 8. To do this, set e.g. the PLC interface signal DB7.DBX62.1 (MCP1Stop) to "false". 2.5 Commissioning 2.5.1 SINUMERIK Operate 2.5.1.1 Activating/deactivating the virtual keyboard The virtual keyboard is configured in the file "slguiconfig.ini". 98 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning Procedure 1. Copy the "slguiconfig.ini" file from the folder /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg. 2. Paste the copy of the file into the following directory: /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg or /user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg. 3. Open the file in the editor. 4. To activate or deactivate the keyboard, make the following settings: - Activating the virtual keyboard: In the section [TouchPanel], EnableTouch = true In the section [Keyboard], EnableVirtualKeyBoard = true - Deactivating the virtual keyboard: In the section [TouchPanel], EnableTouch = true In the section [Keyboard], EnableVirtualKeyBoard = false 5. Double click in the input field to display the keyboard. 2.5.1.2 Configuring the traversing keys The traversing keys of the HT 8 are not labeled as their type of action is not predefined. The labeling of the traversing keys should adapt dynamically to the type of action of the keys. To recognize the type of action of the traversing keys, they are shown within the display in the vertical softkey area. The menu of the traversing keys consists of two vertical rows each with eight keys so that up to 16 texts can be configured. The top and bottom traversing key row remain empty and can be assigned other functions. The following data can be displayed: Machine axis name Alias name for machine axis Any language-dependent text Symbol The following user-specific files are required. You can use the sample files as template: File Meaning "sljkconfig.ini" configuration file File in which the traversing keys are configured. Text file "oem_sljk_xxx.ts" File for labeling traversing keys in a foreign language, xxx = language code Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 99 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning "sljkconfig.ini" configuration file Entries Meaning [State_1] Labeling type - changed via the PLC. ParamText_x_y Text of the traversing key that is made up of parameters. Two-line labeling is possible, whereby max. five characters are possible per line. x: Specifies the position of the key within the row (2 to 7). y: Specifies the key row (1 or 2). %m1 The machine axis name of the first axis is referenced and displayed as text. The current active axis number is read out from data block DB10. The name from the machine data is determined via this index. %n Defines the position in the text for the line break. %a1 The alias axis name of the first axis is referenced and displayed as text. The current active axis number is read out from data block DB10. The name from the "oem_sljk_eng.ts" text file is determined via this index. TextId_x_y Text of the traversing key that is read from the text file (target language text). Picture_x_y File name of the icon to be displayed. The files with the icons must be located in the following directories: /oem/sinumerik/ hmi/ico and depending on the resolution of the subdirectories: /ico640 /ico800 /ico1024 /ico1280 Procedure 1. Copy the "sljkconfig.ini" configuration file from the folder /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg 2. Place the copy into the folder /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg or /user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg 3. Open the copy in the Editor and define the traversing key labeling. Example of a "sljkconfig.ini" configuration file 12 axes are defined in the example, with text for softkey 1 and softkey 2, as well as an image on softkey 3 and softkey 4. [Settings] FileType = INI ; A few examples for further configuration options ; Alias names of machine-axes (%a1, %a2, etc.), from oem_sljk_deu.ts (example) [State_1] TextId_1_1 = OEM_JK_TEXT_1 100 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning TextId_1_2 = OEM_JK_TEXT_2 ParamText_2_1 = %a1%nParamText_2_2 = %a1%n+ ParamText_3_1 = %a2%nParamText_3_2 = %a2%n+ ParamText_4_1 = %a3%nParamText_4_2 = %a3%n+ ParamText_5_1 = %a4%nParamText_5_2 = %a4%n+ ParamText_6_1 = %a5%nParamText_6_2 = %a5%n+ ParamText_7_1 = %a6%nParamText_7_2 = %a6%n+ Picture_8_1 = AlarmCancel.png Picture_8_2 = AlarmNCReset.png "oem_sljk_eng.ts" text file Entries Meaning name Freely selectable name of the text context. In the text file template, the name of the text context is "SIJkLabels" and stands for the traversing key labeling (solution line jog key labels). This identifier is already stored in the configuration file. source Traversing key identifier of the respective axis. This text ID is referenced in the "sljkcon fig.ini" configuration file with the "TextId_2_1". The text IDs for the alias names (JK_AXISNAME_2 to JK_AXISNAME_7) must not be changed. translation Input of the foreign language text for the axis specified in <source>. Language code in file names "xxx" Language Language code German deu English eng French fra Spanish esp Italian ita Chinese chs Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 101 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning Procedure 1. You can copy the sample file " oem_sljk_deu.ts" from the following directory: /siemens/ sinumerik/hmi/template/lng. 2. Store or create the file in the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/lng or /user/sinumerik/hmi/lng directory. 3. Give the file a name, e.g. for German texts: "sljk_deu.ts". If you wish to set-up the labeling for additional languages, a separate file must be created for each language. Save the file with the appropriate language code in the file name. To do this, use the language codes specified above. 4. Open the file and in the <message> and </message> area, define the labeling. 5. Restart the HMI. In order that the labeling is displayed during the program runtime, the file must be converted into a binary format. This conversion is only executed when the HMI powers up. Example of a text file "sljk_deu.ts" 12 axes are defined in the example, with text for softkey 1 (SF1) and softkey 2 (SF2): <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> <!DOCTYPE TS> <TS> <context> <name>SlJkLabels</name> <!-- Alias names for machine axis (%a1, %a2, etc.) --> <!-- Do not change the text ID (JK_AXISNAME_1, etc.) --> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_1</source> <translation>X</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_2</source> <translation>Y</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_3</source> <translation>Z</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_4</source> <translation>A</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_5</source> <translation>B</translation> 102 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_6</source> <translation>C</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_7</source> <translation>U</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_8</source> <translation>V</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_9</source> <translation>W</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_10</source> <translation>UV1</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_11</source> <translation>UV2</translation> </message> <message> <source>JK_AXISNAME_12</source> <translation>UV3</translation> </message> <!-- User defined language dependent text (example) --> <message> <source>OEM_JK_TEXT_1</source> <translation>SF1</translation> </message> <message> <source>OEM_JK_TEXT_2</source> <translation>SF2</translation> </message> </TS> Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 103 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning 2.5.1.3 Configuring user-specific key labeling Labeling the keys for the HT 8 The texts of the CPF menu (CPF: Control Panel Function) for the HT 8 can be labeled with your own texts in the particular language of the country. The texts are created in the "slck_xxx.ts" file. "xxx" = language code for the corresponding language-specific labeling. You can create and edit this file using the HMI or also externally on a PC. Note If you wish to create or edit the file on a PC, use an editor that supports UTF-8 coding. Language code in file names "xxx" Language Language code German deu English eng French fra Spanish esp Italian ita Chinese chs Creating key labeling Tag Meaning source Designation for the user softkey. "SK_USERKEY1" to "SK_USERKEY16" are possi ble, whereby the names may not be changed. comment User-specific description of the key assignment. translation Text that should be shown on the key. A maximum of 10 characters are possible per line. 2-line labeling is possible, whereby the line break is set using "%n". remark Remark for key assignment. chars Number of characters. A maximum of 10 characters per line are possible. lines Number of lines. 2 lines are possible. Procedure 1. You can copy the sample file " oem_slck_deu.ts" from the following directory: /siemens/ sinumerik/hmi/template/lng. 2. Store or create the file in the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/lng or /user/sinumerik/hmi/lng directory. 104 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning 3. Give the file a name, e.g. for German texts: "slck_deu.ts". If you wish to create the key labeling for additional languages, then a separate file must be created for each language. Save the file with the appropriate language code in the file name. To do this, use the language codes specified above. 4. Open the file and in the <message> and </message> area, define the key labeling. 5. Restart the HMI. In order that the key labeling is displayed during the program runtime, the file must be converted into a binary format. This conversion is only executed when the HMI powers up. Example of a key label <!DOCTYPE TS><TS> <context> <name>SlCkDialog</name <message> <source>SK_USERKEY1</source> <comment></comment> <translation>U1</translation> <remark>User key 1</remark> <chars>10</chars> <lines>2</lines> <languageIndependent>true</languageIndependent> </message> <message> <source>SK_USERKEY2</source> <comment></comment> <translation>U2</translation> <remark>User key 2</remark> <chars>10</chars> <lines>2</lines> <languageIndependent>true</languageIndependent> </message> <message> ..... </message> </context> </TS> Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 105 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning 2.5.1.4 Configuring the function display at user-specific keys (U keys) Function Active functions can be displayed at the configurable user keys via the PLC. For instance, small LEDs can be emulated on the softkeys. You configure the function in the "slckcpf.ini" file. Interface signals The PLC bits are in the output image of the PLC-HT 8 interface and are analog to those in the input image. Signals to the MCP1 (or MCP2) Interface PLC HT 8 Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 U4 U3 U9 U10 U8 AB n + 1 AB n + 4 AB n + 5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 U2 U1 U11 U12 U13 U14 U7 U6 U5 Bit 1 Bit 0 U15 U16 Adapt the display in the "slckcpf.ini" file Section Description UserKeyLEDIcon Name of the icon file. Standard entry: led_green.png OFF Deactivates the icon display. PRESSED UserKeyLEDIconAlignment Displays the active functions by pressing down the softkey. Specifies the position of the icon. Standard position: AlignLeft | AlignTop Horizontal and vertical alignments can be combined. The two names are separated by the "|" character. The following alignments are possible: UserKeyLEDMap AlignLeft Left AlignRight Right AlignHCenter Horizontal, center AlignTop Top AlignBottom Bottom AlignVCenter Vertical, center Specifies the start address of the output image. Entries can be made in the following form: "DBx.DBBy", "ABx", "MBx". Default setting: The start address is determined using DB7 MCP1Out (or MCP2Out). 106 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning Section Description U1LED ... U16LED The status bit address can be defined - different from the output image - using these entries. VarIncLED SBLLED WCSLED showVarIncLED showSBLLED showWCSLED Note: The offsets from the HT 8 output image, for one or several softkeys, are not taken into consideration. true When the increment mode is active, the icon is also displayed on the "[VAR]" softkey. false The icon is not displayed. true When the SingleBlock mode is active, then the icon is also displayed on the "Single Block" softkey. false The icon is not displayed. true When the SingleBlock mode is active, then the icon is also displayed on the "Single Block" softkey. false The icon is not displayed. 1. You can copy the sample file "slckcpf.ini" from the following directory: /siemens/sinumerik/ hmi/template/cfg 2. Store the file in the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg or /user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg directory. 3. If you use your own icon, then locate it together with the corresponding resolution for HT 8 directory: /oem/sinumerik/hmi/ico/ico640 or /user/sinumerik/hmi/ico/ico640. 4. Open the file and make the appropriate settings. Sample file "slckcpf.ini" Template for the configuration of the ; HT8 control panel function menu ; ; To activate the settings remove the ; commentary ';' at the beginning of the line ;; Display settings of the user key softkey leds [UserKeyLED] ; Filename of the LED icon ;UserKeyLEDIcon = led_green.png ; Alignment of the LED icon ;UserKeyLEDIconAlignment= AlignLeft | AlignTop ; Use following led map start address instead of calculating DB7.MCP1Out ;UserKeyLEDMap = AB0 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 107 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning ; Use the following settings to use this status bits instead of the led map for a specific sk ;U1LED=/channel/parameter/R[U1,1] ;.... ;U16LED=/channel/parameter/R[U1,16] ;VarIncLED = DB11.DBX8.5 ;SBLLED = DB21.DBX0.4 ;WCSLED = DB19.DBX0.7 ; Show a LED for the var inc sk ;showVarIncLED = true ; Show a LED for the var single block sk ;showSBLLED = true ; Show a LED for the var wcs/mcs sk ;showWCSLED = true 2.5.1.5 Troubleshooting If errors occur while booting, an appropriate message is displayed. For further information, see Chapter "General information and networking" "Networking" "Diagnostics and service". 2.5.2 HMI Advanced 2.5.2.1 Configuring the traversing keys of the HT 8 Prerequisite In order to display or skip the labeling of the traversing keys, the HT 8 must have user authorization. Parameterizing the MCP signals of the HT 8 in the PLC HT 8-relevant blocks in the PLC program are FB 1 for HT 8/PLC communication and FC 26 for NCK/PLC communication. 108 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning Display/skip the labeling of traversing keys on HT 8 In order to inscribe the traversing keys, the names of the first six axes are established from the machine data 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB (indexed using DB 10, bytes 8 to 13). The LED image of HT 8 serves as the interface for displaying the labeling by the PLC. The PLC sets a bit in the LED image of the HT 8 to display or skip the traversing keys: Signal AB n+6 bit 7 = 1 for displaying Signal AB n+6 bit 7 = 0 for skipping Note To ensure that the labeling of the traversing keys is displayed correctly, the names of the axes must not exceed 10 characters. Example with labeling of traversing axes displayed: Image 2-14 Traversing axes displayed Acknowledging display/skipping by HMI on PLC The HMI communicates to the PLC whether the traversing keys are displayed or hidden. This is done using bit 7 in byte 72 of DB 10: Displayed: Skipped: Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 DB10.DBX72.7 = 1 DB10.DBX72.7 = 0 109 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning User keys The user keys (the 2 keys at the top and bottom) can be assigned in any way. User keys, which can be used to trigger a wide range of machine functions, are evaluated directly by the PLC program. See also: You will find additional information on the HT 8 in: Function Manual Basic Functions, basic PLC program (P3 sl) You will find a description of the machine data in: Detailed Machine Data Description Operating Manual HMI-Advanced 2.5.2.2 Configuring user-specific key labeling Labeling the keys for the HT 8 The texts of the CPF menu (CPF: Control Panel Function) for the HT 8 and the traversing keys can be labeled by the user with his own texts in his specific language. A language-dependent file ht8_xx.ini is provided in directory \mmc2\language for this purpose. Only edit a copy of this original file and place this copy in one of the following directories: user\language oem\language addon\language There are two sections in file ht8_xx.ini; one for the CPF menu ( [CPFSoftkeyText] ) and one for a maximum of 31 traversing keys ( [AxiskeyText] ). With no entry (e.g. U2="") or for the value <empty> (e.g. U2=<empty>) no labeling text is displayed on a softkey or on a traversing key (-/+). The entries for the CPF keys are pre-assigned as standard with U1 ... U16. The texts for the traversing keys are not activated as default setting for the following reason: If no traversing key text is read, the name is determined from the machine data - with the axis number as index - and correspondingly output: ("/ACC/NC_TEA/ $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[" & chAxisNbr(k%) & "]", chAxisName(k%) Note It is not possible to combine the labeling texts - e.g. a part of the name from the INI file and another part from the machine data. 110 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.5 Commissioning Configuration file Example of a key labeling (ht8_xx.ini): [CPFSoftkeyText] U1 = "User%nKey 1" U2 = "UserKey 2" U3 = "UserKey 3" U4 = "UserKey 4" U5 = "UserKey 5" U6 = "UserKey 6" U7 = "UserKey 7" U8 = "UserKey 8" U9 = "ETC-UKey 9" U10 = "ETC-UKey 10" U11 = "ETC-UKey 11" U12 = "ETC-UKey 12" ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 Text is two lines due to %n characters characters characters characters characters characters characters characters characters characters characters U13 U14 U15 U16 ; ; ; ; 2*10 2*10 2*10 2*10 characters characters characters characters = = = = "ETC-UKey "ETC-UKey "ETC-UKey "ETC-UKey [AxiskeyText] SF1 SF2 SF3 SF4 AX1 AX2 AX3 = = = = = = = "sf_1" <EMPTY> "sf_3" "sf_4" "Wx" "Xx" <empty> AX4 = AX5 = AX6 = <EMPTY> "Yx" "Zx" 13" 14" 15" 16" ; here, a line break is obtained with 2 blanks. ; 2*10 characters ; 2*10 characters ; 2*10 characters ; 2*10 characters ; 2*5 characters ; 2*5 characters ; 2*5 No text is displayed on the traversing key (-/+). ; 2*5 characters ; 2*5 characters ; 2*5 characters Traversing keys As standard, keys for axes 1 to 6 are displayed. If the 2nd vertical softkey is pressed in the CPF menu (change over traversing keys), then the next time that the traversing keys are displayed, keys 7 to 12 are displayed; after pressing the 2nd vertical softkey in the CPF menu, then axis keys 1 to 6 are displayed again, etc. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 111 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.6 Maintenance and Service Note Switch off CPF menu The CPF_Disabled entry is evaluated in the [CONTROL] section of the MMC.INI configuration file: If the value = 1, the CPF menu will not be displayed. 2.6 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing, display and operator control elements of the HT 8. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the HT 8, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the HT 8 against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button and the enabling button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. Check the enabling button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly in the enable and panic position. WARNING Danger of death caused by damaged HT 8 Immediately check the functioning of the emergency stop button and the enabling button if the device was subject to significant shock (e.g. because it was dropped). 112 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.7 Technical data 2.7 Technical data 2.7.1 Handheld Terminal HT 8 HT 8 handheld terminal Safety Safety class III according to EN 61131-2 / EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 IP65 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Current carrying capacity 24 V DC Enabling button: 10 - 250 mA / 2-channel, 3-stage Emergency Stop button: 10 - 1000 mA / 2-channel Max. current carrying capaci USB interface: ty 100 mA Power consumption, max. Approx. 13 W Mechanical data Dimensions Diameter: Approx. 290 mm Weight Height: Approx. 126 mm Approx. 1730 g Fall height, max. 1.20 m Display Size 7.5" TFT Resolution Service life 640 x 480 pixels At ambient temperatures of > 40 C and long periods of non-use, it is advisable to activate the screen saver function. Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Emergency Stop button Rated voltage 24 V DC Current rating, max. 1A Current rating, min. 10 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 1000 A, 6A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 113 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.7 Technical data B10d (if no PN terminal box used) 100 000 When the PN Plus connection box is used: PFHd 1.01 * 10-7 Service life 20 years Forced dormant error detection interval (mechanical actua 1 year tion to the test the emergency stop) Category 3 Performance Level PL d Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d value corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d value only applies when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. When using the PN Plus terminal box, the specified failure probability (PFHd) must be taken into account. This value only applies when the technical properties of the PN Plus terminal box and the quantitative conditions specified here (e.g. service life) are observed. Enabling button 2-circuit , 3-stage Supply voltage 24 V DC Current rating, max.: 250 mA Current rating, min.: Operating cycles Actuation forces 0A Switch position 2 105 Switch position 3 5 * 104 From switch position 1 to 2, typically 3N From switch position 2 to 3, typically 17 N Category 4 Performance Level (PL) PL e Proof test interval (operating duration) 20 years Safety Integrity Level (SIL) SIL 3 PFHd 5.07 * 10-9 Functional safety EN ISO 13849-1:2008 EN 61508 Forced dormant error detection interval (mechanical actuation to the test the enable and panic position) 1 year Note The PFHd value only applies when the technical properties of the enabling button and the quantitative conditions specified here (e.g. service life) are observed. The permissible number of switching cycles must also be observed in the application. 114 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.7 Technical data 2.7.2 Connection module Basic PN Safety Safety class III according to IEC 60536 Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 IP54 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Current carrying capacity 24 VDC (via X3 connector) Enabling button contacts (X20 connector) max. each 0.5 A / 2-chan nel Emergency stop button contacts (X21 con max. each 0.5 A / 2-chan nector) nel Max. power consumption Connection module without external loading 0.3 A Panel (HT 8) 1.6 A 5 status signals (X7 and X21) 2.5 A (0.5 A each) Total: 4.4 A Max. total power consumption 105.6 W Mechanical data Dimensions Height (without holder for termi nating connector): 66 mm Weight 0.75 kg Fall height, max. 1.20 m Width: 165 mm Length: 166 mm Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 2.7.3 PN terminal box General data Weight without packaging Approx. 700 g Degree of protection according to EN 60529 IP65 (with connected HT 8 or with inserted blanking cover) Electrical data Rated voltage +24 V DC Range, permissible 20.4 to 28.8 V (-15%, +20%) Transients, maximum permissible 35 V (500 ms) Time between two transients, minimum 50 s Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 115 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.9 Accessories Current consumption of PN terminal box without HT 8 Typical Approx. 100 mA Continuous current, maximum Approx. 150 mA Inrush current I t Approx. 0.5 A2s Current consumption of PN with HT 8, typical Approx. 550 mA Fuse, internal Electronic Current load PLC-accompanying signals Max. 100 mA 2 Note Recovery time Wait for approximately one second after withdrawing the connecting cable from the connection box before reinserting. After power failures lasting less than one second the connecting cable has to be disconnected. 2.8 Spare parts The following service set is available for SIMATIC connecting boxes PN Basic and PN Plus: Designation Remark Quantity Article number Service set for mobile pan Dummy plugs for cable compartment els PG screw glands for connection box 1 6AV6574-1AA04-4AA0 2 Blanking cover for connecting a handheld ter minal 1 Terminal strips for connection box 3 2.9 Accessories 2.9.1 Overview The following accessories are available for the HT 8: Designation Remark Quantity Article number PN Plus terminal box With automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system 1 6AV6671-5AE11-0AX0 *) PN Basic terminal box Without automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the system 1 6AV6671-5AE01-0AX0 *) PN Basic connection module Without automatic emergency stop override for mounting in the control cabinet Wall holder For safekeeping, also suitable for stationary op eration 1 6AV6574-1AF04-4AA0 Touch pen with holding loop 1 6FC5348-0AA08-4AA0 116 6FC5303-0AA01-1AA0 *) Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.9 Accessories Designation Remark Quantity Article number Protective membrane for 8" touch display, type 10 2 6AV6671-5BC00-0AX0 Length: 2 m 1 6XV1440-4BH20 *) Length: 5 m 1 6XV1440-4BH50 *) Length: 8 m 1 6XV1440-4BH80 *) Length: 10 m 1 6XV1440-4BN10 *) Length: 15 m 1 6XV1440-4BN15 *) Length: 20 m 1 6XV1440-4BN20 *) Length: 25 m 1 6XV1440-4BN25 *) 1.5 m long, can be extended to 3.5 m 1 6FC5348-0AA08-3AA0 Straight connecting cable Spiral connection cable *) Safety related accessories 2.9.2 Wall holder The HT 8 can be safely kept and operated in a stationary manner in the wall holder. Hook for the grip on the handheld unit Drill holes for screw fixing Image 2-15 HT 8 wall holder - view Ensure that you position the wall holder in such a manner that the display of the hung-in HT 8 is not exposed directly to the sun's rays. the HT 8 can be hung in based on ergonomic considerations. Therefore, choose a suitable mounting height. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 117 Handheld Terminal HT 8 2.9 Accessories Dimension drawing Image 2-16 HT 8 wall holder - dimension drawing Note Please note that the holder is smaller than the HT 8 ( approx. 290 mm). You must keep sufficient clearance around the holder to ensure convenient handling. 118 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Mini-handheld unit 3.1 Description The mini handheld unit (Mini HHU) is an easy-to-handle and ergonomic unit for setting up and operating simple machines in the JobShop area or similar applications. Since coarse, medium and fine infeed can easily be graduated, the operator control concept offers fast, increment-precise positioning. The signals are sent parallel to the CNC. Features The mini HHU features a robust metal connector and is suitable for right-handed as well as left-handed operators. Key labeling can be customized using slide-in labels. The mini handheld unit can be fixed on metal surfaces by means of the integrated magnetic clamp. A holder shell is available as an option. Validity This description applies to: Designation Features Article number Mini HHU With spiral connection cable, Emergency Stop button (2channel), enabling button (3-stage), metal connector, handwheel with magnetic latching 6FX2007-1AD03 With straight cable, Emergency Stop button (2-channel), enabling button (3-stage), metal connector, handwheel with magnetic latching 6FX2007-1AD13 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with a *). Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 119 Mini-handheld unit 3.2 Operator controls 3.2 Operator controls Rapid traverse key for high-speed travel with traversing keys or handwheel Traversing keys +/- direction F1, F2, F3 function keys for customer-specific applications (freely assignable) Holder shell (optional) Connecting cable Handwheel Enabling button, 2-channel, 3-stage Axis selector switch for 5 axes and neutral position Emergency Stop button, 2-channel Slide-labels for Image 3-1 , and View of mini handheld unit Emergency Stop button Press the red Emergency Stop button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. 120 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Mini-handheld unit 3.2 Operator controls Turn the Emergency Stop button clockwise to unlatch it. WARNING Danger of death due to premature restart If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. Note Emergency Stop As a rule, when operating the Emergency Stop button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. For other responses to emergency stop, refer to the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer. Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 3-way switch. This must be held in its central position for traversing movements to be triggered. Axis selector switch You can select up to five axes with the axis selector switch. It is coded using Gray code. Table 3-1 Coding of axis selection switch Plug connector Switch position Function Pin 8 Pin 9 Pin 10 0 0 0 - Mini HHU not connected 1 1 0 0 No axis selected 0 1 0 Z Z axis selected 0 1 1 X X axis selected 1 1 1 Y Y axis selected 1 0 1 4 Axis 4 selected 0 0 1 5 Axis 5 selected Function keys The function keys can be used to trigger machine-specific functions. Traversing keys The + and - traversing keys can be used to trigger traversing movements on the axis selected via the axis selector switch. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 121 Mini-handheld unit 3.2 Operator controls Handwheel The handwheel can be used to initiate movements at the axis that has been selected with the axis selector switch. The handwheel supplies two track signals with 100 increments/revolution. Rapid traverse key The rapid traverse key increases the traversing speed of the axis that has been selected with the axis selector switch. The rapid traverse key affects traversing commands issued via the +/- keys as well as handwheel signals. 122 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Mini-handheld unit 3.3 Dimension drawing 3.3 Dimension drawing 6WUDLJKWFDEOH 6SLUDOFRQQHFWLRQFDEOH 0DJQHWLFFODPS SLQFRQQHFWRU :LWKXQLRQQXW Image 3-2 Dimensions of the mini handheld unit Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 123 Mini-handheld unit 3.4 Connecting 3.4 Connecting Basic procedure A connection kit is required to connect the mini HHU. You can use the preassembled connection kit to connect to an MCP. When doing this please note that for the PROFIBUS version of the machine control panels, X55 is not available. However, X70 is suitable for freely connecting the conductors if you do not require a direct key connection. The non-assembled connection kit is available for free wiring. An angled socket is available for this connection kit to change the cable outlet direction. This allows the flange socket of the connection kit to be mounted 90 rotated. This connection kit contains a metal flange socket for installation at the machine and a terminating connector for overriding the emergency stop circuit when the mini HHU is not connected. 0LQL++8 IUHHO\ZLUHG SLQ3KRHQL[WHUPLQDO EORFN; 0&3[[[31 1RWDVVLJQHG ; SROH'X%R[SOXJVRFNHW 3OXJFRQQHFWRU ; SROH'X%R[SOXJVRFNHW )ODQJHVRFNHW ; SROH'X%R[SOXJVRFNHW ; SROH68%'VRFNHWFRQQHFWRU &RQQHFWLRQNLWIRUPLQL++8DQ0&3[[[31 $VVLJQPHQWRIWKH'X%R[SOXJFRQQHFWRU ;;; 9LHZRIWKHSOXJVLGH &DEOHOHQJWK P Image 3-3 Connection diagram 1. Position the drilling pattern. 2. Route all the connecting cables through the large drill hole. 3. Mount the flange socket (with seal). 124 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Mini-handheld unit 3.4 Connecting 4. Plug the connecting cable into the mating connector according to the connector labeling. 5. Wire up the connections (at the machine) of the emergency stop and enabling button at terminal block -X (see the circuit diagrams). Drilling pattern for the flange socket mounting s 0 Image 3-4 Drilling pattern for mounting Flange socket The mini HHU is connected using a flange socket. There is no need for an additional connection distributor. 9LEUDWLRQSURWHFWLRQ 2ULQJ Image 3-5 Flange socket 1. Plug the connector of the mini HHU (or the terminating connector) into the detent lugs/ guideways of the flange socket. 2. Tighten the screw cap to secure the connector. Note Failure to insert the connectors correctly can result in damage to the contacts. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 125 Mini-handheld unit 3.4 Connecting If no mini HHU is connected, observe the following: WARNING Danger of death resulting from improper access After disconnection, the mini HHU must be locked away. Emergency stop buttons that are inactive must not be identified as such or must be inaccessible. This is to prevent the emergency stop button from being used inadvertently. 126 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Mini-handheld unit 3.4 Connecting Circuit diagrams sw $ 4x2x0.56mm ) )XQFWLRQNH\V 6 ) 6 6 6 9 6 $FNQRZOHGJPHQW $[LVVHOHFWLRQ EXWWRQ 6 $[LVVHOHFWLRQ 5x2x0.25mm 6 (PHUJHQF\6WRS $FNQRZOHGJPHQW (PHUJHQF\6WRS EXWWRQ 0LQLKDQGKHOGXQLW 6KLHOGHG ) 6 6 5x2x0.25mm &RQGXFWRUVPP SLQFRQQHFWRU DWWKHRSHUDWRUSDQHOKRXVLQJ bl Blue sw Black rsbr Pink-brown br Brown vt Violet rtbl Red-blue ge Yellow ws White wsbl White-blue gn Green brbl Brown-blue wsge White-yellow gr Gray gebr Yellow-brown wsgr White-gray rs Pink grbr Gray-brown wsrs Pink-white rt Red grrs Gray-pink wsrt White-red Image 3-6 &RQQHFWRURQWKHPDFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO0&3[[[ 1RWH0&3ZLWK352),%86'3GRQRWKDYHDQ;FRQQHFWLRQ rt 7HUPLQDOVWULSLQWKHRSHUDWRUSDQHOKRXVLQJ +DQGZKHHO Circuit diagram for connection to the MCP Connecting the mini HHU at MCP xxx using the preassembled connection kit Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 127 Mini-handheld unit 3.5 Configuration +DQGZKHHOVLJQDOVWR 0&3033RU+$0 +DQGZKHHO Circuit diagram for custom-specific wiring rt sw $ 4x2x0.56mm ) ) 6 6 $[LVVHOHFWLRQ 6 5x2x0.25mm 9'&VLJQDOVWRVDIHW\ UHODWHGGLJLWDO3/&LQSXWV )XQFWLRQNH\V 6 6 $FNQRZOHGJPHQW (PHUJHQF\6WRS EXWWRQ 0LQLKDQGKHOGXQLW 6 ) 9'&VLJQDOVWR GLJLWDO3/&LQSXWV 6 6 6 5x2x0.25mm &RQGXFWRUVPP Image 3-7 SLQFRQQHFWRU DWWKHRSHUDWRUSDQHOKRXVLQJ Principle connection of a mini HHU using the non-assembled connection kit Note Take care of the 0 V and the supply voltage wiring when connecting the axis selection switch and the function keys. Also observe the max. switching power of the contact blocks. The handwheel can also be routed to the MCP PN interface. 3.5 Configuration Configuring the mini HHU involves setting FB1 parameters in OB100 of the basic PLC program: See Function Manual Basic Functions, Basic PLC Program (P3 sl) 128 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Mini-handheld unit 3.5 Configuration Example: Connecting a mini HHU to an MCP xxx PN The mini HHU is connected to connectors X51, X52, X55 and X60 of an MCP xxx PN. The customer keys (X51 - X55) of the MCPs then cannot be used for other applications. Information concerning the coding of the machine functions on the mini HHU and details of the connection to the customer keys are provided in the tables below. Table 3-2 Coding of axis selection switch X51: 21 X51.1 KT-IN1 22 X51.2 KT-IN2 23 X51.3 KT-IN3 Switch position Function 0 0 0 - Mini HHU not connected 1 1 0 0 No axis selected 0 1 0 Z Z axis selected 0 1 1 X X axis selected 1 1 1 Y Y axis selected 1 0 1 4 Axis 4 selected 0 0 1 5 Axis 5 selected Table 3-3 X52 traversing keys / rapid traverse key coding: Pin Button KT-IN4 X52.1 Travel key + direction KT-IN5 X52.2 Travel key - direction KT-IN6 X52.3 Table 3-4 Function Rapid traverse key X55 function keys coding: Pin Button KT-IN7 X55.1 F1 KT-IN8 X55.2 F2 KT-IN9 X55.3 F3 Function Function keys Note For the assignment of the customer keys to the input images, refer to the appropriate section of the particular machine control panel. Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 129 Mini-handheld unit 3.7 Technical specifications 3.6 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the mini HHU. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the mini HHU, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the mini HHU against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button and the enabling button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. Check the enabling button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly in the enable and panic position. WARNING Danger of death resulting from damaged mini-handheld device Immediately check the functioning of the emergency stop button and the enabling button if the device was subject to significant shock (e.g. because it was dropped). 3.7 Technical specifications Table 3-5 Mini handheld unit General data Approvals 130 CE / cULus Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Mini-handheld unit 3.8 Spare parts / accessories Degree of protection IP65 - according to DIN EN 60529 Mechanical data Dimensions approx. Height: 180 mm Weight Approx. 0.5 kg without connecting cable Width: 90 mm Depth: 67 mm Approx. 1.3 kg with connecting cable Table 3-6 Environmental conditions Operation Storage/transport Temperature ranges 0 ... 55 C -20 ... 60 C Relative humidity Max. 80% (condensation not permissible) Control elements Emergency Stop button Enabling buttons Handwheel Function keys Axis selector switch General 2 channel, accord 2-channel, 3-stage according to RS ing to 422 EN ISO 13850 - - Contact block 2 x NC contact 2 x NO contacts 100 S/R NO contact Gray code Switching voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 5 VDC 5% Max. 30 VDC Max. 25 VDC Switching current 2A 90 mA Max. 0.1 A - Contact rating - - Max. 1 VA Max. 0.2 VA Reliability B10d = 100 000 - - - B10d = 100 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop and enabling safety functions must be based on the B10d value corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop and enabling buttons are taken into account. 3.8 Spare parts / accessories The following accessories and spare parts can be supplied: Item name Article number Can be used with 6FX2007-1AD03 -1AD13 6-pos. selector switch with accessories 104899 X X Emergency Stop button 104900 *) X X ZXE-104833 (3-stage enabling button) 104901 *) X X Protective cap and nut for ZXE 104902 *) X X 3.5 m spiral connecting cable 104903 *) X 5 m straight connecting cable 104904 *) 5 m (straight) extension cable 103832 *) X X 10 m (straight) extension cable 103833 *) X X Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 X 131 Mini-handheld unit 3.8 Spare parts / accessories Item name Article number Can be used with 6FX2007-1AD03 -1AD13 103834 *) X X Connecting adapter (0.5 m adapter cable; met 103835 *) al coupling on mini HHU side to T+B plastic coupling on panel side) X X Connector disassembly tool X X 15 m (straight) extension cable 105037 *) Safety-related Ordering address Euchner GmbH + Co. KG Vertrieb Technik Kohlhammerstr. 16 70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen Germany Phone +49 (0) 711 7597-0 Fax +49 (0) 711 7597-303 Table 3-7 Further accessories Component Article number Remark Connection kit 6FX2006-1BG11 *) Assembled, metal version, with terminating connector Connection kit 6FX2006-1BG03 *) Non-assembled, metal version, with terminating con nector Angled socket 6FX2006-1BG56 *) Metal version, for non-fabricated connection kit Adapter plate 6FX2006-1BG45 Plastic to metal version Retaining shell 6FX2006-1BG70 including 3 M4 screws *) Safety-related 132 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Mini-handheld unit 3.8 Spare parts / accessories Retaining shell Optionally, the mini handheld unit can be stored in a screw-on retaining shell. The retaining shell is mounted using three M4 screws (included in scope of delivery). Image 3-8 Dimension drawing for mounting the retaining shell Angled socket An angled socket is available as an option, which permits the cable outlet direction to be rotated through 90. s s s [ 0 [ 2ULQJ Image 3-9 Dimension drawing of angled socket Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 133 Mini-handheld unit 3.8 Spare parts / accessories Adapter plate The adapter plate is only required if the metal flange socket is being mounted at an installation location intended for plastic flange sockets. Image 3-10 Dimension drawing of the adapter plate Slide-in labels The slide-in labels can be replaced. To do this, you must unscrew the six TORX screws on the rear of the housing. The housing can now be taken apart. The slide-in labels can now be pulled out of the guide on the front plant and replaced, if required. Make sure that no connection cables are pinched during the re-assembly. 134 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 4 Electronic handheld handwheel 4.1 Description The handheld handwheel is intended for use in conjunction with machines. A magnetic bracket and spiral connection cable can be found on its enclosure. The magnetic bracket (retaining magnet) enables the handwheel to be attached to metallic surfaces. So that it can also be safely stored on non-magnetic surfaces, there is also a retaining shell available (see Section: "Accessories"). The electronic handheld handwheel is an incremental encoder that generates signals according to how the manually operated wheel is rotated. The handwheel's magnetic latching facility makes for an extremely precise incremental process. The axis selected via the control can be positioned so that the axes are parallel. The handheld handwheel offers a PPR count of 100 S/R. Validity The description applies to the following electronic handheld handwheel: Designation Interface Article number Electronic handheld handwheel 5 VDC, RS 422 6FC9320-5DE02 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 135 Electronic handheld handwheel 4.1 Description Display Handwheel Spiral connection cable 9-pin connector Image 4-1 136 View of electronic handheld handwheel Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Electronic handheld handwheel 4.2 Dimension drawing 4.2 Dimension drawing Front view and side view 5HWDLQLQJPDJQHW SLQFRQQHFWRU Image 4-2 Dimensions of the electronic handheld handwheel Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 137 Electronic handheld handwheel 4.3 Connection Outputs RS 422 A $% & $% Load current 20 mA Pulse diagram VWHS $ $ % % 4.3 Connection The handheld handwheel is connected via a flange socket using the spiral connection cable. The article numbers for the recommended flange can be found in Section "Accessories". 138 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Electronic handheld handwheel 4.4 Technical specifications Electrical connection diagram $ 56$ $ % % ;9 ZK ;8%9'&s EQ ;$ JQ ;$ \H ;% J\ ;% SN 8QDVVLJQHG 6KLHOG Note When a connected handwheel triggers pulses from its idle position or in the event of a slight touch, connect it so that the label is facing the wrong way. Swap: The wires of terminal A with those of terminal /A The wires of terminal B with those of terminal /B 4.4 Technical specifications Table 4-1 Electronic handheld handwheel Safety Safety class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 I IP65 Electrical data Operating voltage 5 VDC 5% Current consumption Max. 80 mA Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 139 Electronic handheld handwheel 4.5 Accessories Limit frequency 10 kHz Number of pulses 100 increments/revolution Displacement of phase A to B Typ. 90 electrical Interface RS 422 Mechanical data Dimensions approx. Height: 160 mm Weight Width: 85 mm Depth: 67 mm 0.3 kg (without spiral connection cable) Housing material Thermoplastic Distance to NCU 20 m Actuating force 4 Ncm Speed Max. 1,000 rpm Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 4.5 Accessories The following components are available as accessories for the electronic handheld handwheel: Component Description Article number Flange socket 9-pin flange socket 6FC9341-1AQ Holder Providing a place to store the handwheel in the case of nonmetallic surfaces 6FX2006-1BG70 Dimension drawing of the flange socket Pin assignment 140 Pin Signal 1 5V 2 0V 3 B Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Electronic handheld handwheel 4.5 Accessories Pin assignment 4 A 5 *A 6 *B 9 Shield Dimension drawing of the holder Optionally, the handheld electronic handwheel can be stored in a screw-on holder. The holder is mounted using three M4 screws (included in the scope of delivery). Image 4-3 Dimension drawing for mounting the holder Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 141 Electronic handheld handwheel 4.5 Accessories 142 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handwheel connection module 5.1 5 Description The SINUMERIK handwheel connection module for PROFIBUS can be used to connect two handwheels or the handwheel of the handheld unit B-MPI and the mini handheld unit. On the handwheel connection module for PROFIBUS, digital inputs, outputs, connections for rotary override switches and handwheels are provided as well as a PROFIBUS DP interface for communication. The handwheel connection module for PROFIBUS is mounted into the control cabinet. Validity The following description applies to the handwheel connection module for PROFIBUS. Article number: 6FC5303-0AA02-0AA0 Features PROFIBUS DP interface for: 6 inputs 6 inputs and 6 outputs (additional cable set required) 16 direct keys of OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A 2 handwheels Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 143 Handwheel connection module 5.2 Interfaces 5.2 Interfaces 5.2.1 Overview Location of the interfaces ; ; ; ; 6 ; ; ; /('V ++ ; ; Image 5-1 ; 6 Handwheel connection module - location of the interfaces X10 X20 X30 X31 X51 / X52 X53 / X54 X60 / X61 X70 Jumper S1 S3 DIP switch 144 ; Power supply interface PROFIBUS DP interface Feedrate override Spindle override Customer-specific operator controls (pushbuttons incl. 24 V lamps) 24 V control for customer pushbutton lamps Connections for two handwheels (TTL/differential) Direct keys interface for connecting the operator panel front direct keys Setting the handwheel signal type - S1 open: TTL - S1 closed: Differential interface Setting of the PROFIBUS address (see Settings via DIP switch S3 (Page 147)) Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handwheel connection module 5.2 Interfaces LED displays LEDs H1 to H5 provide information about the following states: Diagnostics H1 H3 H4 H5 Power On Lights up red Lights up green Lights up or ange Lights up red/off The LEDs light up for approx. 4 s. GD communication Off Lights up green Flashes orange Lights up red (80 Hz) There is no PROFIBUS com munication. Lights up red (bus error) Lights up green Off Flashes green (approx. 25 Hz) HAM is configured as PROFI BUS slave and with cyclic data exchange. Off Lights up green Off/orange Lights up green Fatal error LED display flashes red flashes green flashes green flashes orange For fatal software errors and incorrect DIP switch settings, the LEDs flash very quickly. LED H2 is reserved for service and is always off. + + + + + Image 5-2 Layout of the LEDs Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". 5.2.2 Input / output images Handwheel Table 5-1 Byte Input image Bit7 Bit6 EB n + 0 EB n + 1 EB n + 2 EB n + 3 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Handwheel 1 counter status (16 bit signed) Handwheel 2 counter status (16 bit signed) 145 Handwheel connection module 5.2 Interfaces Note No output process image exists. Handwheel + additional I/Os Table 5-2 Byte Input image Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 EB n + 0 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Handwheel 1 counter status (16 bit signed) EB n + 1 EB n + 2 Handwheel 2 counter status (16 bit signed) EB n + 3 EB n + 4 DT_07 DT_06 DT_05 DT_04 DT_03 DT_02 DT_01 DT_00 EB n + 5 DT_15 DT_14 DT_13 DT_12 DT_11 DT_10 DT_09 DT_08 EB n + 6 - - KT_6 KT_5 KT_4 KT_3 KT_2 KT_1 EB n + 7 - - - Rotary switch 1 (5 bit) connector X30 EB n + 8 - - - Rotary switch 2 (5 bit) connector X31 Note DT_xx corresponds to direct key xx of connector X70. KT_x corresponds to customer key x. (connection of free customer keys or a direct key module.) Table 5-3 Byte Output image Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 - - KL_6 AB n + 0 AB n + 1 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 KL_3 KL_2 KL_1 Reserved, must be assigned value 0. KL_5 KL_4 Note KL_x corresponds to customer lamp x. 146 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handwheel connection module 5.3 Settings via DIP switch S3 5.3 Settings via DIP switch S3 Delivery condition Table 5-4 Delivery condition setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 on off on off on on off off off off Series Meaning / value Note The delivery condition setting MUST be changed in accordance with the "Assignment of the DIP switch S3" table (below). Connection type: PROFIBUS DP For PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 10: Table 5-5 Assignment of DIP switch S3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning/value off off off off off off off - on on 0 on off off off off off off - on on 1 off on off off off off off - on on 2 on on off off off off off - on on 3 PROFIBUS : : : : : : : - - on off on on on on on - on on 125 off on on on on on on - on on 126 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 - : (etc.) 147 Handwheel connection module 5.4 Mounting 5.4 Mounting The handwheel connection module is intended for mounting onto the control cabinet wall Use both lugs to secure it in place. Image 5-3 148 Front view of handwheel connection module Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Handwheel connection module 5.5 Technical data Dimension drawing Image 5-4 5.5 Dimension drawing for handwheel connection module Technical data Safety Safety class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 III according to EN60204-1 IP00 CE / cULus 149 Handwheel connection module 5.6 Accessories Electrical data Input voltage 24 VDC Power consumption, max. Board: Handwheels: Lamps: Total: 6.2 W 2 x 0.9 W 14.4 W (6 x 2.4 W) *) 22.4 W Mechanical data Dimensions (Wx HxD) Weight 234 x 137 x 40 mm Approx. 820 g *) The outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) can have a max. permissible current of 0.3 A. However, the total current consumption of the components must not exceed 1.0 A (24 W). Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 5.6 Accessories The following accessories are available for the handwheel connection module: 150 Component Description Quanti ty Article number Cable for handwheel Length: < 5 m 1 6FX8002-2CP00-1Ax0 Feedrate override rotary switch Feedrate / rapid traverse override, solidstate rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, rapid traverse and fee drate dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Spindle override rotary switch Spindle / rapid traverse override, solidstate rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, rapid traverse and spin dle dials 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Cable set For additional control devices of the ma chine control panels Length: 500 mm 60 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Index A Activate keyboard, 99 ASCII code HT 2, 49 C Connection kit Mini handheld unit, 124, 132 Control cabinet installation HT 8, 89 D Deactivate keyboard, 99 Display HT 8, 77 E Emergency Stop button HT 2, 57 HT 8, 78, 113 Enabling button HT 8, 79 H Handwheel Handheld, 135 Handwheel connection module Dimensions, 150 PROFIBUS DP, 143 HT 2 ASCII code, 49 Control cabinet installation, 27 Dimensions, 57 Display, 10 Emergency stop button, 11 Emergency Stop button, 57 Enabling button, 11 Handwheel, 11 Keyboard, 10 Key-operated switch, 13 Keys, 46 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Parameterization, 46 PLC, 45 Power consumption, 56 Rotary override switch, 11 HT 8 Control cabinet installation, 89 CPF menu, 111 Dimensions, 113 Display, 77 Displaying/hiding the traversing keys, 109 Emergency Stop button, 78, 113 Enabling button, 79 Key labeling, 111 Membrane keyboard, 78 Power consumption, 113 Thin Client, 73 Traversing keys, 110 User keys, 110 HT 8 Activating, deactivating the virtual keyboard, 98 Configuring the traversing keys, 99 Key labeling, 104 LED display on user keys, 106 oem_sljk_deu.ts, 101 slguiconfig.ini, 98 sljkconfig.ini, 100 K Keys HT 2, 46 M Membrane keyboard HT 8, 78 Mini handheld unit Connection kit, 124, 132 Dimensions, 123, 131 O oem_slck_deu.ts, 104 oem_sljk_deu.ts, 102 151 Index P Parameterization HT 2, 46 PLC HT 2, 45 PROFIBUS DP Handwheel connection module, 143 S slckcpf.ini, 107 T Thin Client HT 8, 73 Touch screen HT 8, 77 HT 8, 77 152 Handheld units Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl Machine control panels Manual Valid for: SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl control 03/2016 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9 MCP Interface PN 10 Electronic handwheels 11 Rotary override switch 12 Table of contents 1 2 3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN.......................................................................................................11 1.1 Description.............................................................................................................................11 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 Operator control and display elements..................................................................................13 Front.......................................................................................................................................13 Rear side................................................................................................................................15 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................16 Overview................................................................................................................................16 Description.............................................................................................................................17 Input / output images..............................................................................................................21 1.4 Mounting................................................................................................................................23 1.5 Connecting.............................................................................................................................24 1.6 Maintenance and Service.......................................................................................................25 1.7 Technical data........................................................................................................................26 1.8 Accessories and spare parts..................................................................................................27 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN.........................................................................................................29 2.1 Description.............................................................................................................................29 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................31 Front side...............................................................................................................................31 Rear side................................................................................................................................33 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 interfaces................................................................................................................................34 Overview................................................................................................................................34 Description.............................................................................................................................35 Input / output images..............................................................................................................35 2.4 Mounting................................................................................................................................38 2.5 Connecting.............................................................................................................................39 2.6 Maintenance and Service.......................................................................................................40 2.7 Technical data........................................................................................................................41 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 Accessories and spare parts..................................................................................................42 Overview................................................................................................................................42 Labeling the slide-in labels.....................................................................................................43 Inserting the slide-in label "Part1"..........................................................................................48 Machine control panel: MCP 310...............................................................................................................53 3.1 Description.............................................................................................................................53 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 Operating and display elements.............................................................................................54 Front side...............................................................................................................................54 Rear side................................................................................................................................55 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Table of contents 4 5 4 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................56 Overview................................................................................................................................56 Settings via DIP switch S3.....................................................................................................57 Input / output images..............................................................................................................57 3.4 Mounting................................................................................................................................61 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 PROFIBUS communication....................................................................................................62 Overview................................................................................................................................62 Prerequisites..........................................................................................................................62 Functions of the machine control panel.................................................................................63 Configuring the DP slave MCP..............................................................................................63 Linking the DP slave MCP.....................................................................................................66 3.6 Maintenance and Service.......................................................................................................68 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................69 LED displays..........................................................................................................................69 Output functions.....................................................................................................................69 Key test..................................................................................................................................71 3.8 Technical data........................................................................................................................72 3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 Accessories and spare parts..................................................................................................73 Overview................................................................................................................................73 Labeling the slide-in labels.....................................................................................................74 Using the slide-in label "Teil1"................................................................................................79 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN.......................................................................................................83 4.1 Description.............................................................................................................................83 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 Operating and display elements.............................................................................................85 Front side...............................................................................................................................85 Rear side................................................................................................................................88 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................89 Overview................................................................................................................................89 Description.............................................................................................................................89 Input / output images..............................................................................................................90 4.4 Mounting................................................................................................................................93 4.5 Connecting.............................................................................................................................94 4.6 Maintenance and Service.......................................................................................................95 4.7 Technical data........................................................................................................................96 4.8 Accessories and spare parts..................................................................................................97 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN.........................................................................................................99 5.1 Description.............................................................................................................................99 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 Operator controls and indicators..........................................................................................101 Front side.............................................................................................................................101 Rear side..............................................................................................................................103 5.3 5.3.1 interfaces..............................................................................................................................104 Overview..............................................................................................................................104 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 6 7 5.3.2 5.3.3 Description...........................................................................................................................105 Input / output images............................................................................................................106 5.4 Mounting..............................................................................................................................109 5.5 Connecting...........................................................................................................................110 5.6 Maintenance and Service.....................................................................................................110 5.7 Technical data......................................................................................................................111 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 Accessories and spare parts................................................................................................112 Overview..............................................................................................................................112 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels................................................................113 Machine control panel: MCP 483 ............................................................................................................119 6.1 Description...........................................................................................................................119 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 Operating and display elements...........................................................................................120 Front side.............................................................................................................................120 Rear side..............................................................................................................................122 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................123 Overview..............................................................................................................................123 Settings via DIP switch S3...................................................................................................123 Input / output images............................................................................................................124 6.4 Mounting..............................................................................................................................127 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 PROFIBUS communication..................................................................................................129 Overview..............................................................................................................................129 Prerequisites........................................................................................................................129 Functions of the machine control panel...............................................................................130 Configuring the DP slave MCP............................................................................................130 Linking the DP slave MCP...................................................................................................133 6.6 Maintenance and Service.....................................................................................................135 6.7 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3 Diagnostics...........................................................................................................................136 LED displays........................................................................................................................136 Output functions...................................................................................................................136 Key test................................................................................................................................138 6.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................139 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.2 Accessories and spare parts................................................................................................140 Overview..............................................................................................................................140 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels................................................................141 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H...............................................................................................147 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 Description...........................................................................................................................147 Overview..............................................................................................................................147 System features...................................................................................................................147 Mechanical design...............................................................................................................150 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.2.1 Operator controls and indicators..........................................................................................151 Overview..............................................................................................................................151 Description...........................................................................................................................153 Device front..........................................................................................................................153 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 5 Table of contents 8 6 7.2.2.2 Device rear side...................................................................................................................154 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.2.1 7.3.2.2 7.3.2.3 7.3.2.4 7.3.3 7.3.4 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................156 Overview..............................................................................................................................156 Description...........................................................................................................................158 Control panel........................................................................................................................158 COM board ..........................................................................................................................159 User keys ............................................................................................................................160 Handheld unit connection HT 8 ...........................................................................................162 Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection.........165 Input / output images............................................................................................................166 7.4 Mounting..............................................................................................................................169 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 Connecting...........................................................................................................................173 MPP 310 IE H......................................................................................................................173 Customer keys.....................................................................................................................175 Handheld unit connection HT 8 with emergency stop override............................................175 Circuits and wiring................................................................................................................179 7.6 Initialization..........................................................................................................................181 7.7 Maintenance and Service.....................................................................................................183 7.8 7.8.1 7.8.2 Technical data......................................................................................................................183 MPP 310 IE H......................................................................................................................183 Input/output interface of individual wiring.............................................................................184 7.9 7.9.1 7.9.2 7.9.3 Accessories and spare parts................................................................................................186 Overview..............................................................................................................................186 Labeling the slide-in labels...................................................................................................187 Display elements and operator controls...............................................................................192 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE..................................................................................................195 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 Description...........................................................................................................................195 Overview..............................................................................................................................195 System features...................................................................................................................196 Mechanical design...............................................................................................................198 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.4.1 8.2.4.2 Operator controls and indicators..........................................................................................199 Standard versions................................................................................................................199 Special versions...................................................................................................................201 Examples of assignment of free slots..................................................................................204 Description...........................................................................................................................205 Device front..........................................................................................................................205 Device rear side...................................................................................................................207 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.2.1 8.3.2.2 8.3.2.3 8.3.2.4 8.3.3 8.3.4 interfaces..............................................................................................................................209 Overview..............................................................................................................................209 Description...........................................................................................................................211 Control panel........................................................................................................................211 COM board ..........................................................................................................................213 Flat module customer keys..................................................................................................213 Connection for handheld units.............................................................................................216 Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection.........219 Input / output images............................................................................................................220 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 9 8.4 Mounting..............................................................................................................................224 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.4 Connecting...........................................................................................................................228 MPP 483 IE..........................................................................................................................228 Customer keys.....................................................................................................................230 Handheld unit connection with Emergency Stop override....................................................230 Circuits and wiring................................................................................................................234 8.6 Initialization..........................................................................................................................235 8.7 Maintenance and Service.....................................................................................................237 8.8 8.8.1 8.8.2 Technical data......................................................................................................................237 MPP 483 IE..........................................................................................................................237 Input/output interface of individual wiring.............................................................................238 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4 Accessories and spare parts ...............................................................................................241 Overview..............................................................................................................................241 Labeling the slide-in labels...................................................................................................242 Expansion panel...................................................................................................................245 Display elements and operator controls...............................................................................249 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483.......................................................................................................251 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 Description...........................................................................................................................251 Overview..............................................................................................................................251 System features...................................................................................................................252 Mechanical design...............................................................................................................254 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.4.1 9.2.4.2 Operating and display elements...........................................................................................256 Standard versions................................................................................................................256 Special versions...................................................................................................................259 Examples of assignment of free slots..................................................................................264 Description...........................................................................................................................266 Device front..........................................................................................................................266 Device rear side...................................................................................................................268 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.2.1 9.3.2.2 9.3.2.3 9.3.2.4 9.3.2.5 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................271 Overview..............................................................................................................................271 Description...........................................................................................................................272 Control panel........................................................................................................................272 COM board ..........................................................................................................................275 User keys ............................................................................................................................275 Handheld unit connection HT 6 ...........................................................................................279 Handheld unit connection HT 2/8.........................................................................................281 Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection.........284 Settings via DIP switch.........................................................................................................285 Input / output images............................................................................................................286 9.4 Mounting..............................................................................................................................291 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 Connecting...........................................................................................................................296 MPP 483..............................................................................................................................296 COM board ..........................................................................................................................300 Handheld unit connection HT 8 with emergency stop override............................................300 Customer keys.....................................................................................................................303 Circuits and wiring................................................................................................................305 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 7 Table of contents 10 11 12 8 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.3 PROFIBUS communication..................................................................................................307 Prerequisites........................................................................................................................307 Configuring the DP slave MPP 483......................................................................................308 PLC user program................................................................................................................311 9.7 Maintenance and Service.....................................................................................................311 9.8 9.8.1 9.8.2 9.8.3 Diagnostics...........................................................................................................................312 LED displays........................................................................................................................312 Output functions...................................................................................................................313 Key test................................................................................................................................314 9.9 9.9.1 9.9.2 Technical data......................................................................................................................315 MPP 483..............................................................................................................................315 Input/output interface of individual wiring.............................................................................316 9.10 9.10.1 9.10.2 9.10.3 9.10.4 Accessories and spare parts................................................................................................319 Overview..............................................................................................................................319 Labeling the slide-in labels...................................................................................................319 Handwheel connection.........................................................................................................324 Display elements and operator controls...............................................................................324 MCP Interface PN.....................................................................................................................................327 10.1 Description...........................................................................................................................327 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................330 Overview..............................................................................................................................330 Terminals.............................................................................................................................331 Switch...................................................................................................................................342 Input / output images............................................................................................................345 10.3 Mounting..............................................................................................................................348 10.4 Technical data......................................................................................................................349 Electronic handwheels..............................................................................................................................351 11.1 Description...........................................................................................................................351 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 Dimension drawings.............................................................................................................353 Encoder with 120 mm x 120 mm front panel, setting wheel (...-5DB01) .............................353 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DC01) ..........................354 Encoder without front panel, without setting wheel (...-5DF01)............................................355 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DH01) ..........................356 Encoder without front panel, with setting wheel (...-5DM00)................................................357 11.3 Connections.........................................................................................................................358 11.4 Technical data......................................................................................................................358 11.5 Accessories..........................................................................................................................359 Rotary override switch..............................................................................................................................361 12.1 Description...........................................................................................................................361 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 Mounting..............................................................................................................................362 Dimension drawings.............................................................................................................362 Replacing the rotary switch..................................................................................................364 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 12.3 Technical data......................................................................................................................366 Index.........................................................................................................................................................369 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 9 Table of contents 10 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 1 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.1 Description Machine control panel MCP 310C PN (PN = PROFINET) enables user-friendly operation of the machine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines) Note The IE functionality (IE = Industrial Ethernet) is still included and preset. Please note the switch position of S2. All keys are designed with replaceable covers for machine-specific adaptations. The key covers can be freely inscribed using a laser. Clear key covers can be used as an alternative. The machine control panel is secured from the rear with special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity This description applies to the machine control panel: Type Key type Article number MCP 310C PN Mechanical short-stroke keys 6FC5303-0AF23-0AA1 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with a *). Features Control elements: Mechanical short-stroke keys Operating mode and function keys: - 49 keys with assigned LEDs - Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override (Key covers are supplied for direction keys for turning machines.) For information, refer to Section: "Control and display elements" "Front"). Feed control with override feed / rapid traverse (rotary switch with 23 positions) Key-operated switch (four positions and three different keys) Interfaces: Ethernet (transfer rate: 10/100 Mbit/s; for IE and PN) Nine customer-specific inputs (e.g. for illuminated pushbuttons) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 11 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.1 Description Six customer-specific outputs Connection for two handwheels (Sub-D) Expansion slots: Six slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) (Additional cable set required for control devices, see Section: "Accessories and spare parts".) 12 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.2 Operator control and display elements 1.2 Operator control and display elements 1.2.1 Front (1) Operating modes and machine functions (2) 16 customer keys (3) Spindle control (4) Slot for EMERGENCY STOP button or spindle override switch (5) Feed control with override switch (6) Slots for control devices 16 mm *) (7) Program control (8) Key-operated switch *) See slots for control devices Image 1-1 Arrangement of the MCP 310C PN control elements EMERGENCY STOP button If an EMERGENCY STOP button is added: See Chapter "Machine control panel MCP 483 PN", Section "Control and display elements" "Front". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 13 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.2 Operator control and display elements Slots for control devices NOTICE Damage to the front Do not break the openings for the installation of operating devices (6), but rather drill them to the required size. Key covers All keys of the MCP 310C PN come with changeable key covers. Refer to the following table for the additional replacement key covers provided for turning machines in the accessories pack. Key cover Symbol number 7027 Key cover Symbol number 7129 7125 7130 7126 7131 7127 7132 7128 The article numbers for the key covers can be found in Section "Accessories and spare parts". 14 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.2 Operator control and display elements 1.2.2 Rear side (1) Slot for Emergency Stop button or spindle override (2) Power supply interface X10 (3) Handwheel connection X60 (4) Handwheel connection X61 (5) switch S1 *) (6) Switch S2 *) (7) LEDs *) (8) Ethernet cable strain relief (9) Ethernet connection, port 2 X21 (10) Ethernet connection, port 1 X20 (11) Equipotential bonding (12) Feed override (13) Customer-specific inputs and outputs *) *) Detailed description under: "Interfaces" "Overview" Image 1-2 Rear of the MCP 310C PN with Ethernet connecting cables Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 15 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.3 Interfaces 1.3 Interfaces 1.3.1 Overview ; ; ; 6 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 6 + + + Image 1-3 Rear of the MCP 310C PN with interfaces X10 X20 X21 X30 X31 X51 / X52 / X55 X53 / X54 X60 / X61 S1 S2 (1) 16 Power supply interface Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 2 Interface for rotary switch feed override Interface for rotary switch spindle override / Emergency Stop (optional) Interfaces for customer-specific inputs Interfaces for customer-specific outputs Connections for 2 handwheels (TTL / differential - can be set with switch S1) Switch for setting the handwheel signal type Switch for setting the MCP address Equipotential bonding Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.3 Interfaces LEDs H1 POWER OK (green) H2 BUSSYNC H3 BUSFAULT Equipotential bonding The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw. 1.3.2 Description Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". Switch S1 The handwheel signal type is set with switch S1. S1 open: TTL S1 closed: Differential interface Switch S1 is closed when supplied ex works. Switch S2 MCP set up as PN Table 1-1 Basic setting of the switch S2 1-8 See Table "Settings of switch S2" 9 10 Meaning on on PN off off IE (default) The two switches S2-9 and S2-10 must be set to "on" in order for PN functionality to be supported. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 17 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.3 Interfaces The switches S2-1 to S2-8 define the default device name. Up to 128 default device names are supported. If these default device names are used, there is no need for initialization of the MCP. Note The default device names cannot be reconfigured using the STEP7 "Device initialization" function for example. If you are connecting the MCP to a SINUMERIK control as a PROFINET component, make sure that this functionality is supported by the control concerned. DCP mode: No default device name is available in this mode. The device name must be set by means of an initialization procedure and remains saved on the MCP. It is deleted again if the factory setting is restored, e.g. using STEP7. Table 1-2 1 18 2 Settings of switch S2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 on on Meaning on on on on on on on on DCP mode on on on on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn127 off on on on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn126 on off on on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn125 off off on on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn124 on on off on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn123 off on off on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn122 on off off on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn121 off off off on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn120 on on on off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn119 off on on off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn118 on off on off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn117 off off on off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn116 on on off off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn115 off on off off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn114 on off off off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn113 off off off off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn112 x x x x x x x x on on on on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn15 off on on on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn14 on off on on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn13 off off on on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn12 on on off on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn11 " Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.3 Interfaces 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off on off on off off off off 9 10 Meaning Default device name: mcp-pn10 on off off on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn9 off off off on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn8 on on on off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn7 off on on off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn6 on off on off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn5 off off on off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn4 on on off off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn3 off on off off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn2 on off off off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn1 off off off off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn MCP set up as IE A logical address can be assigned to the MCP for communication via Ethernet using the 10bit switch S2. Table 1-3 Switch S2 is set as delivered 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning off off off off off off on on off off MCP address 192 The two switches S2-9 and S2-10 must remain set to "off" (IE functionality). The switches S2-1 to S2-8 define the MCP address in the range of 0 to 255. The addresses from 192 to 223 count as the default range. The MCP address is used as a reference for addressing an MCP during PLC parameter assignment. Table 1-4 1 2 Settings of switch S2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 off off Meaning on on on on on on on on x x x x x x x x on on on on on off on on MCP address 223 off on on on on off on on MCP address 222 on off on on on off on on MCP address 221 off off on on on off on on MCP address 220 on on off on on off on on MCP address 219 off on off on on off on on MCP address 218 on off off on on off on on MCP address 217 off off off on on off on on MCP address 216 on on on off on off on on MCP address 215 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP address 255 " 19 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.3 Interfaces 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off on on off on off on on 9 10 Meaning MCP address 214 on off on off on off on on MCP address 213 off off on off on off on on MCP address 212 on on off off on off on on MCP address 211 off on off off on off on on MCP address 210 on off off off on off on on MCP address 209 off off off off on off on on MCP address 208 on on on on off off on on MCP address 207 off on on on off off on on MCP address 206 on off on on off off on on MCP address 205 off off on on off off on on MCP address 204 on on off on off off on on MCP address 203 off on off on off off on on MCP address 202 on off off on off off on on MCP address 201 off off off on off off on on MCP address 200 on on on off off off on on MCP address 199 off on on off off off on on MCP address 198 on off on off off off on on MCP address 197 off off on off off off on on MCP address 196 on on off off off off on on MCP address 195 off on off off off off on on MCP address 194 on off off off off off on on MCP address 193 off off off off off off on on MCP address 192 x x x x x x x x on off off off off off off off MCP address 001 " off off off off off off off off MCP address 000 You can find the settings for the basic PLC program in: Function Manual, Basic Functions (P3 sl) 20 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.3 Interfaces 1.3.3 Input / output images Standard + two handwheels The specifications for assigning input and output bytes listed in the tables can be changed in the PLC via parameter assignment. Note The following applies in respect of the process input and output images in the tables: n is defined by means of FB1 parameters in OB100 of the PLC. Table 1-5 Process input image for MCP 310C PN Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 EB n + 0 * NC Stop Spindle Spindle 100% Spindle + Single block JOG MDA AUTO EB n + 1 NC start Spindle right * Spindle stop Spindle left Key-operat ed switch position 3 REF REPOS Teach IN EB n + 2 Feed start * Feed stop INC VAR Key-operat ed switch position 0 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 RESET Position 2 E (24) D (23) C (22) B (21) A (20) KT-IN5 KT-IN4 KT-IN3 KT-IN2 KT-IN1 X52.2 X52.1 X51.3 X51.2 X51.1 Y X EB n + 3 Key-operated switch EB n + 4 EB n + 5 Position 1 Arrow keys + T16 KT-IN6 X52.3 EB n + 6 Rapid tra verse Axis selection 6 5 4 Unassigned customer keys T9 T10 T11 EB n + 7 EB n + 8 Feed override Z Unassigned customer keys T12 Work Machine T13 T14 T15 Unassigned customer keys T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 - - - - - - - - EB n + 9 - - - - - - - - EB n + 10 KT-IN8 X55.2 KT-IN7 X55.1 KT-IN6 X52.3 KT-IN5 X52.2 KT-IN4 X52.1 KT-IN3 X51.3 KT-IN2 X51.2 KT-IN1 X51.1 EB n + 11 - - - - - - - KT-IN9 X55.3 EB n + 12 - - - - - - - - EB n + 13 - - - X31 pin 6 1) X31 pin 7 1) X31 pin 8 1) X31 pin 9 1) X31 pin 10 1) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 21 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.3 Interfaces Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Signals marked with * are inverse signals. 1) If the 4-stage rotary spindle override switch on X31 is replaced by a 5-stage rotary switch, the input information here can be measured in five stages. Table 1-6 Output image MCP 310C PN Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 AB n + 0 * NC stop Spindle Spindle 100% Spindle + Single block JOG MDA AUTO AB n + 1 NC start Spindle right * Spindle stop Spindle left RESET REF REPOS Teach IN AB n + 2 Feed start * Feed stop INC VAR - INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 AB n + 3 - - - - - - - - AB n + 4 + _ Rapid tra verse KT-OUT5 X54.2 KT-OUT4 X54.1 KT-OUT3 X53.3 KT-OUT2 X53.2 KT-OUT1 X53.1 AB n + 5 T16 KT-OUT6 X54.3 6 5 4 Z Y X T13 T14 T15 T6 T7 T8 AB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys T9 T10 T11 AB n + 7 T12 Work Machine Unassigned customer keys T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Signals marked with * are inverse signals Default key assignment -2* REP REF VAR 7 7 7 Spindle Dec. 100 % Spindle Inc. MDA Teach IN 7 1 7 7 7 Spindle Right Spindle Stop Spindle Left Auto 7 7 10 7 7 7 X Y Z Single Bliock Reset 7 100 7 7 7 4th Axis 5th Axis 6th Axis Cycle Start 1000 WCS MCS Feed Stop Feed Start - Rapid + Cycle Stop ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 1-4 22 77 XQODEHOHGNH\V Default key assignment of MCP 310C PN Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.4 Mounting Assignment of the inputs (I) and outputs (O) to the keys and LEDs , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 1-5 1.4 Inputs and outputs of the MCP 310C PN keyboard Mounting Dimension drawing Image 1-6 MCP 310C PN dimension drawing Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 23 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.5 Connecting Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached using 6 tension jacks (tightening torque, 0.5 Nm). 6HDOLQJDUHD 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV Image 1-7 5] ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Panel cut-out for machine control panel MCP 310C PN Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 1.5 Connecting Two equivalent connections (Fast Ethernet) are available for Ethernet/PROFINET transfer. The Ethernet cables are not included in the scope of delivery. They must be ordered separately. The following components are recommended: Ethernet FastConnect cables Ethernet FastConnect connectors More information on this can be found in the SIEMENS IK PI catalog. 24 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.6 Maintenance and Service Securing Ethernet cables Two cable ties are included in the scope of delivery. These are used to secure the Ethernet cables on the cover plate at the rear of the machine control panel (see figure in Section: "Control and display elements" "Rear side"). NOTICE Damaged cables caused by chafing edges Make sure that all cables are routed so that they do not come into contact with chafing edges. 1.6 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Check of the emergency stop button (if the emergency stop button has been retrofitted) Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 25 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.7 Technical data 1.7 Technical data MCP 310C PN machine control panel Safety Safety class III; PELV according to EN 50178 Degree of protection ac cording to EN 60529 Front side: IP54 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption, max. 24 VDC Board: 5W Lamps: 14.4 W (6 x 2.4 W) *) Handwheels: 2 x 0.9 W Total: 21.2 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 85.2 mm Mounting depth: 29.1 mm Weight *) Approx. 1.2 kg The outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) can have a max. permissible current of 0.3 A. However, the total current consumption of the components must not exceed 1.0 A (24 W). Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Emergency stop button Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. 26 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.8 Accessories and spare parts 1.8 Table 1-7 Accessories and spare parts Accessories and spare parts for machine control panel 310C PN Name Description Emergency Stop button 22 mm actuating element, 40mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protection, latching, red, with hold er, unlit 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) Contact block With two contact pairs (1 NO + 1 NC), 2-pin, screw terminal (3rd contact pair can be connected additionally) 1 3SB3400-0A *) Key Ten key sets, each with three keys for the keyswitch settings 1, 2, 3 1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 Tension jacks Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Override, spindle rotary switch Override spindle / rapid traverse, electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Override, feed rotary switch Feed / rapid traverse override, electronic rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Key cover Square, can be labeled by laser, 1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each of red / green / yellow / medium gray 1 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0 Key cover Square, for inscription plates, 1 set of 90, clear 1 6FC5248-0AF21-0AA0 Key cover Square, can be written with laser, one set with 500 items, ergo-gray (light basic) 1 6FC5348-0AF00-0AA0 Key cover Square, can be written with laser, one set with 500 items, mid-gray (light basic) 1 6FC5348-0AF01-0AA0 Cable set 60 cables for additional MCP control devices, 500 mm long 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 1 6FX8002-2CP00-1Axy Signal cable, handwheel Connecting cable for the handwheel, max. length: 5 m Quanti ty Article number xy is the length code: x (m) = A (0) ...F (5); y (dm) = 0 ... 8 *) Safety-related Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 27 Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN 1.8 Accessories and spare parts /HQJWKFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKHOHQJWKFRGHs 3LQ s 6KLHOG 3 0 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 3 0 *1 *( 25 57 %/ 9, %5 6: *1 <( 2* 5' %8 97 %1 %. 6KLHOG 28 Rating plate of the cable with article no., length in m, manufacturer, month/year of manufacture Pin cable lug Ring cable lug Flexible cable 0.75 mm2 Image 1-8 Connection cable for COM board handwheel Table 1-8 Accessories pack (for delivery ex works) 9 Key covers for turning (labeled) 30 Ergo gray key covers (for labeling) 30 Clear key covers (for labeling) 1 Keyset 1 Yellow backing plate for emergency stop Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 2 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.1 Description Machine control panel MCP 310 PN (PN = PROFINET) enables user-friendly operation of the machine functions, which are clearly laid out for the user. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. Note The IE functionality (IE = Industrial Ethernet) is still included and preset. Please note the switch position of S2. 49 keys have user-inscribed slide-in labels for machine-specific adaptations. A DIN A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in the scope of delivery. A connecting cable is included in the scope of delivery for connecting the direct keys of the SINUMERIK operator panel fronts OP 012 / OP 015A and TP 015A. The machine control panel is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity This description applies to the machine control panel: Type Key type Article number MCP 310 PN Membrane keys 6FC5303-0AF23-1AA1 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with a *). Features Control elements: Membrane keys Operating mode and function keys: - 49 keys with assigned LEDs, 16 freely assignable customer keys in the standard assignment - Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override Feed control with override feed / rapid traverse (rotary switch with 23 positions) Key-operated switch (four positions and three different keys) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 29 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.1 Description Interfaces: Ethernet (transfer rate: 10/100 Mbit/s; for IE and PN) Nine customer-specific inputs (e.g. for illuminated pushbuttons) Six customer-specific outputs For 16 direct keys of OP 012 / OP 015A / TP 015A (connection cable: 850 mm, included in scope of delivery) Connection for 2 handwheels (Sub-D) (velocity input and contour handwheel are only possible if connecting through the handwheel connection module or the MCP PN interface) Expansion slots: Six slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) (Additional cable set required for control devices, see Section: "Accessories and spare parts".) One slot for emergency stop key or rotary override switch (up to d = 22 cm) 30 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.2 Operator controls and indicators 2.2 Operator controls and indicators 2.2.1 Front side Overview (1) Operating modes and machine functions (2) 16 customer keys (3) Spindle control (4) Slot for emergency stop button or spindle override switch (5) Feed control with override switch (6) Slots for control devices 16 mm *) (7) Program control (8) Key-operated switch *) see slots for control devices Image 2-1 Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 310 PN Emergency stop button If an emergency stop button is added: see Chapter: "Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN", Section: "Display and operating elements" "Front". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 31 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.2 Operator controls and indicators Slots for control devices NOTICE Damage to the front Do not break the openings for the installation of operating devices (6), but rather drill them to the required size. With the selection of the control devices, please take care of the surface characteristics of the MCP: For technical reasons, the film is approximately 0.1 to 0.5 mm lower than the contact surface of the control device . Due to this difference, assess the height of the plastic ring. Image 2-2 32 Installation of the control devices 16 mm Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.2 Operator controls and indicators 2.2.2 Rear side Rear Feedrate override X30 Slot for emergency stop button or spindle override Power supply interface X10 Customer-specific inputs and outputs *) Switch S1 *) Handwheel connection X60 Handwheel connection X61 Ethernet connection, port 1 X20 Ethernet connection, port 2 X21 Ethernet cable strain relief LEDs *) Interface for the connection of the keyswitch Switch S2 *) Equipotential bonding *) Detailed description under "Interfaces" "Description" Image 2-3 Rear of the MCP 310 PN with Ethernet connecting cables Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 33 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.3 interfaces Image 2-4 2.3 interfaces 2.3.1 Overview MCP 310 PN - MAC address/rating plate ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 6 + + + 6 ; ; ; Image 2-5 Rear of the MCP 310 PN with interfaces (1) X10 X20 X21 X30 X31 X51 / X52 / X55 X53 / X54 X60 / X61 X70 34 ; Equipotential bonding Power supply interface Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 2 Interface for rotary switch feed override Interface for rotary switch spindle override / emergency stop (optional) Interfaces for customer-specific inputs Interfaces for customer-specific outputs Connections for 2 handwheels (TTL / differential - can be set with switch S1) Interface for connecting 16 direct keys Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.3 interfaces S1 S2 Switch for setting the handwheel signal type Switch for setting the MCP address LEDs H1 POWER OK (green) H2 BUSSYNC H3 BUSFAULT Equipotential bonding The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw. 2.3.2 Description Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". Switch S1/S2 Settings, see Chapter "Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN", Section "Interfaces". 2.3.3 Input / output images Standard + two handwheels The specifications for assigning input and output bytes listed in the tables can be changed in the PLC via parameter assignment. Note The following applies in respect of the process input and output images in the tables: n is defined by means of FB1 parameters in OB100 of the PLC. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 35 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.3 interfaces Table 2-1 Process input image for MCP 310 PN Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 EB n + 0 * NC stop Spindle Spindle 100% Spindle + Single block JOG MDA AUTO EB n + 1 NC start Spindle right * Spindle stop Spindle left Keyswitch REF REPOS Teach IN EB n + 2 Feed start * Feed stop INC VAR Keyswitch INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 EB n + 3 RESET EB n + 5 position 0 Key-operated switch Position 2 EB n + 4 Feedrate override Position 1 Arrow keys + - T16 KT-IN6 Rapid tra verse E (2 ) D (2 ) C (22) B (21) A (20) KT-IN5 KT-IN4 KT-IN3 KT-IN2 KT-IN1 X52.2 X52.1 X51.3 X51.2 X51.1 Y X 4 3 Axis selection X52.3 EB n + 6 position 3 6 5 4 Freely assignable customer keys T9 T10 T11 EB n + 7 Z Freely assignable customer keys T12 WCS MCS T13 T14 T15 T6 T7 T8 Freely assignable customer keys T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 EB n + 8 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 EB n + 9 DT16 DT15 DT14 DT13 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 EB n + 10 KT-IN8 X55.2 KT-IN7 X55.1 KT-IN6 X52.3 KT-IN5 X52.2 KT-IN4 X52.1 KT-IN3 X51.3 KT-IN2 X51.2 KT-IN1 X51.1 EB n + 11 - - - - - - - KT-IN9 X55.3 EB n + 12 - - - - - - - - EB n + 13 - - - X31 pin 6 1) X31 pin 7 1) X31 pin 8 1) X31 pin 9 1) X31 pin 10 1) Signals marked with * are inverse signals. 1) If the 4-stage rotary spindle override switch on X31 is replaced by a 5-stage rotary switch, the input information here can be measured in 5 stages. Table 2-2 Byte EB n + 14 EB n + 15 EB n + 16 EB n + 17 36 Input image for handwheel data Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Handwheel 1 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte n+14) Handwheel 2 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte n+16) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.3 interfaces Within the SINUMERIK control, the handwheel data is processed directly by the NCK and is not available to the PLC. Table 2-3 Process output image for MCP 310 PN Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 AB n + 0 * NC stop Spindle - Spindle 100% Spindle + Single block JOG MDA AUTO AB n + 1 NC start Spindle right * Spindle stop Spindle left RESET REF. REPOS Teach IN AB n + 2 Feed start * Feed stop INC VAR - INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 AB n + 3 - - - - - - - - AB n + 4 + _ Rapid tra verse KT-OUT5 X54.2 KT-OUT4 X54.1 KT-OUT3 X53.3 KT-OUT2 X53.2 KT-OUT1 X53.1 AB n + 5 T16 KT-OUT6 X54.3 6 5 4 Z Y X T13 T14 T15 T6 T7 T8 AB n + 6 Freely assignable customer keys T9 T10 T11 AB n + 7 T12 WCS MCS Freely assignable customer keys T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Signals marked with * are inverse signals Default key assignment -2* REP REF VAR 7 7 7 Spindle Dec. 100 % Spindle Inc. MDA Teach IN 7 1 7 7 7 Spindle Right Spindle Stop Spindle Left Auto 7 7 10 7 7 7 X Y Z Single Bliock Reset 7 100 7 7 7 4th Axis 5th Axis 6th Axis Cycle Start 1000 WCS MCS Feed Stop Feed Start - Rapid + Cycle Stop ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 2-6 77 XQODEHOHGNH\V Default key assignment of MCP 310 PN Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 37 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.4 Mounting Assignment of the inputs (I) and outputs (O) to the keys and LEDs , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 2-7 2.4 Inputs and outputs of the MCP 310 PN keyboard Mounting Dimension drawing Image 2-8 38 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 310 PN Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.5 Connecting Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached by means of 6 tension jacks (0.8 Nm; see dimension drawing). 6HDOLQJDUHD 0RXQWLQJSDQHO Image 2-9 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 5] 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 310 PN Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 2.5 Connecting Two equivalent connections (Fast Ethernet) are available for Ethernet/PROFINET transfer. The Ethernet cables are not included in the scope of delivery. They must be ordered separately. The following components are recommended: Ethernet FastConnect cables Ethernet FastConnect connectors More information on this can be found in the SIEMENS IK PI catalog. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 39 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.6 Maintenance and Service Securing Ethernet cables Two cable ties are included in the scope of delivery. These are used to secure the Ethernet cables on the cover plate at the rear of the machine control panel (see figure in Section: "Control and display elements" "Rear side"). NOTICE Damaged cables caused by chafing edges Make sure that all cables are routed so that they do not come into contact with chafing edges. 2.6 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Check of the emergency stop button (if the emergency stop button has been retrofitted) Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. 40 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.7 Technical data 2.7 Technical data Machine control panel MCP 310 PN Safety Safety class Degree of protection ac cording to EN 60529 III; PELV according to EN 50178 Front side: IP65 Key-operated switch: IP54 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption, max. 24 VDC Board: 5W Lamps: 14.4 W (6 x 2.4 W) *) Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Handwheels: 2 x 0.9 W Total: 21.2 W Mechanical data Dimensions Weight *) Depth: 85.2 mm Mounting depth: 53.9 mm Approx. 1.2 kg The outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) can have a max. permissible current of 0.3 A. However, the total current consumption of the components must not exceed 1.0 A (24 W). Emergency Stop button Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 41 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts 2.8 Accessories and spare parts 2.8.1 Overview Table 2-4 Accessories and spare parts for machine control panel 310 PN Name Description Key-operated switch Key-operated switch with key Sets of keys Quanti Article number ty 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 Ten key sets, each with three keys for the keyswitch settings 1, 2, 3 1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 Set of tension jacks Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Override, spindle rotary switch Override spindle / rapid traverse, electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle dials and rapid tra verse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Override, feed rotary switch Feed / rapid traverse override, electronic rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Emergency Stop but ton 22 mm actuating element, emergency stop mushroom-head pushbutton, red, mushroom head and support 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) Contact block with 2 contacts, 1 NO + 1 NC, 2-pole ,screw ter minal 1 3SB3400-0A *) Slide-in labels 3 DIN A4 films that can be labeled 1 set 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0 Cable set 60 cables for additional MCP control devices, 500 mm long 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 1 6FX8002-2CP00-1Axy Signal cable, handwheel Connecting cable for the handwheel, max. length: 5 m xy is the length code: x (m) = A (0) ...F (5); y (dm) = 0 ... 8 For details, see Image 1-8 Connection cable for COM board handwheel (Page 28). *) Safety-related 42 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts 2.8.2 Labeling the slide-in labels You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. Use the blank films that can be printed for this purpose. Print direction Image 2-10 Blank film for MCP 310 PN Files for printing the blank film The DOConCD or CD included in Catalog NC 61/ NC 62 contains three files for printing the blank films: Template_M_MCP310.doc [defaults for milling - standard shipped file; (A)] Template_MCP310.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205580; (B)] Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, inscription on labels as jpg file (C) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 43 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Outer edges Image 2-11 Template_M_MCP310.doc for the "Milling" version (A) Image 2-12 44 3DUW Template_MCP310.doc (acc. to labeling plan /template: Item No. A5E00205580 (B)] Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts Table 2-5 Symbols.doc file (C) 7001 7013 7025 7002 7014 7026 7003 7015 7027 7004 7016 7005 7017 7029 7006 7018 7030 7007 7019 7031 7008 7020 7032 7009 7021 7033 7010 ; 7028 = 7022 7120 7011 7023 7121 7012 7024 7123 < 7124 & ; < = ; < = & 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 Creating slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_M_MCP310.doc" (A) Open the file Template_M_MCP310.doc in the word-processing program MS Word. To obtain an optimum printing result, remove all separating lines in each slide-in label above, below and between the symbols. 3DUW Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 45 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts Do not highlight the slide-in labels using the table symbol , but instead: 1. Place the cursor directly before the first symbol on the first slide-in label. 2. Highlight the entire row of the slide-in label by - pressing and holding the left mouse key and dragging it to the end of the row or - pressing the F8 key and the cursor key "" until the entire row is selected. 3. Click on the highlighting with the right mouse key. 4. In the menu that appears, select the entry: "Table properties". 5. On the "Table" tab, select the entry: "Borders and shading...". 6. Select the tab "Borders" and click on "Setting:" in the symbol with the designation: "None". 7. Confirm the selection with "OK" "OK" and remove the highlighting. This removes all separating lines (with the exception of the outer edges) from this row. 2XWHUHGJHV 3DUW 8. Remove the separating lines of the other slide-in labels in the same way. 9. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see diagram, "Blank film MCP 310 PN"). 10.Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 11.Start the printing process using MS Word. Note For labeling the slide-in labels, HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 12.Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges. 13.Round off the corners of the slide-in labels approx. 1.5 mm to facilitate insertion. Preparing the slide-in labels with the aid of "Template_MCP310.doc" (B) Inserting symbols with the"Symbols.doc" file (C) 1. Open both the "Template_MCP310.doc" file and the "Symbols.doc" file in MS Word. 2. Copy the desired key symbol from the file "Symbols.doc". 3. Position the cursor in the desired field of the template (B) and add the symbol. 4. If all the desired symbols have been added, remove the separating lines and start the printing process in accordance with the instructions in Section: Preparing the slide-in labels with the aid of "Template_M_MCP310.doc". 46 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts Inserting characters/text 1. Open the "Template_MCP310.doc" file in MS Word. 2. Set the "Arial" font to format characters. (This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.) 3. Position the cursor in the desired table cell and enter characters/text. Creating your own symbols Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Template_MCP310.doc). Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint): - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Template_MCP310.doc). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 47 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts Dimension drawings The figure shows a dimension drawing for the MCP 310 PN blank template: 1DUURZODEHOZLGWKFPKHLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP Image 2-13 2.8.3 Dimension drawing for MCP 310 PN slide-in labels Inserting the slide-in label "Part1" The slide-in label "Part1" (8) is located under the grounding bracket (1). Therefore, first remove the grounding bracket before you pull out or insert the slide-in label "Part 1". 48 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts (1) Grounding bracket (2) Fastening screws (M3) for the grounding bracket (housing) (3) Fastening screw (M5) for the grounding bracket (COM board) (4) Slide-in labels "Part5" (5) Slide-in labels "Part4" (6) Slide-in labels "Part3" (7) Slide-in labels "Part2" (8) Slide-in labels "Part1" Image 2-14 MCP 310 PN - Rear with slide-in labels Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 49 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts Removing the grounding bracket 1.Remove the fastening screw (M5) using a TX 25 screwdriver. 2.Remove the two fastening screws (M3) using a TX 10 screwdriver. 3.Take off the grounding bracket. 50 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts 4.Pull out the slide-in label. Installing the grounding bracket Secure the grounding bracket after you have inserted the slide-in label by tightening the three fastening screws. Note Observe the proper torque values when tightening the screws: - M3: 0.8 to 1.3 Nm - M5: 3.0 to 6.0 Nm Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 51 Machine control panel: MCP 310 PN 2.8 Accessories and spare parts 52 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.1 3 Description The machine control panel MCP 310 permits user-friendly and clear operation of the machine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. 49 keys have user-inscribed slide-in labels for machine-specific adaptations. A DIN A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in the delivery kit. A connecting cable is included in the scope of delivery for connecting the direct keys of the SINUMERIK OP 012 / OP 015A and TP 015A operator panel fronts. The machine control panel is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description applies to the MCP 310 operator panel front. Article number: 6FC5203-0AF23-1AA0 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with a *). Features Operator controls Membrane keys Operating mode and function keys: - 49 keys with LEDs, 16 freely assignable customer keys in the standard assignment - Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override Feed control with override feed / rapid traverse (rotary switch with 23 positions) Key-operated switch (four positions and three different keys) Interfaces: PROFIBUS DP For 6 control devices (6 inputs / 6 outputs) (additional cable set required for control devices; see Section: "Accessories and spare parts".) For 16 direct control keys for OP 012 / OP 015A and TP 015A when connected via PROFIBUS DP (connection cable: 850 mm, included in scope of delivery) For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max. cable length: 5 m) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 53 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.2 Operating and display elements Expansion slots: Six slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) One slot for emergency stop button or rotary override switch (to d = 22 cm) 3.2 Operating and display elements 3.2.1 Front side Overview Operating modes and machine functions Customer keys (T1 to T16) Spindle control Slot for Emergency-Stop button or spindle override rotary switch Feed control with override rotary switch Slots for control devices 16 mm Program control Key-operated switch Image 3-1 54 Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 310 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.2 Operating and display elements Emergency Stop button If an EMERGENCY STOP button is added: See Section Front side (Page 120). Slots for control devices NOTICE Damage to the front The openings for mounting control devices must not be knocked out, but drilled to the required width. Information for the installation, or to select control devices, please refer to the following Section: Front side (Page 31). 3.2.2 Rear side COM board The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 310 are located on the COM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration). The detailed cutout under or above the interface name shows the position of pin 1 on the connectors. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 55 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.3 Interfaces ; ; ; ++ ; ; ; 6 ; &20%RDUG (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ ; ; ; Image 3-2 6 ; .H\RSHUDWHGVZLWFK ; Rear of the MCP 310 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces Description of rear control and display elements See Chapter "Machine control panel MCP 483 (Page 122)". 3.3 Interfaces 3.3.1 Overview Location of the interfaces MCP 310 communication is handled by the COM board where the interfaces are located (see Rear side (Page 55)). 56 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.3 Interfaces Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". 3.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3 Delivery condition Table 3-1 Delivery condition setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning/value on off on off on on off off off off Series Note The delivery condition setting MUST be changed in accordance with the "Assignment of the DIP switch S3" table (below). Connection type: PROFIBUS DP For PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 10: Table 3-2 1 Assignment of DIP switch S3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning/value PROFIBUS 3.3.3 off off off off off off off - on on 0 on off off off off off off - on on 1 off on off off off off off - on on 2 on on off off off off off - on on 3 : : : : : : : - - - on off on on on on on - on on 125 off on on on on on on - on on 126 : (etc.) Input / output images The specifications for assigning input and output bytes listed in the tables can be changed in the PLC via parameter assignment. Note The following applies in respect of the process input and output images in the tables: n is defined by means of FB1 parameters in OB100 of the PLC. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 57 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.3 Interfaces Table 3-3 Input image MCP 310 - standard Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 n+0 * CYCLE STOP SPINDLE DEC. - 100 % SPINDLE INC. + SINGLE BLOCK JOG MDA AUTO n+1 CYCLE START SPINDLE RIGHT * SPINDLE STOP SPINDLE LEFT Keyswitch REF. REPOS TEACH IN n+2 FEED START * FEED STOP INC [VAR] Keyswitch INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 n+3 n+5 position 0 Key-operated switch RESET n+4 Position 2 Traversing direction + - T16 KT-IN6 X52.3 n+6 OV_VS16 X30.6 OV_VS8 X30.7 OV_VS4 X30.8 OV_VS2 X30.9 OV_VS1 X30.10 RAPID KT-IN5 X52.2 KT-IN4 X52.1 KT-IN3 X51.3 KT-IN2 X51.2 KT-IN1 X51.1 Y X Axis selection 6 T9 T10 T11 T1 T2 T3 4 Z WCS MCS Freely assignable customer keys T12 T13 T14 T15 Freely assignable customer keys T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 Input image MCP 310 - supplementary I/O Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 m+0 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 m+1 DT16 DT15 DT14 DT13 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 m+2 - - - - - - - - m+3 - - - OV_VS16 X30.6 OV_VS8 X30.7 OV_VS4 X30.8 OV_VS2 X30.9 OV_VS1 X30.10 m+4 - - - OV_SP16 X31.6 1) OV_SP8 X31.7 1) OV_SP4 X31.8 1) OV_SP2 X31.9 1) OV_SP1 X31.10 1) The input information about optional spindle override rotary switches, max. 5-stage can be retrieved here. Table 3-5 Byte p+0 p+1 p+2 p+3 58 5 Freely assignable customer keys Inverse signals Table 3-4 1) Feedrate override Position 1 n+7 * position 3 Input image MCP 310 - handwheel Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Counter status, handwheel 1 at X60 (16 bits signed, in the big endian format) Counter status, handwheel 2 at X61 (16 bits signed, in the big endian format) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.3 Interfaces Note Within the SINUMERIK control, the handwheel data is processed directly by the NCK and is not available to the PLC. Table 3-6 MCP 310 output image Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 n+0 CYCLE STOP SPINDLE DEC. - 100 % SPINDLE INC. + SINGLE BLOCK JOG MDA AUTO n+1 CYCLE START SPINDLE RIGHT SPINDLE STOP SPINDLE LEFT RESET REF. REPOS TEACH IN n+2 FEED START FEED STOP INC [VAR] - INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 - - n+3 n+4 n+5 Traversing direction + - T16 KT-OUT6 X54.3 n+6 - - - - - - RAPID KT-OUT5 X54.2 KT-OUT4 X54.1 KT-OUT3 X53.3 KT-OUT2 X53.2 KT-OUT1 X53.1 6 5 4 Z Y X Freely assignable customer keys T9 T10 T11 T1 T2 T3 n+7 Table 3-7 Byte WCS MCS T12 Freely assignable customer keys T13 T14 T15 Freely assignable customer keys T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Output image MCP 310 - supplementary I/O Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 m+0 Reserved m+1 Reserved Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 59 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.3 Interfaces Default key assignment -2* REP REF VAR 7 7 7 Spindle Dec. 100 % Spindle Inc. MDA Teach IN 7 1 7 7 7 Spindle Right Spindle Stop Spindle Left Auto 7 7 10 7 7 7 X Y Z Single Bliock Reset 7 100 7 7 7 4th Axis 5th Axis 6th Axis Cycle Start 1000 WCS MCS Feed Stop Feed Start - Rapid + Cycle Stop ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 3-3 77 XQODEHOHGNH\V MCP 310 default key assignment Assignment of the inputs (I) and outputs (O) to the keys and LEDs , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 , 2 ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 3-4 60 Inputs and outputs of the MCP 310 keyboard Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.4 Mounting 3.4 Mounting Dimension drawing Image 3-5 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 310 Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached by means of 6 tension jacks (0.8 Nm; see dimension drawing). 6HDOLQJDUHD 0RXQWLQJSDQHO Image 3-6 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 5] 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 310 Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 61 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.5 PROFIBUS communication 3.5 PROFIBUS communication 3.5.1 Overview This section describes: Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project. Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 "HW config." Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and user program (optional). Note The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the special requirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about working with SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation or online help. Note Both units can be linked up using the supplied 20-pin ribbon cable in order to transfer the direct key signals of the operator panel front to the COM board of the machine control panel. The direct key module therefore no longer needs to be connected. 3.5.2 Prerequisites The following components are needed as prerequisites for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration: SIMATIC STEP 7 as of Version 5.4, Service Pack 4 Toolbox 840D sl as of Version 2.6 Hardware configuration The DP slave MCP is shown in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the hardware catalog of "HW Config" under the following path: Profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in "HW config" use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Note The GSD file of the DP slave MCP is located on the Toolbox CD in the directory: ...\8x0d\GSD\MCP_310_483 62 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.5 PROFIBUS communication 3.5.3 Functions of the machine control panel The machine control panel offers the following functions: Standard The input/output data of the function keys and user-specific keys and outputs are transferred: - Input data: 8 bytes - Output data: 8 bytes Handwheel The absolute values of the two handwheels that can be connected to the machine control panel are transferred. Additional I/Os The data of the following non-default inputs/outputs is transferred: - Direct keys - Customer keys - Rotary switch 3.5.4 Configuring the DP slave MCP This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in the figure by way of example. The hardware configuration has the following modules: SIMATIC Station 300 with SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK MCP with module: Standard + handwheel + additional I/O Procedure Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration . 2. Set the PROFIBUS address. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 63 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.5 PROFIBUS communication 3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP depending on the required functions . 4. Set the I/O addresses of the individual slots. Image 3-7 Configuration with DP slave MCP Requirements: S7 project The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP is to be added: The S7 project has been created. A SIMATIC 300 station with SINUMERIK controller has been defined. Adding a DP slave MCP To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog. The DP slave MCP can be found at profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol: 64 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.5 PROFIBUS communication When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to the configuration. Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes to a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration. PROFIBUS parameters As soon as you have inserted the MCP DP slave into the configuration, the "Properties PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP" dialog box is displayed: Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP Tab card: Parameters Address: <PROFIBUS address> Button: "Properties..." Dialog: PROFIBUS properties Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: PROFIBUS address Data transfer rate Profile Note No automatic comparison of the PROFIBUS address! The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module (DIP switch S3) (see Section: "Settings via DIP switch S3") The following data must agree: 1. SIMATIC S7 configuration DP slave MCP: PROFIBUS address 2. Machine control panel DIP switch S3: PROFIBUS address 3. FB1 call in OB100: "MCP1BusAdr := " Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 65 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.5 PROFIBUS communication Adding a module The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. The following modules are available in HW Config under "SINUMERIK MCP": Universal module (not applicable) Standard Standard + handwheel Standard + additional I/O Standard + handwheel + additional I/O I/O addresses If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the I/O addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog box. This dialog box can be used to set the start addresses of the I/O data of the slot. 3.5.5 Linking the DP slave MCP This chapter describes how to link the DP slave MCP in the basic PLC program for transferring the standard input/output data in the VDI interface to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response to a module failure Note Processing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machine manufacturer) and is not supported by the PLC basic program. PLC basic program To transfer the standard I/O data of the MCP DP slave via the PLC basic program, the corresponding I/O range must be entered in the communication parameters of the FB1 function block. Function block FB1 The communications parameters of the MCP are called MCPx... (x = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels are supported by the basic PLC program. To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly. This is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility. 66 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.5 PROFIBUS communication To operate an MCP 310 machine control panel as DP slave, only the parameters listed in the following table are relevant for the FB1 call in the OB100: Parameters Type Description Value MCPNum: INT Number of active MCPs :=1 MCP1In: POINTER Start address of the input signals := P#E 0.0 MCP1Out: POINTER Start address of the output signals := P#A 0.0 MCP1StatSend POINTER Status data word for sending := P#A 8.0 MCP1StatRec POINTER Status data word for receiving := P#A 12.0 MCP1BusAdr INT S3 switch position on the MCP :=6 MCP1Timeout S5time Cyclic sign-of-life monitoring of the MCP := S5T#700MS MCP1Cycl S5time Time reference for the cyclic updating of the signals to the MCP := S5T#200MS MCPBusType BYTE 33 PROFIBUS (55 Ethernet) := B#16#33 VDI interface parameter assignment The following function blocks are available for assigning the VDI interface parameters: FC 24: Transfer the signals for narrow MCP, M (milling) version FC 25: Transfer the MCP signals, T (turning) version Note The FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 function blocks are part of the basic PLC program. It is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility to call the block correctly and/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters. References A detailed description of the function blocks for transferring the machine control panel signals is available in: Function Manual, Basic Functions: P3, Basic PLC Program PLC user program If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does not check for module failure. In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave: PLC operating system PROFIBUS controller If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP. Customized response The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MCP failure: OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt OB 86: Rack failure Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 67 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.6 Maintenance and Service Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data. Note In the event of a failure of a connected machine control panel, the PLC basic program performs the following: Alarm "40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure"; with x = 0, 1 is initiated. The corresponding interface signal "MCP 1/2 ready" in the DB10.DBB104 is reset. 3.6 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Check of the emergency stop button (if the emergency stop button has been retrofitted) Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. 68 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.7 Diagnostics 3.7 Diagnostics 3.7.1 LED displays LEDs H1 to H5 on the COM board provide information about the following states: Diagnostics H1 H3 H4 Power On Lights up red Lights up green Lights up or ange H5 Lights up red/off The LEDs light up for approx. 4 s. GD communication Off Lights up green Flashes orange Lights up red (80 Hz) There is no PROFIBUS com munication. Lights up red (bus error) Lights up green Off Flashes green (approx. 25 Hz) MCP is configured as PROFI BUS slave and with cyclic data exchange. Off Lights up green Off/orange Lights up green Fatal error LED display flashes red flashes green flashes green flashes orange For fatal software errors and incorrect DIP switch settings, the LEDs flash very quickly. LED H2 is reserved for service and is always off. + + + + + Image 3-8 3.7.2 Arrangement of the LEDs on the COM board Output functions Preconditions The MCP is booting. The MCP is not communicating with the control system/ PROFIBUS master, i.e. all of the LEDs in the keys are flashing. In this state, the output functions described in the following can be sequentially called. 1. Software version Simultaneously press the "FEED START" and "FEED STOP" keys. The software version is output using three digits. The individual digits are expressed by the number of LEDs in the keys that are switched on. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 69 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.7 Diagnostics )((' 6723 )((' 67$57 1. Digit of the software version 2. Digit of the software version 3. Digit of the software version Image 3-9 Example: Output of the actual software version "03.01.00.00" 2. Output of the bus address Keep the FEED keys pressed, and in addition press the WCS MCS" key. The actual bus address of the MCP is output by the number of LEDs in the keys that are switched on: PROFIBUS: Value range 0 ... 126 MPI: Value range 0 ... 15 :&60&6 )((' )((' 6723 67$57 Hundreds position of the bus address Tens position of the bus address Ones position of the bus address Image 3-10 Example: Output of PROFIBUS address "28" 3. Output of the bus system Keep the FEED keys pressed, and press the WCS MCS" key again. The LEDs in the keys indicate the bus system in which the MCP is integrated: MPI or PROFIBUS (PB). 70 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.7 Diagnostics :&60&6 Image 3-11 3.7.3 )((' )((' 6723 67$57 Example: Output of the bus system "PB" (PROFIBUS) Key test Preconditions The MCP is booting. The MCP is not communicating with the control system/ PROFIBUS master, i.e. all of the LEDs in the keys are flashing. In this state, the operating functions described in the following can be executed in the test mode. Test mode Activation: Press the "RESET" key. Automatic deactivation: No operator control was pressed in the last 3 seconds. Manual deactivation: Simultaneously press the "CYCLE STOP" and "CYCLE START" keys. Operating functions Function of the keys and their associated LEDs: When pressing a key, the associated LED is switched on. Function of the rotary switch Each time the rotary switch is turned, an LED is switched on in sequence in the form of a running light. Function of the key-operated switch: When the key-operated switch is turned, positions 0 - 3 are displayed by 0 up to three LEDs. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 71 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.8 Technical data 3.8 Technical data Machine control panel MCP 310 Safety Safety class Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 III; PELV according to EN 50178 Front side: IP65 Key-operated switch: IP54 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption, max. 24 VDC Board: 7W Lamps: 14.4 W (6 x 2.4 W) *) Handwheels: 2 x 0.9 W Total: 23.2 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 65 mm Mounting depth: 33 mm Distance from NCU/PCU PROFIBUS DP: 100 m Weight Approx. 1.2 kg *) The outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) can have a max. permissible current of 0.3 A. However, the total current consumption of the components must not exceed 1.0 A (24 W). Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Emergency Stop button Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. 72 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts 3.9 Accessories and spare parts 3.9.1 Overview Table 3-8 Accessories and spare parts for machine control panel 310 Name Description Keyswitch Keyswitch with key Sets of keys Ten key sets, each with three keys for the keyswitch settings 1, 2, 3 Set of tension jacks Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm Qua ntity Article number 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Override for rotary spindle switch Override spindle / rapid traverse, electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, point er, spindle dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Rotary feed override switch Feed / rapid traverse override, electronic ro tary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 22 mm actuating element, emergency stop button, red, mushroom head and support 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) Contact block with 2 contacts, 1 NO + 1 NC, 2-pole ,screw terminal 1 3SB3400-0A *) Emergency stop button Slide-in labels Slide-in label, (3 films, DIN A4) 1 set 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0 Cable set for addi tional control devi ces Cable set for additional control devices Length: 500 mm 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 *) Safety-related Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 73 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts 3.9.2 Labeling the slide-in labels You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. Use the blank films that can be printed for this purpose. Print direction Image 3-12 74 Blank film for MCP 310 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts Files for printing the blank film The DOConCD or CD included in Catalog NC 61/ NC 62 contains three files for printing the blank films: Template_M_MCP310.doc [defaults for milling - standard shipped file; (A)] Template_MCP310.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205580; (B)] Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, inscription on labels as jpg file (C) 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO Outer edges Image 3-13 Template_M_MCP310.doc for the "Milling" version (A) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 75 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts Image 3-14 Template_MCP310.doc (acc. to labeling plan /template: Item No. A5E00205580 (B)] Table 3-9 Symbols.doc file (C) 7001 7013 7025 7002 7014 7026 7003 7015 7027 7004 7016 7005 7017 7029 7006 7018 7030 7007 7019 7031 7008 7020 7032 7009 7021 7033 7010 76 < 7022 = 7028 7124 & ; < = ; < = & 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7120 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts ; 7011 7023 7121 7012 7024 7123 Creating slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_M_MCP310.doc" (A) Open the file Template_M_MCP310.doc in the word-processing program MS Word. To obtain an optimum printing result, remove all separating lines in each slide-in label above, below and between the symbols. 7HLO Do not highlight the slide-in labels using the table symbol , but instead: 1. Place the cursor directly before the first symbol on the first slide-in label. 2. Highlight the entire row of the slide-in label by - pressing and holding the left mouse key and dragging it to the end of the row or - pressing the F8 key and the cursor key "" until the entire row is selected. 3. Click on the highlighting with the right mouse key. 4. In the menu that appears, select the entry: "Table properties". 5. On the "Table" tab, select the entry: "Borders and shading...". 6. Select the tab "Borders" and click on "Setting:" in the symbol with the designation: "None". 7. Confirm the selection with "OK" "OK" and remove the highlighting. This removes all separating lines (with the exception of the outer edges) from this row. 2XWHUHGJHV 3DUW 8. Remove the separating lines of the other slide-in labels in the same way. 9. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see diagram, "Blank film MCP 310"). 10.Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 11.Start the printing process using MS Word. Note For labeling the slide-in labels, HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 12.Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges. 13.Round off the corners of the slide-in labels approx. 1.5 mm to facilitate insertion. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 77 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts Preparing the slide-in labels with the aid of "Template_MCP310.doc" (B) Inserting symbols with the"Symbols.doc" file (C) 1. Open both the "Template_MCP310.doc" file and the "Symbols.doc" file in MS Word. 2. Copy the desired key symbol from the "Symbols.doc" file (C). 3. Position the cursor in the desired field of the template (B) and add the symbol. 4. If all the desired symbols have been added, remove the separating lines and start the printing process in accordance with the instructions in Section: Preparing the slide-in labels with the aid of "Template_M_MCP310.doc". Inserting characters/text 1. Open the "Template_MCP310.doc" file in MS Word. 2. Set the "Arial" font to format characters. (This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling.) 3. Position the cursor in the desired table cell and enter characters/text. Creating your own symbols Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Template_MCP310.doc). Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint): - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Template_MCP310.doc). Dimensions The figure shows a dimension drawing for the blank template of the MCP 310 (thickness: 0.6 mm): D D D E D D D D E D D D F a = 19 mm b = 4 mm c = 30.5 mm Image 3-15 78 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts 3.9.3 Using the slide-in label "Teil1" The slide-in label "Teil1" is located below the grounding bracket . Therefore, first remove the grounding bracket before you pull out or insert the slide-in label "Teil1". Grounding bracket Fastening screws (M3) for the grounding bracket (housing) Fastening screw (M5) for the grounding bracket (COM board) Slide-in label "Teil5" Slide-in label "Teil4" Slide-in label "Teil3" Slide-in label "Teil2" Slide-in label "Teil1" Image 3-16 MCP 310 - Rear side with slide-in labels Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 79 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts Removing the grounding bracket 1.Remove the fastening screw (M5) using a TX25 screwdriver. 2.Remove the two fastening screws (M3) using a TX10 screwdriver. 3.Take off the grounding brack et. 4.Pull out the slide-in label. 80 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts Installing the grounding bracket Secure the grounding bracket after you have inserted the slide-in label by tightening the three fastening screws. Note Observe the proper torque values when tightening the screws: - M3: 0.8 to 1.3 Nm - M5: 3.0 to 6.0 Nm Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 81 Machine control panel: MCP 310 3.9 Accessories and spare parts 82 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 4 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.1 Description Machine control panel MCP 483C PN (PN = PROFINET) enables user-friendly operation of the machine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. Note The IE functionality (IE = Industrial Ethernet) is still included and preset. Please note the switch position of S2. All keys are designed with replaceable covers for machine-specific adaptations. The key covers can be freely inscribed using a laser. Clear key covers can be used as an alternative. The machine control panel is secured from the rear with special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity This description applies to the machine control panel: Type Key type Article number MCP 483C PN Mechanical short-stroke keys 6FC5303-0AF22-0AA1 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with *). Features Control elements: Mechanical short-stroke keys Operating mode and function keys: - 50 keys with assigned LEDs, 17 freely assignable customer keys in the standard assignment - Arrow keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override (The key covers for the arrow keys for turning machines are supplied, see Section Front side (Page 85)) Spindle control with override spindle (rotary switch with 16 positions) Feed control with override feed / rapid traverse (rotary switch with 23 positions) Keyswitch (four positions and three different keys) Emergency Stop button, two contact blocks (1 NO + 1 NC) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 83 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.1 Description Interfaces: Ethernet (transfer rate: 10/100 Mbit/s; for IE and PN) Nine customer-specific inputs (e.g. for illuminated pushbuttons) Six customer-specific outputs Connection for two handwheels (Sub-D) (velocity input and contour handwheel are only possible if connecting through the handwheel connection module 6FC5303-0AA02-0AA0 or the MCP PN interface 6FC5303-0AF03-0AA0) Expansion slots: Two slots for control devices (d = 16 mm). (additional cable set required for control devices, see Table 4-4 Accessories and spare parts for machine control panel 483C PN (Page 97)) 84 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.2 Operating and display elements 4.2 Operating and display elements 4.2.1 Front side Overview (1) Emergency stop button (2) Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) (3) Reset button (4) Program control (5) Operating modes, machine functions (6) User keys T1 to T15 (7) Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15) (8) Spindle control with override switch (9) Feed control with override switch (10) Keyswitch (four positions) Image 4-1 Position of control elements on MCP 483C PN Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 85 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.2 Operating and display elements Emergency stop button Emergency stop button Press the red emergency stop button in emergencies if people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the emergency stop button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the emergency stop: Refer to the specifications of the machine tool manufacturer WARNING Danger of death resulting from the premature emergency stop unlocking If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. Emergency stop circuit (0(5*(1&< 6723 Image 4-2 Emergency stop circuit Slots for control devices NOTICE Damage to the front The openings for mounting control devices (2) in Fig. "Position of control elements of MCP 483C PN" must not be knocked out, but drilled to the required width. 86 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.2 Operating and display elements Key covers All keys of the MCP 483C PN come with changeable key covers. Refer to the following table for the additional replacement key covers provided for turning machines in the accessories pack. Key cover & ; < = Symbol number 7027 7125 7126 7127 Key cover ; < = & Symbol number 7129 7130 7131 7132 7128 The article numbers for the key covers can be found in Section "Accessories and spare parts". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 87 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.2 Operating and display elements 4.2.2 Rear side Ground terminal (2) Feed override X30 (3) Spindle override X31 (4) Ethernet connection (mechan. secured - Port1 X20 (5) Ethernet connection (mechan. secured - Port2 X21 (6) EMERGENCY STOP (7) Installation locations for additional control devices (d = 16 mm) (8) Customer-specific inputs and outputs (9) Cover plate (10) Ethernet cable strain relief (11) LEDs (see detailed figure) (12) Switch S2 (13) Switch S1 (14) Handwheel connection X61 (15) Handwheel connection X60 (16) Power supply interface X10 Image 4-3 88 (1) Details excerpt Rear of MCP 483C PN with connecting cable (handwheel/Ethernet) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.3 Interfaces LEDs (1) Switch S2 (2) (3) H1 - POWER OK (green) LEDs H2 - BUSSYNC (4) Image 4-4 4.3 Interfaces 4.3.1 Overview H3 - BUSFAULT MCP 483C PN - LEDs Overview X10 X20 X21 X30 X31 X51 / X52 / X55 X53 / X54 X60 / X61 4.3.2 Power supply interface Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 2 Interface for rotary switch feed override Interface for rotary switch spindle override Interfaces for customer-specific inputs Interfaces for customer-specific outputs Connections for 2 handwheels (TTL / differential - can be set with switch S1) Description Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 89 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.3 Interfaces Switch S1/S2 Settings, see Chapter "Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN", Section "Interfaces". 4.3.3 Input / output images Standard + two handwheels The specifications for assigning input and output bytes listed in the tables can be changed in the PLC via parameter assignment. Note The following applies in respect of the process input and output images in the tables: n is defined by means of FB1 parameters in OB100 of the PLC. Table 4-1 Byte Process input image for MCP 483C PN Bit7 EB n + 0 Bit6 Bit5 EB n + 3 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 TEACH IN MDA AUTO Mode D (23) C (22) B (21) A (20) REPOS REF. var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC Spindle start * Spindle stop Feed start * Feed stop NC start * NC stop Single block E (24) D (23) C (22) B (21) A (20) Rapid tra verse R14 Key-operat ed switch position 3 X R1 4. axis R4 7. axis R7 R10 9. axis R9 8. axis R8 6. axis R6 T14 T15 - EB n + 1 EB n + 2 Bit4 Spindle override JOG Machine function Key-operated switch Position 0 Position 2 RESET Key-operat ed switch position 1 EB n + 4 Arrow keys + R15 R13 EB n + 5 Feed override Axis selection Axis selection Y R2 Z R3 5. axis R5 T9 T10 T11 EB n + 6 Motion command in MCS/WCS R11 Unassigned customer keys EB n + 7 T12 T13 Unassigned customer keys T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 EB n + 8 - - - - - - - - EB n + 9 - - - - - - - - 90 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.3 Interfaces Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 EB n + 10 KT-IN8 X55.2 KT-IN7 X55.1 KT-IN6 X52.3 KT-IN5 X52.2 KT-IN4 X52.1 KT-IN3 X51.3 KT-IN2 X51.2 KT-IN1 X51.1 EB n + 11 - - - - - - - KT-IN9 X55.3 EB n + 12 - - - - - - - - EB n + 13 - - - X31 pin 6 1) X31 pin 7 1) X31 pin 8 1) X31 pin 9 1) X31 pin 10 1) Signals marked with * are inverse signals. 1) If the 4-stage rotary spindle override switch on X31 is replaced by a 5-stage rotary switch, the input information here can be measured in five stages. Table 4-2 Byte Input image for handwheel data Bit7 Bit6 EB n + 14 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Handwheel 1 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte n+14) EB n + 15 EB n + 16 Handwheel 2 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte n+16) EB n + 17 Within the SINUMERIK controller, the handwheel data is processed directly by the NCK and are not available to the PLC. Table 4-3 Byte Process output image for MCP 483C PN Bit7 AB n + 0 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Machine function 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC Feed start * Feed stop NC start * NC stop AB n + 2 Arrow key - JOG 4. axis R4 AB n + 3 7. axis R7 TEACH IN MDA AUTO Machine function REPOS Axis selection X R1 Bit0 Mode AB n + 1 R13 Bit1 REF. var. INC 10000 INC Single block Spindle Start *Spindle Stop R10 Axis selection Z R3 5. axis R5 Motion command in MCS/WCS T9 T10 T11 T1 T2 T3 AB n + 6 - - - - - - RESET R14 AB n + 7 - - KT-OUT6 X54.3 KT-OUT5 X54.2 KT-OUT4 X54.1 KT-OUT3 X53.3 KT-OUT2 X53.2 KT-OUT1 X53.1 AB n + 4 R11 9. axis R9 Arrow key + 8. axis R8 6. axis R6 T14 T15 Y R2 T6 T7 T8 R15 Unassigned customer keys AB n + 5 T12 T13 Unassigned customer keys T4 T5 Signals marked with * are inverse signals Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 91 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.3 Interfaces Default key assignment RESET -2* REP REF (T1) (T2) (T3) X (R1) Y (R2) Z (R3) TCH INC VAR INC 1 (T4) (T5) (T6) 4 (R4) 5 (R5) 6 (R6) MDA INC 10 INC 100 (T7) (T8) (T9) 7 (R7) 8 (R8) 9 (R9) AUT INC 1000 INC 10000 (T10) (T11) (T12) (R10) (R11) Work (R12) NC STOP NC START (T13) (R13) RT (R14) + (R15) Single block ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 4-5 (T14) (T15) Sp.STOP Sp.START Feed STOP Feed START , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 77 XQODEHOHGNH\V Default key assignment of MCP 483C PN Assignment of the inputs (I) and outputs (O) to the keys and LEDs , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 4-6 92 Inputs and outputs of the MCP 483C PN keyboard Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.4 Mounting 4.4 Mounting The MCP 483C PN machine control panel can be combined with all SINUMERIK operator panel fronts, preferably with a width of 483 mm. The recommended combination sequence is shown in the figure. 2SHUDWRUSDQHOIURQW HJ23 .H\ERDUG HJ.%& 0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO HJ0&3&31 Image 4-7 Combination sequence of the components Dimension drawing Image 4-8 Front and side view of MCP 483C PN with connecting cable (handwheel and Ethernet) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 93 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.5 Connecting Tension jacks The machine control panel is mounted from the front in a rectangular cut-out It is attached using nine tension jacks (0.5 Nm tightening torque), which are included in the scope of delivery. 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD Image 4-9 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 5] ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Panel cutout of MCP 483C PN Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the environmental temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 4.5 Connecting Two equivalent connections (Fast Ethernet) are available for Ethernet/PROFINET transfer. The Ethernet cables are not included in the scope of delivery. They must be ordered separately. The following components are recommended: Ethernet FastConnect cables Ethernet FastConnect connectors More information on this can be found in the SIEMENS IK PI catalog. 94 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.6 Maintenance and Service Securing Ethernet cables Two cable ties are included in the scope of delivery. These are used to secure the Ethernet cables on the cover plate at the rear of the machine control panel (see figure in Section: "Control and display elements" "Rear side"). NOTICE Damaged cables caused by chafing edges Make sure that all cables are routed so that they do not come into contact with chafing edges. 4.6 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 95 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.7 Technical data 4.7 Technical data MCP 483C PN machine control panel Safety Safety class Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 III; PELV according to EN 50178 Front side: IP54 Mounting frame: IP65 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption, max. 24 VDC Board: Handwheels: Lamps: Total: 5W 2 x 0.9 W 14.4 W (6 x 2.4 W) *) 21.2 W Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 106 mm Mounting depth: 54.5 mm Weight Approx. 2 kg *) The outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) can have a max. permissible current of 0.3 A. However, the total current consumption of the components must not exceed 1.0 A (24 W). Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Emergency Stop button Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. 96 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.8 Accessories and spare parts 4.8 Table 4-4 Accessories and spare parts Accessories and spare parts for machine control panel 483C PN Name Description Quan Article number tity Emergency Stop but ton 22 mm actuating element, 40mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protection, latching, red, with holder, unlit 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) Contact block With two contact pairs (1 NO + 1 NC), 2-pin, screw terminal (3rd contact pair can be connected additionally) 1 3SB3400-0A *) Key Ten key sets, each with three keys for the keyswitch settings 1, 2, 3 1 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 Rapid traverse dial for 16-stage rotary switch MCP 483C 20 6FC5248-0AF30-0AA0 Override spindle / rapid traverse Electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Feed / rapid traverse override Electronic rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Tension jacks Set of tensioners for operator components with 2.5 mm profile, 20 mm length 9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Key covers Square, can be labeled by laser, 1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each of red / green / yellow / medium gray 170 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0 Key covers Square, for inscription plates, 1 set of 90, clear 90 6FC5248-0AF21-0AA0 Key cover Square, can be written with laser, one set with 500 items, ergogray (light basic) 1 6FC5348-0AF00-0AA0 Key cover Square, can be written with laser, one set with 500 items, midgray (light basic) 1 6FC5348-0AF01-0AA0 Cable set 60 cables for additional MCP control devices, 500 mm long 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 Signal cable, hand wheel Connecting cable for the handwheel, max. length: 5 m 1 6FX8002-2CP00-1Axy xy is the length code: x (m) = A (0) ...F (5); y (dm) = 0 ... 8 For details, see Image 1-8 Connection cable for COM board handwheel (Page 28). *) Safety-related Accessories pack (for delivery ex works) Keyset Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 9 Key covers for turning (labeled) 30 Ergo gray key covers (for labeling) 30 Clear key covers (for labeling) 97 Machine control panel: MCP 483C PN 4.8 Accessories and spare parts 98 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 5 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.1 Description Machine control panel MCP 483 PN (PN = PROFINET) enables user-friendly operation of the machine functions, which are clearly laid out for the user. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling and turning machines, and particularly grinding machines. Note The IE functionality (IE = Industrial Ethernet) is still included and preset. Please note the switch position of S2. 46 keys and both control device slots are equipped with user-inscribed slide-in labels for adapting to specific machines. A DIN A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in the scope of delivery. A connecting cable is included in the scope of delivery for connecting the direct keys of the SINUMERIK OP 012 / OP 015A and TP 015A operator panel fronts. The machine control panel is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity This description applies to the machine control panel: Type Key type Article number MCP 483 PN Membrane keys 6FC5303-0AF22-1AA1 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with *). Features Control elements: Membrane keys Operating mode and function keys: - 50 keys with assigned LEDs, 17 freely assignable customer keys in the standard assignment - Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override Spindle control with override spindle (rotary switch with 16 positions) Feed control with override feed / rapid traverse (rotary switch with 23 positions) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 99 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.1 Description Keyswitch (four positions and three different keys) Emergency Stop button, two contact blocks (1 NO + 1 NC) Interfaces: Ethernet (transfer rate: 10/100 Mbit/s; for IE and PN) Nine customer-specific inputs (e.g. for illuminated pushbuttons) Six customer-specific outputs For 16 direct keys of OP 012 / OP 015A / TP 015A (connection cable: 850 mm, included in scope of delivery) Connection for two handwheels (Sub-D) (velocity input and contour handwheel are only possible if connecting through the handwheel connection module 6FC5303-0AA02-0AA0 or the MCP PN interface 6FC5303-0AF03-0AA0) Expansion slots: Two slots for control devices (d = 16 mm). (additional cable set required for control devices, see Table 5-4 Accessories and spare parts for machine control panel 483 PN (Page 112)) 100 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.2 Operator controls and indicators 5.2 Operator controls and indicators 5.2.1 Front side Overview (1) Emergency stop button (2) Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) (3) Reset button (4) Program control (5) Operating modes, machine functions (6) User keys T1 to T15 (7) Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15) (8) Spindle control with override switch (9) Feed control with override switch (10) Key-operated switch (four positions) Image 5-1 Position of control elements on MCP 483 PN Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 101 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.2 Operator controls and indicators Emergency stop button Emergency stop button Press the red emergency stop button in emergencies if people are at risk, there is the danger of machines or the workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the Emergency Stop button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the Emergency Stop button counterclockwise to unlatch it. Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the emergency stop: Refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions WARNING Danger of death resulting from the premature emergency stop unlocking If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. Emergency stop circuit (0(5*(1&< 6723 Image 5-2 Emergency stop circuit Slots for control devices NOTICE Damage to the front Do not knock out the openings for mounting control devices (2) in "Position of control elements on MCP 483 PN", but drill them to the required width. 102 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.2 Operator controls and indicators Information for the installation, or to select control devices, please refer to the following Section: Front side (Page 31). 5.2.2 Rear side Rear Ground terminal Feedrate override X30 Spindle override X31 Power supply interface X10 Switch S1 *) Handwheel connection X60 Handwheel connection X61 Emergency Stop Installation locations for additional control devices (d = 16 mm) Ethernet connection, port 1 X20 Ethernet connection, port 2 X21 Ethernet cable strain relief Interface for the connection of the keyswitch LEDs *) Switch S2 *) Customer-specific inputs and outputs *) *) Detailed figure under "Interfaces" "Description" Image 5-3 Rear of the MCP 483 PN with Ethernet connecting cables Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 103 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.3 interfaces Image 5-4 5.3 interfaces 5.3.1 Overview MCP 483 PN - MAC address/rating plate ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 6 + + + 6 Image 5-5 (1) X10 104 Rear of the MCP 483 PN with interfaces Equipotential bonding Power supply interface Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.3 interfaces X20 X21 X30 X31 X51 / X52 / X55 X53 / X54 X60 / X61 X70 S1 S2 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 2 Interface for rotary switch feed override Interface for rotary switch spindle override Interfaces for customer-specific inputs Interfaces for customer-specific outputs Connections for 2 handwheels (TTL / differential - can be set with switch S1) Interface for connecting 16 direct keys Switch for setting the handwheel signal type Switch for setting the MCP address LEDs H1 POWER OK (green) H2 BUSSYNC H3 BUSFAULT Equipotential bonding The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw. 5.3.2 Description Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". Switch S1/S2 Settings, see Chapter "Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN", Section "Interfaces". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 105 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.3 interfaces 5.3.3 Input / output images Standard + two handwheels The specifications for assigning input and output bytes listed in the tables can be changed in the PLC via parameter assignment. Note The following applies in respect of the process input and output images in the tables: n is defined by means of FB1 parameters in OB100 of the PLC. Table 5-1 Byte Process input image for MCP 483 PN Bit7 Bit6 D (23) C (22) EB n + 0 Bit5 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 A (20) JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO Mode B (21) Machine function REPOS EB n + 3 Bit3 Spindle override EB n + 1 EB n + 2 Bit4 REF. Key-operated switch Position 0 Position 2 RESET Keyswitch position 1 EB n + 4 var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC Spindle start *Spindle stop Feed start *Feed stop NC start *NC stop Single block E (2 ) D (2 ) B (21) A (20) Feedrate override 4 Arrow keys + R15 R13 3 Keyswitch Rapid tra verse R14 EB n + 5 position 3 C (22) Axis selection X R1 4. axis R4 7. axis R7 R10 9. axis R9 8. axis R8 6. axis R6 T14 T15 - T6 T7 T8 Axis selection Y R2 Z R3 5. axis R5 T9 T10 T11 T1 T2 T3 EB n + 6 Traversing command in MCS/WCS R11 Freely assignable customer keys T12 T13 Freely assignable customer keys EB n + 7 T4 T5 EB n + 8 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 EB n + 9 DT16 DT15 DT14 DT13 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 EB n + 10 KT-IN8 X55.2 KT-IN7 X55.1 KT-IN6 X52.3 KT-IN5 X52.2 KT-IN4 X52.1 KT-IN3 X51.3 KT-IN2 X51.2 KT-IN1 X51.1 EB n + 11 - - - - - - - KT-IN9 X55.3 EB n + 12 - - - - - - - - EB n + 13 - - - X31 pin 6 1) X31 pin 7 1) X31 pin 8 1) X31 pin 9 1) X31 pin 10 1) 106 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.3 interfaces Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Signals marked with * are inverse signals. 1) If the 4-stage rotary spindle override switch on X31 is replaced by a 5-stage rotary switch, the input information here can be measured in 5 stages. Table 5-2 Byte Input image for handwheel data Bit7 Bit6 EB n + 14 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Handwheel 1 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte n+14) EB n + 15 EB n + 16 Handwheel 2 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte n+16) EB n + 17 Within the SINUMERIK control, the handwheel data is processed directly by the NCK and is not available to the PLC. Table 5-3 Byte Process output image for MCP 483 PN Bit7 AB n + 0 AB n + 1 AB n + 2 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Machine function Bit1 Bit0 MDA AUTO Mode 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN Feed start *Feed stop NC start *NC stop REPOS REF. var. INC 10000 INC 4. axis R4 Single block Spindle start *Spindle stop R13 X R1 Z R3 5. axis R5 Traversing command in MCS/WCS 8. axis R8 6. axis R6 T14 T15 Direction key - Machine function Axis selection 7. axis R7 AB n + 3 R10 Axis selection AB n + 4 R11 9. axis R9 Direction key + R15 Freely assignable customer keys T9 T10 T11 AB n + 5 T12 T13 Y R2 Freely assignable customer keys T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 AB n + 6 - - - - - - RESET R14 AB n + 7 - - KT-OUT6 X54.3 KT-OUT5 X54.2 KT-OUT4 X54.1 KT-OUT3 X53.3 KT-OUT2 X53.2 KT-OUT1 X53.1 Signals marked with * are inverse signals Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 107 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.3 interfaces Default key assignment RESET -2* REP REF (T1) (T2) (T3) X (R1) Y (R2) Z (R3) TCH INC VAR INC 1 (T4) (T5) (T6) 4 (R4) 5 (R5) 6 (R6) MDA INC 10 INC 100 (T7) (T8) (T9) 7 (R7) 8 (R8) 9 (R9) AUT INC 1000 INC 10000 (T10) (T11) (T12) (R10) (R11) WKS (R12) NCSTOP NCSTART (T13) (R13) Eilg. (R14) + (R15) Einzelsatz (LQJ|QJHLQYHUV Image 5-6 (T14) (T15) Sp.STOP Sp.START VSSTOP VSSTART ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ 77 QLFKWEHVFKULIWHWH7DVWHQ Default key assignment of MCP 483 PN Assignment of the inputs (I) and outputs (O) to the keys and LEDs ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ (LQJ|QJHLQYHUV Image 5-7 108 Inputs and outputs of the MCP 483 PN keyboard Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.4 Mounting 5.4 Mounting Dimension drawing Image 5-8 Dimension drawing of machine control panel MCP 483 PN Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached using 9 tension jacks (tightening torque, 0.8 Nm). 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD Image 5-9 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 5] ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Panel cutout of MCP 483 PN Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 109 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.6 Maintenance and Service 5.5 Connecting Two equivalent connections (Fast Ethernet) are available for Ethernet/PROFINET transfer. The Ethernet cables are not included in the scope of delivery. They must be ordered separately. The following components are recommended: Ethernet FastConnect cables Ethernet FastConnect connectors More information on this can be found in the SIEMENS IK PI catalog. Securing Ethernet cables Two cable ties are included in the scope of delivery. These are used to secure the Ethernet cables on the cover plate at the rear of the machine control panel (see figure in Section: "Control and display elements" "Rear side"). NOTICE Damaged cables caused by chafing edges Make sure that all cables are routed so that they do not come into contact with chafing edges. 5.6 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust 110 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.7 Technical data moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. 5.7 Technical data Machine control panel MCP 483 PN Safety Safety class Degree of protection ac cording to DIN IEC 529 III; PELV according to EN 50178 Front side: IP54 Mounting frame: IP65 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption, max. 24 VDC Board: Handwheels: Lamps: Total: 5W 2 x 0.9 W 14.4 W (6 x 2.4 W) *) 21.2 W Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Depth: 106.7 mm Mounting depth: 53.9 mm Approx. 1.6 kg *) The outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) can have a max. permissible current of 0.3 A. However, the total current consumption of the components must not exceed 1.0 A (24 W). Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Emergency Stop button Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 111 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.8 Accessories and spare parts Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. 5.8 Accessories and spare parts 5.8.1 Overview Table 5-4 Accessories and spare parts for machine control panel 483 PN Name Description Number Article number 22 mm actuating element, 40 mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protection, latching, red, with hold er, unlit 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) Emergency Stop button Contact block with 2 contacts, 1 NO + 1 NC, 2-pole ,screw terminal 1 3SB3400-0A *) Keyswitch Keyswitch with key 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 Sets of keys Ten key sets, each with three keys for the keyswitch settings 1, 2, 3 1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 Set of tension jacks Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Override, spindle rotary switch Override spindle / rapid traverse, electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Override, feed rotary switch Feed / rapid traverse override, electronic rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Slide-in labels Slide-in label, (3 films, A4) 1 set 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1 Cable set 60 cables for additional MCP control devices, 500 mm long 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 Signal cable, handwheel Connecting cable for the handwheel, max. length: 5 m 1 6FX8002-2CP00-1Axy xy is the length code: x (m) = A (0) ...F (5); y (dm) = 0 ... 8 For details, see Image 1-8 Connection cable for COM board handwheel (Page 28). *) Safety-related 112 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.8 Accessories and spare parts 5.8.2 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. Use the blank films that can be printed for this purpose. Image 5-10 Blank film for MCP 483 PN Preparing slide-in labels Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on the supplied film or how to create your own individual film: The DOConCD or CD included in Catalog NC 61/ NC 62 includes four files for printing the blank films: Template_M_MCP483.doc [default assignment for milling - standard; (A)] Template_T_MCP483.doc [defaults for turning; (B)] Template_MCP483.doc [blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579; (C)] Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, inscription on labels as jpg file (D) Files Template_M_MCP483.doc, Template_T_MCP483.doc and Template_MCP483.doc include a table function showing the corresponding keyboard positions. An example of each of the MCP files (milling and turning) is given below: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 113 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.8 Accessories and spare parts < = 3DUW ; 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Image 5-11 Template_M_MCP483.doc for the "Milling" version (A) < ; & 3DUW = = 3DUW & ; < 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Image 5-12 114 Template_T_MCP483.doc for the "Turning" version (B) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.8 Accessories and spare parts 3DUW 3DUW 3DUW Image 5-13 Template_MCP483.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579 (C) Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied and pasted into the corresponding table field. The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels. The strip "Part5" is included twice so that it is available optionally as either a 1-color or 3-color strip. Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font used by Siemens for the key labeling. Table 5-5 Symbols.doc file (D) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 7001 7013 7025 7002 7014 7026 7003 7015 7027 7004 7016 7005 7017 = 7028 7029 7124 & ; < = 7125 7126 7127 7128 115 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.8 Accessories and spare parts 7006 7018 7030 7007 7019 7031 7008 7020 7032 7009 7021 7033 7010 ; 7022 7120 7011 7023 7121 7012 7024 7123 < ; < = & 7129 7130 7131 7132 Creating your own symbols Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word document (Symbols.doc). Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint): - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Symbols.doc). 116 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.8 Accessories and spare parts Dimension drawings The following is a dimension drawing for the MCP 483 PN blank template: 1DUURZODEHOZLGWKFPKHLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP +HLJKWFP 3DUW 1DUURZODEHOZLGWKFPKHLJKWFP +HLJKWFP Image 5-14 +HLJKWFP 3DUW :LGWKFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP :LGWKFP 3DUW +HLJKWFP Dimension drawing for MCP 483 PN slide-in labels Note The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer. HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. To make the labels easier to slide in, they should be rounded by about 1.5 mm. The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge. It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels on film. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 117 Machine control panel: MCP 483 PN 5.8 Accessories and spare parts 118 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.1 6 Description The machine control panel MCP 483 permits user-friendly and clear operation of the machine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling and turning machines, and particularly grinding machines. 46 keys and both control device slots are equipped with user-inscribed slide-in labels for adapting to specific machines. A DIN A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in the delivery kit. A connecting cable is included in the scope of delivery for connecting the direct keys of the SINUMERIK OP 012 / OP 015A and TP 015A operator panel fronts. The machine control panel is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The description applies to the MCP 483 machine control panel. Article number 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA2. The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with *). Features Control elements: Membrane keys Operating mode and function keys: - 50 keys with LEDs, 17 freely assignable customer keys in the standard assignment - Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override Spindle control with override spindle (rotary switch with 16 positions) Feed control with override feed / rapid traverse (rotary switch with 23 positions) Keyswitch (four positions and three different keys) Emergency stop button, two contact blocks (1 NO + 1 NC) Interfaces: PROFIBUS DP Six customer-specific input/outputs (Additional cable set required for the control devices, see Section: "Accessories and spare parts".) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 119 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.2 Operating and display elements For 16 direct keys of OP 012 / OP 015A / TP 015A (connection cable: 850 mm, included in scope of delivery) For two handwheels (max. cable length: 5 m) Expansion slots: Two slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) 6.2 Operating and display elements 6.2.1 Front side Overview Emergency Stop button Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm) Reset button Program control Operating modes, machine functions User keys (T1 to T15) Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15) Spindle control with rotary override switch Feed control with rotary override switch Key-operated switch (four positions) Image 6-1 120 Position of control elements on MCP 483 (milling version) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.2 Operating and display elements Emergency Stop button Emergency Stop button Press the red Emergency Stop button in emergencies if when a person is at risk, when there is danger of the machine or workpiece being damaged. As a rule, when operating the Emergency Stop button, all drives are brought to a standstill with max. braking torque. Turn the Emergency Stop button counterclockwise to unlatch it. For other responses to an Emergency Stop: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions! WARNING Danger of death resulting from the premature emergency stop unlocking If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. Circuit for emergency stop button (PHUJHQF\6WRS EXWWRQ Image 6-2 Emergency Stop button screw-type terminal diagram Slots for control devices NOTICE Damage to the front The openings for mounting control devices (2) in Fig.: "Position of control elements of machine control panel MCP 483" must not be knocked out, but drilled to the required width. Information for the installation, or to select control devices, please refer to the following Section: Front side (Page 31). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 121 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.2 Operating and display elements 6.2.2 Rear side COM board The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 483 are located on the COM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration): The detailed cutout under or above the interface name shows the position of pin 1 on the connectors. (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ ; ; ; ++ ; ; ; 6 ; &20%RDUG ; ; 6 ; Image 6-3 ; ; Rear of the MCP 483 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces Jumper S1 Setting the handwheel signal type - S1 open: TTL - S1 closed: Differential interface S3 DIP switch Sets e.g. baud rate, addresses and protocol, see chapter Settings via DIP switch S3 (Page 123). Diagnostic LEDs H1 ... H5 Please refer to Chapter LED displays (Page 136) for the various operating states that are signaled using the LEDs. 122 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.3 Interfaces 6.3 Interfaces 6.3.1 Overview MCP 483 communication is handled by the COM board where the interfaces are located (see Section: "Control and display elements" --> "Rear side"). Overview X10: Power supply interface 3-pin Phoenix terminal block X20: Operator panel interface (PROFIBUS DP) 9-pin Sub-D socket connector X30: Interface for connecting rotary feed override switch (23 graduations) 2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock X31: Interface for connecting rotary spindle override switch (16 graduations) 2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock X50: Interface to 4-way key-operated switch 1 x 6-pin plug connector X51-X54: Optional interfaces for customer-specific input/outputs (pushbuttons, incl. 24 V lamps) each 1 x 4-pin plug connector X60/X61: Connection for two handwheels (TTL/DTTL) 15-pin sub-D socket each X70: Connection of direct control keys (16 digital inputs; opto-decoupled)) 2 x 10-pin plug connector Equipotential bonding The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw. Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". 6.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3 Delivery condition Table 6-1 Delivery condition setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning/value on off on off on on off off off off Series Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 123 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.3 Interfaces Note The delivery condition setting MUST be changed in accordance with the "Assignment of the DIP switch S3" table (below). Connection type: PROFIBUS DP For PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1 to 10: Table 6-2 Assignment of DIP switch S3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning/value off off off off off off off - on on 0 on off off off off off off - on on 1 off on off off off off off - on on 2 on on off off off off off - on on 3 PROFIBUS 6.3.3 : : : : : : : - - - on off on on on on on - on on : (etc.) 125 off on on on on on on - on on 126 Input / output images The specifications for assigning input and output bytes listed in the tables can be changed in the PLC via parameter assignment. Note The following applies in respect of the process input and output images in the tables: n is defined by means of FB1 parameters in OB100 of the PLC. Table 6-3 Byte Input image MCP 483 - standard Bit7 Bit6 OV_SP8 X31.7 OV_SP4 X31.8 REPOS REF. n+0 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 OV_SP2 X31.9 OV_SP1 X31.10 JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO INC [VAR] INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 SPINDLE START * SPINDLE STOP FEED START * FEED STOP CYCLE START *CYCLE STOP Mode Machine function Key-operated switch Position 0 124 Bit0 Spindle override n+1 n+2 Bit1 Position 2 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.3 Interfaces Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 n+3 RESET Keyswitch SINGLE BLOCK position 1 n+4 Traversing direction + (R15) n+5 (R13) Z (R3) OV_VS16 X30.6 RAPID (R14) Bit2 OV_VS8 X30.7 OV_VS4 X30.8 Keyswitch Bit1 Bit0 OV_VS2 X30.9 OV_VS1 X30.10 position 3 Axis selection X (R1) 4 (R4) WCS MCS 5 (R5) n+6 7 (R7) (R10) Axis selection (R11) 9 (R9) 8 (R8) 6 (R6) T14 T15 - Freely assignable customer keys T9 T10 T11 n+7 T12 T13 Freely assignable customer keys T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Inverse signals Table 6-4 Byte 1) Bit3 Feedrate override Axis selection Y (R2) * Bit4 Input image MCP 483 - supplementary I/O Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 m+0 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 m+1 DT16 DT15 DT14 DT13 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 m+2 - - KT-IN6 X52.3 KT-IN5 X52.2 KT-IN4 X52.1 KT-IN3 X51.3 KT-IN2 X51.2 KT-IN1 X51.1 m+3 - - - OV_VS16 X30.6 OV_VS8 X30.7 OV_VS4 X30.8 OV_VS2 X30.9 OV_VS1 X30.10 m+4 - - - OV_SP16 X31.6 1) OV_SP8 X31.7 1) OV_SP4 X31.8 1) OV_SP2 X31.9 1) OV_SP1 X31.10 1) If the 4-stage rotary spindle override switch on X31 is replaced by a 5-stage rotary switch, the input information here can be measured in 5 stages. Table 6-5 Byte Input image MCP 483 - handwheel Bit7 Bit6 p+0 p+2 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Bit1 Bit0 MDA AUTO Counter status, handwheel 2 at X61 (16 bits signed, in the big endian format) p+3 Byte Bit4 Counter status, handwheel 1 at X60 (16 bits signed, in the big endian format) p+1 Table 6-6 Bit5 Output image for MCP 483 - standard Bit7 Bit6 1000 INC 100 INC n+0 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 1 INC JOG TEACH IN Machine function Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 10 INC Mode 125 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.3 Interfaces Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 n+1 FEED START FEED STOP CYCLE START CYCLE STOP Traversing direction (R13) X (R1) 4 (R4) n+2 n+3 Bit3 Bit2 REPOS Axis selection Axis selection Z (R3) Bit1 7 (R7) (R10) (R11) 9 (R9) WCS MCS REF. INC [VAR] INC 10000 SINGLE BLOCK SPINDLE START SPINDLE STOP Axis selection 5 (R5) Bit0 Machine function 8 (R8) 6 (R6) Traversing direction + (R15) n+4 Freely assignable customer keys T9 T10 T11 T1 T2 T3 T4 - - - - n+5 n+6 T12 Axis selec tion T13 T14 T15 Y (R2) T5 T6 T7 T8 - - RESET (R14) Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 KT-OUT4 X54.1 KT-OUT3 X53.3 KT-OUT2 X53.2 KT-OUT1 X53.1 Freely assignable customer keys n+7 Reserved Signals marked with * are inverse signals. Table 6-7 Byte Output image MCP 483 - supplementary I/O Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 m+0 m+1 Reserved - - KT-OUT6 X54.3 KT-OUT5 X54.2 Default key assignment RESET -2* REP REF (T1) (T2) (T3) X (R1) Y (R2) Z (R3) TCH INC VAR INC 1 (T4) (T5) (T6) 4 (R4) 5 (R5) 6 (R6) MDA INC 10 INC 100 (T7) (T8) (T9) 7 (R7) 8 (R8) 9 (R9) AUT INC 1000 INC 10000 (T10) (T11) (T12) (R10) (R11) WKS (R12) NCSTOP NCSTART (T13) (R13) Eilg. (R14) + (R15) Einzelsatz ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 6-4 126 (T14) (T15) Sp.STOP Sp.START VSSTOP VSSTART 77 XQODEHOHGNH\V MCP 483 default key assignment Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.4 Mounting Assignment of the inputs (I) and outputs (O) to the keys and LEDs ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ( $ ,QSXWVLQYHUWHG Image 6-5 6.4 Inputs and outputs of the MCP 483 keyboard Mounting Dimension drawing Image 6-6 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 127 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.4 Mounting Tension jacks The machine control panel is attached using 9 tension jacks (tightening torque, 0.8 Nm). 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD Image 6-7 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 5] ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD MCP483_mounting Mounting position Max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 128 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.5 PROFIBUS communication 6.5 PROFIBUS communication 6.5.1 Overview This section describes: Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project. Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 "HW config." Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and user program (optional). Note The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the special requirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about working with SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation or online help. Note Both units can be linked up using the supplied 20-pin ribbon cable in order to transfer the direct key signals of the operator panel front to the COM board of the machine control panel. The direct key module therefore no longer needs to be connected. 6.5.2 Prerequisites The following components are needed as prerequisites for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration: SIMATIC STEP 7 as of Version 5.4, Service Pack 4 Toolbox 840D sl as of Version 2.6 Hardware configuration The DP slave MCP is shown in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the hardware catalog of "HW Config" under the following path: Profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in "HW config" use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Note The GSD file of the DP slave MCP is located on the Toolbox CD in the directory: ...\8x0d\GSD\MCP_310_483 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 129 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.5 PROFIBUS communication 6.5.3 Functions of the machine control panel The machine control panel offers the following functions: Standard The input/output data of the function keys and user-specific keys and outputs are transferred: - Input data: 8 bytes - Output data: 8 bytes Handwheel The absolute values of the two handwheels that can be connected to the machine control panel are transferred. Additional I/Os The data of the following non-default inputs/outputs is transferred: - Direct keys - Customer keys - Rotary switch 6.5.4 Configuring the DP slave MCP This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in the figure by way of example. The hardware configuration has the following modules: SIMATIC Station 300 with SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK MCP with module: Standard + handwheel + additional I/O Procedure Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration . 2. Set the PROFIBUS address. 130 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.5 PROFIBUS communication 3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP depending on the required functions . 4. Set the I/O addresses of the individual slots. Image 6-8 Configuration with DP slave MCP Requirements: S7 project The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP is to be added: The S7 project has been created. A SIMATIC 300 station with SINUMERIK controller has been defined. Adding a DP slave MCP To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog. The DP slave MCP can be found at profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MCP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 131 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.5 PROFIBUS communication When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to the configuration. Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes to a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration. PROFIBUS parameters As soon as you have inserted the MCP DP slave into the configuration, the "Properties PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP" dialog box is displayed: Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP Tab card: Parameters Address: <PROFIBUS address> Button: "Properties..." Dialog: PROFIBUS properties Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: PROFIBUS address Data transfer rate Profile Note No automatic comparison of the PROFIBUS address! The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module (DIP switch S3) (see Section: "Settings via DIP switch S3") The following data must agree: 1. SIMATIC S7 configuration DP slave MCP: PROFIBUS address 2. Machine control panel DIP switch S3: PROFIBUS address 3. FB1 call in OB100: "MCP1BusAdr := " 132 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.5 PROFIBUS communication Adding a module The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. The following modules are available in HW Config under "SINUMERIK MCP": Universal module (not applicable) Standard Standard + handwheel Standard + additional I/O Standard + handwheel + additional I/O I/O addresses If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the I/O addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog box. This dialog box can be used to set the start addresses of the I/O data of the slot. 6.5.5 Linking the DP slave MCP This chapter describes how to link the DP slave MCP In the basic PLC program for transferring the standard input/output data in the VDI interface To the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response to a module failure Note Processing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machine manufacturer) and is not supported by the PLC basic program. PLC basic program To transfer the standard I/O data of the MCP DP slave via the PLC basic program, the corresponding I/O range must be entered in the communication parameters of the FB1 function block. Function block FB1 The communications parameters of the MCP are called MCPx... (x = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels are supported by the basic PLC program. To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly. This is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 133 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.5 PROFIBUS communication To operate an MCP 483 machine control panel as DP slave, only the parameters listed in the following table are relevant for the FB1 call in the OB100: parameters Type Description Value MCPNum: INT Number of active MCPs :=1 MCP1In: POINTER Start address of the input signals := P#E 0.0 MCP1Out: POINTER Start address of the output signals := P#A 0.0 MCP1StatSend POINTER Status data word for sending := P#A 8.0 MCP1StatRec POINTER Status data word for receiving := P#A 12.0 MCP1BusAdr INT S3 switch position on the MCP :=6 MCP1Timeout S5time Cyclic sign-of-life monitoring of the MCP := S5T#700MS MCP1Cycl S5time Time reference for the cyclic updating of the signals to the MCP := S5T#200MS MCPBusType BYTE 33 PROFIBUS (55 Ethernet) := B#16#33 VDI interface parameter assignment The following function modules are available for assigning the VDI interface parameters: FC 19: Transfer the signals for wide MCP, M (milling) version FC 25: Transfer the MCP signals, T (turning) version Note The FC 19, FC 19 and FC 25 function blocks are part of the basic PLC program. It is the user's (machine manufacturer's) responsibility to call the block correctly and/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters. References A detailed description of the function blocks for transferring the machine control panel signals is available in: Function Manual, Basic Functions: P3, Basic PLC Program PLC user program If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does not check for module failure. In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave: PLC operating system PROFIBUS controller If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP. Customized response The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MCP failure: OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt OB 86: Rack failure 134 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.6 Maintenance and Service Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data. Note In the event of the failure of a connected machine control panel, the PLC basic program performs the following: Alarm "40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure"; with x = 0, 1 is initiated. The corresponding interface signal "MCP 1/2 ready" in the DB10.DBB104 is reset. 6.6 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 135 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.7 Diagnostics 6.7 Diagnostics 6.7.1 LED displays LEDs H1 to H5 on the COM board provide information about the following states: Diagnostics H1 H3 H4 Power On Lights up red Lights up green Lights up or ange H5 Lights up red/off The LEDs light up for approx. 4 s. GD communication Off Lights up green Flashes orange Lights up red (80 Hz) There is no PROFIBUS com munication. Lights up red (bus error) Lights up green Off Flashes green (approx. 25 Hz) MCP is configured as PROFI BUS slave and with cyclic data exchange. Off Lights up green Off/orange Lights up green Fatal error LED display flashes red flashes green flashes green flashes orange For fatal software errors and incorrect DIP switch settings, the LEDs flash very quickly. LED H2 is reserved for service and is always off. + + Image 6-9 6.7.2 + + + Arrangement of the LEDs on the COM board Output functions Preconditions The MCP is booting. The MCP is not communicating with the control system/ PROFIBUS master, i.e. all of the LEDs in the keys are flashing. In this state, the output functions described in the following can be sequentially called. 1. Software version Simultaneously press the "FEED START" and "FEED STOP" keys. The software version is output using three digits. The individual digits are expressed by the number of LEDs in the keys that are switched on. 136 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.7 Diagnostics )((' 6723 )((' 67$57 1. Digit of the software version 2. Digit of the software version 3. Digit of the software version Image 6-10 Example: Output of the actual software version "03.01.00.00" 2. Output of the bus address Keep the FEED keys pressed, and in addition press the SPINDLE START" key. The actual bus address of the MCP is output by the number of LEDs in the keys that are switched on: PROFIBUS: Value range 0 ... 126 MPI: Value range 0 ... 15 63,1'/( 67$57 )((' )((' 6723 67$57 Hundreds position of the bus address Tens position of the bus address Ones position of the bus address Image 6-11 Example: Output of PROFIBUS address "28" 3. Output of the bus system Keep the FEED keys pressed, and press the SPINDLE START" key again. The LEDs in the keys indicate the bus system in which the MCP is integrated: MPI or PROFIBUS (PB). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 137 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.7 Diagnostics 63,1'/( 67$57 Image 6-12 6.7.3 )((' )((' 6723 67$57 Example: Output of the bus system "PB" (PROFIBUS) Key test Preconditions The MCP is booting. The MCP is not communicating with the control system/ PROFIBUS master, i.e. all of the LEDs in the keys are flashing. In this state, the operating functions described in the following can be executed in the test mode. Test mode Activation: Press the "RESET" key. Automatic deactivation: No operator control was pressed in the last 3 seconds. Manual deactivation: Simultaneously press the "CYCLE STOP" and "CYCLE START" keys. Operating functions Function of the keys and their associated LEDs: When pressing a key, the associated LED is switched on. Function of the rotary switch Each time the rotary switch is turned, an LED is switched on in sequence in the form of a running light. Function of the key-operated switch: When the key-operated switch is turned, positions 0 - 3 are displayed by 0 up to three LEDs. 138 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.8 Technical data 6.8 Technical data Machine control panel MCP 483 Safety Safety class Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 III; PELV according to EN 50178 Front side: IP65 Key-operated switch: IP54 Approvals Rear side: IP00 CE Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption, max. 24 VDC Board: 7W Lamps: 14.4 W (6 x 2.4 W) *) Handwheels: 2 x 0.9 W Total: 23.2 W Mechanical data Dimensions Distance from NCU/PCU Width: 483 mm Height: 155 mm Depth: 70 mm Mounting depth: 38 mm PROFIBUS DP: 100 m Weight: Approx. 1.6 kg *) The outputs for the illuminated pushbuttons (X53/X54) can have a max. permissible current of 0.3 A. However, the total current consumption of the components must not exceed 1.0 A (24 W). Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Emergency Stop button Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 139 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.9 Accessories and spare parts 6.9 Accessories and spare parts 6.9.1 Overview Table 6-8 Accessories and spare parts for machine control panel 483 Name Description Qua ntity Article number 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) Emergency stop button 22 mm actuating element, 40 mm mushroom pushbutton, snap action with tamper protec tion, latching, red, with holder, unlit Contact block with 2 contacts, 1 NO + 1 NC, 2-pole ,screw terminal 1 3SB3400-0A *) Keyswitch Keyswitch with key 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0 Key Ten key sets, each with three keys for the keyswitch settings 1, 2, 3 1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 Tension jacks Tension jack set (9 items) for supplementary components with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm 1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Override spindle / rapid tra verse Electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spindle dials and rapid tra verse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Override feed / rapid tra verse Electronic rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed and rapid-traverse dials 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Slide-in labels Can be written, (3 films, A4) 1 set 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1 Cables Cable set (60 units) for additional control de vices for the machine control panels Length: 500 mm 1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0 *) Safety-related 140 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.9 Accessories and spare parts 6.9.2 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. Use the blank films that can be printed for this purpose. Image 6-13 Blank film for MCP 483 Preparing slide-in labels Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on the supplied film or how to create your own individual film: The DOConCD or CD included in Catalog NC 61/ NC 62 includes four files for printing the blank films: Template_M_MCP483.doc [default assignment for milling - standard; (A)] Template_T_MCP483.doc [defaults for turning; (B)] Template_MCP483.doc [blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579; (C)] Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, inscription on labels as jpg file (D) Files Template_M_MCP483.doc, Template_T_MCP483.doc and Template_MCP483.doc include a table function showing the corresponding keyboard positions. An example of each of the MCP files (milling and turning) is given below: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 141 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.9 Accessories and spare parts < = 7HLO ; 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO Image 6-14 Template_M_MCP483.doc for the "Milling" version (A) < ; & 7HLO = = 7HLO & ; < 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO Image 6-15 142 Template_T_MCP483.doc for the "Turning" version (B) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.9 Accessories and spare parts 7HLO 7HLO 7HLO Image 6-16 Template_MCP483.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579 (C) Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied and pasted into the corresponding table field. The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels. The strip "Part5" is included twice so that it is available optionally as either a 1-color or 3-color strip. Note Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Table 6-9 Symbols.doc file (D) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 7001 7013 7025 7002 7014 7026 7003 7015 7027 7004 7016 7005 7017 7029 7006 7018 7030 = 7028 7124 & ; < = ; 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 143 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.9 Accessories and spare parts 7007 7019 7008 7020 7032 7009 7021 7033 7010 ; 7031 7022 7120 7011 7023 7121 7012 7024 7123 < < = & 7130 7131 7132 Creating your own symbols Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, fill with the color white and give it an invisible border line. - Place the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word document (Symbols.doc). Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint): - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the symbol in the center of this square. - Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Word document (Symbols.doc). 144 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.9 Accessories and spare parts Dimension drawings You can also take the position of the symbols and outer edges from the dimension drawing of the blank template (thickness: 0.6 mm) Center of the key for symbols Image 6-17 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 483 Printing fields for symbols: Teil 1 to Teil 5: 14.8 x 14.8 mm Teil 6: 23 x 14.8 mm Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 145 Machine control panel: MCP 483 6.9 Accessories and spare parts Note The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer. HP Color Laser Jet film C2936A is used. To make the labels easier to slide in, they should be rounded by about 1.5 mm. The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge. It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels on film. 146 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 7 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.1 Description 7.1.1 Overview The machine control panel MPP 310 IE (IE = Industrial Ethernet) permits user-friendly operation of the machine functions on complex machining stations. It is suitable for machinelevel operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. In addition to the standard elements of machine control, several freely assignable slots are integrated on the operator panel for connecting other control devices. The function of the MPP 310 IE H can be extended considerably by fitting additional keys and through the EKS identification system provided by Euchner. The machine control panel is easy to mount on the rear using special tension jacks. All keys have user-inscribed slide-in strips for machine-specific adaptations. Two DIN-A4 sheets (printed and white) for inscribing are supplied by the factory. The machine control panel MPP 310 IE H is available with Ethernet bus interface EKS identification system Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 Extension keys Spindle override Feedrate override Validity The following description applies to the machine control panel: Designation Features MPP 310 IE H With handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 Article number 6FC5303-1AF20-8AA1 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with *). 7.1.2 System features Industrial Ethernet (transfer rate: 10/100 MBit/s) Function keyboard with 5 x 5 key matrix, can be freely projected and labeled Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 147 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.1 Description Eight long-stroke keys with LEDs, Interfaces for two handwheels (velocity input and contour handwheel are only possible when connecting via the handwheel connection module 6FC5303-0AA02-0AA0 or the MCP PN interface 6FC5303-0AF03-0AA0) Emergency Stop button (4-wire), latching, tamper-proof Emergency Stop override button or emergency stop override through 2-position keyswitch left and right probing (right position: customer-specific) Direct key connection for OP 012 Two override switches Handheld unit connection for HT 2 / HT 8 EKS identification system Four extension keys with LEDs 148 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.1 Description System configuration The figures show how the MPP 310 IE H is integrated into the control system. ; ; (WKHUQHW 237RSHUDWRUSDQHO ; &20 %RDUG,( ; +*$+7 80 90 70 100 60 110 50 120 ; &20 %RDUG,( ; ; (WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW 237RSHUDWRUSDQHO +*$+7 80 6,1$0,&6ZLWK1&8 90 70 100 60 110 50 120 % % 50 70 30 50 80 10 70 30 90 80 6 10 100 90 6 100 2 110 2 110 % 120 0 120 0 % 033,(+ +7 Image 7-1 033,(+ +7 System configuration of the MPP 310 IE H Note The connection cables are not part of the scope of supply. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 149 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.1 Description 7.1.3 Mechanical design The machine control panel MCP 310 IE H consists of Control panel Handheld unit connection board (PCB HT 8) Customer keys board (PCB KT 310) COM board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mage 7-2 %ODQNLQJSODWH 2SWLRQ RQO\RQUHTXHVW %ODQNLQJSODWH ZLWKORQJHOHPHQW/( DQGODEHOKROGHU 2SWLRQ RQO\RQUHTXHVW Mechanical structure of the MPP 310 IE H *) Contour and velocity specification via handwheel are not supported. 150 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.2 Operator controls and indicators 7.2 Operator controls and indicators 7.2.1 Overview Panel structure 80 90 70 100 60 110 50 120 % 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) Spindle override (2) Feedrate override (3) 8 customer keys with LEDs (Schlegel keys), slide-in labels (4) EKS Ethernet (5) Blanking plate (6) 25 function keys with LEDs (membrane keys), slide-in labels (7) Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 (8) Emergency stop override button (9) Emergency stop button (10) 4 extension keys with LEDs (3SB3 keys), slide-in labels Image 7-3 Panel of the MPP 310 IE H Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 151 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.2 Operator controls and indicators Assignment of slots 80 6 6 6 6 6 6 100 60 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 90 70 110 :6 50 +6 120 % 6 6 6 6 6 6 50 70 30 80 10 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 6 +6 90 :6 2 100 110 120 0 % +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) +) ) 6 6 (1) Emergency stop button (2) Emergency stop override (3) Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 (4) 4 extension elements, 22.5 mm (5) Function keys (6) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (7) EKS identification system (8) Feedrate override (9) Spindle override Image 7-4 152 ;6 Slots on the MPP 310 IE H Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.2 Operator controls and indicators 7.2.2 Description 7.2.2.1 Device front Emergency stop chain Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of the machine or workpiece being damaged. An emergency stop generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possi ble braking torque in a controlled manner. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. When the emergency stop button is activated, the emergency stop chain of the MPP 310 H will ensure personal safety and protect the machine in hazardous situations. The emergency stop chain is also active if the handheld units are removed. To prevent the emergency stop chain from being interrupted while you plug in or pull out the handheld unit, press the emergency stop override S11. This overrides the emergency stop button on the handheld unit. WARNING Danger of death caused by malfunction of the emergency stop override To effectively deal with a malfunction of the emergency stop override S11 (e.g. jamming), the user PLC program must generate emergency stop when a monitoring time (approximately 5 min) expires (see Figure in Section: "Connecting" "Handheld unit connection HT 8 with emergency stop override"). The emergency stop chain of the MPP 310 IE H should be integrated in the system emergency stop by the user. Note Machine manufacturer For details of other or additional reactions to an Emergency-Stop: Please read the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer! WARNING Danger of death resulting from the premature emergency stop unlocking If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 153 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.2 Operator controls and indicators Actuation elements Actuation elements S1 to S4 and S7 to S10 are activated by the control. They also have electrically isolated contacts (common roots) for user-specific wiring. The following positions can be connected to control devices corresponding to the table in Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements": S1 to S4 S7 to S10 S51 to S54 Lamps Lamps HS1 to HS4 and HS7 to HS10 are connected to the control via Ethernet. Alternatively, HS1 to HS4 and HS7 to HS10 can also be activated by externally non-isolated via X20 of the Customer keys PCB KT 310. 7.2.2.2 Device rear side COM board IE S1 (jumper) Setting the handwheel signal type S1 open: TTL interface S1 closed: differential interface S2 Setting of the MPP address (see Section: "Interfaces" "Description" "COM board") Diagnostic LEDs LED1 (H1) LED2 (H2) LED3 (H3) POWER OK (green) Bussync Busfault LED1 (H1) LED2 (H2) LED3 (H3) Voltage monitoring of customer keys Voltage monitoring of customer keys Voltage monitoring of customer keys Customer keys KT 310 Diagnostic LEDs 154 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.2 Operator controls and indicators HGA board HT 8 &20ERDUG,( + ; 6 + 6 + ; + + + + ; 6 + + + ; ; ; + ; + + + + 6 ; ; KDQGKHOGGHYLFH FRQQHFWLRQ +7 6 ; &XVWRPHUNH\V.7 ;6 ; ; ; Image 7-5 ; 6 ; Rear of MPP 310 IE H with LEDs Table 7-1 Diagnostic LEDs LED Color for LED1 (H1) LNK Green X1 RJ45 Connection established LED2 (H2) ACT yellow X1 RJ45 Transmission active LED3 (H3) LNK Green X2 RJ45 Connection established LED4 (H4) ACT Yellow X2 RJ45 Transmission active LED5 (H5) LNK Green HT 8 transmission LED6 (H6) ACT Yellow HT 8 transmission LED7 (H7) Power OK Green LED8 (H8) FAULT STAT1 Red Fault LED9 (H9) FAULT STAT2 Red Fault Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Meaning 155 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces Table 7-2 Coding switches S1 S2 Module address bit 4 ... 7 Module address bit 0 ... 3 7.3 Interfaces 7.3.1 Overview ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 6 6 6 6 :6 ; :6 ; 6 + + ; + + + (.6 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 156 + + + + + + 6 ; ; ; ; Image 7-6 + ; ;6 ; ; Rear of the MPP 310 IE H with interfaces Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces Control panel (5) (2) Protective conductor connection S13 Emergency stop button S11 Emergency stop override S51 to S54 Extension keys WS2 Feedrate override WS3 Spindle override EKS Identification system COM board X10 Power supply X20 Ethernet / Port 1 X21 Ethernet / Port 2 X60 Handwheel 1 X61 Handwheel 2 X70 Direct keys (3) (1) (4) Strain relief for Ethernet cable Customer keys X11 Power supply X20 Individual wiring X25 Extension X30 Feedrate override X31 Spindle override Connection for handheld units X1 / X2 Ethernet X7 Panel present X20 Enable X21 Emergency stop override XS12 Connection for handheld units Signal type O I B V Outputs Inputs Bidirectional signals Power supply Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 157 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces 7.3.2 Description 7.3.2.1 Control panel Protective Ground Connection Pin Signal PE Connection Connection cross-sec tion M5 x 2.5 cable lug 2.5 mm2 Emergency stop button S13 Key designation: Key type: Table 7-3 S13 Mushroom, push-pull key 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder 3SB3901-0AB and 1 x NO 3SB3400-0B (internal use) Emergency stop contact block Pin Signal Type Signal name 14 BZ_S13.14 Reference potential S1, S13 13 S_S13.13 NO contact S1, S13 31 OE_S13.31 32 BZ_S13.32 Reference potential OE1, S13 21 OE_S13.21 NC contact OE2, S13 22 BZ_S13.22 Reference potential OE2, S13 I/O Function NC contact OE1, S13 Emergency stop override S11 Key designation: Key type: 158 S11 left probing, right probing, safety lock with actuation element according to the catalog: Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution (LV 1) carrier 3SB3901-0AC with pressure plates 1 x NO contact 3SB3400-0B 2 x 3SB3400-0A switching element 1xNC contact/1xNO contact ele ments positively driven Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces Table 7-4 Emergency stop override contact block Pin 7.3.2.2 Signal Type Signal name 14 BZ_S11.14 Reference potential S1, S11 13 S_S11.13 NO contact S1, S11 21 OE_S11.21 NC contact OE1, S11 22 BZ_S11.22 44 BZ_S11.44 Reference potential S2, S11 43 S_S11.43 NO contact S2, S11 31 OE_S11.31 NC contact OE2, S11 32 BZ_S11.32 Reference potential OE2, S11 54 BZ_S11.54 Reference potential S3, S11 53 S_S11.53 NO contact S3, S11 61 OE_S11.61 NC contact OE3, S11 62 BZ_S11.62 Reference potential OE3, S11 I/O Function Reference potential OE1, S11 COM board Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". Switch S1 Settings, see Chapter "Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN", Section "Interfaces". Switch S2 Settings, see Chapter "Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN", Section "Interfaces", mode "MCP set up as IE". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 159 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces 7.3.2.3 User keys Power supply interface X11 Connector designation:X11 Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block Cable length (max.): 10 m Table 7-5 Interface power supply Pin Signal name 1 2P24 2 M24 3 Shield Type Meaning 24 V potential V Ground 24 V Shield connection Individual wiring Connector X20 Connector designation:X20 Connector type: 32-pin S2L-SMT 3.5/180 Weidmuller Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 7-6 Pin 160 Connector X20 Signal Type Signal name Function B4 OE_S2 B3 OE_S1 B16 OE_S4 B15 OE_S3 B2 BZOE_S1-4 B1 BZS_S1-S6 Reference potential NO contact S1 ... S6 B14 S_S4 NO contact S4 B13 S_S3 B12 S_S2 NO contact S2 B11 S_S1.1 NO contact S1.1 I/O I/O I/O I/O NC contact S2 NC contact S1 NC contact S4 NC contact S3 Reference potential NC contact S1 ... S4 NO contact S3 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces Pin Signal B10 BZS_S1.2 Type Reference potential NO contact S1.2 B9 S_S1.2 NO contact S1.2 B8 HS 4 Signaling lamp S4 B7 HS 3 B6 HS 2 B5 HS 1 Signaling lamp S1 A1 HS7 Signaling lamp S7 I Signal name Signaling lamp S3 Signaling lamp S2 A2 HS8 A3 HS9 A4 HS10 Signaling lamp S10 A5 OE_S7 NC contact S7 A6 OE_S8 A7 OE_S9 NC contact S9 A8 OE_S10 NC contact S10 A14 BZOE_S7-10 Reference potential NC contacts S7 ... S10 A9 S_S7 NO contact S7 A10 S_S8 A11 S_S9 NO contact S9 A12 S_S10 NO contact S10 A13 BZ S_S7-10 Reference potential NO contacts S7 ... S10 A15 2P24 A16 2P24 I I/O I/O V Signaling lamp S8 Signaling lamp S9 Function All inputs "High" active All inputs "High" active NC contact S8 NO contact S8 +24V potential +24V potential Connector X25 Connector designation:X25 Connector type: 18-pin S2L-SMT 3.5/180 Weidmuller Cable length (max.): 1.5 m Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 161 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces Table 7-7 Pin Connector X25 Signal Type Signal name Pin Signal Type V Reference potential +24V A1 M24_EXT V Signal name B1 P24_OUT B2 S13 Emergency stop button A2 H55 LED_H55 B3 S59 *) KT-IN3 emergency stop override A3 H56 LED_H56 B4 S60 Mode selection A4 H57 LED_H57 B5 S62 *) S32 / HGA enabling unit plugged in / terminating connector A5 H58 LED_H58 I Reference poten tial +24V O B6 S51 Ext. key S51 A6 H51 LED_H51 B7 S52 Ext. key S52 A7 H52 LED_H52 B8 S53 Ext. key S53 A8 H53 LED_H53 B9 S54 Ext. key S54 A9 H54 LED_H54 *) can only be used as a neutral input without HGA 7.3.2.4 Handheld unit connection HT 8 You will find a detailed drawing showing the location of the interfaces in Section: "Control and display elements" "Description" "Device rear". Ethernet X1 / X2 Connector designation:X1, X2 Connector type: RJ-45 socket Table 7-8 Ethernet X1 / X2 Pin Signal name 1 TD+ Type Meaning Transmit data + 2 TD- O 3 RD+ I Receive data + 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 RD- I Receive data - 7 N.C. - Not connected 8 N.C. - Not connected Transmit data - Note Connection only on LAN, not on telecommunication networks! 162 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces Panel Present X7 Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 7-9 X7 MCV 1.5/6-G3.81 Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 PRES O "High": Panel (HT 8) plugged in 2 N.C. - Not connected 3 N.C. - Not connected 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 M P Ground Enabling X20 Connector designation:X20 Connector type: MCV 1.5/8-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 7-10 Enabling X20 Pin Signal name Type Meaning 1 ZUST1P I Electronic enabling button 1P 2 ZUST1M O Electronic enabling button 1M 3 ZUST2P I Electronic enabling button 2P 4 ZUST2M O Electronic enabling button 2M 5 N.C. Not connected 6 N.C. Not connected 7 N.C. Not connected 8 N.C. Not connected Emergency Stop override X21 Connector designation:X21 Connector type: MCV 1.5/10-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 163 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces Table 7-11 Emergency Stop override X21 Pin Signal name Type Meaning 1 STOP23 Emergency Stop NC contact 1.1 2 STOP24 Emergency Stop NC contact 1.1 3 STOP13 4 STOP14 5 M V 6 N.C. - Not connected 7 IN_E9 I Emergency Stop override negated 8 P24_FILT V 24 V 9 IN_E9_EXT 10 IN_E12_EXT I/O Emergency Stop NC contact 2.1 Emergency Stop NC contact 2.2 Key-operated switch actuated O Terminating connector plugged in Note Emergency stop X21: Supply voltage: 24 VDC; switched current: Max. 500 mA. Handheld unit connection XS12 Connector designation:XS12 Connector type: GX3BXC-T22QF10-0004 Table 7-12 Handheld unit connection XS12 Pin 164 Signal Type Meaning Function 1 HH_PR_P 2 HH_PR_M 3 HP24 V 24 V HH for present 4 ZUST2M O Enabling button 2M 5 ZUST1P I Enabling button 1P 6 ZUST1M O Enabling button 1M 7 ZUST2P I Enabling button 2P 8 HH_L2.2 9 HH_L2.1 10 HH_L1.2 11 HH_L1.1 12 M V Ground Power supply 13 ABS_ST_PRES I Terminating connector Terminating connector plugged in 14 HH_P24 V 24 V HH supply Power supply 15 IDENT_B I/O 16 TX- 17 TX+ I + Present line - Present line Power supply Enabling function HH emergency stop L2.2 I/O HH emergency stop L2.1 HH emergency stop L1.2 Emergency stop HH emergency stop L1.1 O Diff Signal Module Addr. Ethernet Transmit Ethernet Transmit + Ethernet transmitted data Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces Pin Signal Type Meaning 18 RX+ 19 RX- 20 SHIELD - Cable shield 21 M V Ground 22 IDENT_A Function Ethernet receive + I Ethernet receive data Ethernet receive - I/O Power supply Diff Signal Module Addr. Switch S1/S2 Module address of connection module for HT 8 Table 7-13 8 7.3.3 Coding switches for module address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning S1 S2 switch 0 to F 0 to F Module address Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection This table shows plug connection elements for the following modules: COM board (COM) Customer keys (KT) Connection for handheld units (HGA) Table 7-14 Module COM KT HGA HT 8 Connection components Connector Units Terminal element X10 1 MSTB2,5/3-STZ-5,08,1776168 X20/X21 2 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 X60 / X61 2 6FC9348-7HX X70 1 A5E00026403 X11 1 X20 Connectable crosssection (max.) Manufacturer 2.5 mm2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0.75 mm2 SIEMENS MSTB2,5/3-ST-5,08,1757022 2.5 mm2 PHOENIX CONTACT 1 BZL 3.5 / 32 F SN SW, 1748300000 1.5 mm2 Weidmuller X25 1 BZL 3.5 / 32 F SN SW, 1748230000 1.5 mm2 Weidmuller X1 / X2 2 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 X7 1 MC1.5/6-STZ-3.81 GY BD1-6, 1713198 1.5 mm X 20 1 MC1.5/8-STZ-3.81 GY BD-1-8, 1713208 1.5 mm2 X 21 1 MC1.5/10-STZ-3.81 GY BD1-10, 1901658 1.5 mm Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 SIEMENS 2 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 165 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces 7.3.4 Input / output images Input image MPP 310 IE H Byte Bit7 Bit6 n+0 Bit5 Bit4 BA switch Bit3 Bit2 Function key HG connec tion XS12:13 WS1/4 1) WS1/3 1) WS1/2 1) WS1/1 1) F16*) F11*) F6*) F1*) n+1 Key WS4, pos. 0 1) n+2 S51 WS4, pos.2 WS4, pos.1 1) KT-IN9 Extension key Emergency stop S79 1) S53 S13 S10 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT16 DT15 DT14 DT13 KT-IN8 KT-IN7 S78 1) S77 1) n+4 S4 WS5/8 1) S3 S2 S1 WS5/4 1) WS5/2 1) WS5/1 1) Extension key S9 S8 S7 S52 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 WS3/8 WS3/4 WS3/2 WS3/1 WS2/4 WS2/2 WS2/1 F3 F2 F1 F11 F10 F9 F19 F18 F17 WS2/2" WS2/1 WS3/2 WS3/1 Feedrate override WS2/16 WS2/8 Function keys F8 F7 F6 n+9 F5 F4 Function keys F16 F15 F14 n+10 F13 F12 Function keys F25 F24 F23 F22 F20 Reserve n+12 Feedrate override WS2/16 WS2/8 n+13 WS2/4 Spindle override WS3/16 166 S59 Customer keys Extension key n+8 n+15 S60 S62 Spindle override S54 n+14 S11 left-hand side momenta ry-contact Direct keys n+7 n+11 S11 right-hand side momenta ry-contact Direct keys n+5 n+6 Emergency stop override Rapid traverse override 1) WS4, pos.3 1) Bit0 Customer keys Key 1) 1) n+3 F21 Extension key 1) Bit1 WS3/8 WS3/4 Handwheel 1 counter status (optional) (16-bit signed, low-order equals byte n+14) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces n+16 Handwheel 2 counter status (optional) (16-bit signed, low-order equals byte n+16) n+17 *) The function keys are not active if WS1 is assigned. 1) Option only upon request Keyboard layout - input image MPP 310 IE H 6SLQGOHRYHUULGH :6 6 6 6 6 6 6 2963 2963 2963 2963 )HHGUDWHRYHUULGH :6 6 6 6 6 6 6 2996 2996 2996 $OWHUQDWLYHHTXLSPHQWRIWKH YDULDEOHDUHD 5DSLGWUDYHUVHRYHUULGH :6 29(O 29(, 29(, 29(, $XWKRUL]DWLRQ NH\VZLWFK ,WHP 2996 2996 6 6 6 ;6 6 6 ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 6 ,WHP ,WHP :6 6 ,WHP :6VHOHFWRUVZLWFK :6 :6 :6 :6 :6 6 2SWLRQRQO\RQUHTXHVW $UHDRIYDULDEOHHTXLSPHQW Image 7-7 Keyboard layout input image Output image MPP 310 IE H Byte Bit7 Bit6 HS8 HS7 Bit5 n+0 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 HS3 HS2 HS1 Customer keys HS4 n+1 Customer keys n+2 HS10 HS9 H52 H51 Extension keys H58 H57 H56 H55 H54 H53 n+3 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 167 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.3 Interfaces n+4 Function keys HF8 HF7 HF6 HF5 HF16 HF15 HF14 HF13 n+5 HF4 HF3 HF2 HF1 HF11 HF10 HF9 HF19 HF18 Function keys n+6 HF12 Function keys HF24 HF23 HF22 HF21 HF20 n+7 HF17 Function key HF25 Keyboard layout - output image MPP 310 IE H 6SLQGOHRYHUULGH :6 + + +6 +6 +6 +6 + )HHGUDWHRYHUULGH :6 + 6 Image 7-8 168 + ;6 +6 +6 +6 $OWHUQDWLYHHTXLSPHQWRIWKH YDULDEOHDUHD + + + +6 +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) $UHD YDULDEOHHTXLSPHQW 7KHHOHPHQWVZLWKLQWKH PDUNHGDUHDFDQEH LQWHUFKDQJHGLQDFFRUGDQFH ZLWKWKHSRVVLEOHDOWHUQDWLYH HTXLSPHQW Tastaturlayout_Ausgangsabbild Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.4 Mounting 7.4 Mounting Dimensions Image 7-9 Dimension drawing of MPP 310 IE H *) Depth 105 mm applies to MPPs without a handheld unit connector. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 169 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.4 Mounting Panel cutout 6HDOLQJDUHD 0RXQWLQJSDQHO s Image 7-10 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 5] s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Panel cutout for MPP 310 IE H The MPP 310 IE H is attached to the rear of the operator panel using 13 tension jacks (contained in the delivery kit). The tightening torque is 0.4 Nm. Note The clearance to the next MPP (above and below) must be a minimum of 18 mm. Mounting position The mounting position is max. 60 to the vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 170 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.4 Mounting Mounting position of LEDs Image 7-11 Mounting position of LEDs on the MPP 310 IE H Marking of the anode connection: Insert +polarity of the LED in key at the side marked Changing the lamps on illuminated keys 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the key cap forward and off. 2. Use lamp remover LZ6 to lever out the key carrier. 3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ6 or a suitable insulating tube 4. Reinstall the key carrier and key cap in reverse order. Lamp remover LZ6 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from the Schlegel company. Georg Schlegel GmbH & Co. KG Am Kapellenweg 88525 Durmentingen Germany Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Phone.: 0 73 71 / 502-0 Fax: 0 73 71 / 502 49 E-mail: info@schlegel.biz 171 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.4 Mounting Changing the lamps on pilot lamps 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the calotte and name bearing element forward and off. 2. Change the lamp using the lamp remover of service tool LZ6 or a suitable insulating tube 3. Reinstall the calotte and name bearing element. Note When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity (see Fig.: "Mounting position of LEDs" in Section: "Mounting") Mounting additional control elements 1. If necessary, unscrew the blank plug. 2. Place the contact maker on the socket and insert the lamp if required. 3. Insert pushbutton through front panel and screw on cap nut (by several turns). 4. Press pushbutton on contact maker. Note the position of the twist protection device! 5. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). Insert slide-in labels 1. Create the slide-in label (see Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Labeling the slidein labels"). 2. Pull protective films off slide-in slot. 3. Guide in the slide-in labels (labeling facing operator side). 4. Align text in window. Note Slide in the labels when the MPP is not yet installed. Changing a contact maker 1. Loosen cap nut off pushbutton until just in front of contact maker. 2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3 mm out of the fixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed). 3. Remove the LED. 4. Change the contact element, remove defective contact maker from fixture and press new contact maker onto fixture. 5. Insert pushbutton into aperture and partially screw on cap nut. 6. Press pushbutton on contact maker until it snaps in. Note the position of the snap nose! 7. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). 172 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.5 Connecting 7.5 Connecting 7.5.1 MPP 310 IE H Connecting the 24 V supply The 24 V supply is connected via a 3-pin terminal block (see figure) at connector X11 on the rear of the machine control panel. NOTICE Damage to the device caused by unfused power supplies The 24 VDC power supply must always be grounded and designed as Protective Extra-Low Voltage (PELV) - protection by function low voltage with safe isolation! Emergency stop circuit connection The connections of the emergency stop circuit are shown in Fig. "Ethernet connection". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 173 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.5 Connecting Ethernet connection Connection of HGA - X1 to operator panel front (OP) Connection of HGA - X2 via COM X20 and COM X21 to control (NC) 23 'LUHFWNH\V ,QGLYLGXDOZLULQJRIFXVWRPHUNH\V ; ; ; 6 6 6 6 ; ; :6 ; ; +DQGZKHHO :6 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW +DQGZKHHO 6 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ; ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW (.6 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW 6 ; ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW 3( 0 3 3&8 (WKHUQHW 23 Image 7-12 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZR+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZLWK+*$ (WKHUQHW Ethernet connection Individual wiring connection The individual contacts are connected in accordance with the customer-specific links required (see Section: "Customer keys"). Note Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded! 174 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.5 Connecting 7.5.2 Customer keys The customer keys (KT 310) module links the operator panel and COM board. The inputs for handheld unit connection and extension keys are opto-decoupled. The outputs belonging to these are issued by high-side drivers. The floating individual contacts of function keys S1 ... S4 and S7 ... S10 are shown in the figure. 7R3/& J P J P J %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 3 ; %ORFN6 3 J +6 P P P ; %ORFN6+6 J %ORFN6+6 %ORFN6 J %ORFN6+6 6 J %ORFN6+6 6 J P %ORFN6+6 P %ORFN6+6 +6 %ORFN6+6 ; P %ORFN6+6 P ; N K N N K N K K 0 D E F G H I D E F G D E F G D E F G D E F G D E F G D E F G N D E F G K N K N K N K 0 9 ) $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % ; ; Image 7-13 Individual wiring of the customer keys(a, b, ..., m designate IN and OUT of the individual blocks) NOTICE Damage to pushbutton contacts When using an external 24 V encoder supply, always protect the key contacts against overload in the individual wiring with an external fuse for L+ with the following properties: - fuse in accordance with UL248: 1.6 A. If you use the encoder supply X20:A15/A16 or VS1/VS2 of the ET200S block 4/8 F DI 24 VDC PROFIsafe, the external fuse can be omitted. 7.5.3 Handheld unit connection HT 8 with emergency stop override The connection for handheld units (HGA) of the HT 8 has four function complexes: Two-channel version of enabling function Three-port Ethernet switch Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 175 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.5 Connecting Connection of HT 8 Module address WARNING Danger of death if the enabling button is not DIN-conform It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the enabling button or the enable control is implemented according to DIN EN 60204-1, Section 9.2.6.3, and the enabling button, when released or pushed down, stops dangerous movements reliably. Emergency stop override S11 Implemented as pushbutton or keyswitch Pushbutton pressed or keyswitch, left probing - "Emergency stop override" of the handheld unit connection query via input E59 - Interruption of the power supply for the handheld unit connection when actuated Keyswitch, right probing: Unassigned function query via input S60 Image 7-14 6 +7 &LUFXLW &LUFXLW 6 +7 &LUFXLW &LUFXLW 2-channel architecture of the emergency stop override contacts With regard to their accidental failure, the contacts of the emergency stop override safety function form a 2-channel architecture together with the emergency stop button on the HT 8. In addition to the B10d value of the emergency stop button, the B10d value of S11 must also be taken into consideration for the assessment in both emergency stop circuits. 176 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.5 Connecting The diagnostics for the contacts of S11 is performed on the HT 8 together with the diagnostics of the emergency stop button. WARNING Danger of death caused by failure of the "emergency stop" safety function The user must ensure that the emergency stop override is implemented with the S11 button in accordance with the safety goals required by the risk analysis of the machine. Actuation of the emergency stop override results in failure of the emergency stop safety function on the HT 8. The user must implement suitable organizational and/or technical procedures for this in order to achieve the safety goals. As a technical measure, the signaling contacts on the S11 emergency stop override: 31/32 and 61/62 can be used to trigger an "emergency stop" by the PLC after a monitoring time has expired (maximum five minutes) (see Remark 1 in the following figure). However, this measure alone does not satisfy the requirements of Category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008. If the risk analysis of your machine has shown that the technical measure for monitoring the emergency stop override (S11) is not sufficient, the signaling contacts 31/32 and 61/62 of S11 can be evaluated, e.g. by a safe PLC or the SPL of the SINUMERIK 840D sl. The requirements of category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 can be met with this measure. For this purpose, the user must wire these contacts accordingly. All other functions can be found in the figure. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 177 WULJJHUVDPRQLWRULQJWLPHU ,IWKHVLJQDOOHYHOLVVWLOOORZ RURSHQDIWHUWKHPRQLWRULQJ SHULRG PD[PLQ HPHUJHQF\ VWRSPXVWEHWULJJHUHG E\WKH3/& b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mage 7-15 ++B3 ; ; ; Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.5 Connecting Handheld unit connection HT 8 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.5 Connecting 7.5.4 Circuits and wiring External control of signaling lamps %ORFN6Q The following circuit diagram relates to the lights in HS1 to HS4 and HS7 to HS10 (see Section: "Connecting" "Customer keys" Fig.: "Individual wiring of customer keys"). 3 +6Q 0 ; $ $ ([WHUQDOFRQWDFW Image 7-16 External control of signaling lamps Machine control panels Manual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mage 7-17 +*$; DOWHUQDWLYHIRUWKH PRGHVHOHFWLRQ Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.5 Connecting Extension keys connection Extension keys connection Customer function S11 The NC-NO combination 3SB34 03-0A is right probing and a customer function of the S11. The NO contact is wired on delivery and can be queried through the MPP 310 IE H. The probing function facilitates mode selection. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.6 Initialization If an external evaluation of both contacts is required, the internal wiring on the NO contact 1.3/1.4 of the S 11 must be removed (see Fig.: "Extension keys connection" in this section). Remove connection 1 and connection 4 If connection 2 exists, wire the connection of S11:1.3 to S13:1.4 Direct key connection &20ERDUG 23 Image 7-18 7.6 ; ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 9s Direct key connection Initialization LEDs on the control panel HF1 to HF25 HS1 to HS4 HS7 to HS10 Switching on the MPP 310 IE H (POWER ON) also switches on all the LEDs on the control panel which then remain permanently lit. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 181 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.6 Initialization Once internal power-up is completed, the LEDs blink at approx. 1 Hz until communication is established with the control or another client ("Waiting for Client"). LEDs on the COM board The LEDs on the COM board of the MPP 310 IE H (rear) are not controlled by the software. The are only used to signal the hardware states (for example, power supply OK). Software version If there is still no communication with the control, the MPP 310 IE H software version can be output on the panel via the LEDs. The output is activated by pressing the "F21" and "F25" buttons at the same time. Flashing of the LEDs is thereby suppressed and the software version output on the function key block using three digits. The individual digits are expressed in hexadecimal format by the number of LEDs activated in the first three LED lines on the MPP. The lowest value bit position is always on the right. The software version of the MPP V 02.01.00.00 is shown in the example given. VWGLJLW QGGLJLW UGGLJLW Image 7-19 Sample displays of software version Note The software version can only be output while there is no communication with the control system. Once communication has taken place, the software version is only displayed again after the power to the MPP 310 IE H has been switched OFF and ON! 182 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.8 Technical data 7.7 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. 7.8 Technical data 7.8.1 MPP 310 IE H Safety Safety class according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to DIN EN 60529 Approvals III; PELV Front side: IP54 Rear: IP00 CE / UL Electrical data Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 183 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.8 Technical data Input voltage 24 V DC Power consumption, max. Boards: 5W Lamps: LED 6W Handheld unit: Hand wheels: 13 W 2 x 0.5 W Total: Approx. 25 W Mechanical data Dimensions Height: 295 mm Width: 310 mm Weight: Mounting depth: 140 mm *) Approx. 3 kg Tightening torques, max. *) Depth (front): 60 mm Tension jack screws: 0.4 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm M5 screws: 3 Nm Without use of the handwheel connections X60 and X61 on the COM board IE: 105 mm Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 7.8.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring Button contact maker Table 7-15 Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4 and S7 to S10 AC DC + 50 V Rated insulation voltage Ue + 50 V Rated operating current Ie 2A Rated operating current at 24 V Ie Min. rated operating current at 5 V Imin 2A 1 mA Volume resistance < 20 m Switching capacity 10 le 1.1 le Emergency stop button S13 184 Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 acc. to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG acc. to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.8 Technical data Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. Emergency stop override S11 Table 7-16 Contacts with floating outputs Usage category (EN 60947-5-1) AC DC Ue + 24 V + 24 V AC-12 le 10 A AC-15 le 6A DC-12 le Rated operating voltage Switching capacity DC-13 Min. rated operating current at 5 V 10 A le 3A Imin 1 mA For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the contact block are taken into account. Inputs The inputs are opto-decoupled. Table 7-17 Emergency stop S13; extension keys S51 ... S54, S59, S60, S62 Status Number H signal L signal Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Voltage switched 15 Remark Input characteristics curve following IEC61131, type 1 Rated value + 24 VDC Signal level +15 V to +30 V Rated value 0 V or open Signal level -3 V to +5 V 185 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts Status Voltage switched In a group of 1 Cable length max. 50 m AWG 16 Encoder power supply Remark 18.5 V to 30 V LED outputs Table 7-18 LED-H51 ... LED H58 Status Number Voltage switched Current switched 14 Load voltage 2P24 20.4 V ... 28.8 V Rated value +24 VDC 0.5 A H signal Signal level min. Ue - 0.16V max. 0.7A / output L signal Max. signal level 2V (idling) 0.3 mA Short-circuit protection yes Typ. activation threshold 1.1 A Eff. short circuit current 0.5 A Electrical isolation no In a group of 1 Output total current Cable length max. 3 A max. 50 m AWG 16 Handheld unit connection XS12 The currents depend on the connected handheld unit. The internal connecting cables of the handheld unit connection HT 8 are designed for a rated voltage of 24 VDC and 0.5 A. 7.9 Accessories and spare parts 7.9.1 Overview Numerous spare parts and accessories are available for the MPP 310 IE H. Contact your Siemens service center to order accessories and spare parts. A connecting cable is available to connect the handwheels, see Accessories and spare parts (Page 27). 186 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts 7.9.2 Labeling the slide-in labels 80 90 70 100 60 110 50 120 % 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % NC NC Stop Start Next- Axes Image 7-20 MPP 310 IE H Machine Pushbutton Panel The figure shows the MPP 310 IE H in its standard version. You can create your own slide-in labels in order to change the key labels. A printable blank film (DIN A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. A spare parts kit containing three blank films is also available (Item no.: A5E00414151). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 187 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts Image 7-21 Blank film for MCP 310 IE H membrane keyboard 1) Print direction 188 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts Files for printing the blank film The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: Template_MPP310.doc [(A)] SymboleMPP483.doc [(B)] 7(;7 7(;7 7(;7 7(;7 7(;7 7(;7 /DEHOLQJVWULSVIRU 033,( 76 7(;7 7(;7 7(;7 7(;7 7(;7 7(;7 76 = P = P WUDQVSDUHQW 1H [W $[HV WUDQVSDUHQW = P (6 ; = < WUDQVSDUHQW = P (5 WUDQVSDUHQW )6 (% 9. WUDQVSDUHQW ;; ;;; ;; ;;; )6 )6 )6 )6 Image 7-22 Template_MPP310.doc (A) Table 7-19 Symbole_MPP483.doc (B) )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 /DEHOLQJVWULSV6;6 1& 6WRS = P 1& 6WDU W ; ;;; ;;; ; ;;; ;;; )6 WUDQVSDUHQW )6 ; < = Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 ; ; 189 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts < < = = & & 9. (% (6 (5 ,2 60 1& 6WDUW 1& 6WRS 66 68 1H[W $[HV Preparing standard slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_MPP310.doc" (A) 1. Open the file "Template_MPP310.doc" in MS Word. The key symbols are arranged in a table on the position that corresponds to their location on the keyboard. The borders visible in the table are not printed. 2. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see figure: "Blank film for MPP 310 IEH membrane keyboard"). 3. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 4. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 5. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (outer lines). 6. Round off the corners of the slide-in labels approx. 1.5 mm to facilitate insertion. 7. Slide in the printed slide-in label. Preparing specific slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Symbole_MPP483.doc" (B) 1. Open both the "Symbole_MPP483.doc" file and the"Template_MPP310.doc" file. 2. Copy the desired key symbol from the file "Symbole_MPP483.doc". 3. Position the cursor in the desired field of the template (A), add the symbol and adjust its size accordingly by dragging it by the gripping points. 190 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts 4. To move a symbol to a different position, - select the symbol, - cut it out and - add it into the desired table cell. 5. If all the symbols are positioned as desired, follow the instructions in Section: "Preparing standard slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_MPP310.doc" as of point 2. Note Input of characters/text instead of symbols Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Creating your own symbols Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a square 15 x 15 mm without frames, filled with the color white. - Place the graphic in the center of this square. - Group the graphic and square together and add this group to the file "Template_MPP310.doc". Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint) - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the graphic or add an image in the center of this square. - Copy the graphic and square and add them both to the file "Template_MPP310.doc". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 191 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts 7.9.3 Display elements and operator controls You can retrofit the following control elements: Function Upper section actuator / accessories Lower section contact block / signaling lamp Signaling light Illuminated nipple 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-WS (white) AL5 lamp socket with spot LED S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Light Button Pushbutton 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-GWS (black) Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external Illuminated key with socket for T5.5K Pushbutton 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) Illuminated button contact maker ATL2 with spot LED S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external L5.5K28UW (white) S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Spot LED Mounting location Keyswitch *) switching angle of 90, 2 positions Safety lock cylinder 28 mm RXJSSA 15 E key can be removed when in both positions Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Keys / position se lector RX-JEWEL 22.3 mm Schlegel catalog Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Raised keys 6FC5247-0AA41-0 AA0 2 RTAO pushbuttons with plunger elongation 2 AT2 special version S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Application For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external *) Safety-related Note When assigning the colors for keys and signaling lights to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 113 Part 1, Chapter Pushbuttons/colors. 192 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts Name Description Dummy plug BVR22 1 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Selector switch 1) Toggle FS1 Conversion to toggle switch 1 WS1 Override spindle/rapid traverse Electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spin dle dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 WS3 Override feed / rapid tra Electronic rotary switch 1x23G, verse T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 WS2 Override feed / rapid tra Electronic rotary switch 1x29G, verse1) T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF14-1AA0 WS5 22 mm actuating element, 40 mm mushroom pushbutton, snap ac tion with tamper protection, latch ing, red, with holder, unlit 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) S13 Contact block, 2 NC, Extension NC, emergency stop 1 3SB3400-0E *) S13 Protective collar for front panel mounting, protection against accidental ac tuation 1 3SB3921-0AK S13 Emergency stop Num ber Article number Mounting location Control and signaling devices all elements marked with LE 3SB3 following selection from S51 ... S54 Low-Voltage Controls and Dis tribution Catalog (LV 1) EKS Euchner identification system Serial interface EKS-A-ISX-G01-ST09/03 1) PROFIBUS DP interface S14 EKS-A-IDX-G01-ST09/03 only for option *) Safety-related Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 193 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 310 IE H 7.9 Accessories and spare parts 194 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 8 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.1 Description 8.1.1 Overview The machine control panel MPP483 IE (IE = Industrial Ethernet) permits user-friendly operation of the machine functions on complex machining stations. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. In addition to the standard elements of machine control, several freely assignable slots are integrated on the operator panel for connecting other control devices. The function of the MPP 483 IE can be extended considerably by fitting additional keys and through the EKS identification system provided by Euchner. The machine control panel is easy to mount on the rear using special tension jacks. All keys have user-inscribed slide-in strips for machine-specific adaptations. Two DIN-A4 sheets (printed and white) for inscribing are supplied by the factory. The machine control panel MPP 483 IE is available as standard, in extended standard versions and in special versions. Validity The following description applies to the following machine control panels: Table 8-1 Standard version Designation Features MPP 483 IE Without handheld unit connection Table 8-2 Extended standard version Designation Features MPP 483 IE H With handheld unit connection HT 2/HT 8 Table 8-3 Article number 6FC5303-1AF10-0AA0 Article number 6FC5303-1AF10-8AA0 Special versions Designation Features Interface Article number MPP 483 IE S MPP 483 IE Sxx Height: 155 mm - with customer-specific equipment Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 6FC5303-1AF12-0__0 1) 195 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.1 Description Designation Features MPP 483 IE H Sxx Height: 155 mm - with customer-specific equipment - with handheld unit connection HT 2/HT 8 Interface 6FC5303-1AF12-8__0 1) Article number MPP 483 IE /L Lxx Height: 244 mm - with customer-specific equipment 6FC5303-1AF13-0__0 1) MPP 483 IE H/L Lxx Height: 244 mm - with customer-specific equipment - with handheld unit connection HT 2/HT 8 6FC5303-1AF13-8__0 1) MPP 483 IE L ) You can put together the components for occupancy of the free module locations according to your practical needs. The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (accompanying CD) contains a configuring tool and instructions for this purpose. 1 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with *). 8.1.2 System features Standard for all versions: Industrial Ethernet (transfer rate: 10/100 MBit/s) Function keyboard with 5 x 5 key matrix, can be freely projected and labeled Eight long-stroke keys with LEDs, Interfaces for two handwheels (velocity input and contour handwheel are only possible when connecting via the handwheel connection module or the MCP PN interface) Emergency Stop button (4-wire), latching, tamper-proof Keyswitch with two settings - leftward probing setting and rightward probing setting (right setting is customer-specific) Direct key connection for OP 012 Two free 22.5 mm slots or space for EKS Space for override Supplementary elements for the extended standard and special versions: Integration of max. three override switches Handheld unit connection HGA for HT 2 / HT 8 (instead of the handheld unit connection, the MPP 483 IE L can be equipped with one extension key.) EKS identification system Protective shroud for emergency stop button, REES emergency stop Emergency Stop overridden by 2-position keyswitch (probing position) 196 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.1 Description Two extension keys with LEDs can be variably fitted with contact blocks (on MPP 483 IE) Ten extension keys with LEDs can be variably fitted with contact blocks (on MPP 483 IE L) Mushroom button (SR) Authorization lock switch (ALS) Mode selector switch, 4-position key-operated or toggle switch The positions of the individual elements on the machine control panels is shown in section: "Control and display elements" --> "Special versions". System configuration The figures show how the MPP 483 IE H is integrated into the control system. 2SHUDWRUSDQHO (WKHUQHW 'LUHFWNH\V ; ; ; (WKHUQHW ; &20%RDUG,( 7HUPLQDOPRGXOH ;; +DQGZKHHO 033,(+ 6,180(5,. 1& +7 Image 8-1 System configuration of the MPP 483 IE H Note The connection cables are not part of the scope of supply. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 197 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.1 Description 8.1.3 Mechanical design The machine control panel MCP 483 IE consists of Control panel Flat module with customer keys (FBG HGA) Flat module with customer keys (FBG KT) Flat module with COM board (FBG COM IE) 'LUHFWNH\V (WKHUQHW FRQQHFWLRQ (PHUJHQF\6WRS (PHUJHQF\6WRSRYHUULGH +DQGZKHHO ; ; ; ; (QDEOLQJEXWWRQV ; +7FRQQHFWLRQ ;6 ; ; ; % ++ ; ; 9'& +DQGZKHHO ; % &2 0 ,( ; ; 8 ; 3& ; ; 3& ; 3& &R Q LQW QHF HUQ WLR DO Q % .7 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 2YHUULGH 6SHHG :6 ; 2YHUULGH )HHGUDWH :6 ; ; ; 2 $XWKRUL]DWLRQ NH\VZLWFK :6 ; 1 3 0 20 30 40 50 10 60 5 3 2YHUULGH 5DSLG WUDYHUVH :6 2 70 80 1 0 90 100 (% 9. [LQSXWVGHFRXSOHGWKURXJKRSWRFRXSOHUV RIZKLFK[IRU+*$[RXWSXWV ,OOXP SXVK EXWWRQ Image 8-2 198 3URPSW (PHUJ6WRS %\SDVV PRGH VHOHFWLRQ 3URPSW WHUPLQDWLQJ FRQQHFWRU +*$ (6 (5 0RGH VHOHFWRUVZLWFK :6 (PHUJHQF\6WRS EXWWRQ 0XVKURRP EXWWRQ 65 Mechanical design by way of example of the MPP 483 IE L Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2.1 Standard versions The machine control panel is available in the following standard versions: NC NC Stop Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) Key-operated switch (2) Emergency Stop button (3) Function keys with LEDs (4) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (5) Blanking elements (6) Feedrate override Image 8-3 MPP 483 IE standard version Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 199 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators NC NC Stop Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) Emergency Stop button (2) Key-operated switch (3) Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 (4) Function keys with LEDs (5) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (6) Blanking elements (7) Feedrate override Image 8-4 MPP 483 IE H extented standard version Note The free slots can be assigned operator elements which are listed in Section: "Operation and display elements" "Special versions" for the MPP 483 IE S or MPP 483 IE L variants. A description of the individual components can be found in Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements". 200 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2.2 Special versions The machine control panel is available in the following special versions: 50 30 80 70 100 110 2 60 110 50 % % 65 65 120 120 0 100 90 6 90 80 70 10 /( /( /( *) Component in this slot requires a customer-specific cover **) Labeling only for variants without EKS (1) Key-operated switch (9) Feedrate override (2) Protective shroud for emergency stop button (10) Override spindle / rapid traverse (3) EKS identification system (11) RJ 45 bushing (4) Keys with LEDs, actuators (12) Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 2) (5) Long Element, button with LED 1) (13) Toggle switch (6) Mushroom button - rapid withdrawal (7) Authorization lock switch (8) Mode selector switch 1) 1) Can be assigned according to Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements" 2) Only in variant MPP 483 IE H Sxx Image 8-5 Special version MPP 483 IE S Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 201 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators LE LE LE LE 0 0 LE LE LE 20 80 20 30 40 50 10 80 20 60 30 70 5 3 2 1 0 60 40 50 50 0 70 30 SR *) 3 LE 90 10 10 90 1 LE 2 70 80 90 100 40 60 20 80 20 80 30 70 60 40 50 50 40 60 70 30 70 30 90 10 80 20 0 0 10 90 80 20 90 10 30 70 0 0 10 90 40 60 LE LE SR 50 50 60 40 LE LE 202 *) Mushroom button can only be used if the adjacent spot is not occupied **) Component in this slot requires a customer-specific cover (1) Key-operated switch (10) Override spindle / rapid traverse (2) Protective shroud for emergency stop button (11) Rapid traverse override (3) EKS identification system (12) RJ45 bushing (4) Keys with LEDs, actuators (13) Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 2) (5) Long Element, button with LED 1) (14) Handwheel (6) Mushroom button - rapid withdrawal (15) Toggle switch (7) Authorization lock switch (8) Mode selector switch (9) Feedrate override 1) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators Can be assigned according to Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements" 1) 2) Only in variant MPP 483 IE H/L Lxx Image 8-6 Special version MPP 483 IE L Note You can use a configurator to put together the components for occupancy of the free module locations according to your practical needs. The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (accompanying CD) contains the following files for this purpose: - KonfigMPP483.zip (configuration tool) - AnleitungKonfigurator_MPP483.pdf You can also obtain the configurator via the Service & Support portal of Siemens: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24533571 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 203 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 8.2.3 Examples of assignment of free slots S13 HS13 S11 XS12 HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 HF6 HFT7 HF8 HF9 HF10 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HF11 HF12 HF13 HF14 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 HF16 HF17 HF18 HF19 HF20 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 HF21 HF22 HF23 HF24 HF25 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 S1 S2 S3 S4 ES EB VK ER WS3 WS1 HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 S7 S8 S9 S10 HS7 HS8 HS9 HS10 HF15 WS4 2 WS2 1 3 0 (1) Emergency stop button (2) Function keys (3) Mode selector switch (4) EKS identification system or 2 extension elements 22.5 mm (5) Override spindle / rapid traverse (6) Feed override (7) Authorization lock switch (8) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (9) Handheld unit connection or EKS identification system (10) Key-operated switch Image 8-7 204 MPP 483 IE S example Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators S13 HS13 XS12 S11 HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 HF6 HFT7 HF8 HF9 HF10 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HF5 HF11 HF12 HF13 HF14 HF15 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 HF16 HF17 HF18 HF19 HF20 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 HF21 HF22 HF23 HF24 HF25 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 S1 S2 S3 S4 S14 HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 HS14 S7 S8 S9 S10 S15 HS7 HS8 HS9 HS10 HS15 WS3 WS5 20 30 40 50 10 60 5 S51 EKS H51 S52 H52 S53 H53 S54 H54 S55 H55 S56 H56 (1) Key-operated switch (2) Emergency stop button (3) Connection for handheld units (4) Function keys (5) Override spindle / rapid traverse (6) Rapid traverse override (7) Feed override (8) Extension keys (9) EKS identification system or 2 extension elements 22.5 mm Image 8-8 8.2.4 Description 8.2.4.1 Device front S57 H57 S58 3 2 1 0 WS2 70 80 90 100 H58 Example MPP 483 IE L with EKS Connectable control elements Inputs for 25 function keys 18 long-stroke keys (max.) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 205 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators 3 rotary selector switches Key-operated switch with four positions Outputs for 47 LEDs (14 led to plug connector) Emergency Stop chain Emergency Stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of the machine or workpiece being damaged. An emergency stop generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possi ble braking torque in a controlled manner. Turn the Emergency Stop button counterclockwise to unlatch it. When the emergency stop button is activated, the emergency stop chain of the MPP 483 will ensure personal safety and protect the machine in hazardous situations. The emergency stop chain is also active if the handheld units are removed. To prevent the emergency stop chain from being interrupted while you plug in or pull out the handheld unit, press the emergency stop override S11. This overrides the emergency stop button on the handheld unit. WARNING Danger of death caused by malfunction of the emergency stop override To effectively deal with a malfunction of the emergency stop override S11 (e.g. jamming), the user PLC program must generate emergency stop when a monitoring time (approximately 5 min) expires (see Figure in Section: "Connecting" "Handheld unit connection Emergency Stop override"). The emergency stop chain of the MPP 483 IE should be integrated in the system emergency stop by the user. Note Machine manufacturer For other responses to an Emergency Stop: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions! WARNING Danger of death resulting from the premature emergency stop unlocking If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. 206 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators Actuation elements The actuating elements S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15 are addressed via the control. They also have electrically isolated contacts (common roots) for user-specific wiring. The following positions can be connected to control devices corresponding to the table in Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements": S1 to S4 S7 to S10 S14 S15 S51 to S58 Lamps The lamps HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 are connected to the control via Ethernet. Alternatively, HS1 to HS4 and HS7 to HS10 can also be activated externally nonisolated. WS1 selector switch 2-way, 4 stages, 60 switching angle Centrally mounted with front ring Designed as key-operated switch CG4-1A251-600 *FS1 V750D/2J. It can be changed by the customer to the toggle switch variant FS1 Key can be removed in all positions 8.2.4.2 Device rear side Flat module COM board S1 (jumper) Setting the handwheel signal type S1 open: TTL interface S1 closed: Differential interface S2 Setting of the MPP address (see Section: "Interfaces" "Description" "COM board") Diagnostic LEDs LED1 (H1) LED2 (H2) LED3 (H3) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 POWER OK (green) Bussync Busfault 207 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.2 Operator controls and indicators Flat module customer keys Diagnostic LEDs LED1 (H1) LED2 (H2) LED3 (H3) Voltage monitoring of customer keys Voltage monitoring of customer keys Voltage monitoring of customer keys Flat module, handheld unit connection ; 6 6 + 6 + + 6 + + ; ; ; ; ; ; + + + + 6 ;6 ; ; ; ; ; ; 208 Image 8-9 Rear MPP 483 IE with LEDs on HGA board HT 8 (1) Table 8-4 Diagnostic LEDs Color for Meaning LED1 (H1) LNK Green X1 RJ45 Connection established LED2 (H2) ACT Yellow X1 RJ45 Transmission active LED3 (H3) LNK Green X2 RJ45 Connection established LED4 (H4) ACT Yellow X2 RJ45 Transmission active LED5 (H5) LNK Green HT 8 transmission LED6 (H6) ACT Yellow HT 8 transmission LED7 (H7) Power OK Green LED8 (H8) FAULT STAT1 Red Fault LED9 (H9) FAULT STAT2 Red Fault Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces S1 (coding switches) Module address bit 4 ... 7 S2 (coding switches) Module address bit 0 ... 3 8.3 interfaces 8.3.1 Overview ; :6 (.6 ; +++ ; ; ; 6 ; ; + + 6 6 ;3RUW + 6 :6 ;3RUW ; ; ; Image 8-10 ; ; 6 ; Rear of the MPP 483 IE with interfaces Control panel (2) Protective Ground Connection S13 Emergency Stop button S11 Emergency Stop override PCB COM board X10 Power supply X20 Ethernet / Port 1 X21 Ethernet / Port 2 X30 Feedrate override Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 209 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces X31 Spindle override X60 Handwheel 1 X61 Handwheel 2 X70 Direct keys (4) (1) (3) Strain relief for Ethernet cable PCB customer keys X11 Power supply X20 Connector X20 X21 Connector X21 X22 Connector X22 X23 Connector X23 X24 Connector X24 X25 Connector X25 Individual wiring Expansion PCB handheld unit connection X1 / X2 Ethernet X20 Enable X21 Emergency Stop override XS12 Connection for handheld units Signal type O I B V VI VO 210 Outputs Inputs Bi-directional signals Supply voltage Voltage input Voltage output Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces 8.3.2 Description 8.3.2.1 Control panel Protective Ground Connection Pin Signal PE Connection Connection cross-sec tion M5 x 2.5 cable lug 2.5 mm2 Emergency stop button S13 Key designation: Key type: Table 8-5 S13 Mushroom, push-pull key 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder 3SB3901-0AB and 1 x NO 3SB3400-0B (internal use) Switching element for NC Pin Signal Type Signal name 11 OE_S13.11 12 BZ_S13.12 21 OE_S13.21 NC contact OE2, S13 22 BZ_S13.22 Reference potential OE2, S13 Function NC contact OE1, S13 I/O Reference potential OE1, S13 Emergency stop override S11 Key designation: Key type: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 S11 left probing, right probing, safety lock with actuation element according to the catalog: Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution (LV 1) carrier 3SB3901-0AC with pressure plates 1 x NO contact 3SB3400-0B 2 x 3SB3400-0A switching element 1xNC contact/1xNO contact ele ments positively driven 211 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Table 8-6 Pin Emergency stop override Signal Type Signal name 14 BZ_S11.14 Reference potential S1, S11 13 S_S11.13 NO contact S1, S11 21 OE_S11.21 Function NC contact OE2, S11 I/O 22 BZ_S11.22 Reference potential OE2, S11 24 BZ_S11.24 Reference potential S2, S11 23 S_S11.23 NO contact S2, S11 31 OE_S11.31 NC contact OE3, S11 32 BZ_S11.32 Reference potential OE3, S11 34 BZ_S11.34 Reference potential S3, S11 33 S_S11.33 NO contact S3, S11 WS1 selector switch Switch designation: Switch type: Table 8-7 WS1 CG4-1 A251-600 *FS1 V750 D/2J WS1 selector switch Pin Signal Type 11 ER Mode 4 15 ES Mode 3 10 BZ_WS I/O Signal name Switch position Reference signal 13 EB Mode 2 9 Linked mode Mode 1 Rapid withdrawal (SR) Key designation: Key type: Switching element: 212 SR 3SB3000-1GA31 NO contact 3SB3400-0B, input PLC Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Table 8-8 Rapid withdrawal (SR) Pin 8.3.2.2 Signal 14 BZ_SR.14 13 S_SR.13 Type I/O Signal name Function Reference potential S1, SR NO contact S1, SR COM board Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". Switch S1 Settings, see Chapter "Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN", Section "Interfaces". Switch S2 Settings, see Chapter "Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN", Section "Interfaces", mode "MCP set up as IE". 8.3.2.3 Flat module customer keys Power supply interface X11 Connector designation:X11 Connector type: Combicon MSTBA2.5/3-G-5.08 Cable length (max.): 10 m Table 8-9 Interface power supply Pin Signal name 1 2P24 2 M24 3 N.C. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Type V Meaning 24 V potential Ground 24 V Not connected 213 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Individual wiring Connector X20 / X21 Connector designation:X20/X21 Connector type: Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 8-10 Connec tor X20 X21 X20 X21 Connector X20 / X21 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 OE_S2 2 OE_S1 1 OE_S4 2 OE_S3 3 BZOE_S1-4 4 BZS_S1-S6 Reference potential NO contact S1 ... S6 3 S_S4 NO contact S4 4 S_S3 5 S_S2 NO contact S2 6 S_S1.1 NO contact S1.1 7 BZS_S1.2 Reference potential NO contact S1.2 8 S_S1.2 NO contact S1.2 9 HS 4 Signaling lamp S4 10 HS 3 11 HS 2 12 HS 1 I/O I/O I/O I/O I Function NC contact S2 NC contact S1 NC contact S4 NC contact S3 Reference potential NC contact S1 ... S4 NO contact S3 Signaling lamp S3 Signaling lamp S2 All inputs "High" active Signaling lamp S1 Connector X22 Connector designation:X22 Connector type: Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m 214 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Table 8-11 Connector X22 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 OE_S7 2 OE_S8 3 OE_S9 NC contact S9 4 OE_S10 NC contact S10 10 BZOE_S7-S10 Reference potential NC contacts S7-10 5 S_S7 NO contact S7 6 S_S8 7 S_S9 NO contact S9 8 S_S10 NO contact S10 9 BZS_S7-S10 Reference potential NO contacts S7-10 11 3P24 12 3P24 Function NC contact S7 I/O I/O V NC contact S8 NO contact S8 +24 V potential +24 V potential Connector X23 Connector designation:X23 Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 8-12 Connector X23 Pin Signal 1 HS 7 2 HS 8 3 HS 9 4 HS 10 Type Signal name Function Signaling lamp S7 I Signaling lamp S8 Signaling lamp S9 All inputs "High" active Signaling lamp S10 Connector X24 For special versions, when required this connector is provided. Connector designation:X24 Connector type: MCD 1.5/8-G1-3.81 HT BK Cable length (max.): 1.5 m Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 215 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Table 8-13 Connector X24 Pin Signal B1 B2 B3 S53 B4 S54 B5 Type Signal name Pin Signal S51 Ext. key S51 A1 H51 LED_S51 S52 Ext. key S52 A2 H52 LED_S52 Ext. key S53 A3 H53 Ext. key S54 A4 H54 S55 Ext. key S55 A5 H55 LED_S55 B6 S56 Ext. key S56 A6 H56 LED_S56 B7 S57 Ext. key S57 A7 H57 LED_S57 B8 S58 Ext. key S58 A8 H58 LED_S58 Pin Signal Reference potential +24 V A1 M24_EXT I Type Signal name LED_S53 O LED_S54 Viewed from the PCB: B at top of plug connector O at bottom of plug connector Connector X25 Connector designation:X25 Connector type: MCD 1.5/8-G1-3.81 HT BK Cable length (max.): 1.5 m Table 8-14 Connector X25 Pin Signal Type B1 P24_OUT B2 S13 Emergency Stop button A2 HS13 Emergency Stop LED B3 S14 KT-S14 A3 HS14 LED-S14 B4 S15 KT-S15 A4 HS15 B5 S59 *) KT-IN3/emergency stop override A5 H59 B6 S60 Mode selection A6 H60 LED-S60 B7 S61 Rapid withdrawal A7 H61 LED-S61 B8 S62 *) S32 / HGA enabling unit plugged in / terminating connector A8 M24_EXT V I Signal name Type V O V Signal name Reference poten tial +24 V LED-S15 LED-S59 Reference poten tial +24 V *) can only be used as a neutral input without HGA 8.3.2.4 Connection for handheld units You will find a detailed drawing showing the location of the interfaces in Section: "Control and display elements" "Description" "Device rear". 216 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Ethernet X1 / X2 Connector designation:X1, X2 Connector type: RJ45 socket Table 8-15 Ethernet X1 / X2 Pin Signal name 1 TD+ 2 TD- 3 RD+ I Receive data + 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 RD- I Receive data - 7 N.C. - Not connected 8 N.C. - Not connected Type Meaning Transmit data + O Transmit data - Note Connection only on LAN, not on telecommunication networks! Panel Present X7 Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 8-16 X7 6-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 PRES O "High": Panel (HT 8) plugged in 2 N.C. - Not connected 3 N.C. - Not connected 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 M P Ground Emergency Stop wiring terminal X8 Connector designa tion: Connector type: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 X8 4-pin Phoenix terminal 217 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Table 8-17 Assignment of the emergency stop wiring terminal X8 Pin Protective circuit 1 On-board jumper between 1 and 2 2 3 On-board jumper between 3 and 4 4 Note Use this terminal for simple routing of the emergency stop cables, optional. The connector is only used to assist looping through. The connected pins 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 have no additional function on the connection module. Enabling X20 Table 8-18 Enabling X20 Pin Signal name Type Meaning 1 ZUST1P I Electronic enabling button 1P 2 ZUST1M O Electronic enabling button 1M 3 ZUST2P I Electronic enabling button 2P 4 ZUST2M O Electronic enabling button 2M 5 N.C. Not connected 6 N.C. Not connected 7 N.C. Not connected 8 N.C. Not connected Emergency Stop override X21 Connector designation:X21 Connector type: MCV 1.5/10-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 8-19 218 Emergency Stop override X21 Pin Signal name Type Meaning 1 STOP23 2 STOP24 3 STOP13 4 STOP14 5 M V 6 N.C. - Not connected 7 IN_S59 I Emergency Stop override negated Emergency Stop NC contact 1.1 I/O Emergency Stop NC contact 1.1 Emergency Stop NC contact 2.1 Emergency Stop NC contact 2.2 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Pin Signal name Type 8 P24_FILT V 9 IN_S59_EXT 10 IN_S62_EXT O Meaning 24 V Key-operated switch actuated Terminating connector plugged in Note Emergency Stop X21: Supply voltage: 24 VDC; switched current: Max. 500 mA. 8.3.3 Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection This table shows plug connection elements for the following modules: COM board (COM) Customer keys (KT) Connection for handheld units (HGA) Table 8-20 Module COM KT HGA Connection components Connector Units Terminal element X10 1 MSTB2,5/3-STZ-5,08,1776168 X20/X21 2 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 X60 / X61 2 6FC9348-7HX X70 1 A5E00026403 X11 1 X20 / X23 Connectable crosssection (max.) Manufacturer 2.5 mm2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0.75 mm2 SIEMENS MSTB2,5/3-ST-5,08,1757022 2.5 mm2 2 MC1,5/4-ST-3,81, 1803594 1.5 mm2 PHOENIX CONTACT X21/X22 2 MC1,5/12-ST-3,81, 1803675 1.5 mm2 X24:A/B X25: A/B 4 MC1,5/8-ST-3,81, 1803633 1.5 mm2 X1 / X2 2 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 X7 1 MC1,5/6-STZ-3,81 GY BD1-6, 1713198 1.5 mm2 X8 1 MC1,5/4-STZ-3,81 GY BD1-4, 1713185 1.5 mm2 X 20 1 MC1,5/8-STZ-3,81 GY BD-1-8, 1713208 1.5 mm2 X 21 1 MC1,5/10-STZ-3,81 GY BD1-10, 1901658 1.5 mm2 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 SIEMENS PHOENIX CONTACT 219 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces 8.3.4 Input / output images Process input image MPP 483 IE Byte Bit7 Bit6 n+0 Bit5 Bit4 BA switch Bit3 Bit2 Function key HG connec tion XS12:13 n+1 WS1/4 WS1/3 WS1/2 WS1/1 F16*) F11*) F6*) F1*) Customer key Key Customer key Extension key S15 WS4, pos.0 S14 S51 n+2 Key WS4, pos.3 n+3 F21 WS4, pos.1 Extension key Emergency stop S53 S13 n+4 S61 Emergency stop override S11 right-hand side momenta ry-contact S11 left-hand side momenta ry-contact S60 S59 S4 S3 S2 S1 Rapid traverse override WS5/8 WS5/4 WS5/2 Customer keys S10 Bit0 Customer keys SR key WS4, pos.2 S62 Bit1 S9 WS5/1 Extension key S8 S7 S52 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT11 DT10 DT9 Direct control keys DT8 DT7 DT6 n+5 DT5 DT4 Direct control keys DT16 DT15 n+6 DT14 DT13 DT12 Extension keys n+7 Spindle override S58 S57 WS3/8 WS2/8 Extension keys WS3/4 WS3/2 WS3/1 WS2/4 WS2/2 WS2/1 F3 F2 F1 F11 F10 F9 F19 F18 F17 WS2/2" WS2/1 WS3/2 WS3/1 Feed override S56 S55 S54 WS2/16 F8 F7 F6 F5 F16 F15 F14 F13 n+8 Function keys n+9 F4 Function keys n+10 F12 Function keys F25 F24 F23 n+11 F22 F20 Reserve n+12 Feed override WS2/16 WS2/8 n+13 WS2/4 Spindle override WS3/16 WS3/8 WS3/4 *) The function keys are not active if WS1 is assigned. 220 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Optional 4-byte handwheel Table 8-21 Byte Input image for handwheel data Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 n+14 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Handwheel 1 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order equals byte n+14) n+15 n+16 Handwheel 2 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order equals byte n+16) n+17 Keyboard layout - input image MPP 483 IE ) 033 6 033/ 6 6 ;6 6 6 6SLQGOHRYHUULGH :6 ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 6 6 ) 2963 2963 6 2963 2963 )HHGRYHUULGH :6 ) ) ) ) ) 6 ) ) ) ) 6 6 6 6 2996 2996 2996 2996 2996 5DSLGWUDYHUVHRYHUULGH :6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 29(O 29(, 6 29(, 29(, $OWHUQDWLYHHTXLSPHQWRIWKH YDULDEOHDUHD $UHD YDULDEOHHOHPHQWV 7KHHOHPHQWVZLWKLQWKH PDUNHGDUHDFDQEH LQWHUFKDQJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKH SRVVLEOHHTXLSPHQWYDULDWLRQV Image 8-11 6 6 ,WHP 6 ,WHP :6 :6 :6 ,WHP :6 ,WHP :6 :6 Front view Output image MPP 483 IE Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 n+0 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 HS3 HS2 HS1 Customer keys Hs8 HS7 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 HS15 HS14 HS4 221 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces n+1 Customer keys n+2 HS10 HS9 H52 H51 Extension keys H58 H57 H56 H55 n+3 H54 H53 SR key Feedback for Extension keys S59/S60 when S11 is not used emergency stop H61 n+4 HF8 HF7 HF6 n+5 H60 H59 HF5 HF4 HF3 HF2 HF1 HF11 HF10 HF9 HF19 HF18 HF17 Function keys HF16 HF15 HF14 n+6 HF13 HF12 Function keys HF24 n+7 HS13 Function keys HF23 HF22 HF21 HF20 Function key HF25 222 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.3 interfaces Keyboard layout - output image MPP 483 IE 033 +6 +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) ;6 033/ 6 +) +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 )HHGRYHUULGH :6 +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 5DSLGWUDYHUVHRYHUULGH :6 + + + + + $UHD YDULDEOHHOHPHQWV 7KHHOHPHQWVZLWKLQWKH PDUNHGDUHDFDQEH LQWHUFKDQJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKH SRVVLEOHHTXLSPHQWYDULDWLRQV Image 8-12 6SLQGOHRYHUULGH :6 + + + + + $OWHUQDWLYHHTXLSPHQWRIWKH YDULDEOHDUHD + :6 :6 Front side Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 223 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.4 Mounting 8.4 Mounting Dimensions Image 8-13 Dimension drawing of the MPP 483 IE and MPP 483 IE L *) Depth 105 mm applies to MPPs without a handheld unit connector. 224 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.4 Mounting Panel cutouts 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD s 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 5] s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Image 8-14 Panel cutout MPP 483 IE 6HDOLQJDUHD 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s Image 8-15 5] 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Panel cutout MPP 483 IE L The MPP 483 IE is attached to the rear of the operator panel using 13 tension jacks (contained in the delivery kit). The tightening torque is 0.4 Nm. Note The clearance to the next MPP (above and below) must be a minimum of 18 mm. Mounting position The mounting position is max. 60 to the vertical. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 225 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.4 Mounting For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 033,(/ 033,( Mounting position of LEDs Image 8-16 Mounting position of LEDs MPP 483 IE / MPP 483 IE L Marking of the anode connection: Insert +polarity of the LED in key at the side marked Changing the lamps on illuminated keys 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the key cap forward and off. 2. Use lamp remover LZ6 to lever out the key carrier. 3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ6 or a suitable insulating tube 4. Reinstall the key carrier and key cap in reverse order. Lamp remover LZ6 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from the Schlegel company. Georg Schlegel GmbH & Co. KG Am Kapellenweg 88525 Durmentingen Germany 226 Phone.: 0 73 71 / 502-0 Fax: 0 73 71 / 502 49 E-mail: info@schlegel.biz Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.4 Mounting Changing the lamps on pilot lamps 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the calotte and name bearing element forward and off. 2. Change the lamp using the lamp remover of service tool LZ6 or a suitable insulating tube 3. Reinstall the calotte and name bearing element. Note When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity (see Fig.: "Mounting position of LEDs" in Section: "Mounting") Mounting additional control elements 1. If necessary, unscrew the blank plug. 2. Place the contact maker on the socket and insert the lamp if required. 3. Insert pushbutton through front panel and screw on cap nut (by several turns). 4. Press pushbutton on contact maker. Note the position of the twist protection device! 5. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). Insert slide-in labels 1. Create the slide-in label (see Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Labeling the slidein labels"). 2. Pull protective films off slide-in slot. 3. Guide in the slide-in labels (labeling facing operator side). 4. Align text in window. Note Slide in the labels when the MPP is not yet installed. Changing a contact maker 1. Loosen cap nut off pushbutton until just in front of contact maker. 2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3 mm out of the fixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed). 3. Remove the LED. 4. Change the contact element, remove defective contact maker from fixture and press new contact maker onto fixture. 5. Insert pushbutton into aperture and partially screw on cap nut. 6. Press pushbutton on contact maker until it snaps in. Note the position of the snap nose! 7. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 227 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.5 Connecting 8.5 Connecting 8.5.1 MPP 483 IE Connecting the 24 V supply The 24 V supply is connected via a 3-pin terminal block at connector COM X10 and KT X11 to the rear of the machine control panel (see Figure: "Rear side of MPP 483 IE with interfaces" in Section: "Interfaces" "Overview"). The protective ground is secured to the M5 bolt. NOTICE Damage to the device caused by unfused power supplies The 24 VDC power supply must always be grounded and designed as Protective Extra-Low Voltage (PELV) - protection by function low voltage with safe isolation! Emergency Stop circuit connection The connections of the emergency stop circuits are shown in Fig. "Ethernet connection". 228 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.5 Connecting Ethernet connection Connection of HGA - X1 to operator panel front (OP) Connection of HGA - X2 via COM X20 and COM X21 to control (NC) (WKHUQHW 3&8 'LUHFWNH\V 23 +DQGZKHHO +DQGZKHHO 0 3 3( &20; .7; .7; (PHUJ6WRSFLUFXLW .7; (PHUJ6WRSFLUFXLW :6 ; (.6 &20 6 :6 6 + (PHUJ6WRSFLUFXLW 6 ;3RUW ; 6 ; ; + + 6 ; (PHUJ6WRSFLUFXLW ;6 ; ;3RUW ; (PHUJ6WRSFLUFXLW .7; 1& Image 8-17 (WKHUQHW .7; .7; .7; ; (PHUJ6WRSFLUFXLW (PHUJHQF\6WRSFLUFXLWZLWKRXWKDQGKHOGXQLWFRQQHFWLRQ (PHUJHQF\6WRSFLUFXLWZLWKKDQGKHOGXQLWFRQQHFWLRQ Ethernet connection *) Not included for the version without handheld unit. Individual wiring connection The individual contacts are connected in accordance with the customer-specific links required (see Section: "Customer keys"). Note Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded! Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 229 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.5 Connecting 8.5.2 Customer keys The customer keys (KT) module links the operator panel, handheld unit connection and COM board. The inputs for handheld unit connection and extension keys are opto-decoupled. The outputs belonging to these are issued by high-side drivers. The floating individual contacts of function keys S1 ... S4 and S7 ... S10 are schematically shown in the diagram. 3&%FXVWRPHUNH\V J J J J P P ; %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 3 %ORFN6 3 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 J +6 ; P P P %ORFN6+6 N K 6 J %ORFN6+6 N K 6 J %ORFN6+6 N K J %ORFN6+6 P %ORFN6+6 +6 P %ORFN6+6 %ORFN6+6 ; P %ORFN6+6 P 7RWKH3/& N K N K N K ; N K 0 D E F G D E F G D E F G D EF G D E FG D E FG D E FG N D E FG K 0 H I 9 ; ; ) ; ; ; &XVWRPHUZLULQJH[WHUQDOOLJKWFRQWURO Image 8-18 Individual wiring of the customer keys (a, b, ..., m designate IN and OUT of the individual blocks) NOTICE Damage to pushbutton contacts When using an external 24 V encoder supply, always protect the key contacts against overload in the individual wiring with an external fuse for L+ with the following properties: - circuit breaker of characteristic A, 1.6 A. If you use the encoder supply X20:A15/A16 or VS1/VS2 of the ET200S block 4/8 F DI 24 VDC PROFIsafe, the external fuse can be omitted. 8.5.3 Handheld unit connection with Emergency Stop override The connection for handheld units (HGA) has four sets of functions: Two-channel version of enabling function Three-port Ethernet switch 230 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.5 Connecting Connection of HT 8 / HT 2 Module address WARNING Danger of death if the enabling button is not DIN-conform It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the enabling button or the enable control is implemented according to DIN EN 60204-1, Section 9.2.6.3, and the enabling button, when released or pushed down, stops dangerous movements reliably. Emergency Stop override S11 Implemented as pushbutton or keyswitch Pushbutton pressed or keyswitch, left probing - "Emergency Stop override" of the handheld unit connection query via input E59 - Interruption of the power supply for the handheld unit connection when actuated Keyswitch, right probing: Unassigned function query via input S60 Image 8-19 6 +7 &LUFXLW &LUFXLW 6 +7 &LUFXLW &LUFXLW 2-channel architecture of the emergency stop override contacts With regard to their accidental failure, the contacts of the emergency stop override safety function form a 2-channel architecture together with the emergency stop button on the HT 8. In addition to the B10d value of the emergency stop button, the B10d value of S11 must also be taken into consideration for the assessment in both emergency stop circuits. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 231 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.5 Connecting The diagnostics for the contacts of S11 is performed on the HT 8 together with the diagnostics of the emergency stop button. WARNING Danger of death caused by failure of the "emergency stop" safety function The user must ensure that the emergency stop override is implemented with the S11 button in accordance with the safety goals required by the risk analysis of the machine. Actuation of the emergency stop override results in failure of the emergency stop safety function on the HT 8. The user must implement suitable organizational and/or technical procedures for this in order to achieve the safety goals. As a technical measure, the signaling contacts on the S11 emergency stop override: 31/32 and 61/62 can be used to trigger an "emergency stop" by the PLC after a monitoring time has expired (maximum five minutes) (see Remark 1 in the following figure). However, this measure alone does not satisfy the requirements of Category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008. If the risk analysis of your machine has shown that the technical measure for monitoring the emergency stop override (S11) is not sufficient, the signaling contacts 31/32 and 61/62 of S11 can be evaluated, e.g. by a safe PLC or the SPL of the SINUMERIK 840D sl. The requirements of category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 can be met with this measure. For this purpose, the user must wire these contacts accordingly. All other functions can be found in the figure. 232 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.5 Connecting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mage 8-20 Handheld unit connection HT 8 Machine control panels Manual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mage 8-21 .7;B% . $ 8.5.4 .7;B$ 6 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.5 Connecting Circuits and wiring Extension keys connection Extension keys connection Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.6 Initialization Customer function S11 The NC-NO combination 3SB34 03-0A is right momentary contact and a customer function of the S11. The NO contact is wired on delivery and can be queried through the MPP 483 IE. The probing function facilitates mode selection. If an external evaluation of both contacts is required, then the internal wiring at S11.13 and S11.14 must be removed (also refer to the diagram "Extension keys connection" in this section). Remove connections 1, 2 and connection 4 Wire up connection 3 Direct key connection &20ERDUG 23 Image 8-22 8.6 ; ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 9s Direct key connection Initialization LEDs on the control panel HF1 to HF25 HS1 to HS4 HS7 to HS10 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 235 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.6 Initialization Switching on the MPP 483 IE (POWER ON) also switches on all the LEDs on the control panel which then remain permanently lit. Once internal power-up is completed, the LEDs blink at approx. 1 Hz until communication is established with the control or another client ("Waiting for Client"). LEDs on the COM board The LEDs on the COM board of the MPP 483 IE (rear) are not controlled by the software. The are only used to signal the hardware states (for example, power supply OK). Software version If there is still no communication with the control, the MPP 483 IE software version can be output on the panel via the LEDs. The output is activated by pressing the "F21" and "F25" buttons at the same time. Flashing of the LEDs is thereby suppressed and the software version output on the function key block using three digits. The individual digits are expressed in hexadecimal format by the number of LEDs activated in the first three LED lines on the MPP. The lowest value bit position is always on the right. The software version of the MPP V 02.01.00.00 is shown in the example given. VWGLJLW QGGLJLW UGGLJLW Image 8-23 Sample displays of software version Note The software version can only be output while there is no communication with the control system. Once communication has taken place, the software version is only displayed again after the power to the MPP 483 IE has been switched OFF and ON! 236 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.8 Technical data 8.7 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. 8.8 Technical data 8.8.1 MPP 483 IE Safety Safety class according to EN 50178 Degree of protection accord ing to DIN EN 60529 Approvals III; PELV Front side: IP54 Rear: IP10A CE / UL Electrical data Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 237 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.8 Technical data Input voltage 24 V DC Power consumption, max. Boards: 5W Lamps: LED 6W Handheld unit: Hand wheels: 13 W 2 x 0.5 W Total: 25 W Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Weight: Height: Width: Depth (front): Mounting depth: MPP 483 IE 155 483 60 140 / 105 *) Approx. 3 kg MPP 483 IE L 244 483 60 140 / 105 *) Approx. 4.5 kg Tightening torques, max. *) Tension jack screws: 0.4 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm M5 screws: 3 Nm without connector for handwheel connection Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 8.8.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring Button contact maker Table 8-22 Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4; S7 to S10 (NC contact or NO contact) AC DC 50 V Rated insulation voltage Ue 50 V Rated operating current Ie 2A Rated operating current at 24 V Ie Min. rated operating current at 5 V Imin 2A 1 mA Volume resistance Switching capacity 238 < 20 m 10 le 1.1 le Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.8 Technical data Selector switch Table 8-23 Contacts with floating outputs WS1 / 9-11, 13, 15 Max. operating voltage Ue AC DC 50 V 50 V Switching capacity with resistive load 10 A Switching capacity with inductive load >2A Switching capacity at 24 V with resistive load 10 A Switching capacity at 24 V with inductive load 6A Rated values for arc-free switching at 24 V 0.3 A 0.22 A Emergency stop button S13 Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. SR mushroom-head button S61 Table 8-24 Contacts with floating outputs Usage category (EN 60947-5-1) Rated operational voltage Switching capacity AC DC 24 V Ue 24 V AC-12 le 10 A 6A AC-15 le DC-12 le 10 A DC-13 le 3A Imin 1 mA Min. rated operating current at 5 V For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3 B10d Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 500 000 239 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.8 Technical data Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the contact block are taken into account. Emergency stop override S11 Table 8-25 Contacts with floating outputs Usage category (EN 60947-5-1) AC DC Ue 24 V 24 V AC-12 le 10 A AC-15 le 6A DC-12 le Rated operational voltage Switching capacity DC-13 Min. rated operating current at 5 V 10 A le 3A Imin 1 mA For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the contact block are taken into account. Inputs The inputs are opto-decoupled. Table 8-26 Extension keys S14, S15, S51 ... S62, emergency stop S13 Status Number H signal L signal 240 Switching voltage 15 Remark Input characteristics curve following IEC61131, type 1 Rated value + 24 VDC Signal level +15 V to +30 V Rated value 0 V or open Signal level -3 V to +5 V Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts Status Switching voltage In a group of 1 Cable length Max. 50 m AWG 16 Encoder power supply Remark 18.5 V to 30 V LED outputs Table 8-27 S14, S15, S51 ... S61, emergency stop HS13 Status Number Switching voltage Switching current 14 Load voltage 2P24 20.4 V ... 28.8 V Rated value +24 VDC 0.5 A H signal Signal level min. Ue - 0.16 V Max. 0.7 A / output L signal Max. signal level 2 V (idling) 0.3 mA Short-circuit protection Yes Typ. activation threshold 1.1 A RMS short-circuit current Electrical isolation 0.5 A No In a group of 1 Output total current Cable length Max. 3 A Max. 50 m AWG 16 Handheld unit connection XS12 The currents depend on the connected handheld unit. The internal connecting cables of the handheld unit connection HT 8 are designed for a rated voltage of 24 VDC and 0.5 A. 8.9 Accessories and spare parts 8.9.1 Overview Numerous spare parts and accessories are available for the MPP 483 IE. Contact your Siemens service center to order accessories and spare parts. A connecting cable is available to connect the handwheels, see Accessories and spare parts (Page 27). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 241 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts 8.9.2 Labeling the slide-in labels NC NC Stop Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % Image 8-24 MPP 483 IE Machine Push Button Panel You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. A printable blank film (DIN A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. A spare parts kit containing three blank films is also available (Item no.: A5E00414151). Image 8-25 Blank film for MCP 483 IE membrane keyboard 1) Print direction 242 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts Files for printing the blank film The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: Template_MPP483.doc [assignment for standard variants of MPP 483 IE - (A)] 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 76 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 76 SymbolsMPP483.doc [key symbols as Word file - (B)] /DEHOLQJVWULSIRU033033$ 033+ /DEHOLQJVWULSRIWKHNH\URZV WKHULJKWWH[WILHOG LVRQO\XVHGIRUWKH033/DQGFDQEHFXWWR WKHQHFHVVDU\OHQJWK 1H[W $[HV 6LQJOH PRGH (6 ; (6 = PP )6 7H[W WUDQVSDUHQW /LQNHG PRGH 1& 6WDUW 1& 6WRS WUDQVSDUHQW WUDQVSDUHQW < = WUDQVSDUHQW (5 (5 = PP = PP = PP = PP 7H[W /DEHOLQJVWULSIRU:6;6 6LQJOH PRGH 7H[W ;;;;;;;; ;;;;;;;; /LQNHG PRGH 7H[W ;;;;;; ;;;;;; = PP 7H[W = PP = PP 7H[W = PP = PP 7H[W = PP 7H[W 76 /DEHOLQJVWULSIRU033/ WUDQVSDUHQW WUDQVSDUHQW )6 )6 )6 )6 Image 8-26 Template_MPP483.doc (A) Table 8-28 Symbole_MPP483.doc (B) )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 ; < = Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 ; ; 243 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts < < = = & & 9. (% (6 (5 ,2 60 1& 6WDUW 1& 6WRS 66 68 1H[W $[HV Preparing standard slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_MPP483.doc" (A) 1. Open the file "Template_MPP483.doc" in MS Word. The key symbols are arranged in a table on the position that corresponds to their location on the keyboard. The borders visible in the table are not printed. 2. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see figure: "Blank film for MPP 483 IE membrane keyboard"). 3. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 4. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 5. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (outer lines). 6. Round off the corners of the slide-in labels approx. 1.5 mm to facilitate insertion. 7. Slide in the printed slide-in label. 8. Shorten the labeling strips for the long-stroke keys for MPP 483 IE, because only the first four text fields of the strips TS1 and TS2 are needed on this device. Preparing specific slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Symbole_MPP483.doc" (B) 1. Open both the "Symbole_MPP483.doc" file and the"Template_MPP483.doc" file. 2. Copy the desired key symbol from the file "Symbole_MPP483.doc". 3. Position the cursor in the desired field of the template (A), add the symbol and adjust its size accordingly by dragging it by the gripping points. 244 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts 4. To move a symbol to a different position, - select the symbol, - cut it out and - add it into the desired table cell. 5. If all the symbols are positioned as desired, follow the instructions in Section: "Preparing standard slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_MPP483.doc" as of point 2. Note Input of characters/text instead of symbols Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Creating your own symbols Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a square 15 x 15 mm without frames, filled with the color white. - Place the graphic in the center of this square. - Group the graphic and square together and add this group to the file "Template_MPP483.doc". Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint) - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the graphic or add an image in the center of this square. - Copy the graphic and square and add them both to the file "Template_MPP483.doc". 8.9.3 Expansion panel The expansion panel is used for the installation of additional control elements, e.g. pushbuttons, indicator lights, and keyswitches as an expansion to a machine pushbutton panel or a machine control panel or to expand the free inputs/outputs of a machine control panel. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 245 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts Front view with section $ $ $$ &HQWHU 2SHUDWRUFRQWUROHOHPHQW Image 8-27 View of the expansion panel Product name: SINUMERIK expansion panel 19" Article number: 6FC5247-0AA43-1AA0 Can be equipped with max. 12 control devices, diameter 22 mm, grid 33 mm Labeling with exchangeable text labels 246 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts Mounting Installation is with tension jacks. % 2SHUDWRUSDQHO IURQW 7HQVLRQMDFNV $$ $ % $VVHPEO\EDFNJURXQG WRWKLFN $ %% Image 8-28 PD[WRUTXH 1P Expansion panel cutout Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 247 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts Dimensions for labeling the slide-in labels The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labels can also be arranged. 'LPHQVLRQVIRUODEHOLQJWKHVOLGHLQXVHUODEHOV YDULDEOHVZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6WR6 &RUQHUVURXQGHG5 RUFKDPIHUHG[GHJUHHV 6OLGHLQGLUHFWLRQ :LQGRZDUHDERUGHULQJ PXVWQRWEHSULQWHG &XWWLQJHGJHERUGHULQJ PXVWEHSULQWHG 'LPHQVLRQVIRUODEHOLQJWKHVOLGHLQXVHUODEHOV YDULDEOHVZLWFKLQJHOHPHQWV6WR6 6OLGHLQGLUHFWLRQ Image 8-29 248 Dimensions for texts and labeling strips Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts 8.9.4 Display elements and operator controls You can retrofit the following control elements: Function Upper section actuator / accessories Lower section contact block / signaling lamp Signaling light Illuminated nipple 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-WS (white) AL5 lamp socket with spot LED S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Light Button Pushbutton 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-GWS (black) Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external Illuminated key with socket for T5.5K Pushbutton 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) Illuminated button contact maker ATL2 with spot LED S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external L5.5K28UW (white) S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Spot LED Mounting location Keyswitch *) switching angle of 90, 2 positions Safety lock cylinder 28 mm RXJSSA 15 E key can be removed when in both positions Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Keys / position se lector RX-JEWEL 22.3 mm Schlegel catalog Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Raised keys 6FC5247-0AA41-0 AA0 2 RTAO pushbuttons with plunger elongation 2 AT2 special version S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Application For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external *) Safety-related Note When assigning the colors for keys and signaling lights to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 113 Part 1, Chapter Pushbuttons/colors. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 249 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 IE 8.9 Accessories and spare parts Name Description Dummy plug BVR22 1 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Selector switch Toggle FS1 Conversion to toggle switch 1 WS1 Override spindle / rapid traverse Electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spin dle dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 WS3 Override feed / rapid traverse Electronic rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 WS2 Override feed / rapid traverse1) Electronic rotary switch 1x29G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF14-1AA0 WS5 22 mm actuating element, 40 mm mushroom pushbutton, snap ac tion with tamper protection, latch ing, red, with holder, unlit 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) S13 Contact block, 2 NC, Extension NC, emergency stop 1 3SB3400-0E *) S13 Protective collar for front panel mounting, protection against accidental ac tuation 1 3SB3921-0AK S13 Emergency stop Num ber Article number Mounting location Control and signaling devices All elements marked with LE 3SB3 following selection from S51 ... S62 Low-Voltage Controls and Dis S14, S15 tribution Catalog (LV 1) EKS Euchner identification system Serial interface EKS-A-ISX-G01-ST09/03 1) PROFIBUS DP interface S14 EKS-A-IDX-G01-ST09/03 only for option *) Safety-related 250 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 9 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.1 Description 9.1.1 Overview The machine control panel MPP 483 permits user-friendly operation of the machine functions on complex machining stations. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning, grinding and special machines. In addition to the standard elements of machine control, several freely assignable slots are integrated on the operator panel for connecting other control devices. The function of the MPP 483 can be extended considerably by fitting additional keys and through the EKS identification system provided by Euchner. The machine control panel is easy to mount on the rear using special tension jacks. All keys have user-inscribed slide-in strips for machine-specific adaptations. Two DIN-A4 sheets (printed and white) for inscribing are supplied by the factory. The machine control panel MPP 483 is available as standard, in extended standard versions and in special versions. Validity The following description applies to the following machine control panels: Table 9-1 Standard version Designation Features MPP 483 Without handheld unit connection Table 9-2 Article number 6FC5303-1AF00-0AA1 Extended standard versions Designation Features MPP 483 H With handheld unit connection B-MPI 6FC5303-1AF00-1AA1 MPP 483 HTC With handheld unit connection HT 2/HT 8 6FC5303-1AF00-8AA1 MPP 483 A for mounting applications (without override) 6FC5303-1AF01-0AA1 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Article number 251 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.1 Description Table 9-3 Special versions Designation Features Article number MPP 483 S MPP 483 Sxx Height: 155 mm - with customer-specific equipment 6FC5303-1AF02-0__0 1) MPP 483 H Sxx Height: 155 mm - with customer-specific equipment - with handheld unit connection B-MPI 6FC5303-1AF02-1__0 1) MPP 483 HTC Sxx Height: 155 mm - with customer-specific equipment - with handheld unit connection HT 2/HT 8 6FC5303-1AF02-8__0 1) MPP 483 L MPP 483 /L Lxx Height: 244 mm - with customer-specific equipment 6FC5303-1AF03-0__0 1) MPP 483 H/L Lxx Height: 244 mm - with customer-specific equipment - with handheld unit connection B-MPI 6FC5303-1AF03-1__0 1) MPP 483 HTC/L Lxx Height: 244 mm - with customer-specific equipment - with handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 6FC5303-1AF03-8__0 1) ) You can put together the components for occupancy of the free module locations according to your practical needs. The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (accompanying CD) contains a configuring tool and instructions for this purpose. 1 The safety-related accessories / spare parts are marked in the "Accessories and spare parts" section with *). Connectable controls SINUMERIK 840D sl SIMATIC S7-300 9.1.2 System features Standard for all versions: PROFIBUS or MPI/OPI Function keyboard with 5 x 5 key matrix, can be freely projected and labeled 8 long-stroke keys with LEDs Interfaces for two handwheels for connection via PROFIBUS DP (function depends on NCU software) Emergency Stop button (4-wire), latching, tamper-proof Key-operated switch with 2 settings - leftward probing setting and rightward probing setting (right setting is customer-specific) 252 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.1 Description Direct key connection for OP 012 2 free 22.5 mm slots or space for EKS Space for override Supplementary elements for the extended standard and special versions: Integration of max. 3 override switches Handheld unit connection HGA for HHU or HT 2 / HT 8 (instead of the handheld unit connection, the MPP 483 L can be equipped with one extension key) EKS identification system Protective shroud for emergency stop button, REES emergency stop Emergency Stop overridden by 2-position key-operated switch (probing position) Two extension keys with LEDs can be variably fitted with contact blocks (on MPP 483) Ten extension keys with LEDs can be variably fitted with contact blocks (on MPP 483 L) Mushroom button (SR) Authorization lock switch (ALS) Mode selector switch, 4-positions as key-operated or toggle switch The positions of the individual elements on the machine control panels is shown in section: "Control and display elements" "Special versions". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 253 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.1 Description System configuration The figure shows the ways in which the MPP 483 HTC can be integrated in the control system. (WKHUQHW 2SHUDWRUSDQHO 'LUHFWNH\V 033+7& +DQGZKHHO 03, 352),%86'3 6,180(5,. 6,0$7,& Image 9-1 +7 System configuration of the MPP 483 HTC Note The connection cables are not part of the scope of supply. 9.1.3 Mechanical design The machine control panel MCP 483 consists of Control panel flat module with handheld unit connection (option) Flat module customer keys Flat module COM board 254 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.1 Description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mage 9-2 Mechanical design taking example of the MPP 483 L Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 255 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements 9.2 Operating and display elements 9.2.1 Standard versions Standard version The machine control panel is available in the following standard version: NC NC Stop Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) Key-operated switch (2) Emergency stop button (3) Function keys with LEDs (4) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (5) Dummy element (6) Cutout for EKS identification system (7) Feed override Image 9-3 256 MPP 483 standard version Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements Extended standard versions The machine control panel is available in the following extended standard versions: NC NC Stop Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) Emergency stop button (2) Key-operated switch (3) Handheld unit connection B-MPI (4) Function keys with LEDs (5) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (6) Dummy element (7) Feed override Image 9-4 MPP 483 H extented standard version Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 257 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements NC NC Stop Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % (1) Emergency stop button (2) Key-operated switch (3) Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 (4) Function keys with LEDs (5) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (6) Dummy element (7) Cutout for EKS identification system (8) Feed override Image 9-5 Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop (1) Key-operated switch (2) Emergency stop button (3) Function keys with LEDs (4) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (5) Dummy element Image 9-6 MPP 483 HTC extented standard version 258 Acknowledge fault Lock/release protective doors MPP 483 A extended standard version Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements Note When using the 8 byte MPI function, only the function keys in the first column can be used (see Section: "Interfaces" "Input / output image" "Input image of MPI standard"). If you use the WS1 selector switch, you use this to assign these keys. The free slots can be assigned operator elements which are listed in Section: "Operation and display elements" "Special versions" for the MPP 483 S or MPP 483 L variants. A description of the individual components can be found in Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements". 9.2.2 Special versions The machine control panel is available in the following special versions: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 259 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements MPP 483 S 50 80 10 70 100 110 2 60 110 50 120 120 0 % % 65 65 /( 100 90 6 90 80 70 30 /( /( *) Designation bearing element can only be equipped without EKS (4) **) Component in this slot needs a new cover ***) Labeling only for variants without EKS (1) Key-operated switch (9) Mode selector switch (2) Protective shroud for emergency stop button (10) Feedrate override (3) Handheld unit connection B-MPI 1) (11) Spindle/rapid traverse override (4) EKS identification system (12) RJ 45 bushing (5) Keys with LEDs, actuators (13) Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 3) (6) Long Element, button with LED 2) (14) Toggle switch (7) Mushroom-shaped button - rapid withdrawal (15) Label holder (8) Authorization lock switch (16) Adhesive label 4) 2) 1) Only in variant MPP 483 H Sxx 2) Can be assigned according to Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements" 3) Only in variant MPP 483 HTC Sxx 4) xxxx... - place holder for the number of possible font characters 260 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements Image 9-7 Special version MPP 483 S Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 261 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements MPP 483 L LE LE LE 0 0 10 90 20 80 20 30 40 30 70 50 50 40 60 0 0 10 90 30 70 70 30 70 30 30 70 90 10 80 20 80 20 20 80 90 10 20 80 0 0 10 90 60 40 40 60 50 50 LE 70 80 90 100 60 40 60 50 10 5 3 2 1 0 60 40 0 LE 90 10 70 30 SR *) 3 LE LE 80 20 1 LE 2 LE LE 50 50 LE 60 40 LE LE SR 262 *) Mushroom-shaped button can only be used if the adjacent spot is not occupied **) Component in this slot needs a new cover (1) Key-operated switch (10) (2) Protective shroud for emergency stop button (11) Spindle/rapid traverse override (3) Handheld unit connection B-MPI 1) (12) Rapid traverse override (4) EKS identification system (13) RJ45 bushing (5) Keys with LEDs, actuators (14) Handheld unit connection HT 2 / HT 8 3) (6) Long Element, button with LED 2) (15) Handwheel (7) Mushroom-shaped button - rapid withdrawal (16) Toggle switch 2) Feedrate override Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements (8) Authorization lock switch (17) Label holder (9) Mode selector switch (18) Adhesive label 4) 1) Only in variant MPP 483 H/L Lxx Can be assigned according to Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements" 2) 3) Only in variant MPP 483 HTC/L Lxx 4) xxxx... - place holder for the number of possible font characters Image 9-8 Special version MPP 483 L Note You can use a configurator to put together the components for occupancy of the free module locations according to your practical needs. The DOConCD / Catalog NC 60, NC 61 (accompanying CD) contains the following files for this purpose: - KonfigMPP483.zip (configuration tool) - AnleitungKonfigurator_MPP483.pdf You can also obtain the configurator via the Service & Support portal of Siemens: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24533571 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 263 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements 9.2.3 Examples of assignment of free slots MPP 483 H / MPP 483 A / MPP 483 S S13 HS13 S11 HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 HF6 HFT7 HF8 HF9 HF10 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HF11 HF12 HF13 HF14 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 HF16 HF17 HF18 HF19 HF20 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 HF21 HF22 HF23 HF24 HF25 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 S1 S2 S3 ES EB VK ER WS3 WS1 HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 S7 S8 S9 S10 HS7 HS8 HS9 HS10 HF15 WS4 2 WS2 1 3 0 XS12 S4 (1) Emergency stop button (2) Function keys (3) Mode selector switch (4) EKS identification system or 2 extension elements 22.5 mm (5) Override spindle / rapid traverse (6) Feed override (7) Authorization Lock Switch (8) Customer keys (long-stroke keys) (9) Handheld unit connection or EKS identification system (10) Key-operated switch Image 9-9 264 Example of MPP 483 H/A/S Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements MPP 483 H / MPP 483 L with EKS S13 HS13 HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 HF6 HFT7 HF8 HF9 HF10 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HF5 HF11 HF12 HF13 HF14 HF15 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 HF16 HF17 HF18 HF19 HF20 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 HF21 HF22 HF23 HF24 HF25 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 S1 S2 S3 S4 S14 HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 HS14 S7 S8 S9 S10 S15 WS3 20 30 40 50 10 60 5 HS7 HS8 HS9 HS10 HS15 3 2 1 0 WS2 70 80 90 100 XS12 S11 EKS 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 H51 H52 H53 H54 H55 H56 H57 H58 WS5 (1) Key-operated switch (2) Emergency stop button (3) Connection for handheld units (4) Function keys (5) Override spindle / rapid traverse (6) Rapid traverse override (7) Feed override (8) Extension keys (9) EKS identification system or 2 extension elements 22.5 mm Image 9-10 Example MPP 483 H/L with EKS Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 265 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements 9.2.4 Description 9.2.4.1 Device front Connectable control elements Inputs for 25 function keys 18 long-stroke keys (max.) 3 rotary selector switches Key-operated switch with four positions Outputs for 47 LEDs (14 led to plug connector) Emergency stop chain Emergency stop button Press the red button in emergencies when people are at risk, there is the danger of the machine or workpiece being damaged. An emergency stop generally shuts down all drives with the greatest possi ble braking torque in a controlled manner. Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it. When the emergency stop button is activated, the emergency stop chain of the MPP 483 will ensure personal safety and protect the machine in hazardous situations. The emergency stop chain is also active if the handheld units are removed. To prevent the emergency stop chain from being interrupted while you plug in or pull out the handheld unit, press the emergency stop override S11. This overrides the emergency stop button on the handheld unit. WARNING Danger of death caused by malfunction of the emergency stop override To effectively deal with a malfunction of the emergency stop override S11 (e.g. jamming), the user PLC program must generate emergency stop when a monitoring time (approximately 5 min) expires (see Figure in Section: "Connecting" "Handheld unit connection HT 8 with emergency stop override"). The emergency stop chain of the MPP 483 should be integrated in the system emergency stop by the user. 266 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements Note Machine manufacturer For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP: refer to the machine tool manufacturer's instructions! WARNING Danger of death resulting from the premature emergency stop unlocking If you have shut down the system to be monitored, you can only release the emergency stop button or put the system to be monitored back into operation if the condition that triggered the emergency stop function has been corrected and a safe restart is carried out. Actuation elements Actuation elements S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15 are activated by the control. They also have electrically isolated contacts (common roots) for user-specific wiring. The following positions can be connected to control devices corresponding to the table in Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Display and operating elements": S1 to S4 S7 to S10 S14 S15 S51 to S58 Lamps The lamps HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 are connected to the control system via MPI/OPI. Alternatively, they can also be activated externally non-isolated. WS1 selector switch 2-way, 4 stages, 60 switching angle Centrally mounted with front ring Designed as key-operated switch CG4-1A251-600 *FS1 V750D/2J. It can be changed by the customer to the toggle switch variant FS1 Key can be removed in all positions Note When the WS1 mode selector switch is used, function keys F1, F6, F11 and F16 cannot be evaluated with the MPI standard input image (8 bytes). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 267 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements 9.2.4.2 Device rear side COM board S1 (jumper) Setting the handwheel signal type S1 open: TTL interface S1 closed: Differential interface S3 (coding switches) Baud rate, address and protocol setting Table 9-4 1 2 Settings for switch S3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning off MPP with MPI communication off Compatible mode 8/8 bytes I/O on Extended assignment 12/8 bytes I/O on on Reserved on off Parameter set 3 3) off on Parameter set 2 2) off off Parameter set 1 1) on on on on Bus address: 15 on on on off Bus address: 14 on on off on Bus address: 13 on on off off Bus address: 12 on off on on Bus address: 11 on off on off Bus address: 10 on off off on Bus address: 9 on off off off Bus address: 8 off on on on Bus address: 7 off on on off Bus address: 6 off on off on Bus address: 5 off on off off Bus address: 4 off off on on Bus address: 3 off off on off Bus address: 2 off off off on Bus address: 1 off off off off Bus address: 0 on Transmission cycle time: 200 ms off Transmission cycle time: 100 ms on OPI baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud off MPI baud rate: 187.5 kbaud 1) GD parameters 1, 1, 1 - 1, 2, 1 (fixed) 2) GD parameters 2, 1, 1 - 2, 2, 1 (fixed) 3) Assignment depends on the set bus address 268 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements Diagnostic LEDs LED1 (H1) LED5 (H5) Hardware test underway. If errors are found, the LED lights up red. Not connected Logic voltages on the module OK During data transfer via the operator panel inter face, the LED flashes yellow. LED for PROFIBUS: Status Meaning Flashes green Ready to communicate Lights up green Communication taking place Lights up red Channel interference or not yet ready (default after Pow er On) LED1 (H1) LED2 (H2) LED3 (H3) Voltage monitoring of customer keys Voltage monitoring of customer keys Voltage monitoring of customer keys LED2 (H2) LED3 (H3) LED4 (H4) Customer key board Diagnostic LEDs HGA board handheld unit B-MPI The arrangement of the LEDs on the HGA board handheld unit B-MPI is shown in the Figure: "Rear side of MPP 483H with interfaces" in Section: "Interfaces" "Overview". Diagnostic LEDs Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 LED1 (H1) LED2 (H2) LED3 (H3) LED4 (H4) Bus request Repeater Segment 2 Bus request Repeater Segment 1 Voltage of repeater segment 1 (>4.7V) Voltage of repeater segment 2 (>4.7V) 269 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.2 Operating and display elements HGA board HT 2 / 8 ; 6 6 + 6 + + 6 + + ; ; ; ; ; ; + + + + 6 ;6 ; ; ; ; ; ; Image 9-11 Rear MPP 483HTC with LEDs on HGA board HT 2 / 8 (1) Table 9-5 Diagnostic LEDs Color for Meaning LED1 (H1) LNK Green X1 RJ-45 Connection established LED2 (H2) ACT Yellow X1 RJ-45 Transmission active LED3 (H3) LNK Green X2 RJ-45 Connection established LED4 (H4) ACT Yellow X2 RJ-45 Transmission active LED5 (H5) LNK Green HT transfer LED6 (H6) ACT Yellow HT transfer LED7 (H7) Power OK Green LED8 (H8) FAULT STAT1 Red Fault LED9 (H9) FAULT STAT2 Red Fault S1 (coding switches) Module address bit 4 ... 7 S2 (coding switches) Module address bit 0 ... 3 270 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces 9.3 Interfaces 9.3.1 Overview ; :6 ; ; + + + 6 6 6 ; + + + + + ; 6 ; + + + + ; ; &20%RDUG :6 ; ; 6 ; ; ; ; ;6 ; ; 6 Image 9-12 Rear side of MPP 483H with interfaces Control panel (2) Protective Ground Connection S13 Emergency stop button S11 Emergency stop override COM board X10 Power supply X20 PROFIBUS DP/MPI X60 Handwheel 1 X61 Handwheel 2 X70 Interface for direct keys Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 271 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces (1) (3) Customer keys X11 Power supply X20 Connector X20 X21 Connector X21 X22 Connector X22 X23 Connector X23 X24 Connector X24 X25 Connector X25 Individual wiring Expansion Connection for handheld units X1 MPI/OPI X20 Enable X21 Emergency stop override X22 Handwheel XS12 Connection for handheld units Signal type O I B V VI VO Outputs Inputs Bi-directional signals Power supply Voltage input Voltage output 9.3.2 Description 9.3.2.1 Control panel Protective Ground Connection Pin Signal PE 272 Connection Connection cross-sec tion M5 x 2.5 cable lug 2.5 mm2 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Emergency stop button S13 Key designation: Key type: Table 9-6 S13 Mushroom, push-pull key 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder 3SB3901-0AB and 1 x NO 3SB3400-0B (internal use) Switching element for NC Pin Signal Type Signal name 11 OE_S13.11 12 BZ_S13.12 21 OE_S13.21 NC contact OE2, S13 22 BZ_S13.22 Reference potential BZ2, S13 Function NC contact OE1, S13 I/O Reference potential BZ, S13 Emergency stop override S11 Key designation: Key type: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 S11 left probing, right probing, safety lock with actuation element accord ing to the catalog: Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution (LV 1) carrier 3SB3901-0AC with pressure plates 1 x NO contact 3SB3400-0B 2 x 3SB3400-0A switching element 1xNC contact/1xNO contact ele ments positively driven 273 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Table 9-7 Pin Emergency stop override Signal Type Signal name 14 BZ_S11.14 Reference potential S1, S11 13 S_S11.13 NO contact S1, S11 21 OE_S11.21 Function NC contact OE2, S11 I/O 22 BZ_S11.22 Reference potential BZ2, S11 24 BZ_S11.24 Reference potential S2, S11 23 S_S11.23 NO contact S2, S11 31 OE_S11.31 NC contact OE3, S11 32 BZ_S11.32 Reference potential BZ3, S11 34 BZ_S11.34 Reference potential S3, S11 33 S_S11.33 NO contact S3, S11 WS1 selector switch Switch designation: Switch type: Table 9-8 WS1 CG4-1 A251-600 *FS1 V750 D/2J WS1 selector switch Pin Signal Type 11 ER Mode 4 15 ES Mode 3 10 BZ_WS I/O Signal name Switch position Reference signal 13 EB Mode 2 9 Linked mode Mode 1 Rapid withdrawal (SR) Key designation: Key type: Switching element: 274 SR 3SB3000-1GA31 NO contact 3SB3400-0B, input PLC Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Table 9-9 Rapid withdrawal (SR) Pin 9.3.2.2 Signal 14 BZ_SR.14 13 S_SR.13 Type I/O Signal name Function Reference potential S1, SR NO contact S1, SR COM board Pin assignment For more detailed information, see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting". Switch S1 Settings, see Chapter "Machine control panel: MCP 310C PN", Section "Interfaces". 9.3.2.3 User keys Power supply interface X11 Connector designation:X11 Connector type: Combicon MSTBA2.5/3-G-5.08 Cable length (max.): 10 m Table 9-10 Interface power supply Pin Signal name 1 2P24 2 M24 3 N.C. Type V Meaning 24 V potential Ground 24 V Not connected Individual wiring Connector X20 / X21 Connector designation:X20/X21 Connector type: Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 275 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Table 9-11 Connec tor X20 X21 X20 X21 Connector X20 / X21 Pin Signal Type Signal name 1 OE_S2 2 OE_S1 1 OE_S4 2 OE_S3 3 BZOE_S1-4 4 BZS_S1-S6 Reference potential NO contact S1 ... S6 3 S_S4 NO contact S4 4 S_S3 5 S_S2 NO contact S2 6 S_S1.1 NO contact S1.1 7 BZS_S1.2 Reference potential NO contact S1.2 8 S_S1.2 NO contact S1.2 9 HS 4 Signaling lamp S4 10 HS 3 11 HS 2 12 HS 1 I/O I/O I/O I/O I Function NC contact S2 NC contact S1 NC contact S4 NC contact S3 Reference potential NC contact S1 ... S4 NO contact S3 All inputs "High" active Signaling lamp S3 Signaling lamp S2 Signaling lamp S1 Connector X22 Connector designation:X22 Connector type: Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 9-12 Pin 276 Connector X22 Signal Type Signal name 1 OE_S7 2 OE_S8 3 OE_S9 NC contact S9 4 OE_S10 NC contact S10 10 BZOE_S7-S10 Reference potential NC contacts S7-10 Function NC contact S7 I/O NC contact S8 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Pin Signal Type Signal name 5 S_S7 6 S_S8 7 S_S9 NO contact S9 8 S_S10 NO contact S10 9 BZS_S7-S10 Reference potential NO contacts S7-10 11 3P24 12 3P24 Function NO contact S7 I/O V NO contact S8 +24 V potential +24 V potential Connector X23 Connector designation:X23 Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 9-13 Connector X23 Pin Signal 1 HS 7 2 HS 8 3 HS 9 4 HS 10 Type Signal name Function Signaling lamp S7 I Signaling lamp S8 Signaling lamp S9 All inputs "High" active Signaling lamp S10 Connector X24 Only the special versions MPP 483 S and MPP 483 L are equipped with these connectors. Connector designation:X24 Connector type: MCD 1.5/8-G1-3.81 HT BK Cable length (max.): 1.5 m Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 277 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Table 9-14 Connector X24 Pin Signal B1 B2 B3 S53 B4 S54 B5 Type Signal name Pin Signal S51 Ext. key S51 A1 H51 LED_S51 S52 Ext. key S52 A2 H52 LED_ S52 Ext. key S53 A3 H53 Ext. key S54 A4 H54 S55 Ext. key S55 A5 H55 LED_ S55 B6 S56 Ext. key S56 A6 H56 LED_ S56 B7 S57 Ext. key S57 A7 H57 LED_ S57 B8 S58 Ext. key S58 A8 H58 LED_ S58 Pin Signal Reference potential +24 V A1 M24_EXT I Type Signal name LED_ S53 O LED_ S54 Viewed from the PCB: B at top of plug connector A at bottom of plug connector Connector X25 Connector designation:X25 Connector type: MCD 1.5/8-G1-3.81 HT BK Cable length (max.): 1.5 m Table 9-15 Connector X25 Pin Signal Type B1 P24_OUT B2 S13 Emergency stop button A2 HS13 Emergency stop LED B3 S14 KT-S14 A3 HS14 LED-S14 B4 S15 KT-S15 A4 HS15 B5 S59 *) KT-IN3/emergency stop override A5 H59 B6 S60 Mode selection A6 H60 LED-S60 B7 S61 Rapid withdrawal A7 H61 LED-S61 B8 S62 *) S32 / HGA enabling unit plugged in / terminating connector A8 M24_EXT V I Signal name Type V O V Signal name Reference poten tial +24 V LED-S15 LED-S59 Reference poten tial +24 V *) can only be used as a neutral input without HGA 278 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces 9.3.2.4 Handheld unit connection HT 6 MPI / OPI X1 interface The interface supports transfer rates of up to 1.5 MBit/s. Connector designation:X1 Connector type: 9-pin sub-D socket Cable length (max.): 100 m Table 9-16 MPI / OPI X1 interface Pin Signal name Type 1 N.C. - Not connected Not connected 2 N.C. - 3 RS_DP I/O Meaning RS-465 differential signal 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 M5EXT V 5 V external ground 6 P5EXT V 5 V external potential Not connected 7 N.C. - 8 XRS_DP I/O 9 N.C. - RS-465 differential signal Not connected Enabling X20 Connector designation:X20 Connector type: MCV 1.5/8-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 9-17 Enabling X20 Pin Signal name Type Meaning 1 ZS1.1 Enabling button 1 2 ZS1.2 Call-up enabling button 1 3 ZS2.1 Enabling button 2 4 ZS2.2 Call-up enabling button 2 Emergency Stop override X21 Connector designation:X21 Connector type: MCV 1.5/8-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 279 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Table 9-18 Emergency Stop override X21 Pin Signal name Type Meaning 1 NOT_ HALT 1.1 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1.1 2 NOT_ HALT 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1.2 3 NOT_ HALT 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.1 4 NOT_ HALT 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.2 5/6 N.C. - Not connected 7 XNAUE I Emergency Stop override negated 8 3P24_HGA V 24 V Note Emergency stop X21: Supply voltage: 24 VDC; switched current: Max. 500 mA. Handwheel X22 Connector designation:X22 Connector type: MCV 1.5/4-G5.08 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 9-19 Handwheel X22 Pin Signal name 1 HR_A 2 HR_XA 3 HR_B 4 HR_XB Type Meaning Handwheel A Handwheel A negated O Handwheel B Handwheel B negated Handheld unit connection XS12 Connector designation:XS12 Connector type: RC-17S1YM2H3SW Table 9-20 Pin 280 Handheld unit connection XS12 Signal name 1 NOT_ HALT 2.1 2 MPI_A 3 3M24 4 3P24 Type I/O V Meaning Function EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP RS-485 data MPI Ground 24 V +24 V Power supply Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Pin 9.3.2.5 Signal name Type Meaning 5 ZS1.1 Enabling button 1 6 ZS1.2 Call-up enabling button 2 7 HR_B 8 HR_A 9 Handwheel B O Function Enabling function Handwheel A Handwheel NOT_ HALT 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1.2 EMERGENCY STOP 10 NOT_ HALT 1.1 EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 1.1 11 ASS 12 NOT_ HALT 2.2 13 MPI_B 14 ZS2.1 15 HR_XA 16 ZS1.2 17 HR_XB I I/O O O Terminating connector Terminating connector plugged in EMERGENCY STOP NC contact 2.2 EMERGENCY STOP RS-485 data MPI Enabling button 2 Enabling function Handwheel A negated Handwheel Call-up enabling button 1 Enabling function Handwheel B negated Handwheel Handheld unit connection HT 2/8 Ethernet X1 / X2 Connector designation:X1, X2 Connector type: RJ-45 socket Table 9-21 Ethernet X1 / X2 Pin Signal name 1 TD+ Type Meaning Transmit data + 2 TD- O 3 RD+ I Receive data + 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 RD- I Receive data - 7 N.C. - Not connected 8 N.C. - Not connected Transmit data - Panel Present X7 Connector designa tion: Connector type: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 X7 6-pin Phoenix terminal 281 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Table 9-22 Assignment of the interface Panel Present X7 Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning 1 PRES O "High": Panel (HT 2/8) plugged in 2 N.C. - Not connected 3 N.C. - Not connected 4 N.C. - Not connected 5 N.C. - Not connected 6 M P Ground Emergency Stop wiring terminal X8 Connector designa tion: Connector type: Table 9-23 X8 4-pin Phoenix terminal Assignment of the emergency stop wiring terminal X8 Pin Protective circuit 1 On-board jumper between 1 and 2 2 3 On-board jumper between 3 and 4 4 Note Use this terminal for simple routing of the emergency stop cables, optional. The connector is only used to assist looping through. The connected pins 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 have no additional function on the connection module. Enabling X20 Connector designation:X20 Connector type: MCV 1.5/8-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 9-24 Pin 282 Enabling X20 Signal name Type Meaning 1 ZUST1P I Electronic enabling button 1P 2 ZUST1M O Electronic enabling button 1M 3 ZUST2P I Electronic enabling button 2P 4 ZUST2M O Electronic enabling button 2M Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Pin Signal name 5 N.C. Type Not connected Meaning 6 N.C. Not connected 7 N.C. Not connected 8 N.C. Not connected Emergency Stop override X21 Connector designation:X21 Connector type: MCV 1.5/10-G3.81 Cable length (max.): 30 m Table 9-25 Emergency Stop override X21 Pin Signal name 1 STOP23 2 STOP24 3 STOP13 4 STOP14 Type Meaning Emergency Stop NC contact 1.1 Emergency Stop NC contact 1.2 I/O Emergency Stop NC contact 2.1 Emergency Stop NC contact 2.2 5 M V 6 N.C. - Not connected 7 IN_S59 I Emergency Stop override negated 8 P24_FILT V 24 V 9 IN_S59_EXT 10 IN_S62_EXT Key-operated switch actuated O Terminating connector plugged in Note Emergency stop X21: Supply voltage: 24 VDC; switched current: Max. 500 mA. Handheld unit connection XS12 Connector designation:XS12 Connector type: 9GX3BXC-T22QF10-0004 Table 9-26 Handheld unit connection XS12 Pin Signal Type 1 HH_PR_P 2 HH_PR_M I 3 HP24 V Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Meaning Function + Present line - Present line 24 V HH for present Power supply 283 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Pin 9.3.3 Signal Type Meaning Function 4 ZUST2M O Enabling button 2M 5 ZUST1P I Enabling button 1P 6 ZUST1M O Enabling button 1M 7 ZUST2P I Enabling button 2P 8 HH_L2.2 9 HH_L2.1 10 HH_L1.2 11 HH_L1.1 12 M V Ground Power supply 13 ABS_ST_PRES I Terminating connector Terminating connector plugged in 14 HH_P24 V 24 V HH supply Power supply 15 IDENT_B I/O 16 TX- 17 TX+ 18 RX+ 19 RX- 20 SHIELD - Cable shield 21 M V Ground 22 IDENT_A Enabling function HH emergency stop L2.2 I/O HH emergency stop L2.1 HH emergency stop L1.2 Emergency stop HH emergency stop L1.1 O I I/O Diff Signal Module Addr. Ethernet Transmit - Ethernet transmitted data Ethernet Transmit + Ethernet receive + Ethernet receive data Ethernet receive - Power supply Diff Signal Module Addr. Connection elements for COM board, customer keys and handheld unit connection This table shows plug connection elements for the following modules: COM board (COM) Customer keys (KT) Connection for handheld units (HGA) Table 9-27 Module COM 284 Connection elements Connector Units Terminal element X10 1 MSTB2,5/3-STZ-5,08,1776168 X20 1 6ES7972-0BA50-0XA0 6ES7972-0BB50-0XA0 *) X60 / X61 2 6FC9348-7HX X70 1 A5E00026403 Connectable crosssection (max.) Manufacturer 2.5 mm2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0.75 mm2 SIEMENS Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces Module KT HGA hand held unit BMPI HGA HT 2/8 Connector Units Terminal element Connectable crosssection (max.) X11 1 MSTB2,5/3-ST-5,08,1757022 2.5 mm2 X20 / X23 2 MC1.5/4-ST-3.81, 1803594 1.5 mm X21/X22 2 MC1.5/12-ST-3.81, 1803675 1.5 mm2 X24:A/B X25: A/B 4 MC1.5/8-ST-3.81, 1803633 1.5 mm2 X1 1 6ES7972-0BA50-0XA0 X20/X21 2 MC1.5/8-ST-3.81, 1803633 1.5 mm X22 1 MC1.5/4-ST-5.08, 1836095 1.5 mm2 X1 / X2 2 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 X7 1 MC1.5/6-STZ-3.81 GY BD1-6.1713198 1.5 mm2 X8 1 MC1.5/4-STZ-3.81 GY BD1-4.1713185 1.5 mm2 X 20 1 MC1.5/8-STZ-3.81 GY BD-1-8, 1713208 1.5 mm X 21 1 MC1.5/10-STZ-3.81 GY BD1-10, 1901658 1.5 mm2 2 Manufacturer PHOENIX CONTACT SIEMENS 2 PHOENIX CONTACT SIEMENS 2 PHOENIX CONTACT *) With PG connection 9.3.4 Settings via DIP switch The configurations which are available for the MPP 483 are displayed broken down by PROFIBUS DP and MPI (GD) communication protocols. For PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS slave ID which has been specified by PI is also named. Slave ID MPI (GD) PROFIBUS DP 8122 Configuration IN/OUT Standard 8/8 bytes Extended standard 12/8 bytes Standard 14/8 bytes Standard + handwheel 14/8 bytes + 2/0 words Settings for coding switch S3 Table 9-28 1 2 Settings for coding switch S3 for PROFIBUS DP 3 4 5 6 7 8 off 9 off 10 Meaning on MPP 483 as PROFIBUS slave Reserved off off off off off off off Bus address: 0 on off off off off off off Bus address: 1 off on off off off off off Bus address: 2 on on off off off off off Bus address: 3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... etc. off off on on on on on Bus address: 124 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 285 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 on off on on on on on 8 9 10 Meaning Bus address: 125 off on on on on on on Bus address: 126 Bits 8 and 9 are reserved during PROFIBUS mode and should be assigned "off". Table 9-29 8 9.3.5 Module address connection module HT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 S1 S2 0 to F 0 to F 1 Meaning Switch Module address Input / output images MPI standard input image Byte Bit7 Bit6 n+0 Bit5 Bit4 BA switch Bit3 Bit2 Function key HG connec tion HT 2 / HT 8 XS12:13 n+1 WS1/4 WS1/3 WS1/2 WS1/1 F16*) F11*) F6*) F1*) Customer key Key Customer key Extension key S15 WS4, pos.0 S14 n+2 Key WS4, pos.3 n+3 F21 WS4, pos.1 Extension key Emergency stop S51 S53 S13 S61 Emergency stop override S11 right-hand side momenta ry-contact S11 left-hand side momenta ry-contact S60 S59 S4 S3 S2 S1 Rapid traverse override WS5/8 WS5/4 WS5/2 Customer keys S10 n+4 Bit0 Customer keys SR key WS4, pos.2 S62 Bit1 WS5/1 Extension key S9 S8 S7 S52 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 WS3/4 Direct keys DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 n+5 Direct keys DT16 DT15 n+6 DT14 DT13 Extension keys n+7 Spindle override S58 S57 WS3/8 S54 WS2/16 WS2/8 Extension keys S56 S55 WS3/2 WS3/1 WS2/2 WS2/1 Feed override WS2/4 *) The function keys are not active if WS1 is assigned. 286 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces MPI extended input image Byte Bit7 Bit6 n+0 Bit5 Bit4 BA switch Bit3 Bit2 Function key HG connec tion HT 2 / HT 8 XS12:13 n+1 WS1/4 WS1/3 WS1/2 WS1/1 F16*) F11*) F6*) F1*) Customer key Key Customer key Extension key S15 WS4, pos.0 S14 n+2 Key WS4, pos.3 n+3 F21 WS4, pos.1 Extension key Emergency stop S51 S53 S13 S61 Emergency stop override S11 right-hand side momenta ry-contact S11 left-hand side momenta ry-contact S60 S59 S4 S3 S2 S1 Rapid traverse override WS5/8 WS5/4 WS5/2 Customer keys S10 n+4 Bit0 Customer keys SR key WS4, pos.2 S62 Bit1 WS5/1 Extension key S9 S8 S7 S52 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 WS3/4 Direct keys DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 n+5 Direct keys DT16 DT15 n+6 DT14 DT13 Extension keys n+7 Spindle override S58 S57 WS3/8 S54 WS2/16 WS2/8 Extension keys S56 S55 WS3/2 WS3/1 WS2/4 WS2/2 WS2/1 F3 F2 F1 F11 F10 F9 F19 F18 F17 Feed override n+8 Function keys F8 F7 F6 n+9 F5 F4 Function keys F16 F15 F14 n+10 F13 F12 Function keys F25 F24 F23 n+11 F22 F20 Reserve *) The function keys are not active if WS1 is assigned. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 287 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces PROFIBUS-DP input image Byte Bit7 Bit6 n+0 Bit5 Bit4 BA switch Bit3 Bit2 Function key HG connec tion HT 2 / HT 8 XS12:13 n+1 WS1/4 WS1/3 WS1/2 WS1/1 F16*) F11*) F6*) F1*) Customer key Key Customer key Extension key S15 WS4, pos.0 S14 n+2 Key WS4, pos.3 n+3 F21 WS4, pos.1 Extension key Emergency stop S51 S53 S13 S61 Emergency stop override S11 right-hand side momenta ry-contact S11 left-hand side momenta ry-contact S60 S59 S4 S3 S2 S1 Rapid traverse override WS5/8 WS5/4 WS5/2 Customer keys S10 n+4 Bit0 Customer keys SR key WS4, pos.2 S62 Bit1 WS5/1 Extension key S9 S8 S7 S52 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT12 DT11 DT10 DT9 WS3/4 Direct keys DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 n+5 Direct keys DT16 DT15 n+6 DT14 DT13 Extension keys n+7 Spindle override S58 S57 WS3/8 S54 WS2/16 WS2/8 Extension keys S56 S55 WS3/2 WS3/1 WS2/4 WS2/2 WS2/1 F3 F2 F1 F11 F10 F9 F19 F18 F17 WS2/2" WS2/1 WS3/2 WS3/1 Feed override n+8 Function keys F8 F7 F6 n+9 F5 F4 Function keys F16 F15 F14 n+10 F13 F12 Function keys F25 F24 F23 n+11 F22 F20 Reserve n+12 Feed override WS2/16 WS2/8 n+13 WS2/4 Spindle override WS3/16 WS3/8 WS3/4 *) The function keys are not active if WS1 is assigned. Optional 4-byte handwheel n+0 Handwheel 1 n+1 Handwheel 1 288 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces n+2 Handwheel 2 n+3 Handwheel 2 Keyboard layout - input image MPP 483 ) 033 6 033/ 6 6 6 ;6 6 ) ) ) 6SLQGOHRYHUULGH :6 ) 6 ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 6 ) 2963 2963 6 2963 2963 )HHGRYHUULGH :6 ) ) ) ) ) 6 ) ) ) ) 6 6 6 6 2996 2996 2996 2996 2996 5DSLGWUDYHUVHRYHUULGH :6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 29(O 29(, 6 29(, 29(, $OWHUQDWLYHHTXLSPHQWRIWKH YDULDEOHDUHD $UHD YDULDEOHHOHPHQWV 7KHHOHPHQWVZLWKLQWKH PDUNHGDUHDFDQEH LQWHUFKDQJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKH SRVVLEOHHTXLSPHQWYDULDWLRQV Image 9-13 6 6 ,WHP 6 ,WHP :6 :6 :6 ,WHP :6 ,WHP :6 :6 Front view Output image MPI / PROFIBUS-DP Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Hs8 HS7 HS15 HS14 n+0 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 HS3 HS2 HS1 Customer keys HS4 n+1 Customer keys n+2 HS10 HS9 H52 H51 Extension keys H58 H57 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 H56 H55 H54 H53 289 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.3 Interfaces n+3 SR key Feedback for Extension keys E9/E10 when S11 is not used emergency stop H61 n+4 HS13 H60 H59 HF3 HF2 HF1 HF11 HF10 HF9 HF19 HF18 Function keys HF8 HF7 HF6 HF5 n+5 HF4 Function keys HF16 HF15 HF14 HF13 n+6 HF12 Function keys HF24 HF23 HF22 HF21 HF20 n+7 HF17 Function key HF25 Keyboard layout - output image MPP 483 033 +6 +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) +) ;6 033/ 6 +) +6 +6 +6 +6 )HHGRYHUULGH :6 +) +) +) +) +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 5DSLGWUDYHUVHRYHUULGH :6 + + + + $UHD YDULDEOHHOHPHQWV 7KHHOHPHQWVZLWKLQWKH PDUNHGDUHDFDQEH LQWHUFKDQJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKH SRVVLEOHHTXLSPHQWYDULDWLRQV 290 +6 +) +) +) +) +) +) +) + Image 9-14 6SLQGOHRYHUULGH :6 + + + + + $OWHUQDWLYHHTXLSPHQWRIWKH YDULDEOHDUHD + :6 :6 Front Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.4 Mounting 9.4 Mounting Dimensions Image 9-15 Dimension drawing for MPP 483 and MPP 483 L *) The depth of 105 mm is only attainable with a Profibus adapter. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 291 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.4 Mounting Panel cutouts 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 6HDOLQJDUHD s 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV 5] s ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Image 9-16 Panel cutout for MPP 483 6HDOLQJDUHD 0RXQWLQJSDQHO 7HQVLRQMDFNVZLWKVHWVFUHZV s s Image 9-17 5] 3UHVVXUHSRLQWV IRUWHQVLRQMDFNV ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD Panel cutout for MPP 483 L The MPP 483 is attached to the rear side of the operator panel using 13 tension jacks (contained in the delivery kit). The tightening torque is 0.4 mm. Note The clearance to the next MPP (above and below) must be a minimum of 18 mm. Mounting position The mounting position is max. 60 to the vertical. 292 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.4 Mounting For mounting positions greater than 60, a fan must also be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine control panel constantly below 55 C. 033/ 033 Mounting position of LEDs Image 9-18 Mounting position for MPP 483 / MPP 483 L LEDs Marking of the anode connection: Insert +polarity of the LED in key at the side marked Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 293 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.4 Mounting Installing Profibus adapter If no handwheels are connected, the installation depth can be reduced from 140 mm to 105 mm. For this, insert the PCB Profibus adapter (1) according to the figure. Image 9-19 Installing Profibus adapter Changing the lamps on illuminated keys 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the key cap forward and off. 2. Use lamp remover LZ6 to lever out the key carrier. 3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ6 or a suitable insulating tube 4. Reinstall the key carrier and key cap in reverse order. Lamp remover LZ6 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from the Schlegel company. Georg Schlegel GmbH & Co. KG Am Kapellenweg 88525 Durmentingen Germany 294 Phone.: 0 73 71 / 502-0 Fax: 0 73 71 / 502 49 E-mail: info@schlegel.biz Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.4 Mounting Changing the lamps on pilot lamps 1. Use a screwdriver to pull the calotte and name bearing element forward and off. 2. Change the lamp using the lamp remover of service tool LZ6 or a suitable insulating tube 3. Reinstall the calotte and name bearing element. Note When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity (see Fig.: "Mounting position of LEDs" in Section: "Mounting") Mounting additional control elements 1. If necessary, unscrew the blank plug. 2. Place the contact maker on the socket and insert the lamp if required. 3. Insert pushbutton through front panel and screw on cap nut (by several turns). 4. Press pushbutton on contact maker. Note the position of the twist protection device! 5. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). Insert slide-in labels 1. Create the slide-in label (see Section: "Accessories and spare parts" "Labeling the slidein labels"). 2. Pull protective films off slide-in slot. 3. Guide in the slide-in labels (labeling facing operator side). 4. Align text in window. Note Slide in the labels when the MPP is not yet installed. Changing a contact maker 1. Loosen cap nut off pushbutton until just in front of contact maker. 2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3 mm out of the fixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed). 3. Remove the LED. 4. Change the contact element, remove defective contact maker from fixture and press new contact maker onto fixture. 5. Insert pushbutton into aperture and partially screw on cap nut. 6. Press pushbutton on contact maker until it snaps in. Note the position of the snap nose! 7. Screw down cap nut (tightening torque 0.8 Nm). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 295 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting 9.5 Connecting 9.5.1 MPP 483 Connecting the 24 V supply The 24 V supply is connected via a 3-pin terminal block at connector X10 and X11 to the rear of the machine control panel (see Figure: "Rear side of MPP 483 with interfaces" in Section: "Interfaces" "Overview"). The protective ground is secured to the M5 bolt (see Figure: "MPI connection"). NOTICE Damage to the device caused by unfused power supplies The 24 VDC supply must always be grounded and designed as "Protective Extra-Low Voltage" (PELV) - protection by function low voltage with safe isolation! Emergency stop circuit connection The emergency stop circuit connections are shown in figures "MPI connection" and "PROFIBUS DP connection." 296 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting MPI connection Connection of X1 (HGA) to X20 (COM board) and to the control 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 3&8 0 3 3( .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW :6 &20; 6 &20 + + + &206 + + :6 ; &20 6 ; ; + + + + ; &20 6 &20 ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ; +*$ 6 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ;; 6 ;6 .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW 03,EXV (QDEOH (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZR+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZLWK+*$ Image 9-20 MPI connection Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 297 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting PROFIBUS DP connection DP connection via X20 (COM board) to the control MPI connection via X1 (HGA) to the PCU of the panel Handwheel 1 from X60 (COM board) to connection X22 (HGA) for the handheld unit 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 3&8 0 3 3( .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW :6 &20; 6 &20 + + + &206 + + :6 ; &20 6 ; ; + + + + ; &20 6 &20 ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ; +*$ 6 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ;; 6 ;6 .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW 352),%86'3 (QDEOH 03,EXV +DQGZKHHO Image 9-21 298 +DQGZKHHO RU+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZR+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZLWK+*$ PROFIBUS DP connection Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting Connection for HT 8 DP connection via X20 (COM board) to the control Ethernet connection X1 / X2 (WKHUQHW 'LUHFWFRQWURONH\V 3&8 0 3 3( .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW &206 :6 ; 6 &20; &206 &20 :6 ; 6 ; ; &20 ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW 6 &20; 6 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW ;6 ; ; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW .7; .7; .7; .7; (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLW (QDEOH 3URILEXV03, +DQGZKHHO +DQGZKHHO (WKHUQHW Image 9-22 (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZR+*$ (PHUJVWRSFLUFXLWZLWK+*$ Ethernet connection Individual wiring connection Selector switches and individual contacts are connected in accordance with the customerspecific links required (see figure in Section: "Customer keys (KT) module"). Note Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded! Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 299 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting 9.5.2 COM board The COM board provides communication via the bus and forms the interface to the superordinate system. The parameters are set on coding switch S3. .7; .7; .7; :6 &20; 6 &20 + + + + + &206 :6 ; &20 6 ; ; + + + + ; &20 6 &20 ; ; +*$ 6 ;; 6 ;6 .7; .7; .7; .7; &206 21 Image 9-23 9.5.3 Coding switch S3 Handheld unit connection HT 8 with emergency stop override The connection for handheld units (HGA) of the HT 8 has four function complexes: Two-channel version of enabling function Three-port Ethernet switch 300 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting Connection of HT 8 Module address WARNING Danger of death if the enabling button is not DIN-conform It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the enabling button or the enable control is implemented according to DIN EN 60204-1, Section 9.2.6.3, and the enabling button, when released or pushed down, stops dangerous movements reliably. Emergency stop override S11 Implemented as pushbutton or keyswitch Pushbutton pressed or keyswitch, left probing - "Emergency stop override" of the handheld unit connection query via input S59 - Interruption of the power supply for the handheld unit connection when actuated Keyswitch, right probing: Unassigned function query via input S60 Image 9-24 6 +7 &LUFXLW &LUFXLW 6 +7 &LUFXLW &LUFXLW 2-channel architecture of the emergency stop override contacts With regard to their accidental failure, the contacts of the emergency stop override safety function form a 2-channel architecture together with the emergency stop button on the HT 8. In addition to the B10d value of the emergency stop button, the B10d value of S11 must also be taken into consideration for the assessment in both emergency stop circuits. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 301 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting The diagnostics for the contacts of S11 is performed on the HT 8 together with the diagnostics of the emergency stop button. WARNING Danger of death caused by failure of the "emergency stop" safety function The user must ensure that the emergency stop override is implemented with the S11 button in accordance with the safety goals required by the risk analysis of the machine. Actuation of the emergency stop override results in failure of the emergency stop safety function on the HT 8. The user must implement suitable organizational and/or technical procedures for this in order to achieve the safety goals. As a technical measure, the signaling contacts on the S11 emergency stop override: 31/32 and 61/62 can be used to trigger an "emergency stop" by the PLC after a monitoring time has expired (maximum five minutes) (see Remark 1 in the following figure). However, this measure alone does not satisfy the requirements of Category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008. If the risk analysis of your machine has shown that the technical measure for monitoring the emergency stop override (S11) is not sufficient, the signaling contacts 31/32 and 61/62 of S11 can be evaluated, e.g. by a safe PLC or the SPL of the SINUMERIK 840D sl. The requirements of category 3, PL d according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 can be met with this measure. For this purpose, the user must wire these contacts accordingly. All other functions can be found in the figure. 302 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting 6\VWHP(PHUJHQF\6WRS 6 ,QSXWPRGHVHOHFWLRQ 3&%.7;% ULJKW OHIW PRPHQWDU\ PRPHQWDU\ 6 FRQWDFW FRQWDFW 3&%KDQGKHOGXQLWFRQQHFWLRQ $XWKRUL]DWLRQ PRGH VHOHFWLRQ 3 ; 7;5; (WKHUQHW 6ZLWFK 7;5; (PHUJHQF\ 6WRSRYHUULGH O 7;5; ; Q 0RGXOHDGGUHVV 0 %2;,' ,1B6B(;7 ; ,1B6B(;7 ; 6 6 %2;,' SUHVHQW LGHQWLILFD WLRQ 35(6 ; Q ;V +DQGKHOGXQLW 0DLQERDUG (PHUJHQF\6WRS 7HUPLQDWLQJFRQQHFWRU SDUWRIWKH033ZLWK KDQGKHOGXQLWFRQQHFWLRQ (QDEOLQJEXWWRQV 7HUPLQDWLQJFRQQHFWRUFRGLQJ 6LJQDOWRWKH3/& 7ULJJHUVWLPHPRQLWRULQJ,IDIWHUWKHPRQLWRULQJWLPHKDVH[SLUHG PD[LPXPPLQ WKHVLJQDOOHYHOLVVWLOO ORZRURSHQWKHQWKH3/&PXVWLQLWLDWHDQ(0(5*(1&<2)) 1RWDYDLODEOHIRUYHUVLRQ6DVSXVKEXWWRQ Image 9-25 9.5.4 Handheld unit connection HT 8 Customer keys The customer keys (KT) module links the operator panel, handheld unit connection and COM board. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 303 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting The inputs for handheld unit connection and extension keys are opto-decoupled. The outputs belonging to these are issued by high-side drivers. The floating individual contacts of function keys S1 ... S4 and S7 ... S10 are shown in the figure. 7R3/& N K N K Image 9-26 J J P J P ; E FG %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 %ORFN6 D H I 3 3 D E F G J ; %ORFN6 0 %ORFN6 N K J DEFG DEFG DEFG DEFGDEFG DEFG 9 ; ; +6 P P P %ORFN6+6 K 6 J %ORFN6+6 %ORFN6+6 6 ; N J J %ORFN6+6 P %ORFN6+6 P %ORFN6+6 +6 %ORFN6+6 ; P %ORFN6+6 P N K N K N K ; N K 0 ) ; ; Individual wiring of the customer keys (a, b, ..., m designate IN and OUT of the individual blocks) NOTICE Damage to pushbutton contacts When using an external 24 V encoder supply, always protect the key contacts against overload in the individual wiring with an external fuse for L+ with the following properties: - circuit breaker of characteristic A, 1.6 A. If you use the encoder supply X20:A15/A16 or VS1/VS2 of the ET200S block 4/8 F DI 24 VDC PROFIsafe, the external fuse can be omitted. 304 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting 9.5.5 Circuits and wiring External control of signaling lamps The following circuit diagram relates to the lights in HS1 to HS4 and HS7 to HS10. 3 +6Q 0 ;; ; (1) Block Sn (2) External contact Image 9-27 External control of signaling lamps Circuit for emergency stop button .7;% 3 (1) Emergency stop button S13 (2) Emergency stop of the machine control Image 9-28 Circuit for emergency stop button Machine control panels Manual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mage 9-29 .7;B$ 6 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.5 Connecting Extension keys connection Extension keys connection Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.6 PROFIBUS communication Direct key connection &20ERDUG 23 Image 9-30 ; ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 9s Direct key connection Customer function S11 The NC-NO combination 3SB34 03-0A is right probing and a customer function of the S11. The NO contact is wired on delivery and can be queried through the MPP 483. The probing function facilitates mode selection. If an external evaluation of both contacts is required, the internal wiring on the NO contact 1.3/1.4 of the S 11 must be removed (see Fig.: "Extension keys connection" in this section). Remove connection 1 and connection 4 If connection 2 exists, wire the connection of S11:1.3 to S13:1.4 9.6 PROFIBUS communication 9.6.1 Prerequisites The assignment and quantity structure of PROFIBUS mode are shown in section: "Interfaces" "Input/output images". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 307 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.6 PROFIBUS communication PROFIBUS mode also offers the following functions: Connection of two handwheels 5-position spindle override Prerequisites The following components are needed as prerequisites for adding a DP slave MPP to the hardware configuration: SIMATIC STEP 7 as of Version 5.4, Service Pack 4 Toolbox 840D sl as of Version 2.6 Hardware configuration The DP slave MPP is shown in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the hardware catalog of "HW Config" under the following path: Profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MPP If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in "HW config" use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Note The GSD file of the DP slave MCP is located on the Toolbox CD in the directory: ...\8x0d\GSD\MPP 9.6.2 Configuring the DP slave MPP 483 This section describes how to configure a DP slave MPP with reference to the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in the figure by way of example. The hardware configuration has the following modules: SIMATIC Station 300 with SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK MPP with module: Standard+Handwheel Procedure Configuring the DP slave MPP as an S7 project involves the following steps: 1. Add the DP slave MPP to the configuration . 2. Set the PROFIBUS address. 308 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.6 PROFIBUS communication 3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MPP depending on the required functions . 4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots. Image 9-31 Configuring the DP slave MPP 483 Requirements: S7 project The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MPP is to be added: The S7 project has been created. A SIMATIC 300 station with SINUMERIK controller has been defined. Adding a DP slave MPP To add a DP slave MPP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog using the menu command View > Catalog. The DP slave MCP can be found at profile: Standard PROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control > SINUMERIK MPP Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MPP (SINUMERIK MPP) in the hardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station window by holding down the left mouse button. The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the following symbol: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 309 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.6 PROFIBUS communication When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MPP is added to the configuration. Note As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it. When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes to a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration. PROFIBUS parameters As soon as you have inserted MPP DP slave into the configuration, the "Properties PROFIBUS Interface SINUMERIK MPP" dialog box is displayed. Dialog: Properties - PROFIBUS Interface SINUMERIK MPP Tab card: Parameters Address: <PROFIBUS address> Button: "Properties..." Dialog: PROFIBUS properties Tab card: Network settings Data transfer rate: 12 Mbaud Profile: DP OK OK The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified: PROFIBUS address Data transfer rate Profile Note No automatic comparison of the PROFIBUS address! The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MPP set in the S7 project must match the PROFIBUS address set on the module (coding switch S3) (see Section: "Initialization") Adding a module The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be transferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. The following modules are available in HW Config under "SINUMERIK MPP": Universal module (not applicable) Standard Standard + handwheel 310 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.7 Maintenance and Service Setting the I/O addresses If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MPP, the input/output addresses are automatically assigned by STEP 7. Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be set here. 9.6.3 PLC user program If the MPP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does not check for module failure. In this case the MPP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the active DP slave: PLC operating system PROFIBUS controller If a failure of a DP slave MPP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP. Customized response The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program to customize the response to a DP slave MPP failure: OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt OB 86: Rack failure Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking organization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data. 9.7 Maintenance and Service Cleaning the device Use a soft cloth moistened either with water or a mild cleaning agent to clean the housing and operator control elements of the machine control panel. Checking the device In order to prevent foreign bodies or liquids entering the machine control panel, regularly check the device that all the housing screws are in place and tight for damage to the housing for damage to the cable cover or cable entry Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 311 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.8 Diagnostics Protect the device from environmental effects Protect the machine control panel against direct solar radiation and heat sources mechanical vibration and shock dust moisture, and strong magnetic fields Checking the emergency stop button Check the emergency stop button regularly to ensure that it functions correctly. 9.8 Diagnostics 9.8.1 LED displays LEDs H1 to H5 on the COM board provide information about the following states: Diagnostics H1 H3 Power On Lights up red Lights up green Lights up or ange H4 H5 Lights up red/off The LEDs light up for approx. 4 s. GD communication Off Lights up green Flashes orange Lights up red (80 Hz) There is no PROFIBUS com munication. Lights up red (bus error) Lights up green Off Flashes green (approx. 25 Hz) MPP is configured as PROFI BUS slave and with cyclic data exchange. Off Lights up green Off/orange Lights up green Fatal error LED display flashes red flashes green flashes green flashes orange For fatal software errors and incorrect DIP switch settings, the LEDs flash very quickly. LED H2 is reserved for service and is always off. + + Image 9-32 312 + + + Arrangement of the LEDs on the COM board Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.8 Diagnostics 9.8.2 Output functions Preconditions The MPP is presently booting. The MPP is not communicating with the control system/ PROFIBUS master, i.e. all of the LEDs in the keys are flashing. In this state, the output functions described in the following can be sequentially called. 1. Software version Simultaneously press the "F21" and "F25" keys. The software version is output using three digits. The individual digits are expressed in the binary format by the number of LEDs that are on (bright) in the first 3 "LED lines" on the MPP. The least significant bit position is at the right. ) ) 1. Digit of the software version 2. Digit of the software version 3. Digit of the software version Image 9-33 Example: Output of the actual software version "03.01.00.00" 2. Output of the bus address Keep the "F21" and "F25" pressed, and in addition, press the "F22" key. The actual bus address of the MPP is also output in the binary format by the number of LEDs in the keys that are switched on: PROFIBUS: Value range 0 ... 126 MPI: Value range 0 ... 15 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 313 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.8 Diagnostics ) ) ) Ones position of the bus address Tens position of the bus address Hundreds position of the bus address Image 9-34 9.8.3 Example: Output of PROFIBUS address "117" Key test Preconditions The MPP is presently booting. The MPP is not communicating with the control system/ PROFIBUS master, i.e. all of the LEDs in the keys are flashing. In this state, the operating functions described in the following can be executed in the test mode. Test mode Activation: Press the "F1" key. Automatic deactivation: No operator control was pressed in the last 3 seconds. Manual deactivation: Simultaneously press the "F1" and "F5" keys. Operating functions Function of the function keys and their associated LEDs: When pressing a function key, the associated LED is switched on. Function of the rotary switch Each time the rotary switch is turned, an LED is switched on in sequence in the form of a running light. Function of the key-operated switch: When the key-operated switch is turned, positions 0 - 3 are displayed by 0 up to three LEDs. 314 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.9 Technical data 9.9 Technical data 9.9.1 MPP 483 Safety Safety class according to EN 50178 III; PELV Degree of protection ac cording to EN 60529 Front side: IP54 Rear: IP10A Approvals CE / UL Electrical data Input voltage Power consumption, max. 24 V DC Boards: 12 W Lamps: LED 8.8 W Handheld unit: 12 W Handwheels: Total: 2 x 0.9 W 35 W Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Weight: Height: Width: Depth (front): Mounting depth: MPP 483 155 483 60 140 / 105 *) Approx. 3 kg MPP 483 L 244 483 60 140 / 105 Approx. 4.5 kg Tightening torques, max. Tension jack screws: 0.4 Nm M4 screws: 1.8 Nm M3 screws: 0.8 Nm *) *) M5 screws: 3 Nm When a PROFIBUS adapter is used Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 315 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.9 Technical data 9.9.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring Button contact maker Table 9-30 Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4; S7 to S10 (NC contact or NO contact) AC DC 50 V Rated insulation voltage Ue 50 V Rated operating current Ie 2A Rated operating current at 24 V Ie Min. rated operating current at 5 V Imin 2A 1 mA Volume resistance < 20 m Switching capacity 10 le 1.1 le Selector switch Table 9-31 Contacts with floating outputs WS1 / 9-11, 13, 15 Max. operating voltage Ue AC DC 50 V 50 V Switching capacity with resistive load 10 A Switching capacity with inductive load >2A Switching capacity at 24 V with resistive load 10 A Switching capacity at 24 V with inductive load 6A Rated values for arc-free switching at 24 V 0.3 A 0.22 A Emergency stop button S13 Rated voltage 24 VDC Current magnitude, max. 3A Current magnitude, min. 1 mA Switching capacity DC 13 according to EN 60947-5-1 Conditional rated short-circuit current 10 A gL/gG according to EN 60947-5-1 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the emergency stop button are taken into account. 316 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.9 Technical data SR mushroom-head button S61 Table 9-32 Contacts with floating outputs Usage category (EN 60947-5-1) Rated operational voltage Switching capacity AC DC Ue 24 V 24 V AC-12 le 10 A AC-15 le 6A DC-12 le 10 A DC-13 le 3A Imin 1 mA Min. rated operating current at 5 V For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the contact block are taken into account. Emergency stop override S11 Table 9-33 Contacts with floating outputs Usage category (EN 60947-5-1) AC DC Ue 24 V 24 V AC-12 le 10 A AC-15 le 6A DC-12 le Rated operational voltage Switching capacity DC-13 Min. rated operating current at 5 V 10 A le 3A Imin 1 mA For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3 B10d 500 000 Note The quantitative assessment of the emergency stop safety function must be based on the B10d values corresponding to the used standards (e.g. ISO 13849-1) under consideration of the respective application (frequency of the actuation, service life, diagnostics by the evaluation unit, etc.). The B10d values only apply when the technical properties of the contact block are taken into account. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 317 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.9 Technical data Inputs The inputs are opto-decoupled. Table 9-34 S51 ... S62, S14, S15, emergency stop S13 Status Switching voltage Number 15 H signal L signal Input characteristics curve following IEC61131, type 1 Rated value + 24 VDC Signal level +15 V to +30 V Rated value 0 V or open Signal level -3 V to +5 V In a group of 1 Cable length Max. 50 m AWG 16 Encoder power supply Remark 18.5 V to 30 V LED outputs Table 9-35 S51 ... S61, S14, S15, emergency stop HS13 Status Number Switching voltage Switching current 14 Load voltage 2P24 20.4 V ... 28.8 V Rated value +24 VDC 0.5 A H signal Signal level min. Ue - 0.16 V Max. 0.7 A / output L signal Max. signal level 2 V (idling) 0.3 mA Short-circuit protection Yes Typ. activation threshold 1.1 A RMS short-circuit current 0.5 A Electrical isolation In a group of No 1 Output total current Cable length Max. 3 A Max. 50 m AWG 16 Handheld unit connection XS12 The currents depend on the connected handheld unit. The internal connecting cables of the handheld unit connection B-MPI are designed for a rated voltage of 24 VDC and 2 A. The internal connecting cables of the handheld unit connection HT 8 are designed for a rated voltage of 24 VDC and 0.5 A. 318 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.10 Accessories and spare parts 9.10 Accessories and spare parts 9.10.1 Overview Numerous spare parts and accessories are available for the MPP 483. Contact your Siemens service center to order accessories and spare parts. 9.10.2 Labeling the slide-in labels NC NC Stop Start Machine on Initial state Start Machine off Stop after end of cycle Immediate Stop Acknowledge fault Next- Axes Lock/release protective doors 50 70 30 80 10 90 6 100 110 2 120 0 % Image 9-35 MPP 483 Machine Push Button Panel The figure shows the MPP 483 in the standard version. The same slide-in labels can be used for the MPP 483H and the MPP 483A. You can create your own slide-in labels in order to change the key labels. A printable blank film (DIN A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose. A spare parts kit containing three blank films is also available (Item no.: A5E00414151). Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 319 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.10 Accessories and spare parts Image 9-36 Blank film for MCP 483 film keyboard 1) Print direction 320 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.10 Accessories and spare parts Files for printing the blank film The DOConCD / Catalog NC 61 (CD enclosed) contains two files for printing the blank films: Template_MPP483.doc [assignment for standard variants of MPP 483 - (A)] 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 76 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 7H[W 76 SymbolsMPP483.doc [key symbols as Word file - (B)] /DEHOLQJVWULSIRU033033$ 033+ /DEHOLQJVWULSRIWKHNH\URZV WKHULJKWWH[WILHOG LVRQO\XVHGIRUWKH033/DQGFDQEHFXWWR WKHQHFHVVDU\OHQJWK 1H[W $[HV 6LQJOH PRGH (6 ; (6 = PP )6 7H[W WUDQVSDUHQW /LQNHG PRGH 1& 6WDUW 1& 6WRS WUDQVSDUHQW WUDQVSDUHQW < = WUDQVSDUHQW (5 (5 = PP = PP = PP = PP 7H[W /DEHOLQJVWULSIRU:6;6 6LQJOH PRGH 7H[W ;;;;;;;; ;;;;;;;; /LQNHG PRGH 7H[W ;;;;;; ;;;;;; = PP 7H[W = PP = PP 7H[W = PP = PP 7H[W = PP 7H[W 76 /DEHOLQJVWULSIRU033/ WUDQVSDUHQW WUDQVSDUHQW )6 )6 )6 )6 Image 9-37 Template_MPP483.doc (A) Table 9-36 Symbole_MPP483.doc (B) )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 )6 ; < = Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 ; ; 321 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.10 Accessories and spare parts < < = = & & 9. (% (6 (5 ,2 60 1& 6WDUW 1& 6WRS 66 68 1H[W $[HV Preparing standard slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_MPP483.doc" (A) 1. Open the file "Template_MPP483.doc" in MS Word. The key symbols are arranged in a table on the position that corresponds to their location on the keyboard. The borders visible in the table are not printed. 2. Place the blank film in the printing direction in the slot of your laser printer (see figure: "Blank film for MPP 483 membrane keyboard"). 3. Select "film" as the printable medium if your printer allows this setting. 4. Start the printing process using MS Word. Note Make a test print on paper before you print on the film. Allow the film to cool after printing so that the ink can dry. 5. Cut the slide-in labels out of the film along the edges (outer lines). 6. Round off the corners of the slide-in labels approx. 1.5 mm to facilitate insertion. 7. Slide in the printed slide-in label. 8. Shorten the labeling strip for the long-stroke keys for MPP 483 and MPP 483A, because only the first four text fields of the strips TS1 and TS2 are needed. Preparing specific slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Symbole_MPP483.doc" (B) 1. Open both the "Symbole_MPP483.doc" file and the"Template_MPP483.doc" file. 2. Copy the desired key symbol from the file "Symbole_MPP483.doc". 3. Position the cursor in the desired field of the template (A), add the symbol and adjust its size accordingly by dragging it by the gripping points. 322 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.10 Accessories and spare parts 4. To move a symbol to a different position, - select the symbol, - cut it out and - add it into the desired table cell. 5. If all the symbols are positioned as desired, follow the instructions in Section: "Preparing standard slide-in labels with the aid of the file: "Template_MPP483.doc" as of point 2. Note Input of characters/text instead of symbols Use the "Arial" font to format text. This font is comparable to the "Univers S57" font, used by Siemens for the key labeling. Creating your own symbols Drawing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw): - Draw a square 15 x 15 mm without frames, filled with the color white. - Place the graphic in the center of this square. - Group the graphic and square together and add this group to the file "Template_MPP483.doc". Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher, Paint) - Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) filled with the color white. - Draw the graphic or add an image in the center of this square. - Copy the graphic and square and add them both to the file "Template_MPP483.doc". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 323 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.10 Accessories and spare parts 9.10.3 Handwheel connection A connecting cable is available to connect the COM board handwheels, see Accessories and spare parts (Page 27). 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP 3LQ 1 $B+: ;$B+: %B+: ;%B+: 6KLHOG +RXVLQJ ([SODQDWLRQ 6LJQDOFRQQHFWRU Image 9-38 9.10.4 6LJQDOFDEOH 6LJQDOFRQQHFWRU0&673+2(1,; Connection cable for HHU handwheel Display elements and operator controls You can retrofit the following control elements: Function Upper section actuator / accessories Lower section contact block / signaling lamp Signaling light Illuminated nipple 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-WS (white) AL5 lamp socket with spot LED S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Light Button Pushbutton 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) RXJN-GWS (black) Button contact maker AT2 For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external 324 Mounting location S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Application Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.10 Accessories and spare parts Function Upper section actuator / accessories Lower section contact block / signaling lamp Mounting location Application Illuminated key with socket for T5.5K Pushbutton 28 mm RXJN-GB (yellow) RXJN-GN (green) RXJN-RT (red) RXJN-BL (blue) RXJN-KL (crystal clear) Illuminated button contact maker ATL2 with spot LED S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external L5.5K28UW (white) S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Spot LED Keyswitch *) switching angle of 90, 2 positions Safety lock cylinder 28 mm RXJSSA 15 E key can be removed when in both positions Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Keys / position se lector RX-JEWEL 22.3 mm Schlegel catalog Button contact maker AT2 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Raised keys 6FC5247-0AA41-0 AA0 2 RTAO pushbuttons with plunger elongation 2 AT2 special version S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 For S1, 1 NC internal, 2 NO + 1 NC external For S2 ... S4, S7 ... S10, 1 NC internal, 1 NO + 1 NC external *) Safety-related Note When assigning the colors for keys and signaling lights to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 113 Part 1, Chapter Pushbuttons/colors. Name Description Dummy plug BVR22 1 S1 ... S4 S7 ... S10 Selector switch Toggle FS1 Conversion to toggle switch 1 WS1 Override spindle / rapid traverse Electronic rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, button, pointer, spin dle dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 WS3 Override feed / rapid traverse Electronic rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 WS2 Override feed / rapid traverse1) Electronic rotary switch 1x29G, T=32, cap, button, pointer, feed dials and rapid traverse 1 6FC5247-0AF14-1AA0 WS5 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Num ber Article number Mounting location 325 Machine pushbutton panel: MPP 483 9.10 Accessories and spare parts Name EMERGENCY STOP Description Num ber Article number Mounting location 22 mm actuating element, 40 mm mushroom pushbutton, snap ac tion with tamper protection, latch ing, red, with holder, unlit 1 3SB3000-1HA20 *) S13 Contact block, 2 NC, Extension NC, emergency stop 1 3SB3400-0E *) S13 Protective collar for front panel mounting, protection against accidental ac tuation 1 3SB3921-0AK S13 Control and signaling devices All elements marked with LE 3SB3 following selection from S51 ... S62 Low-Voltage Controls and Dis S14, S15 tribution Catalog (LV 1) EKS Euchner identification system Serial interface EKS-A-ISX-G01-ST09/03 1) PROFIBUS DP interface S14 EKS-A-IDX-G01-ST09/03 only for option *) Safety-related 326 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 10 MCP Interface PN 10.1 Description The MCP Interface PN module enables customer-specific machine control panels to be connected to a machine tool. Communication is handled via PROFINET RT or Industrial Ethernet. You can connect the following operator controls to the interface: 80 single keys 64 LEDs 2 handwheels 2 rotary override switches The following inputs/outputs are also available: 9 digital inputs (5 V) 6 digital inputs (24 V) 15 digital inputs (24 V / each 0.15 A) Validity The following description applies to the MCP PN interface. Article number: 6FC5303-0AF03-0AA0 System configuration The following diagram shows a system configuration with ETHERNET. b9'&SRZHUVXSSO\ ; 1&8 2SHUDWRUSDQHO ZLWK HJ7&8[ 0&3,QWHUIDFH31 ; ; (7+(51(7 ; ; (7+(51(7 Alternatively, you can connect the MCP Interface PN module via PROFINET to the NCU. The TCU must remain connected to the NCU via ETHERNET. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 327 MCP Interface PN 10.1 Description 9'&SRZHUVXSSO\ ; 2SHUDWRUSDQHO ZLWK HJ7&8[ 1&8 ; ; 0&3,QWHUIDFH31 ; (7+(51(7 ; 352),1(7 Diagram Rating plate Terminal strips / connectors for operator controls Diagnostic LEDs PROFINET interface X2 (Industrial Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s) PROFINET interface X3 (Industrial Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s) Grounding screw M5 for potential equalization connection 24 VDC power supply X1 Image 10-1 328 View of MCP Interface PN Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.1 Description LED displays + + + + Name Function State Meaning H500 POWER OK (green) Lights up All internal voltages are in the setpoint range. Does not light up At least one of the generated voltages has exceeded its setpoint; a reset will be initiated. Does not light up No PROFINET communication. Lights up PROFINET is synchronized (STOP state). Flashes (0.5 Hz) PROFINET is synchronized (RUN state). Lights up PROFINET group fault. H501 BUS_SYNC H502 BUS_FAULT H505 Temperature alarm (red) Lights up Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 The upper limit temperature (T_Critical) of temperature sensor LM77 has been exceeded. 329 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces 10.2 Interfaces 10.2.1 Overview 1 Image 10-2 330 12 MCP Interface PN interfaces Function Designation 24 VDC power supply X1 PROFINET interface X2 PROFINET interface X3 Feed rotary override switch X30 Spindle override rotary switch X31 Digital inputs (24 V) X40, X41 Digital inputs (TTL) X51, X52, X55 Digital outputs (24 V) X53, X54, X56, X57, X58 Handwheels X60, X61, X62 Keys and LED interface X111, X112, X113, X114 DIP switch for setting the MCP address S1 DIP switch for setting the handwheel signal type S2 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces 10.2.2 Terminals Pin assignment In principle you will find the pin assignments of the individual interfaces in "General information and networking", Section "Connecting", except for: The interfaces for digital inputs/outputs and the handwheel terminal strip X62. Digital inputs X40, X41 A total of six 24 V signals can be evaluated via the X40 and X41 connectors. 9 ; ,1B9>@ N ,1B9>@ Q ,1B9>@ 0 Image 10-3 N Q 0 Schematic circuit diagram for X40 X40, X41 4-pin plug connector No galvanic isolation, short-circuit proof 0.6 m Assignment of connector X40 Pin Name 1 IN_24V[0] 2 IN_24V[1] 3 IN_24V[2] 4 M Table 10-2 N 0 Connector designation: Connector type: Special features: Max. cable length: Table 10-1 N 9 Type Meaning 24 V input 0 I 24 V input 1 24 V input 2 V Ground Type Meaning Assignment of connector X41 Pin Name 1 IN_24V[3] 2 IN_24V[4] 3 IN_24V[5] 4 M Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 24 V input 3 I 24 V input 4 24 V input 5 V Ground 331 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Table 10-3 Technical data for X40 and X41 Parameters Value Voltage: -3 V to 30 V Typical current consumption: 6 mA at 24 VDC Signal level (including ripple): High signal level: 15 V to 30 V Low_Level: -3 V to 5 V Digital inputs X51, X52, X55 Only switches (passive inputs) may be connected via the X51, X52 and X55 connectors. Typically, illuminated pushbuttons are connected here. The lamps in the pushbuttons are activated via X53, X54, X56, X57 and X58. Note Connection miniature handheld unit Alternatively, at the inputs X51, X52 and X55, one miniature handheld unit may be operated. For details, please refer to the corresponding section. 9 9 N ; 9 N ,1>@ ,1>@ ,1>@ 0 Q) 0 Image 10-4 0 Schematic circuit diagram for X51 Connector designation: Connector type: Special feature: Max. cable length: 332 0 0 X51, X52, X55 4-pin plug connector No galvanic isolation 0.6 m Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Table 10-4 Assignment of connector X51 Pin Name 1 IN6[0] 2 IN6[1] 3 IN6[2] 4 M Table 10-5 Name 1 IN6[3] 2 IN6[4] 3 IN6[5] 4 M Customer key 0 I Customer key 1 Customer key 2 V Ground Type Meaning Customer key 3 I Customer key 4 Customer key 5 V Ground Type Meaning Assignment of connector X55 Pin Name 1 IN6[6] 2 IN6[7] 3 IN6[8] 4 M Table 10-7 Meaning Assignment of connector X52 Pin Table 10-6 Type Customer key 6 I Customer key 7 Customer key 8 V Ground Technical data for X51, X52 and X55 Parameters Value Voltage: Nominal: 0 V to 5 V Permissible: -3 V to 30 V Typical current consumption: 0.2 mA at 5 VDC -0.3 mA at 0 VDC Signal level (including ripple): High signal level: 2.3 V to 5 V Low signal level: 0 V to 1 V Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 333 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Digital outputs X53, X54, X56, X57, X58 The fifteen outputs are provided to control lamps in the illuminated pushbuttons. Recommended are lamps with 1.2 W (50 mA). Only "small" relays, valves, etc. can be connected. +LJK6LGH 6ZLWFK 3 ; 287B9>@ 287B9>@ 287B9>@ 0 0 Image 10-5 Schematic circuit diagram for X54 Note Observe the utilization of the power supply The fifteen 24 V outputs are divided into two groups with eight or seven outputs. Group 1 covers the output signals OUT_24V[0 ... 7] Group 2 covers the output signals OUT_24V[8 ... 14] Each group may load the 24 V power supply with max. 1.2 A. Connector designation: Connector type: Special features: Max. cable length: Table 10-8 334 X53, X54, X56, X57, X58 4-pin plug connector No galvanic isolation, short-circuit proof 0.6 m Assignment of connector X54 Pin Name 1 OUT_24V[0] 2 OUT_24V[1] 3 OUT_24V[2] 4 M Type Meaning 24 V output 0 (group 1) O 24 V output 1 (group 1) 24 V output 2 (group 1) V Ground Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Table 10-9 Assignment of connector X53 Pin Name Type 1 OUT_24V[3] 2 OUT_24V[4] 3 OUT_24V[5] 4 M Meaning 24 V output 3 (group 1) O 24 V output 4 (group 1) 24 V output 5 (group 1) V Ground Type Meaning Table 10-10 Assignment of connector X56 Pin Name 1 OUT_24V[6] 2 OUT_24V[7] 3 OUT_24V[8] 4 M 24 V output 6 (group 1) O 24 V output 7 (group 1) 24 V output 8 (group 2) V Ground Type Meaning Table 10-11 Assignment of connector X57 Pin Name 1 OUT_24V[9] 2 OUT_24V[10] 3 OUT_24V11] 4 M 24 V output 9 (group 2) O 24 V output 10 (group 2) 24 V output 11 (group 2) V Ground Type Meaning Table 10-12 Assignment of connector X58 Pin Name 1 OUT_24V[12] 2 OUT_24V[13] 3 OUT_24V[14] 4 M 24 V output 12 (group 2) O 24 V output 13 (group 2) 24 V output 14 (group 2) V Ground Table 10-13 Technical data for X53, X54, X56, X57 and X58 Parameters Value Voltage: Nominal: 24 V Permissible: 18 V to 30 V Max. load current: Per output: 0.7 A Per connector: 1 A Per output at 100% simultaneity of all fifteen outputs: 0.15 A UL certified rating Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Each output: 24 V / 0.15 A general, resistive 24 V / 3.6 W tungsten 24 V / 0.15 A pilot duty 335 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces X62 handwheels Up to two handwheels can be connected via the X62. This means, purely on the basis of calculations, together with X60 and X61, four handwheels can be inserted. However, only a total of two handwheels can be operated concurrently because the signals from X60 and X61 are routed parallel to X62. Switching between TTL and differential signals: See switch S2. Note The handwheels are supplied by the MCP Interface PN module with 5 V / 100 mA. An external power supply is not permitted. Connector designation: Connector type: Special features: Max. cable length: X62 12-pin plug connector No galvanic isolation 5m Table 10-14 Assignment of connector X62 336 Pin Name Type Meaning 1 P5HW V 5 V power supply 2 M V Ground 3 HW1_A I Handwheel 1 pulses track A 4 HW1_XA I Handwheel 1 pulses track A (negated) 5 HW1_B I Handwheel 1 pulses track B 6 HW1_XB I Handwheel 1 pulses track B (negated) 7 P5HW V 5 V power supply 8 M V Ground 9 HW2_A I Handwheel 2 pulses track A 10 HW2_XA I Handwheel 2 pulses track A (negated) 11 HW2_B I Handwheel 2 pulses track B 12 HW2_XB I Handwheel 2 pulses track B (negated) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Digital inputs and outputs X111, X112, X113, X114 You can connect up to 80 keys and 64 LEDs. The connectors are connected to the machine control panel with ribbon cables. Inputs: All keys signal "high" in the idle state (= open). When actuated, the state changes to "low". Short-stroke keyboards and membrane keyboards can be connected. 5 V signals can also be applied to the inputs. They are TTL-compatible, but not 24 V-tolerant. Outputs: - Instead of a LED, an external logic with TTL-compatible inputs can also be connected. Because the P5 (=5 V) routed externally are not short-circuit proof, they may be loaded in total (X111 to X114) with maximum 500 mA. - Because of the series resistor, the outputs are short-circuit proof but not protected against external overvoltage. NOTICE The provision of an external voltage can destroy the module. No voltage may be supplied at the P5 connections. 39 N 5Y ; ; .H\ /(' ,1>@ ; ; 0 0 0DFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO Image 10-6 X111 schematic circuit diagram Note LED brightness The setting of the LED brightness can be implemented by an additional external resistor connected in series. Alternatively, the LEDs can also be operated with polarity reversal at P5, in which case the LEDs illuminate for low signal level. Connector designation: Connector type: Special features: Max. cable length: Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 X111, X112, X113, X114 40-pin plug connector No galvanic isolation, with interlock 2m 337 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Note Allocation of the inputs/outputs The inputs INi[j] are allocated into five groups (i=0..4) each of 16 inputs (j=0..15). The outputs OUTi[j] are allocated into four groups (i=0..3) each of 16 inputs (j=0..15). Example: IN0[0] = input 0 of group 0 Table 10-15 Assignment of connector X111 338 Pin Name Type Pin 1 Ground V 2 Ground V 3 IN0[0] I 4 OUT0[0] O 5 IN0[1] 6 OUT0[1] 7 IN0[2] 8 OUT0[2] 9 IN0[3] 10 OUT0[3] 11 IN0[4] 12 OUT0[4] 13 IN0[5] 14 OUT0[5] 15 IN0[6] 16 OUT0[6] 17 IN0[7] 18 OUT0[7] 19 IN0[8] 20 OUT0[8] 21 IN0[9] 22 OUT0[9] 23 IN0[10] 24 OUT0[10] 25 IN0[11] 26 OUT0[11] 27 IN0[12] 28 OUT0[12] 29 IN0[13] 30 OUT0[13] 31 IN0[14] 32 OUT0[14] 33 IN0[15] 34 OUT0[15] 35 IN4[0] 36 IN4[1] I 37 IN4[2] 38 IN4[3] I 39 P5 = 5 V 40 P5 = 5 V V V Name Type Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Table 10-16 Assignment of connector X112 Pin Name Type Pin Name Type 1 Ground V 2 Ground V 3 IN1[0] I 4 OUT1[0] O 5 IN1[1] 6 OUT1[1] 7 IN1[2] 8 OUT1[2] 9 IN1[3] 10 OUT1[3] 11 IN1[4] 12 OUT1[4] 13 IN1[5] 14 OUT1[5] 15 IN1[6] 16 OUT1[6] 17 IN1[7] 18 OUT1[7] 19 IN1[8] 20 OUT1[8] 21 IN1[9] 22 OUT1[9] 23 IN1[10] 24 OUT1[10] 25 IN1[11] 26 OUT1[11] 27 IN1[12] 28 OUT1[12] 29 IN1[13] 30 OUT1[13] 31 IN1[14] 32 OUT1[14] 33 IN1[15] 34 OUT1[15] 35 IN4[4] 36 IN4[5] I 37 IN4[6] 38 IN4[7] I 39 P5 = 5 V 40 P5 = 5 V V Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 V 339 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Table 10-17 Assignment of connector X113 340 Pin Name Type Pin Name Type 1 Ground V 2 Ground V 3 IN2[0] I 4 OUT2[0] O 5 IN2[1] 6 OUT2[1] 7 IN2[2] 8 OUT2[2] 9 IN2[3] 10 OUT2[3] 11 IN2[4] 12 OUT2[4] 13 IN2[5] 14 OUT2[5] 15 IN2[6] 16 OUT2[6] 17 IN2[7] 18 OUT2[7] 19 IN2[8] 20 OUT2[8] 21 IN2[9] 22 OUT2[9] 23 IN2[10] 24 OUT2[10] 25 IN2[11] 26 OUT2[11] 27 IN2[12] 28 OUT2[12] 29 IN2[13] 30 OUT2[13] 31 IN2[14] 32 OUT2[14] 33 IN2[15] 34 OUT2[15] 35 IN4[8] 36 IN4[9] I 37 IN4[10] 38 IN4[11] I 39 P5 = 5 V 40 P5 = 5 V V V Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Table 10-18 Assignment of connector X114 Pin Name Type Pin Name 1 Ground V 2 Ground V 3 IN3[0] I 4 OUT3[0] O 5 IN3[1] 6 OUT3[1] 7 IN3[2] 8 OUT3[2] 9 IN3[3] 10 OUT3[3] 11 IN3[4] 12 OUT3[4] 13 IN3[5] 14 OUT3[5] 15 IN3[6] 16 OUT3[6] 17 IN3[7] 18 OUT3[7] 19 IN3[8] 20 OUT3[8] 21 IN3[9] 22 OUT3[9] 23 IN3[10] 24 OUT3[10] 25 IN3[11] 26 OUT3[11] 27 IN3[12] 28 OUT3[12] 29 IN3[13] 30 OUT3[13] 31 IN3[14] 32 OUT3[14] 33 IN3[15] 34 OUT3[15] Type 35 IN4[12] 36 IN4[13] I 37 IN4[14] 38 IN4[15] I 39 P5 = 5 V 40 P5 = 5 V V V Table 10-19 Technical data of the inputs of X111 to X114 Parameters Value Voltage: 0 V to 5 V Typical current consumption: 0.2 mA at 5 VDC -0.3 mA at 0 VDC Signal level (including ripple): High signal level: 2.3 V to 5 V Low signal level: 0 V to 1 V Table 10-20 Technical data of the outputs of X111 to X114 Parameters Value Voltage: 0 V to 5 V (depending on the load) Typical load current (without external series resistor): 8 mA at LED flow voltage = 2.3 V Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 15 mA at short-circuit 341 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces 10.2.3 Switch 2)) 21 6 Image 10-7 6 DIP switches S1, S2 in the delivered condition The switches have the following meaning in the delivered condition: S1 is in PROFINET mode with default device name "mcp-pn". S2 is in the "differential interface connection" handwheel signal type position. Switch S1 in PROFINET mode Table 10-21 General switch S1 setting 1-8 9 10 Meaning off on on PROFINET device name: mcp-pn The two switches S1-9 and S1-10 must remain set to "on" in order for PN functionality to be supported. The switches S1-1 to S1-8 define the default device name. Up to 128 default device names are permitted: If these default device names are used, there is no need for initialization of the MCP. Note The default device names cannot be reconfigured using the STEP7 "device initialization" facility for example. If you are connecting the MCP Interface PN to a SINUMERIK control as a PROFINET component, make sure that this functionality is supported by the control concerned. DCP mode: No default device name is available in this mode. The device name must be set by means of an initialization procedure and remains saved on the interface. It is deleted again if the factory setting is restored, e.g. using STEP7. Table 10-22 Switch S1 settings in PROFINET mode 1 342 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 on on Meaning on on on on on on on on DCP mode on on on on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn127 off on on on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn126 on off on on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn125 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off off on on on on on off 9 10 Meaning Default device name: mcp-pn124 on on off on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn123 off on off on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn122 on off off on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn121 off off off on on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn120 on on on off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn119 off on on off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn118 on off on off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn117 off off on off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn116 on on off off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn115 off on off off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn114 on off off off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn113 off off off off on on on off Default device name: mcp-pn112 x x x x x x x x on on on on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn15 off on on on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn14 on off on on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn13 off off on on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn12 on on off on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn11 off on off on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn10 on off off on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn9 off off off on off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn8 on on on off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn7 off on on off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn6 on off on off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn5 off off on off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn4 on on off off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn3 off on off off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn2 on off off off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn1 off off off off off off off off Default device name: mcp-pn " Switch S1 in Ethernet mode A logical address can be assigned to the MCP for communication via Ethernet using the 10bit switch S1. Table 10-23 Example for setting switch S1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning off off off off off off on on off off MCP address 192 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 343 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces The two switches S1-9 and S1-10 must be set to "off" (IE functionality). The switches S1-1 to S1-8 define the MCP address in the range of 0 to 255. The addresses from 192 to 223 count as the default range. The MCP address is used as a reference for addressing an MCP during PLC parameter assignment. Table 10-24 Switch S1 settings in Ethernet mode 344 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 off off Meaning on on on on on on on on x x x x x x x x on on on on on off on on MCP address 223 off on on on on off on on MCP address 222 on off on on on off on on MCP address 221 off off on on on off on on MCP address 220 on on off on on off on on MCP address 219 off on off on on off on on MCP address 218 on off off on on off on on MCP address 217 off off off on on off on on MCP address 216 on on on off on off on on MCP address 215 off on on off on off on on MCP address 214 on off on off on off on on MCP address 213 off off on off on off on on MCP address 212 on on off off on off on on MCP address 211 off on off off on off on on MCP address 210 on off off off on off on on MCP address 209 off off off off on off on on MCP address 208 on on on on off off on on MCP address 207 off on on on off off on on MCP address 206 on off on on off off on on MCP address 205 off off on on off off on on MCP address 204 on on off on off off on on MCP address 203 off on off on off off on on MCP address 202 on off off on off off on on MCP address 201 off off off on off off on on MCP address 200 on on on off off off on on MCP address 199 off on on off off off on on MCP address 198 on off on off off off on on MCP address 197 off off on off off off on on MCP address 196 on on off off off off on on MCP address 195 MCP address 255 " Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off on off off off off on on 9 10 Meaning MCP address 194 on off off off off off on on MCP address 193 off off off off off off on on MCP address 192 x x x x x x x x on off off off off off off off MCP address 001 " off off off off off off off off MCP address 000 You can find the settings for the basic PLC program in: Function Manual, Basic Functions (P3 sl) Switch S2 The handwheel signal type is set with switch S2-1. Table 10-25 Switch S2 settings 1 Meaning on differential interface off TTL interface Note Switch S2-2 is reserved for test purposes. 10.2.4 Input / output images Standard + two handwheels The specifications for assigning input and output bytes listed in the tables can be changed in the PLC via parameter assignment. The inputs/outputs can be accessed word-oriented. Note The following applies for the process input and output images in the tables: n is defined by means of FB1 parameters in OB100 of the PLC. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 345 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces Table 10-26 MCP Interface PN input image Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 EB n + 0 IN0[7] X111.17 IN0[6] X111.15 IN0[5] X111.13 IN0[4] X111.11 IN0[3] X111.9 IN0[2] X111.7 IN0[1] X111.5 IN0[0] X111.3 EB n + 1 IN0[15] X111.33 IN0[14] X111.31 IN0[13] X111.29 IN0[12] X111.27 IN0[11] X111.25 IN0[10] X111.23 IN0[9] X111.21 IN0[8] X111.19 EB n + 2 IN1[7] X112.17 IN1[6] X112.15 IN1[5] X112.13 IN1[4] X112.11 IN1[3] X112.9 IN1[2] X112.7 IN1[1] X112.5 IN1[0] X112.3 EB n + 3 IN1[15] X112.33 IN1[14] X112.31 IN1[13] X112.29 IN1[12] X112.27 IN1[11] X112.25 IN1[10] X112.23 IN1[9] X112.21 IN1[8] X112.19 EB n + 4 IN2[7] X113.17 IN2[6] X113.15 IN2[5] X113.13 IN2[4] X113.11 IN2[3] X113.9 IN2[2] X113.7 IN2[1] X113.5 IN2[0] X113.3 EB n + 5 IN2[15] X113.33 IN2[14] X113.31 IN2[13] X113.29 IN2[12] X113.27 IN2[11] X113.25 IN2[10] X113.23 IN2[9] X113.21 IN2[8] X113.19 EB n + 6 IN3[7] X114.17 IN3[6] X114.15 IN3[5] X114.13 IN3[4] X114.11 IN3[3] X114.9 IN3[2] X114.7 IN3[1] X114.5 IN3[0] X114.3 EB n + 7 IN3[15] X114.33 IN3[14] X114.31 IN3[13] X114.29 IN3[12] X114.27 IN3[11] X114.25 IN3[10] X114.23 IN3[9] X114.21 IN3[8] X114.19 EB n + 8 IN4[7] X112.38 IN4[6] X112.37 IN4[5] X112.36 IN4[4] X112.35 IN4[3] X111.38 IN4[2] X111.37 IN4[1] X111.36 IN4[0] X111.35 EB n + 9 IN4[15] X114.38 IN4[14] X114.37 IN4[13] X114.36 IN4[12] X114.35 IN4[11] X113.38 IN4[10] X113.37 IN4[9] X113.36 IN4[8] X113.35 OV_VS16 X30.6 OV_VS8 X30.7 OV_VS4 X30.8 OV_VS2 X30.9 OV_VS1 X30.10 EB n + 10 *) Temperature alarms *) T_Critical T_High T_Low EB n + 11 - - - OV_SP16 X31.6 OV_SP8 X31.7 OV_SP4 X31.8 OV_SP2 X31.9 OV_SP1 X31.10 EB n + 12 IN6[7] X55.2 IN6[6] X55.1 IN6[5] X52.3 IN6[4] X52.2 IN6[3] X52.1 IN6[2] X51.3 IN6[1] X51.2 IN6[0] X51.1 EB n + 13 IN_24V[5] X41.3 IN_24V[4] X41.2 IN_24V[3] X41.1 IN_24V[2] X40.3 IN_24V[1] X40.2 IN_24V[0] X40.1 - IN6[8] X55.3 A logical 1 in the appropriate bit means that the associated temperature alarm is present. The GSDML-V2.1-siemens-sinumerik-mcpRT-20111001.xml file is required to configure the PROFINET. The module must be configured as MCP/MPP universal component on slot 1. 346 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.2 Interfaces This expands the input image by two further bytes: EB n + 14: Current temperature of the module measured in degrees Celsius. The measured value of temperature sensor LM77 is represented as an integer value in 8bit one's complement. Theoretically representable value range: -127 C to +127 C. Real value range of temperature sensor LM77: -55 C to +125 C. For examples, see table: Temperature in C Representation in byte EB n + 14 *) Meaning +0 = T_Low 00000000 = 0x00 0 Prewarning level for lower ambient temperature +1 00000001 = 0x01 1 ... ... ... +70 = T_High 01000110 = 0x46 70 ... ... ... +75 = T_Critical 01001011 = 0x4B 75 ... ... ... +127 01111111 = 0x7F 127 -127 10000000 = 0x80 128 ... ... ... -0 11111111 = 0xFF 255 *) Prewarning level for upper ambient temperature Max. permissible ambient temperature Interpreted as an unsigned figure EB n + 15: Identifier for the 'MCP Interface PN' module: 0x8D Table 10-27 Input image for handwheel data Byte Bit7 Bit6 EB m + 0 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Handwheel 1 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte m + 0) EB m + 1 EB m + 2 Handwheel 2 counter status (16-bit signed, low-order byte equals byte m + 2) EB m + 3 Note Within the SINUMERIK control, the handwheel data is processed directly by the NCK and is not available to the PLC. Table 10-28 MCP Interface PN output image Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 AB n + 0 OUT0[7] X111.18 OUT0[6] X111.16 OUT0[5] X111.14 OUT0[4] X111.12 OUT0[3] X111.10 OUT0[2] X111.8 OUT0[1] X111.6 OUT0[0] X111.4 AB n + 1 OUT0[15] X111.34 OUT0[14] X111.32 OUT0[13] X111.30 OUT0[12] X111.28 OUT0[11] X111.26 OUT0[10] X111.24 OUT0[9] X111.22 OUT0[8] X111.20 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 347 MCP Interface PN 10.3 Mounting Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 AB n + 2 Byte OUT1[7] X112.18 OUT1[6] X112.16 OUT1[5] X112.14 OUT1[4] X112.12 OUT1[3] X112.10 OUT1[2] X112.8 OUT1[1] X112.6 OUT1[0] X112.4 AB n + 3 OUT1[15] X112.34 OUT1[14] X112.32 OUT1[13] X112.30 OUT1[12] X112.28 OUT1[11] X112.26 OUT1[10] X112.24 OUT1[9] X112.22 OUT1[8] X112.20 AB n + 4 OUT2[7] X113.18 OUT2[6] X113.16 OUT2[5] X113.14 OUT2[4] X113.12 OUT2[3] X113.10 OUT2[2] X113.8 OUT2[1] X113.6 OUT2[0] X113.4 AB n + 5 OUT2[15] X113.34 OUT2[14] X113.32 OUT2[13] X113.30 OUT2[12] X113.28 OUT2[11] X113.26 OUT2[10] X113.24 OUT2[9] X113.22 OUT2[8] X113.20 AB n + 6 OUT3[7] X114.18 OUT3[6] X114.16 OUT3[5] X114.14 OUT3[4] X114.12 OUT3[3] X114.10 OUT3[2] X114.8 OUT3[1] X114.6 OUT3[0] X114.4 AB n + 7 OUT3[15] X114.34 OUT3[14] X114.32 OUT3[13] X114.30 OUT3[12] X114.28 OUT3[11] X114.26 OUT3[10] X114.24 OUT3[9] X114.22 OUT3[8] X114.20 AB n + 8 OUT_24V [7] X56.2 OUT_24V [6] X56.1 OUT_24V [5] X53.3 OUT_24V [4] X53.2 OUT_24V [3] X53.1 OUT_24V [2] X54.3 OUT_24V [1] X54.2 OUT_24V [0] X54.1 AB n + 9 - OUT_24V [14] X58.3 OUT_24V [13] X58.2 OUT_24V [12] X58.1 OUT_24V [11] X57.3 OUT_24V [10] X57.2 OUT_24V [9] X57.1 OUT_24V [8] X56.3 10.3 Mounting The module can be attached at a suitable position via the four mounting holes (e.g. behind the machine control panel or in the control cabinet). The selection of the appropriate mounting position depends on the interfaces used and the associated maximum cable lengths. Four standard torx-slotted screws T20/M4 are used to attach the module. [ Image 10-8 348 MCP Interface PN dimension drawing Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 MCP Interface PN 10.4 Technical data 10.4 Technical data Safety Safety class III according to EN60204-1 Degree of protection ac cording to EN 60529 IP00 Approvals CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage 24 VDC Typical current consump tion Power consumption, max. min. 0.1 A 1) / max. 2.6 A 2) Board: Handwheels: 2.4 W 2 x 0.9 W Lamps: LEDs: 54 W 4W (15 x 3.6 W) (80 x 0.05 W) Total: 62.4 W Mechanical data Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight 242 x 152 x 36 mm 557 g 1) Without connection (no handwheels, no loading of the outputs ...) 2) Max. connection with two handwheels, two rotary override switches, loading of the 24 V outputs ... Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 349 MCP Interface PN 10.4 Technical data 350 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 11 Electronic handwheels 11.1 Description Electronic handwheels are incremental encoders whose signals correspond to rotation of the wheel actuated manually. They are equipped with a magnetic latching mechanism that supports traversing with incremental accuracy. The axis selected via the control can be positioned so that the axes are parallel. All handwheels have 100 I/U lines. The electronic handwheels are available in several versions. They differ in terms of the interface and the size of the front plate. The cogging torque and the size of the adjustment wheel are adapted to the front plate. When required, the front panel can be removed. An adapter set is available for installing the handwheels with central mounting in front panels which are intended for the installation of handwheels with 3-hole mountings (see chapter Accessories (Page 359)). Note The handheld handwheel is intended for machine level use, see Chapter at: "Handheld units" "Handheld electronic handwheel". A magnet bracket and spiral cable can be found on its housing. The electronic handwheel with 24 V operating voltage and an HTL signal level is designed for connecting to 24 V PLC counter modules. Validity The description applies to the following electronic handwheels: Designation Dimensions of front panel (mm) Interface Encoder with setting wheel (large) 120 x 120 5 VDC, TTL *) 6FC9320-5DB01 Encoder with setting wheel 76.2 x 76.2 5 VDC, TTL *) 6FC9320-5DC01 without front panel 5 VDC, TTL *) 6FC9320-5DF01 76.2 x 76.2 24 VDC, HTL 6FC9320-5DH01 5 VDC, TTL 6FC9320-5DM00 Encoder without setting wheel (for central mounting) Encoder with setting wheel Encoder with setting wheel (for central mounting) *) without front panel Article number *) according to RS 422 A (A = antivalent) Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 351 Electronic handwheels 11.1 Description Diagram Front panel Setting wheel (large) Setting wheel (small) Encoder Image 11-1 View of electronic handwheels Principle output circuit $% & $% Principle pulse diagram CW rotation CCW rotation $ $ $ $ % % % % 352 Quiescent position Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Electronic handwheels 11.2 Dimension drawings 11.2 Dimension drawings 11.2.1 Encoder with 120 mm x 120 mm front panel, setting wheel (...-5DB01) Front view and side view $ $ Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Drilling pattern for mounting To mount the handwheel, a cutout is required for the encoder and 4 mounting holes. [ Mounting using 4 M5 screws. Tightening torque: 3 Nm Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 353 Electronic handwheels 11.2 Dimension drawings 11.2.2 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DC01) Front view and side view $ $ Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Drilling pattern for mounting To mount the handwheel, a cutout is required for the encoder and 2 mounting holes. [ Mounting using 2 M4 screws. Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm 354 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Electronic handwheels 11.2 Dimension drawings 11.2.3 Encoder without front panel, without setting wheel (...-5DF01) Front view and side view $ K $ Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Switch panel cutout for mounting version Cutout with twist protection Cutout without twist protection Central mounting with M15x1 nut, 5 Nm tightening torque, wrench size 17. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 355 Electronic handwheels 11.2 Dimension drawings 11.2.4 Encoder with front panel, 76.2 mm x 76.2 mm, setting wheel (...-5DH01) Front view and side view $ $ Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Drilling pattern for mounting To mount the handwheel, a cutout is required for the encoder and 2 mounting holes. [ Mounting using 2 M4 screws. Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm 356 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Electronic handwheels 11.2 Dimension drawings 11.2.5 Encoder without front panel, with setting wheel (...-5DM00) Individual parts Gasket/O-ring Washer Nut M15x1 Rotary button with crank Side view $ $ Flat connector for push-on contacts 6.3 mm Gasket Recommended distance of 0.40 mm switch panel / rotary button Switch panel thickness 2 to max. 6 mm Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 357 Electronic handwheels 11.4 Technical data Switch panel cutout for mounting version Cutout with twist protection Cutout without twist protection Central mounting with M15x1 nut, 5 Nm tightening torque, wrench size 17. 11.3 Connections Connections for all versions of the electronic handwheel: Connection: Connectable conductor cross-sections: Tightening torque: 6-pin screw-type terminal AWG 22 ... 14 or 0.3 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2 with conductor end sleeves: max. 1.5 mm2 Max. 0.25 Nm Flat connector 6.3 mm according to DIN 46244 (M3 - can be released). Note When a connected handwheel triggers pulses from its idle position or in the event of tiny contacts, connect it so that the label is facing the wrong way. Replace - the wire of terminal A with the wire of terminal /A - the wire of terminal B with the wire of terminal /B 11.4 Technical data Safety Safety class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 I Front: IP65 Approvals Connection side: IP50 CE Electrical data Rated voltage 358 Type: 5 V Type: 24 V 5 VDC 10% 10 VDC - 30 V Rated current (without load) Max. 35 mA Max. 10 mA Rated current (full load) Max. 55 mA Max. 30 mA Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Electronic handwheels 11.5 Accessories Output signals QB quadrature signals, electr. debounced Output current Max. 10 mA per output Switching capacity - 1.4 VA Output frequency Max. 2 kHz Speed Max. 1200 rpm Number of pulses 100 I/U per track (A/B track) Displacement of phase A to B Typ. 90 electrical Mechanical data Weight ...-5DF01 Approx. 0.2 kg ...-5DM00 Approx. 0.3 kg ...-5DC01 / ...-5DH01 Approx. 0.42 kg ...-5DB01 Approx. 0.65 kg Housing material Steel / plastic Max. distance to MCP / MPP / HAM Actuating force Max. 25 m 4 Ncm, with the exception of ...-5DB01: 8 Ncm Max. tightening torque 5 Nm (via central mounting) Service life > 20x106 revolutions Climatic and mechanical environ mental conditions Condensation, spraying water and ice formation Perm. ambient temperature Rel. humidity Vibration strength according to IEC 68-1-5 (oscillation) Not permissible Operation Storage and transport -20 ... 70 C -40 ... 85 C 0 ... 80% 0 ... 80% 1g, 2-200 Hz, 1 oct/min, 133 min Shock resistance according to IEC 28-2-27 10g, 11 ms Interference immunity According to EN 61000-6-2:2005 EMC According to EN 61000-6-4:2007 RoHS conformity 11.5 Garanteed Accessories The following adapter set is available for installing the handwheels with central mounting in front panels which are intended for the installation of handwheels with 3-hole mountings: Component Description Adapter set For installation with 3-hole mounting Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Number Article number 1 6FC9320-5DN00 359 Electronic handwheels 11.5 Accessories O-ring Adapter ring Axle adapter Threaded stud O-ring Cylinder head screw DIN 84 M4x10 (3x) Image 11-2 Components of adapter set To mount the adapter set, a cutout and three mounting holes are required. s [ r Image 11-3 Drilling pattern for mounting Mounting using three M4 screws. Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm 360 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 12 Rotary override switch 12.1 Description Although some of the rotary override switches described in this chapter already belong to the standard scope of an MCP/MPP, they can also be provided as an upgrade or installed in their own operator panels. Note The connection to an MCP/MPP is via X30/X31. Validity The description applies to the following rotary override switches Type Category Article number Override spindle / rapid traverse Electronic, 1x16G, T=24 6FC5247-0AF12-1AA0 Override feed / rapid traverse Electronic, 1x23G, T=32 6FC5247-0AF13-1AA0 Override feed / rapid traverse Electronic, 1x29G, T=32 6FC5247-0AF14-1AA0 Override spindle / rapid traverse Mechanical, 1x16G, T=24 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0 Override feed / rapid traverse 6FC5247-0AF13-0AA0 Mechanical, 1x23G, T=32 Features Gray-code coding Central attachment Connection via ribbon cable with plug connector Pin Meaning Electronic variants Mechanical variants 1 Not connected Not connected 2 Not connected Not connected 3 Ground Ground 4 Not connected Vcc (4.75 ... 5.5 V) 5 Vcc (4.75 ... 5.5 V) Not connected 6 Weighting factor 16 Weighting factor 16 7 Weighting factor 8 Weighting factor 8 8 Weighting factor 4 Weighting factor 4 9 Weighting factor 2 Weighting factor 2 10 Weighting factor 1 Weighting factor 1 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 361 Rotary override switch 12.2 Mounting 12.2 Mounting 12.2.1 Dimension drawings s 0[ s Marking Plug connector Type plate Fastening nut with SW 14 (width across flats) O ring 12.2 x 1.3 Image 12-1 362 Dimension drawing for electronic rotary override switch Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Rotary override switch 12.2 Mounting s 0[ s Marking Plug connector Type plate Fastening nut with SW 14 (width across flats) O ring 12.2 x 1.3 Image 12-2 Dimension drawing for mechanical rotary override switch Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 363 Rotary override switch 12.2 Mounting 5 Anti-twist protection Image 12-3 12.2.2 Operator panel cutout for fastening the rotary override switch Replacing the rotary switch Removal of a rotary switch 1. Lever the cap (3) off the rotary knob (2) (snap-on connection!). 2. Remove the nut of the collet (1) with a wrench (width 10). 3. Remove the entire rotary knob (2). 4. Remove the fastening nut (5) on the shaft of the rotary switch (4) with a wrench (width 14). 5. Remove the connector on the end of the rotary switch cable from the slot. 6. Remove the rotary switch. 364 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Rotary override switch 12.2 Mounting (1) Nut of the collet (2) Rotary knob (3) Cap (4) Rotary switch shaft (5) Fastening nut (6) Scale Image 12-4 Removal of a rotary switch Installation of a rotary switch NOTICE Damage to the rotary switch during the fastening It is essential to use the correct tightening torques shown below. 1. Push the O-ring (1) onto the shaft of the new rotary switch as a seal. 2. Insert the rotary switch into the front cutout so that pressure is applied to the O-ring. 3. Tighten the fastening nut (4) on the shaft of the rotary switch from the front with a wrench (width 14) (tightening torque: 3 Nm). 4. Connect the arrow ring (3) and the rotary knob (5). 5. Slide both parts onto the shaft of the rotary switch. 6. Align the arrow point on the ring with position "0" on the scale. 7. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary knob by hand and using a torque spanner with 2 Nm torque. 8. Place the cap (2) on the rotary knob and snap it into position. 9. Fold and fasten the connecting cable (7) as shown in the figure on the right. Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 365 Rotary override switch 12.3 Technical data (1) O-ring (2) Cap (3) Arrow ring (4) Fastening nut (5) Rotary knob (6) Connector (see detail diagram) (7) Connecting cable (8) Connection PCB Image 12-5 12.3 Detail diagram of the connector Installation of a rotary switch Technical data Electrical data Power supply (Vcc) 4.75 ... 5.5 VDC 100 mV Power consumption typical/maxi 25 mA / 75 mA (all outputs loaded) mum Reverse polarity protection Up to 12 V Short-circuit protection limited short-circuit protection (max. 50 ms) Output level "low" < 0.6 V; "high" > Vcc - 1 V Output current Max. 10 mA Mechanical data 366 Activation torque approx. 9 Ncm Stop strength 2.5 Nm Starting torque max. 500 Nm Dust protection Sensor range protected with a cap Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Rotary override switch 12.3 Technical data Service life 50,000 cycles Ambient temperature Operation: -25 C ... +85 C Vibration strength 1g; 2 - 200 Hz; 1 octave/min, 133 min according to IEC 68-2-6 Shock/impact strength 10g, 11 ms according to IEC 28-2-27 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Storage: -40 C ... +135 C 367 Rotary override switch 12.3 Technical data 368 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Index C H COM board MCP 310, 55, 56 MCP 483, 122, 123 MPP 483, 300 Handwheel MCP 310C PN, 12 MCP 483, 120, 122 MCP 483C PN, 84 D K DIP switch MCP 483, 122 Direct keys MPP 310 IE H, 181 MPP 483, 307 MPP 483 IE, 235 DP slave MPP MPP 483, 308 Key covers MCP 310C PN, 11, 27 MCP 483C PN, 83, 97 Key-operated switch MCP 310, 53, 54 MCP 310 PN, 29, 31, 42 MCP 310C PN, 11 MCP 483, 120 Keyswitch MCP 310, 73 MCP 483, 119, 140 MCP 483 PN, 100, 112 MCP 483C PN, 83 E EKS identification system MPP 310 IE H, 147 MPP 483, 251 MPP 483 IE, 195 Emergency stop button MCP 310C PN, 26 MPP 483, 305 Emergency Stop button MCP 310, 54, 72 MCP 310 PN, 30, 31, 41, 42 MCP 483, 119, 120, 139 MCP 483 PN, 100, 111 MCP 483C PN, 83, 96, 97 Emergency stop circuit MCP 483 PN, 102 MCP 483C PN, 86 Ethernet MCP 310C PN, 11 MCP 483C PN, 84 Expansion panel, 245 Extension keys MPP 310 IE H, 180 MPP 483, 306 MPP 483 IE, 234 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 L LEDs MCP 483, 122 M MCP 310 COM board, 55, 56 Dimension drawing, 61 Dimensions, 72 Emergency Stop button, 54, 72 Key-operated switch, 53, 54 Keyswitch, 73 Mounting position, 61 Power consumption, 72 PROFIBUS DP, 57, 124 Rotary switch, 53 Slide-in labels, 53, 73, 74 Slots, 54 MCP 310 PN Dimension drawing, 38 Dimensions, 41 369 Index Emergency Stop button, 30, 31, 41, 42 Key-operated switch, 29, 31, 42 Mounting position, 39 Power consumption, 41 Rotary switch, 29 Slide-in labels, 29, 42, 43 Slots, 30, 31 MCP 310C PN Dimensions, 26 Emergency stop button, 26 Ethernet, 11 Handwheel, 12 Key covers, 11, 14, 27 Key-operated switch, 11 Power consumption, 26 MCP 483 COM board, 122, 123 Dimension drawing, 127 Dimensions, 139 DIP switch, 122 Emergency Stop button, 119, 120, 139 Equipotential bonding conductor, 123 Handwheel, 120, 122 Key symbols, 141 Key-operated switch, 120 Keyswitch, 119, 140 LEDs, 122 Mounting position, 128 Power consumption, 139 Slide-in labels, 119, 140, 141 Slots, 120 MCP 483 PN Dimension drawing, 109 Dimensions, 111 Emergency Stop button, 100, 111 Emergency stop circuit, 102 Key symbols, 113 Keyswitch, 100, 112 Mounting position, 109 Power consumption, 111 Slide-in labels, 99, 112, 113 MCP 483C PN Dimension drawing, 93 Dimensions, 96 Emergency Stop button, 83, 96, 97 Emergency stop circuit, 86 Ethernet, 84 Handwheel, 84 Key covers, 83, 97 Keyswitch, 83 Mounting position, 94 370 Power consumption, 96 Rotary switch, 97 MPP 310 IE H Actuation elements, 154 Anode connection for LEDs, 171 COM board IE, 154 Dimensions, 184 Direct keys, 181 EKS identification system, 147 Extension keys, 180 Lamps, 154 Mounting position, 170 Power consumption, 184 Signaling lamps, 179 Slide-in labels, 147 Software Version, 182 System configuration, 149 MPP 483 Actuation elements, 267 Anode connection for LEDs, 293 Coding switch S3, 300 COM board, 268, 300 Dimensions, 315 Direct keys, 307 DP slave MPP, 308 EKS identification system, 251 Emergency stop button, 305 Extension keys, 306 GSD file, 308 Lamps, 267 Mounting position, 292 Power consumption, 315 PROFIBUS DP, 285 PROFIBUS parameters, 310 Signaling lamps, 305 Slide-in labels, 251 Special versions, 252 Standard version, 251 Standard version, extended, 251 Supplementary elements, 253 System configuration, 254 MPP 483 IE Actuation elements, 207 Anode connection for LEDs, 226 COM board, 207 Customer keys, 208 Dimensions, 238 Direct keys, 235 EKS identification system, 195 Extension keys, 234 Lamps, 207 Mounting position, 225 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Index Power consumption, 238 Slide-in labels, 195 Software Version, 236 Special versions, 195 Standard version, 195 Standard version, extended, 195 Supplementary elements, 196 System configuration, 197 MPP 483 IE HTC Connection for handheld units, 208 P PROFIBUS DP MCP 310, 57, 124 MPP 483, 285 PROFIBUS parameters MPP 483, 310 R Rotary switch MCP 310, 53 MCP 310 PN, 29 MCP 483C PN, 97 S Slide-in labels MCP 310, 53, 73, 74 MCP 310 PN, 29, 42, 43 MCP 483, 119, 140, 141 MCP 483 PN, 99, 112, 113 MPP 310 IE H, 147 MPP 483, 251 MPP 483 IE, 195 Slots MCP 310, 54 MCP 310 PN, 30, 31 MCP 483, 120 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 371 Index 372 Machine control panels Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US 1 Keyboard tray 2 SINUMERIK Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl Keyboards and additional components Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4 CompactFlash card 5 Card reader with USB interface 6 USB extension 7 Manual Valid for: SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl control 03/2016 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Table of contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US..........................................................................................................5 1.1 Description...............................................................................................................................5 1.2 Operator controls and indicators..............................................................................................6 1.3 Technical data..........................................................................................................................6 Keyboard tray...............................................................................................................................................7 2.1 Description...............................................................................................................................7 2.2 Technical data..........................................................................................................................7 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C.......................................................................................................................9 3.1 Description...............................................................................................................................9 3.2 Operating and display elements.............................................................................................10 3.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................11 3.4 Mounting................................................................................................................................12 3.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................14 3.6 Accessories............................................................................................................................15 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C.....................................................................................................................17 4.1 Description.............................................................................................................................17 4.2 Operating and display elements.............................................................................................18 4.3 Interfaces...............................................................................................................................20 4.4 Mounting................................................................................................................................21 4.5 Technical data........................................................................................................................23 4.6 Accessories............................................................................................................................24 CompactFlash card....................................................................................................................................25 5.1 Description.............................................................................................................................25 5.2 Technical data........................................................................................................................26 Card reader with USB interface..................................................................................................................29 6.1 Description.............................................................................................................................29 6.2 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................30 6.3 interfaces................................................................................................................................31 6.4 Installation..............................................................................................................................31 6.5 Memory cards........................................................................................................................31 6.6 Technical data........................................................................................................................32 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Table of contents 6.7 7 Accessories............................................................................................................................33 USB extension............................................................................................................................................35 Index...........................................................................................................................................................37 4 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 1 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US 1.1 Description Programs and texts can be edited easily with the standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US. The standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US is not suitable for industrial use (EMC) and should not be used as a permanent installation. It must be used only for servicing and commissioning. Validity The description applies to the following components: Designation Remark Article number PC standard keyboard KBPC CG US MF-II compatible, 104 key layout, connection: USB, length of connecting cable: 1.7 m 6FC5203-0AC01-3AA0 Features Flat compact design, ergonomic keys MF-II compatible, 104 keys layout System compatibility: USB 1.1 Full Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Interface: USB Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 5 Standard PC keyboard KBPC CG US 1.3 Technical data 1.2 Operator controls and indicators Image 1-1 1.3 View of PC standard keyboard: KBPC CG US Technical data Certificates and approvals FCC, GS, CE, c-tick, cURus Input voltage + 5.25 VDC Power consumption 0.1 W Degree of protection DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529) IP20 Permissible ambient temperature Storage and transportation - 20 ... 60 C Weight Dimensions (mm) Electromagnetic compatibility 6 Operation 0 ... 50 C Approx. 1.3 kg Width: 405 Height: 44 Depth: 180 CE certification in accordance with EU Directives EN 55022/B, EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 2 Keyboard tray 2.1 Description The extremely stable 19" keyboard tray in anthracite facilitates your work when using a standard external keyboard with an operator panel. Special screws permit easy attachment of the keyboard tray, and equally easy removal after the work is finished. If required, a version with an additional removable tray for a mouse is also available. Validity The description applies to the following components: Designation Remark Article number Keyboard tray for keyboard with two collar screws 6FC5247-0AA40-0AA0 View Image 2-1 2.2 View of keyboard tray Technical data Weight Dimensions (mm) Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 approx. 1.6 kg Width: 487 Depth: 196 7 Keyboard tray 2.2 Technical data 8 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 3 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3.1 Description The SINUMERIK KB 310C full CNC keyboard permits user-friendly input of programs and text. It is fitted with short-stroke keys. The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified, i.e. the key covers cannot be transposed. The keyboard is mounted from the rear using special clamps included in the scope of delivery. Validity The following description applies to the component: Designation Keyboard Article number KB 310C full CNC keyboard Mechanical 6FC5203-0AF21-0AA1 Features Keys - Standard/US layout in QWERTY version - 75 mechanical keys Key groups - Alphabetic pad with special characters - Numeric pad with special characters - Cursor pad - CNC function keys with hotkeys for fast selection of the operating area Connections - USB 1.1 Full Speed Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 9 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3.2 Operating and display elements 3.2 Operating and display elements Key assignments Image 3-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 310C Keyboard codes For keyboard codes can be found in section: "CNC full keyboard KB 483C", section: "Operating and display elements". 10 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3.3 Interfaces 3.3 Interfaces 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHWV 3(WHUPLQDOV Image 3-2 ;86%% &DEOHFODPSIRU86%FDEOH Front, side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 310C USB upstream port X302 The interface (see figure) is designed as a "high powered interface" (5 V / 500 mA). As a result, the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubs which possess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capable of supplying a 500 mA current. A standard USB 2.0 HiSpeed cable of max. 3 m in length (recommended: 1.5 m) is supported. Connector designation: Plug-connector type: Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 X302 USB-B connector (4-pin) 11 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3.4 Mounting Pin assignment see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting" 3.4 Mounting Note When mounting, install and secure the USB connecting cable properly to ensure that it cannot chafe against the frame of the keyboard. Panel cutout Image 3-3 12 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 310C (plate thickness 1.5 - 6.0 mm) Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3.4 Mounting Dimension drawing for mounting $ $ $$ ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD PPPP 5] 0RXQWLQJIUDPH 7HQVLRQMDFNV [ 0RXQWLQJIUDPH 5HDUYLHZZLWKWHQVLRQMDFNV Image 3-4 'HWDLOHGYLHZ0RXQWLQJRIWHQVLRQMDFNV 7RUTXH1P Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 310C Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 13 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3.5 Technical data Mounting position 0RXQWLQJSRVLWLRQPD[r WRWKHYHUWLFDO SHUPLWWHG )URQW Image 3-5 3.5 Mounting position Technical data Safety Safety class / approvals Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 III; PELV according to EN 50178 / CE Front side IP54 Rear side IP00 Seating to the cabinet: IP65 Immunity ESD HF radio HF conducted (on USB ca ble) Air discharge 8 kV / contact discharge 4 kV 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 -1000 MHz 10 V, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 - 80 MHz Electrical data Supply voltage / current (typ.) 4,75, ... 5.25 V / 102 mA Power consumption, max. 0.4 W Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Maximum distance to PCU/ TCU Housing base color Key color Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 31 mm Mounting depth: 20 mm Approx. 0.9 kg 3 m (recommended: 1.5 m) Anthracite 614 Pastel turquoise RAL 6034, pantone yellow light basic 700, medium basic 701 Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 14 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3.6 Accessories 3.6 Accessories Set of tension jacks Component Description Quanti ty Set of tension jacks For supplementary operator com ponents with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm Set of 9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Article number 15 Full CNC keyboard: KB 310C 3.6 Accessories 16 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 4 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4.1 Description The SINUMERIK KB 483C full CNC keyboard permits user-friendly input of programs and text. It is fitted with short-stroke keys. The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified, i.e. the key covers cannot be transposed. The keyboard is secured from the rear using special clamps supplied with the panel. Validity The following description applies to the component: Designation Key type Article number CNC full keyboard KB 483C mechanical 6FC5203-0AF20-0AA1 Features The keyboard has 78 mechanical keys based on the standard/US QWERTY layout. Key groups - Alphabetic pad with special characters - Numeric pad with special characters - Cursor pad - CNC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of the control area Connections - USB 1.1 Full Speed Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 17 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4.2 Operating and display elements 4.2 Operating and display elements Key assignments Image 4-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 483C The following table shows the differences of the key assignment to the US/standard keyboard. Also note that the following keys on the KB 483C always correspond to the left-hand keys on the standard keyboard: Shift, Ctrl, Alt Note The keyboard does not support Suspend mode or a Remote Wakeup function. KB 483C key KB 483C key function KB 483C key function without SHIFT Corresponding US standard key Space Space +/- with SHIFT = = = + + + (NB) ~ ' * Corresponding US standard key SHIFT + GRAVE AC CENT Not connected SHIFT + GRAVE AC CENT * SHIFT + 8 Input confirmation ENTER Not connected Calls the "Machine" op erating area. SHIFT + F11 Not connected PROGRAM MAN Calls the "Program Man AGER ager" operating area. 7 (NB) Not connected PROGRAM Calls the "Program" op erating area. 1 (NB) Not connected ALARM Calls the "Diagnosis" op erating area. 9 (NB) Not connected OFFSET Calls the "Parameters" operating area. 3 (NB) Not connected INPUT MACHINE 18 ' Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4.2 Operating and display elements KB 483C key KB 483C key function without SHIFT CUSTOM Corresponding US standard key KB 483C key function with SHIFT Corresponding US standard key Calls the "Custom" oper ating area. SHFT + F12 Deletes alarms and messages. ESC CHANNEL Steps for multiple chan nels. F11 Not connected HELP Calls the context-sensi tive online help. F12 Not connected NEXT WINDOW Toggles between the windows. HOME Selects the first entry in the selection lists. SHIFT + HOME SELECT Steps in selection lists. 5 (NB) SW-dependent SHIFT + 5 (NB) ALARM CANCEL Not connected SW-dependent SHIFT + ESC NB = numeric block The key functions of the SINUMERIK keyboard depend on the used operating software and largely match the keys of the operator panels. A detailed description of the keys is contained in the operating manuals. Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 19 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4.3 Interfaces 4.3 Interfaces 3(FRQQHFWLRQ0VFUHZWHUPLQDO 86%FDEOHLQFOXGHGLQWKHGHOLYHU\NLW s s 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Image 4-2 ; 3(FRQQHFWLRQVFUHZWHUPLQDO &DEOHFODPS Front, side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 483C USB upstream port X302 The interface (see figure) is designed as a "high powered interface" (5 V / 500 mA). As a result, the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubs which possess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capable of supplying a 500 mA current. A standard USB 2.0 HiSpeed cable of max. 3 m in length (recommended: 1.5 m) is supported. Connector designation: Connector type: X302 USB-B connector (4-pin) Pin assignment see "General information and networking", Chapter: "Connecting" 20 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4.4 Mounting 4.4 Mounting Panel cutout 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Image 4-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 483C (plate thickness 1.5 - 6.0 mm) Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 21 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4.4 Mounting Dimension drawing $ $ PPPP 5] ,QWKHVHDOLQJDUHD 0RXQWLQJIUDPH $$ 5HDUYLHZ ZLWKWHQVLRQMDFNV 'HWDLO0RXQWLQJRIWHQVLRQMDFNV 7RUTXHb1P 7HQVLRQMDFNV [ Image 4-4 22 0RXQWLQJIUDPH 'LPHQVLRQVLQPP Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 483C Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4.5 Technical data Mounting position 0RXQWLQJSRVLWLRQPD[r WRWKHYHUWLFDO SHUPLWWHG )URQW Image 4-5 4.5 Mounting position Technical data Safety Safety class / approvals Degree of protection accord ing to EN 60529 (IEC 60529) III; PELV according to EN 50178 / CE Front side IP54 Rear side IP00 Fusing to cabinet: IP65 Immunity ESD HF radio HF conducted (on USB ca ble) Air discharge 8 kV / contact discharge 4 kV 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 -1000 MHz 10 V, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 - 80 MHz Electrical data Supply voltage / current (typ.) 4,75, ... 5.25 V / 102 mA Power consumption, max. 0.4 W Mechanical data Dimensions Weight Max. distance from PCU Housing base color Key color Width: 483 mm Height: 133 mm Depth: 31 mm Mounting depth: 20.2 mm approx. 1.3 kg 3 m (recommended: 1.5 m) Anthracite 614 Pastel turquoise RAL 6034, pantone yellow light basic 700, medium basic 701 Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 23 Full CNC keyboard: KB 483C 4.6 Accessories 4.6 Accessories Set of tension jacks 24 Component Description Quanti ty Article number Set of tension jacks For supplementary operator com ponents with 2.5 mm profile, length: 20 mm Set of 9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 5 CompactFlash card 5.1 Description The CompactFlash card stores the user data. Validity The following description applies to the following components Designation Article number SINUMERIK CompactFlash card, 1 GB, empty 6FC5313-5AG00-0AA1 SINUMERIK CompactFlash card, 2 GB, empty 6FC5313-5AG00-0AA2 SINUMERIK CompactFlash card, 8 GB, empty 6FC5313-6AG00-0AA0 Safety instructions Insert the CompactFlash card carefully with the correct orientation into the memory card slot (observe indicators such as arrow or similar). This way you avoid mechanical damage to the memory card or the device. Note the general ESD information. Only use the memory card type provided by Siemens with its formatting (e.g. FAT16) for your device, in order to guarantee the basic functions - especially when the operating system is started from the card. It is recommended that the card contents be backed up regularly. Use the appropriate procedure in the respective documentation. Do not remove the memory card while it is being accessed. If possible, use the eject function for removable data carriers in Windows. If this is not observed, it can result in data loss through to irreparable damage of the memory card. If a memory card does not function with your device, it may be an unsuitable card, a card not formatted for the device or a card with defective contents. Protect an unused card against pollution - especially the connector area - by keeping it in a suitable protective sleeve. Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 25 CompactFlash card 5.2 Technical data View Image 5-1 Image 5-2 View of the CompactFlash card Schematic diagram of the CompactFlash card socket connector NOTICE Note reverse polarity protection Do not use force to insert the CompactFlash card. There are various guide grooves to protect against reverse polarity. As can be seen in the above figure, the groove on the left is wider than the groove on the right. The arrow always indicates pin 1. 5.2 Technical data Safety Degree of protection according to EN 60529 Approvals IP20 CE / cULus Electrical data 26 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 CompactFlash card 5.2 Technical data Supply voltage 5.5 V DC Mechanical data Dimensions (mm) Width: 43 Weight Height: 3 Depth: 37 12 g Climatic environmental conditions Condensation, spray water and icing Not permitted Operation Storage and transportation EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2 Permissible ambient temperature 0 ... 85 C -40 ... 100 C Limits for relative humidity 10 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 % Applicable standards Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 27 CompactFlash card 5.2 Technical data 28 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Card reader with USB interface 6.1 6 Description The SINUMERIK card reader is intended for archiving and exchanging user data. The card reader is connected via the USB interface. It can be installed in a front panel. This makes data exchange possible without opening the control cabinet. The card reader can be booted. All cards can be inserted and removed during operation. Validity This description applies to the card reader Article number: 6FC5335-0AA00-0AA0. Features Suitable for CF, SD, and MMC cards Installation in front panels Bootability Connection: USB 2.0 Hi-Speed The card reader is delivered with attached 1 m USB cable. Possible connections The card reader is suitable for connection to: PCU 50.5 TCU x0.2 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 29 Card reader with USB interface 6.2 Operator controls and indicators 6.2 Operator controls and indicators Slot cover USB line LED for displaying read and write processes (red) LED for displaying operational readiness (green) Slot for CF cards Slot for SD / MMC cards Image 6-1 Front view of the USB card reader Function of the LEDs Two LEDs (see Fig.) with different functions are located next to the slot for CF cards. LED Green Red Display lit permanently if the card reader is ready for operation lit if reading or writing is in progress Card slots The two card slots of the reader are located under the cover. Cards can be inserted in both slots at the same time as they operate simultaneously. In this way, it is possible to Copy files from one card to the other, Read or write to the media from various applications at the same time. Note Only use card types and sizes offered by Siemens. The corresponding article numbers can be found in Catalog NC 61. We cannot guarantee that every card available on the market can be used. 30 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Card reader with USB interface 6.5 Memory cards 6.3 interfaces The card reader has a USB interface (USB 2.0 Hi-Speed). The card reader can be connected via this interface to a USB interface of the PCU/TCU whose maximum current carrying capacity is 500 mA. Transmission rate If the card reader is connected to a USB 2.0 interface, the bus speed is automatically 480 Mbps (Hi-Speed). On a USB 1.1 interface, the card reader switches to 12 Mbps (Full Speed). 6.4 Installation 0IL[LQJVFUHZ PD[VFUHZLQGHSWKPP Image 6-2 Panel cutout NOTICE Damage to the drive drive for open top cover The slot cover of the card reader must be closed to prevent dirt entering or damage during installation. 6.5 Memory cards The card reader is suitable for Compactflash cards (CF) SecureDigital cards (SD) Multimedia cards (MMC) MicroMemory cards (Simatic MMC) Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 31 Card reader with USB interface 6.6 Technical data Note The read and write speed depends on the card used! Booting With the exception of the Simatic MMC, all other cards are bootable. Card type Bootable CF cards X SD cards X MMC cards X Simatic MMC cards - Note The card reader works like a USB drive. Please note therefore that restrictions in the BIOS or operating system may not always allow booting from such a drive. 6.6 Technical data Safety Safety class Degree of protection according to EN 60529 III; PELV according to EN 50178 Front IP54 Approvals Rear IP00 CE / cULus Electrical data Input voltage 4.75 - 5.25 VDC Input current Max. 500 mA Mechanical data Dimensions Width: 145 mm Height: 50 mm Weight Card slots Depth: 143 mm Mounting depth: 125 mm Approx. 0.4 kg 2 (for every 10,000 mating cycles) Climatic environmental conditions Condensation, spray water and icing 32 Not permitted Operation Storage and transportation Perm. ambient temperature 0 ... 70 C -20 ... 85 C Limits for relative humidity 5 ... 90% 5 ... 95% Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Card reader with USB interface 6.7 Accessories Note Information about the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions is contained in the associated section under: "General notes and interconnection" "Operational planning". 6.7 Accessories The following accessories are available for the card reader: Component Description Cover for diskette drive and card reader Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Number Article number 1 6FC5247-0AA20-0AA0 33 Card reader with USB interface 6.7 Accessories 34 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 7 USB extension Description Some operator panel fronts have no USB front interfaces. If required, you can, however, use the USB interfaces for PCU/TCU. The USB extension is used for external connection of the rear USB interface to the operator panel housing front. Advantages: Undetachable protective cover. The bolted protective cap retains the degree of protection of the housing. Because the locknut automatically cuts itself into the paint or anodized layer, a conductive connection results. Validity This description applies to the following component: USB extension USB standard Length Article number 1.1 Full Speed, 2.0 HiSpeed 1m 6FC5347-0AF01-1AA0 Display Image 7-1 USB extension Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 35 USB extension Mounting PP Protective cap Anti-twist protection Operator panel housing front Locknut Image 7-2 Laying the USB extension 1. Mark the position on the operator panel housing front for the cable entry. 2. Punch the hole for the cable entry in order to ensure the anti-twist protection: NOTICE Damage to the USB extension The USB cable must not be damaged. Consequently, remove any burrs in the hole. 3. Insert the USB extension through the hole. 4. Tighten the locknut with a tightening torque of 0.5 Nm to 0.75 Nm. 36 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Index C U Card reader Dimensions, 32 CF card Dimensions, 27 CNC keyboard KB 310C, 9 KB 483C, 17 USB technology KB 310C, 11 KB 483C, 20 K KB 310C CNC keyboard, 9 Dimension drawing, 13 Dimensions, 14 Key codes, 10 Key groups, 9 Key layout, 9, 10 Mounting position, 14 Power consumption, 14 USB technology, 11 KB 483C CNC keyboard, 17 Dimension drawing, 22 Dimensions, 23 Key groups, 17 Key layout, 17, 18 Mounting position, 23 Power consumption, 23 USB technology, 20 KBPC CG US standard PC keyboard Dimensions, 6 Power consumption, 6 Key codes KB 310C, 10 Key groups KB 310C, 9 KB 483C, 17 Key layout KB 310C, 9, 10 KB 483C, 17, 18 Keyboard tray Dimensions, 7 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 37 Index 38 Keyboards and additional components Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Appendix A.1 A Abbreviations AC Alternating Current ASIC Application-Specific Integrated Circuit BA Mode selector switch BIOS Basic Input Output System HHU Handheld Unit ALS Authorization Lock Switch OPI Operator Panel Interface CCFL Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp: fluorescent lamp for background lighting CDROM Compact Disk ROM CRT Cathode Ray Tube COM Communications module CPU Central Processing Unit DC Direct Current DCP Discovery and basic Configuration Protocol: Standard for the assignment of IP addresses DIP Dual In-Line Package: dual in-line arrangement DRAM Dynamic RAM DKM Direct Key Module I/O Input/Output ECC Error Correction Code: method error correction in memory blocks ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device EKS Electronic Key System: Identification system from EUCHNER EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility EEA European Economic Area FB Function Block EN European standard PCB Function Block Group FSB Front Side Bus GD Global Data communication GND Ground GSD Generic Station Description: The file describes a PROFIBUS slave in accordance with the PROFIBUS standard INC Increment: Increment HAM Handwheel connection module HF Function keys LED HGA Connection for handheld units HID Human Interface Device: Device class of the USB standard that describes devices with which users interact directly, e.g. keyboard, mouse. Operator Components and Networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 17 Appendix A.1 Abbreviations HMI Human Machine Interface: SINUMERIK operator interface for operating, programming and simulation. HT Handheld Terminal HW Hardware IC Integrated Circuit: integrated electronic circuit IDE Integrated Drive Electronics IE Industrial Ethernet I/O Input/Output IP International Protection: ID letter for IPxx degree of protection ISA Industry Standard Architecture: Bus standard for IBM-compatible PCs KT Customer keys LCD Liquid Crystal Display LE Long Element LED Light-Emitting Diode LPT Line Print Terminal: Data transfer via a parallel interface LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signaling: standardized high-speed data transmission for the digital control of liquid crystal screens. MCP Machine Control Panel MFII Multifunction keyboard II Modem Modulator-demodulator MPI Multi-Point Interface: multi-point serial interface MPP Machine Pushbutton Panel MCP Machine Control Panel (MCP/MPP) N.C. Not Connected: Connection unassigned NAU Power failure NC Numerical Control NCK Numerical Control Kernel NCU Numerical Control Unit ODU Plug connector system OP Operator Panel: Operator panel front PC Personal Computer PCU PC Unit: computer unit PE Potential Earth PELV Protective Extra-Low Voltage PG Programming device PLC Programmable Logic Controller: component of the numerical control system PNO PROFIBUS user organization PROFIBUS Process Field Bus RAM Random Access Memory: Read/write memory ROM Read Only Memory S/R Steps per Revolution SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory: synchronous DRAM SR Mushroom button - rapid withdrawal SSD Solid State Drive: Electronic hard disk drive STN Super Twisted Nematic: Flat screen technology 18 Operator Components and Networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 Appendix A.1 Abbreviations SVGA Super VGA: Screen resolution 800 x 600 pixels, maximum 16.7 million colors SXGA Super Extended Graphics Array: Screen resolution 1280 x 1024 pixels SW Software TCU Thin Client Unit TFT Thin Film Transistor (flat screen technology) UL Underwriters Laboratories USB Universal Serial Bus V.24 Interface standard in accordance with CCITT V.24 VGA Video Graphics Array: Computer graphics standard with 640 x 480 pixel resolution, 16 colors WS Selector switch XGA Extended Graphics Array: Screen resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Operator Components and Networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3 19 Appendix A.2 Documentation overview A.2 Documentation overview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vV0DQXDO 0LOOLQJDQG7XUQLQJ 20 6,180(5,. 7UDLQLQJGRFXPHQWV 0LOOLQJPDGHHDVLHU ZLWK6KRS0LOO 7XUQLQJPDGHHDVLHU ZLWK6KRS7XUQ )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG 6,180(5,. &RQILJXUDWLRQ0DQXDO (0&'HVLJQ*XLGHOLQHV (OHFWURQLFGRFXPHQWDWLRQ 6,180(5,. 0DQXDOV 7RRODQG PROGPDNLQJ '2&RQ&' '2&RQ:(% 0\'RFXPHQWDWLRQ 0DQDJHU Operator Components and Networking Manual, 03/2016, 6FC5397-1AP40-5BA3